0% found this document useful (0 votes)

599 views1,319 pages

RDM2020 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Genaro Cabrera

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

599 views1,319 pages

RDM2020 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Genaro Cabrera

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1319

2020.

1
2| Remote Desktop Manager

Table of Contents

Part I Overview 13
1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop Manager 14

3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
System Requirements 17
Prerequisite Softw are
............................................................................................................................................................................ 18
4 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
The Devolutions Platform 18
Rem............................................................................................................................................................................
ote Desktop Manager Agent 19
Rem............................................................................................................................................................................
ote Desktop Manager Jum p 21

Part II Getting Started 25

Part III Installation 39

Part IV User Interface 85

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 3

2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Style 87

3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Theme 91

Part V Data Sources 122

6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Lock Data Source 250

7 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Offline mode 251
Offline Read/Write
............................................................................................................................................................................ 255
............................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Manage Cache 259

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

3
4| Remote Desktop Manager

9 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Private Vault 261
Private Vault Search
............................................................................................................................................................................ 262

Part VI Entries 265

1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Common Settings 267
General
............................................................................................................................................................................ 268
More
............................................................................................................................................................................ 270
Perm issions
............................................................................................................................................................................ 271
Security Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................ 273
Checkout
....................................................................................................................................................................
system 274
Session Recording
............................................................................................................................................................................ 279
VPN/SSH/Gatew ay
............................................................................................................................................................................ 280
User Interface
............................................................................................................................................................................ 283
Inform ation
............................................................................................................................................................................ 290
Jum p Host
............................................................................................................................................................................ 291
Events
............................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Typing
....................................................................................................................................................................
Macro 296
Logs
............................................................................................................................................................................ 301
Managem ent Tools
............................................................................................................................................................................ 305
Wake-on-LAN
.................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Advanced
............................................................................................................................................................................ 311
2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Sessions 313
Open a Rem ote Connection
............................................................................................................................................................................ 314
Rem ote Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................ 318
Apple
....................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop 319
BeyondTrust
....................................................................................................................................................................
Passw ord Safe Dashboard 325
FTP .................................................................................................................................................................... 327
Host.................................................................................................................................................................... 328
LogMeIn
.................................................................................................................................................................... 331
Microsoft
....................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop (RDP) 337
Pow ....................................................................................................................................................................
erShell Remote Console 358
ScreenConnect
.................................................................................................................................................................... 363
Spicew
....................................................................................................................................................................
orks 367
Telnet
.................................................................................................................................................................... 369
VNC .................................................................................................................................................................... 376
Wayk....................................................................................................................................................................
Now 383
Virtualization
............................................................................................................................................................................ 387
Amazon
....................................................................................................................................................................
Aw s Dashboard 388
Microsoft
....................................................................................................................................................................
Hyper-V Dashboard 390
VMw ....................................................................................................................................................................
are Dashboard 393
File............................................................................................................................................................................
Brow ser 396
Microsoft
....................................................................................................................................................................
OneDrive Explorer 397
WinSCP
.................................................................................................................................................................... 404
Others
............................................................................................................................................................................ 405
Data....................................................................................................................................................................
Report 406
Pow ....................................................................................................................................................................
erShell 412
SNMP....................................................................................................................................................................
Report 416
SQL ....................................................................................................................................................................
Server Management Studio 422
3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Information 425

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 5

Dynam ic Credential Linking

8 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronizer 491
Active Directory
............................................................................................................................................................................ 492
Active
....................................................................................................................................................................
Directory Sample Structure 498
Am............................................................................................................................................................................
azon EC2 500
9 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
VPN 504
Microsoft VPN
............................................................................................................................................................................ 507
Microsoft
....................................................................................................................................................................
VPN Phone-book Management 510
10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Macros/Scripts/Tools 516
Pow erShell (Local)
............................................................................................................................................................................ 519
Tem plate
............................................................................................................................................................................ 523
11 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Variables 524

Part VII Commands 549

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

5
6| Remote Desktop Manager

Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Netw ork Scan 600
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Sessions 601
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Logins 602
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Contacts 603
Export
............................................................................................................................................................................ 605
Encrypted
....................................................................................................................................................................
Html 608
Options
............................................................................................................................................................................ 610
Advanced
.................................................................................................................................................................... 611
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Options 617
Export
....................................................................................................................................................................
Options 619
My............................................................................................................................................................................
Account Settings 622
My....................................................................................................................................................................
Personal Credentials 624
User....................................................................................................................................................................
Specific Settings List 626
Tem plates
............................................................................................................................................................................ 628
Creating
....................................................................................................................................................................
Templates 633
Default
....................................................................................................................................................................
Settings 639
Passw
....................................................................................................................................................................
ord Templates 641
............................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Home 646

4 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Actions 646
Com m ands
............................................................................................................................................................................ 651
RDP .................................................................................................................................................................... 651
VNC .................................................................................................................................................................... 652
SSH ....................................................................................................................................................................
Shell (Rebex) 654
Telnet
.................................................................................................................................................................... 656
5 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Edit 658
Edit............................................................................................................................................................................ 663
Play....................................................................................................................................................................
List 663
Setting Overrides
............................................................................................................................................................................ 671
Specific
....................................................................................................................................................................
Settings 671
Batch............................................................................................................................................................................ 674
Batch
....................................................................................................................................................................
Edit 674
6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
View 678
Panels
............................................................................................................................................................................ 681
Task....................................................................................................................................................................
List 681
View
............................................................................................................................................................................ 684
Activity
....................................................................................................................................................................
Logs 684
Advanced
....................................................................................................................................................................
Search 686
Documentation
....................................................................................................................................................................
Search 689
7 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Administration 692
Managem ent
............................................................................................................................................................................ 695
User....................................................................................................................................................................
Management 695
Role....................................................................................................................................................................
Management 708
Reports
............................................................................................................................................................................ 709
Reports
.................................................................................................................................................................... 709
Deleted
....................................................................................................................................................................
Entries 714
Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................ 717
Root....................................................................................................................................................................
(Settings) 717
System
....................................................................................................................................................................
Settings 718
System
....................................................................................................................................................................
Permissions 733
Security
....................................................................................................................................................................
Providers 738
Clean up
............................................................................................................................................................................ 744
Clean
....................................................................................................................................................................
Up Deleted History 744

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 7

Clean
....................................................................................................................................................................
Up Entry History 746
Clean
....................................................................................................................................................................
Up Activity Logs 748
Pack....................................................................................................................................................................
Data Source (Optimize) 750
............................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools 751
Generators
............................................................................................................................................................................ 753
Passw
....................................................................................................................................................................
ord Generator 753
SSH ....................................................................................................................................................................
Key Generator 761
Certificate
....................................................................................................................................................................
Generator 763
Port....................................................................................................................................................................
Generator 766
Tools
............................................................................................................................................................................ 768
Passw
....................................................................................................................................................................
ord Analyzer 768
Key ....................................................................................................................................................................
Agent Manager 771
Pow ....................................................................................................................................................................
erShell (RDM CmdLet) 777
Wayk....................................................................................................................................................................
Now 778
More....................................................................................................................................................................
Tools 779
9 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Help 801
Support
............................................................................................................................................................................ 803
Application
....................................................................................................................................................................
Log 803
Diagnostic
.................................................................................................................................................................... 806
Profiler
.................................................................................................................................................................... 810
Record
.................................................................................................................................................................... 813

Part VIII Devolutions Web Login 814

2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation 816
Chrom e
............................................................................................................................................................................ 816
Firefox
............................................................................................................................................................................ 818
Microsoft Edge Beta
............................................................................................................................................................................ 819
Opera
............................................................................................................................................................................ 823
3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
First Login 824
Passw ord Hub
............................................................................................................................................................................ 824
Multiple
....................................................................................................................................................................
Passw ord Hub 828
Passw ord Server
............................................................................................................................................................................ 834
Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 837
4 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Exploring Devolutions Web Login 839
Menu
............................................................................................................................................................................ 839
Settings
.................................................................................................................................................................... 839
Retrieve Credentials
............................................................................................................................................................................ 844
Remote
....................................................................................................................................................................
Desktop Manager 845
Secure Devolutions Web Login
............................................................................................................................................................................ 846
Keyboard Shortcuts
............................................................................................................................................................................ 848

Part IX Role Based Access Control 851

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

7
8| Remote Desktop Manager

Part X PowerShell Scripting 897

Part XI Knowledge Base 909

1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Protocols and application 910
Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 910
Add ....................................................................................................................................................................
a w eb link in Macros/Scripts/Tools Session 910
Configure
....................................................................................................................................................................
VPN for multiple sessions 912
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
Credentials From Keepass 918
Import
....................................................................................................................................................................
and Export 924
Multiple
....................................................................................................................................................................
Types of Connections to a single computer 928
Pw....................................................................................................................................................................
ned Passw ord Check 936
Vaults
....................................................................................................................................................................
Overview 940
Quick
....................................................................................................................................................................
Connect 950
Send....................................................................................................................................................................
application logs 952
Send....................................................................................................................................................................
error report 955
Upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................
from Free Edition to Enterprise Edition 958
Understand
....................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop Manager licensing 960
Web ....................................................................................................................................................................
protocol handler 962
Create
....................................................................................................................................................................
a saved search w ith Smart Folders 966
Add ....................................................................................................................................................................
an RDP entry 967
Quick
....................................................................................................................................................................
Start 968
Rem ote Desktop Manager Jum p
............................................................................................................................................................................ 970
Configure
....................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop Manager Jump 970
RDP
............................................................................................................................................................................ 977
Restoring
....................................................................................................................................................................
the rdp file association w ith mstsc.exe 977
SSH
............................................................................................................................................................................ 978
Configure
....................................................................................................................................................................
an SSH Tunnel 978
VMw are
............................................................................................................................................................................ 978
Configuring
....................................................................................................................................................................
VMw are's Pow erCLI for use by Remote Desktop Manager 978
Tips and tricks
............................................................................................................................................................................ 979
Use ....................................................................................................................................................................
Multiple Versions of a Third Party Application 979
Sending
....................................................................................................................................................................
Window s Credentials inside TeamView er 980
2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance 985
Mem ory Tuning Of RDP Sessions
............................................................................................................................................................................ 985
3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Security 987
Blocking MS RDP to Only Use Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 987
Certificate validation
............................................................................................................................................................................ 988
Window s Credential Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 994

Part XII Technical Support 996

Part XIII Support/Resources 998

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 9

5............................................................................................................................................................................................
Add-on Documentation 1009
Bom gar Representative Console Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1009
DbVisualizer Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1012
NoMachine Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1014
PenguiNet SSH Client Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1015
SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI) Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1018
Shutdow n Application Tool Add-on
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1020
SQL Server Managem ent Studio Add-On
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1021
VPN Add-ons
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1024
Cisco
....................................................................................................................................................................
AnyConnect 1024
Generic
....................................................................................................................................................................
VPN 1025
OpenVPN
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1026
6............................................................................................................................................................................................
Best Practices 1027
Data Backups
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1028
Credential Managem ent For Team s
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1031
Use Credential Entries
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1035
Use VPN Entries
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1035
7............................................................................................................................................................................................
How-To 1035
How to Add a Web Link in Macros/Scripts/Tools Session
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1035
How to apply policies
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1040
How to Backup Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1048
How to Configure Passw ord Manager Pro in Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1049
How to Configure ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) 5 in Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1054
How to Configure the Google Authenticator 2-Factor Authentication
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1059
How to Configure the Yubikey 2-Factor Authentication
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1061
How to Disable Rem ote Desktop Manager Auto Update
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1063
How to Dow nload the Keepass Plugin
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1064
How to Register Licenses in Older Version
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1066
How to Reinstall Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1067
How to Send an Error Report
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1068
How to Send a File Securely
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1070
How to Send the Application Logs Report
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1071
How to Send your Configuration File
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1073
How to Setup a SSH Tunnel
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1073
How
....................................................................................................................................................................
to Broadcast Action in SSH 1080
How to Setup Rem ote Desktop Manager to Receive New Update
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1081
How to Setup the Usage of the Session Credentials to Launch a Tool
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1082
How to Subscribe to the Announcem ents Forum s
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1083
How to Use a Typing Macro to Perform Authentication
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1085
How to use the Them e system
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1088
Image
....................................................................................................................................................................
List 1089
Pow erShell
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1105
Extract
....................................................................................................................................................................
TeamView er ID 1106
Custom
....................................................................................................................................................................
Export to CSV 1106
Remote
....................................................................................................................................................................
Management 1107
Script
....................................................................................................................................................................
Execution Policy 1107
Change
....................................................................................................................................................................
your Synchronizer source 1108
8............................................................................................................................................................................................
Tips And Tricks 1111
Allow Open Multiple Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1111
Autom ating Rem ote Microsoft Managem ent Console (MMC)
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1112

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

9
10 | Remote Desktop Manager

Create a list of credentials

............................................................................................................................................................................ 1115
Creating Shortcuts
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1118
Data Migration
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1120
Data Report
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1127
Edit Hosts File
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1130
Handling RDP Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1134
HTML Export Using Sym m etric Encryption
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1135
Keep Tabs Opened
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1136
Open RD Gatew ay Only w hen Unable to Ping Host
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1138
Passcode Prom pt When Opening an Entry
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1139
RDP Session Tim e Lim its
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1141
Rem ote Install w ith PSExec
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1145
Run as Another User
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1146
Built-in
....................................................................................................................................................................
RunAs 1147
Manual
....................................................................................................................................................................
RunAs 1154
Running Rem ote Desktop Manager as Another User
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1162
SQL Server Data Source w ith Integrated Security
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1163
SQL Server Maintenance Plans
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1170
Tab Groups
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1171
Team Tips
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1173
Testing variables
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1176
Use Differents Version of Sam e Application
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1177
VPN
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1177
VPN
....................................................................................................................................................................
Group 1177
VPN
....................................................................................................................................................................
Routing 1178
............................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Tools 1180
Devolutions Localizer
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1180
10............................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting 1182
1Passw ord
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1182
2-Factor Authentication
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1182
Apple Rem ote Desktop
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1184
BeyondTrust
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1184
Clipboard
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1185
Corrupted System File
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1186
Data Recovery
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1186
Data Sources
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1187
Database
....................................................................................................................................................................
Schema 1189
Devolutions
....................................................................................................................................................................
Online Database 1192
MySQL
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1193
SQL
....................................................................................................................................................................
Azure 1195
SQL
....................................................................................................................................................................
Server 1197
DB Upgrades
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1203
FIPS (Encryption)
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1203
KeePass
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1204
LogMeIn
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1205
Microsoft Office
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1206
Microsoft RDP
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1207
Automatic
....................................................................................................................................................................
Logon 1212
Cannot
....................................................................................................................................................................
Store Passw ord on Local Computer 1218
Display
....................................................................................................................................................................
Issues 1219
Keyboard
....................................................................................................................................................................
not w orking 1221
Licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................
Protocol Error 1221
Logoff
....................................................................................................................................................................
Access Denied 1223

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 11

Logoff
....................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1224
Memory
....................................................................................................................................................................
and Performance issues 1225
Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................
mapped drives 1227
Printer
....................................................................................................................................................................
Redirection 1229
Protocol
....................................................................................................................................................................
Error 1230
RDP
....................................................................................................................................................................
Session Credentials 1231
Remote
....................................................................................................................................................................
Computer Requires Authentication to be Enabled Error 1233
Reconnect
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1234
RD....................................................................................................................................................................
Gatew ay Credentials Prompt When Trying To Reconnect 1235
RDM
....................................................................................................................................................................
Hangs w hen logging off RDP sessions 1236
Sessions
....................................................................................................................................................................
w ork using mstsc.exe but not in RDM 1238
Netw ork Devices
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1239
Non-Adm in Users Cannot View Passw ords
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1240
Passw ord Manager Pro
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1241
Perform ance
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1245
Data
....................................................................................................................................................................
sources 1245
Diagnostic
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1246
Startup
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1249
Pow ershell
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1250
Putty
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1253
Rem ote Desktop Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1254
Caching
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1255
Debugging
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1256
High
....................................................................................................................................................................
CPU Usage 1258
HDPI
....................................................................................................................................................................
Scaling Issues 1259
Hung
....................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Desktop Manager 1262
Large
....................................................................................................................................................................
Memory Aw are Application 1264
Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation Pane 1266
Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................
Sessions 1267
Offline
....................................................................................................................................................................
Mode 1268
Profiler
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1269
Red
....................................................................................................................................................................
X in Navigation Pane or Credential List 1269
Root
....................................................................................................................................................................
Is Empty Error 1270
Session
....................................................................................................................................................................
Focus Issue 1271
SQL
....................................................................................................................................................................
Server Data Source Connection Refused 1272
Startup
....................................................................................................................................................................
performance 1273
Unable
....................................................................................................................................................................
to install or upgrade 1276
Unable
....................................................................................................................................................................
to Uninstall 1276
Upgrade
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1277
User
....................................................................................................................................................................
Interface 1277
Unable
....................................................................................................................................................................
to communicate w ith Passw ord Vault Manager 1279
Proxy
....................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication Required Error 1280
RPC
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1281
Secret Server
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1281
Secure Note
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1283
Session Tools
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1284
SSH
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1285
Synchronizers
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1286
Active
....................................................................................................................................................................
Directory Synchronizer 1286
VMWare
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1286
Advanced
....................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting of the Pow erCLI 1291
VPN
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1293
Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................
Opened VPN from List 1293
FortiClient
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1294

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

11
12 | Remote Desktop Manager

Sonicw
....................................................................................................................................................................
all Global VPN Client 1294
Microsoft
....................................................................................................................................................................
VPN 1295
Cisco
....................................................................................................................................................................
AnyConnect 1296
Web Brow sers
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1297
Internet
....................................................................................................................................................................
Explorer 1297
Google
....................................................................................................................................................................
Chrome 1301
Firefox
.................................................................................................................................................................... 1302
Web
....................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication 1303
WebDav
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1307
Web traffic
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1308
Welcom e Page
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1309
WMI
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1312
11............................................................................................................................................................................................
Tutorials 1313
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1314
Getting Started
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1315
Spotlight On...
............................................................................................................................................................................ 1316

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Overview
Part I
14 | Remote Desktop Manager

1 Ov erv iew

1.1 Remote Desktop Manager

Remote Desktop Manager is an application that integrates a

comprehensive set of tools and managers to meet the needs of any IT
team. It is designed to centralize remote connection technologies,
credentials, and secure the access to these resources. Most connections
are established using either an external library or third-party software.

Remote Desktop Manager is compatible with several relevant tools and

technologies, including: Apple Remote Desktop, Citrix, Dameware,
FTP, Hyper-V, LogMeIn, Radmin, RDP (Microsoft Remote Desktop),
SSH Port Forward, SSH Shell, TeamViewer, Telnet, Remote
Desktop Services, VMware, VNC, SCP, Wayk Now, X Windows, and
more!

THE REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ECOSYSTEM

Remote Desktop Manager is available in two editions:

Free For individuals only, no information can be shared with colleagues.

The most popular remote access technologies are supported, and
passwords can be stored securely.

Enterprise Used by teams, this edition offers user permissions, roles,

advanced logging, etc. Typically uses a Database Management
System (DBMS) for storing the information and sharing it
according to your security requirements. Devolutions also offers
two specialized services for either Cloud-Based storage, or to get
full Active Directory Integration.

Remote Desktop Manager is also offered on multiple platforms, as seen below.

Purchasing an Enterprise license grants the right to use ALL the various client
applications.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 15

You must use a desktop application to create a team data source. This
explains why the mobile applications are free. They do allow for simple usage
by an individual much like the Free Edition, but they can only use, not manage,
a Team data source.

Platform Free Edition Enterprise

Edition

Windows

macOS

iOS
(Free App)

Android
(Free App)

1.2 Security

All passwords stored in the data sources are encrypted using a strong encryption algorithm, to
the extent that if a user attempts to access the data directly in the database, it will be considered
unreadable.

If you choose to store passwords locally, Remote Desktop Manager will use the same
mechanism used by mstsc.exe (Remote Desktop Manager client), which stores the passwords
in the Windows Credential Manager. It must be noted that the password will not be able to be
viewed due to being encrypted by Windows. For obvious reasons, this choice also means that
credentials stored in this fashion are not shared. Please refer to Windows Credential Manager
for more information.

U.S. FEDERAL GOVERNMENT APPROVED ENCRYPTION

Our application integrates an Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm to protect

sensitive data in the database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

16 | Remote Desktop Manager

This cipher is proven to be very secure. AES/Rijndael became effective as a U.S. Federal
government standard and is approved by the National Security Agency (NSA) for top secret
information.

TIPS

Encryption of data while in transit is offered natively by our cloud services.

Whenever you decide to use an on-premise solution, encryption of data in
transit must be implemented by using the tools involving your chosen
technologies. Most customers with security concerns choose one of the
supported Advanced Data Sources. Follow instructions specific to the chosen
solution.

The encryption key is built-in the application and is therefore the same for all
copies of the software in circulation. It is imperative that you follow our
recommended steps and apply a Security Provider to encrypt not only the
passwords, but also all connection data stored in the data source. This will
provide protection over your data at rest, using a key under your exclusive
control.

We recommend you follow these steps to ensure security:

· Use an Advanced Data Source and grant user access by assigning permissions.

· Use encrypted communication with the database when available.

· Use the Data Source Settings (System Settings) to control settings impacting security.

· Use the Security Provider to encrypt entries completely instead of just the password.

· If using the offline mode, add your own password to add an additional layer of protection to
the local cache. Go to File – Options – Security.

· Require a password to launch the application, and even better: require two factor
authentication. File – Options – Security.

· If your data source supports it, choose not to save password in the data source, which will
prompt for the credentials on the first connection.

· Use our policies to enforce some of these settings at the system level.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 17

1.3 System Requirements

Remote Desktop Manager requires the following prior to installation:

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Windows Desktop:

· Windows 10

· Version 1607, 1703, 1709, 1803, 1809, 1903 and 1909

· 8.1

· 7 SP1

Windows Server:

· Windows Server 2019

· Version 1709, 1803 and 1809

· 2016

· 2012 R2

· 2012

· 2008 R2 SP1

Microsoft .NET Framework 4.7.2

1 GHz or faster processor

512MB RAM

1024 x 768 screen resolution

500+ MB hard drive space

64-BIT SUPPORT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

18 | Remote Desktop Manager

Remote Desktop Manager is compatible with all 64-bit versions of Windows.

REMOTE DESKTOP SERVICES AND THIN CLIENT SUPPORT

Remote Desktop Manager can be installed on Remote Desktop Services and thin client.

MANUAL/PORTABLE DEPLOYMENT

Deploying manually using our zip file is documented as being a Portable (USB) deployment. In
this case, the prerequisites will need to be handled manually as well. Please consult Prerequisite
Software for details.
1.3.1 Prerequisite Software

Specific prerequisite software need to be installed on your computer prior to running Remote
Desktop Manager.

These are managed automatically by our installers. The only situations where
one would perform a manual installation of the prerequisite software is when the
zip archive is used for deployment or if there is no internet connection.

SETTINGS

The following package must be installed prior to proceeding with the Remote Desktop Manager
installation:
· Microsoft .NET Framework 4.7.2.

1.4 The Devolutions Platform

Our platform offers multiple products to help in managing all of aspects of an IT infrastructure.

The flagship product is Remote Desktop Manager, the strongest edition admittedly being for the
Windows operating system.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 19

APPLICATIONS DESCRIPTION INSTALLA

TION

Application used to manage and centralize remote Windows,

Remote Desktop access technologies, passwords, documents and macOS,
Manager (RDM) shared information. iOS,
Android

Tool used to run commands on remote systems. It Windows

listens for commands from a master Remote
Remote Desktop Desktop Manager. It resolves a lot of issues
Manager Agent brought on by remote management, in particular
removing the need to use Microsoft's WinRM and
managing lists of TrustedHosts.

Feature that uses the Remote Desktop Manager Windows

Remote Desktop Agent to launch any of our supported technologies
on a remote Windows Host. It transforms it in what
Manager Jump
is called alternatively a Jump Server, or Bastion
Server, or Service Host.

Enterprise Grade data store for creating a Windows

Devolutions centralized database for your team. Integrates with
Password Server AD to drastically reduce time spent on managing
(DPS) permissions. It is installed on-premises and offers
many advanced features.

Web browser extension technology that interacts Windows,

Devolutions Web with our Remote Desktop Manager and Password macOS
Vault Manager desktop applications to obtain
Login (DWL)
credentials and automatically fill authentication
fields in your browser.

1.4.1 Remote Desktop Manager Agent

Please note that if your Windows profile is corrupted, Remote Desktop

Manager Agent and Remote Desktop Manager Jump might not work.

The Remote Desktop Manager Agent can run commands on remote hosts, but what is really
useful is that it can send commands to multiple hosts at the same time. Since Remote Desktop

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

20 | Remote Desktop Manager

Manager uses a secure RDP channel to communicate with the Remote Desktop Manager
Agent, it can only operate against Windows-based hosts.

It supports both environment and Remote Desktop Manager variables. Remote Desktop
Manager variables (i.e. $HOST$, basically all the ones surrounded by dollar signs) are resolved
on the client against the running session, while environment variables (i.e. %windir%, basically
all the ones surrounded by percent signs) will be resolved on the remote host at execution time.
You can use Remote Desktop Manager variables while running file based scripts (.ps1) within
the command. The file based script variables (.ps1) will be resolved prior to sending the script to
the destination host.

RDM Agent

SCENARIOS

The Remote Desktop Manager Agent can be used to run scripts from another Remote Desktop
Manager installation. Since it uses an RDP channel for communication, it saves you from remote
management headaches such as opening various ports in your firewall. This requires the
lightweight installation model of just the agent package (Methods 2-4 below).

It is also used by Remote Desktop Manager Jump for supporting many technologies. However, it
does require a full Remote Desktop Manager installation on the remote host for those features.

INSTALLATION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 21

Installing Remote Desktop Manager Agent on a remote host can be achieved in 4 different
ways:

The Remote Desktop Manager Agent must be configured to automatically start

when a Windows session is established. Method 1 below performs that
automatically, but in other cases, you must configure this manually using
Windows features (startup folder or Run registry key). Please consult the
documentation of your operating system for details.

1. Install Remote Desktop Manager and select Tools – More Tools – RDM Agent. It will launch
and auto-register the Agent to automatically start with Windows.

2. Download Remote Desktop Manager Agent from

https://remotedesktopmanager.com/Home/Download, and install the agent on the remote
computer.

3. Copy the files Devolutions.Utils.dll, Devolutions.Windows.Utils.dll and RDMAgent.exe from

the installation folder of the Remote Desktop Manager version that is used by your team, or
download the zip file containing those files at
https://remotedesktopmanager.com/Home/Download and deploy them on the remote host in
the folder of your choice.

4. Via Chocolatey at https://chocolatey.org/packages/rdmagent.

Chocolatey command line

Many new users using this technology wonder why a full installation of Remote Desktop Manager
is required. There are three factors that make this a good solution:

· Remote Desktop Manager on the remote host does not require a data source, it’s an empty
shell.

· The logging of the activity is brought back to your data source.

· Every technology supported by Remote Desktop Manager can be used remotely.

1.4.2 Remote Desktop Manager Jump

Remote Desktop Manager Jump connects to a remote host, often called a Jump Box, Service
Host, or a Bastion Server, which in turn connects to other hosts.

This can be compared to RD Gateway from Microsoft and to some extent SSH port forwarding.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

22 | Remote Desktop Manager

The Jump is performed through Remote Desktop Manager Agent. The Agent
needs to be CURRENTLY EXECUTING in a Windows Session on the remote
host, or set to automatically start upon login. We have decided NOT to have this
available through a service at this time.

Remote Desktop Manager must be installed on the jump host for the agent to
be able to run commands. The application does not have to connect to any data
source, as Remote Desktop Manager only serves as a shell for the agent to run
commands.

HOW DOES IT WORK?

Both instances of Remote Desktop Manager Jump or Remote Desktop Manager and RDM
Agent running on the Jump Host communicate through an RDP channel. Commands are sent
securely over the RDP channel and are then executed on the Service Host. Commands include
running a script or opening a remote session of any type. It can even launch a VPN client on the
Service Host prior to running the remote session.

Please consult the Configure Remote Desktop Manager Jump topic.

USAGE SCENARIOS

There are two targeted scenarios:

1. ACCESSING A SECURE NETWORK THROUGH A SINGLE HOST

This allows you to have a strict firewall policy that allows connections only from a specific IP
address. This configuration only grants you access to hosts that are accessible from the Jump
Box. Let's imagine you have the following infrastructure:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 23

You need to access the remote hosts, but you want to limit risks and expose only the jump host
to the internet traffic. This allows you to create strict firewall rules and to open only a single port.
Therefore, it forces you to connect to the jump host before hopping to a remote host.

Remote Desktop Manager Jump helps achieve that goal simply and efficiently.

2. WORKAROUND LIMITATIONS OF SOME VPN CLIENTS

These limitations make it impossible to use multiple VPN clients concurrently on the same
workstation. In this case, you can have multiple virtual machines, each running a single VPN
client. Using these virtual machines as jump boxes allows you to connect to the virtual machine,
launch the VPN client, then launch the remote session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

24 | Remote Desktop Manager

Remote Desk top Manager Jump to handle incompatible VPN clients

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Getting Started
Part II
26 | Remote Desktop Manager

2 Getting Started

2.1 Using Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager is highly flexible and can work for both individuals and teams. Please
follow the checklist that applies to your environment:

· Checklist for Individuals: For individuals but also for teams of three users or less that do not
want to implement security.

· Checklist for Teams: For a team environment that wishes to implement security.

2.2 Checklist for Individuals

Please follow these simple steps to get started with Remote Desktop Manager for individuals
or for teams of three users or less that do not want to implement security.

CHECKLIST FOR INDIVIDUALS (ENTERPRISE EDITION)

Step 1 - Register your license serial.

Step 2 - Choose a data source type (individuals).

Step 3 - Set up your data source with a master key or

encryption.

Step 4 - Set up your Devolutions Online Backup with

Devolutions Account.

Step 5 - Create your Default Settings.

Step 6 - Import your data.

REGISTER REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 27

Remote Desktop Manager Enterprise Edition grants you a 30 day trial. Refer to the procedure in the Registration
Enterprise Edition topic to register your license key. If you decide not to register by the end of the 30 day trial,
your data will not be altered or erased, and you will have full access to it once you provide a license key. Please
consult our Free Edition or Enterprise Edition topic to register.

CHOOSE YOUR DATA SOURCE TYPE

When choosing any data source type that is not on-premises, you need to
think about the safety of the data at rest and during transport. We strongly
recommend that you further encrypt your data by applying a master key for file-
based solutions, or a Security Provider for Advanced Data Sources. This
ensures only you can read the data.
Upon first launch, Remote Desktop Manager uses an SQLite data source. The data sources are elaborated further
in the Data Sources overview topic. Consult Choosing your data source (Individuals) for help selecting a data
source.

SET UP YOUR DEVOLUTIONS ONLINE BACKUP

The Online Backup allows you to securely backup your information for the following data sources: Devolutions
Online Drive, SQLite, XML and Microsoft Access. The backup is automatically executed 30 seconds
after any modifications made to the data source content. It is best practice to always back up your data source. If
using another type of data source, please consult our Backup Best Practices topic to use the best solution for
your chosen data source.

CREATE YOUR DEFAULT SETTINGS

In File - Templates - Default Settings, you will be able to create, edit or reset your default settings when a new
entry is created. Each entry type is supported and can have a default template defined to fit your requirements.

IMPORT YOUR DATA

The final step is to Import all of your data into Remote Desktop Manager. You can import your sessions, logins
and contacts in a few easy steps.

2.2.1 Select the Data Source type - Individuals

This topic is for individuals or for teams of three users or less that do not want to implement
security.

To help you select a data source, here is a set of concerns and the list of data sources that can
serve in such context. If you have multiple concerns, simply create the intersection of all sets to
isolate a list of choices.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

28 | Remote Desktop Manager

SHARED
BETWEE
SELF- CLOUD WORKS MULTI-
DATA SOURCE LOCAL N YOUR
HOSTED BASED OFFLINE USER
COMPUT
ERS

SQLite X X

XML X X

Devolutions X X X
Online Drive

Dropbox (Note ) X X Note 1

Amazon S3, X X Note 1

FTP, SFTP X X Note 1

Web X Note 2 Note 2

Devolutions X X X 3 users
Online
Database -
Basic

NOTES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 29

NOTE 1

There is no protection in the case of data contention issues. The last one saving the file will win!
This is for single users with multiple computers, not for multiple users using the data
concurrently.

NOTE 2

The master XML is maintained by a single user and synchronized to a web site that is hosted as
per your requirements. Accessing the data through a URL ensures it is read-only for other users.
2.3 Checklist for Teams

Here's a checklist to help you get started with Remote Desktop Manager when working in a
team environment.

CHECKLIST FOR TEAMS

Step 1 - Register your license.

Step 2 - Add your Data Source (for teams).

Step 3 - Select your Security Provider.

Step 4 - Create your folder structure.

Step 5 - Create your Default Settings.

Step 6 - Create Users.

Step 7 - Create Roles.

Step 8 - Create Entries.

Step 9 - Grant Permissions.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

30 | Remote Desktop Manager

CHECKLIST FOR TEAMS

Step 10 - Import your Data.

REGISTER REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

ADD A DATA SOURCE

When choosing any data source type that is not on-premises, you need to
think about the safety of the data at rest and during transport. We strongly
recommend that you further encrypt your data by applying a master key for file-
based solutions, or a Security Provider for Advanced Data Sources. This
ensures only you can read the data.
Upon first launch, Remote Desktop Manager uses a local SQLite data source. Learn more about adding your own
Data Source.
For help selecting a data source tailored to your needs, please see Choosing your data source (Teams).

SELECT YOUR SECURITY PROVIDER

Select your Security Provider before importing or creating any data in your database so nobody can read your
entry configuration data, even when people have a direct access to your database.

CREATE YOUR FOLDER STRUCTURE

Top level folders are at the foundation of a solid security structure. Your folder structure (Folder entries) should
represent your company structure. For example, you can create a folder for your Production team, one for your
Staging team and one for your Testing team.

CREATE YOUR DEFAULT SETTINGS

In File - Options you can set options for Remote Desktop Manager and create default settings Templates. Each
entry type is supported and can have a default template defined to fit your requirements. After you configure the
options, use the Custom Installer to share the pre-configured version with your team.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 31

CREATE USERS

Remote Desktop Manager supports advanced User Management. User accounts must be created manually by an
administrator of the database.

CREATE ROLES

Create Roles to easily manage your security system. You can then assign users to Roles, making it easy to grant
permissions to a set of users instead of having to manage permissions individually.

CREATE ENTRIES

An Entry is how you save information about your sessions (e.g. RDP, SSH connections), credentials, websites,
VPNs, Synchronizers and documents.

GRANT PERMISSIONS

Once your users are created you can then grant Permissions for role-based access control. The permissions
granted on the folder can be inherited by each entry set under that folder.

IMPORT YOUR DATA

The final step is to Import all of your data into Remote Desktop Manager. You can import your sessions, logins
and contacts in a few easy steps.

2.3.1 Select the Data Source type - Teams

This topic is for teams that need the functionality offered by our Enterprise Edition.

When choosing any data source type that is not on-premises, you need to
think about the safety of the data both at rest and during transport. We
strongly recommend that you further encrypt your data by applying a master key
for file-based solutions, or a Security Provider for Advanced Data Sources.
This ensures only you can read the data.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

32 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutio MYSQL/
ns SQL SQL DODB DODB
CONCERN MARIAD
Passwor SERVER AZURE PRO ENT
d Server B

The database is X Note 1 & 2 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

not accessible
to end users

AD accounts X X
used for
authentication

AD group X
membership
used to assign
permissions

The data is X X X
stored on-
premises

Activity Logs X X X X X

Data accessible Note 3 Note 4 X Note 4 X X

globally

Optional local X X X X X X
cache of
connections

NOTES

NOTE 1

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 33

The administrators can create accounts for end users without divulging the passwords. A locked
data source definition is imported for each end user. This obviously requires a lot of manual
operations by the administrator.

NOTE 2

Integrated Security is the name of a Microsoft technology that does not sends credentials to get
access to a SQL Server instance, but rather the token resulting from authentication in your
Windows computer. This therefore allows the users to connect directly to the database using
other tools. It should not be used if you need to prevent direct access to the database.

Our SQL Server data source offers a third option, namely the Custom (Devolutions) user type. It
allows for the user to be impersonated and therefore not be made aware of the credentials used
to connect to the database. Please consult User Management for details.

NOTE 3

You should not expose a Devolutions Password Server instance to the Internet without being
able to protect it from DDoS attacks. Strong passwords must be used as well as obscure
account names that are not easily inferred using social data mining.

NOTE 4

You can indeed expose a database to the Internet, but you must use SSL/TLS to encrypt traffic,
you must ALSO protect against DDoS attacks. Cloud services, like Azure or Amazon Web
Services, have that concern in the forefront. The default settings of the firewall should be to block
everything, you will then open only the most limited set of ports, while filtering on a short list of
acceptable origins for requests.
2.3.2 Set up a team folder for default settings

You must create a team folder on a server drive to store your default settings templates in order
to share them with your team.

SETTINGS

1. Start by accessing your server drive (such as \\servercommon) and create a new team folder
to hold all your team default settings templates.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

34 | Remote Desktop Manager

Server Drive - Team Folder

2. Go to File - Options - Path and enter the path of your newly created folder stored on your
server drive. All your default templates will then automatically be saved in that folder.

File - Options - Path

3. If you have remote workers, ensure they have access to the shared server in offline mode.
Map your network drive and then follow the instructions here for the offline mode access when
using Windows 10.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 35

Map Network Drive

2.4 Creating an Entry

When getting started with Remote Desktop Manager, you must configure your entries. There are
many types of entries; you should know what third party or technology you will use in order to
choose the appropriate entry type(s) that you plan on configuring.

CREATING AN ENTRY FROM THE CONTEXT MENU

On the main application window, simply right-click on the name of the data source and select
Add from the menu. To initialize a new session, you can specify either the type of session, or a
template. You will be prompted to customize your settings in the entry properties window.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

36 | Remote Desktop Manager

Adding a new entry

CREATING AN ENTRY WITH DRAG & DROP

You can also create a session by dragging and dropping an .rdp file in the main application
window. By doing so, Remote Desktop Manager will ask you whether to import the content and
create a new session, or create a session linked to the .rdp file. It is also possible to drag and
drop the LogMeIn desktop shortcut to create a LogMeIn session.

It is possible that drag and drop will not work because of your security settings.
They may prevent applications running in different contexts from interacting. For
example, if Remote Desktop Manager is running in an elevated context
(administrator mode) and Internet Explorer is running in default mode, Windows
will not allow you to drag a URL link in the application.

CREATING AN ENTRY BY IMPORTING ITS CONFIGURATION

You can also import entries by using the Import Computer Wizard, or by importing its
configuration directly from any compatible applications supported by our import tools. You can
learn more in the Import section.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 37

2.5 Managing Credentials

Depending on your organization's security policies, there are multiple ways of handling
credentials. We can manage a wide range of scenarios, the most popular are listed below. It is
critical to understand that these are the credentials used to connect to remote hosts, not the
ones you use to launching Remote Desktop Manager.

Most of these selections do not exist in the Free edition of Remote Desktop
Manager as they depend on features offered by an Advanced Data Source.

A few key points that the admin of the solution must be aware of:

Password You can store passwords in a Credential entry (Username /

visibility Password entry, which (by default) makes the password USABLE, but
not VISIBLE, by the end user. We provide multiple Credential entry
types, you should always consider carefully which type you are using
based on your security and administrative needs.

Credentials set Our folders can have credentials defined. This is useful because in the
on folders great majority of cases, one reuses the same credentials for a whole
branch of the network infrastructure. To make use of credentials defined
in a folder, the child sessions must be adjusted to use Inherited
Credentials.

Entry location When storing entries in the tree view, users with the View permissions
on that entry (or folder by inheritance) will be able to make use of them.
This is how you would share credentials with other members of your
team. A Private Vault exists for users to store private information that
should be seen by no one else. Credentials stored this way can still be
accessed in the Public area of the system by referencing them or
through the User Specific Settings feature described below.

User Specific User Specific Settings are partial overrides for settings of your entries,
Settings most notably the Credentials. When applying such an override, one can
choose the type in the credentials directly in the override or one can
choose to instead link to credentials stored elsewhere, such as the
Private Vault.

Here are the most common scenarios and how to address them. In the majority of cases, we
prefer to have sessions using Inherited credentials, meaning it climbs up the tree until it has
access to a set of credentials, be it defined, linked, or overridden in an entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

38 | Remote Desktop Manager

SCENARIO STRATEGY

One set of credentials is used by all of Set the credentials on the Vault Settings. All
the staff, be it for the whole system or children use Inherited Credentials.
for a branch in your tree view
(Customer, Department, etc).

Each user has its own credentials for Make use of the User Specific Settings on each
many different branches (often branch. All children use Inherited Credentials.
corresponds to
customers/departments, etc).

Each user has its own credentials This solution involves a little more work. The
managed by an administrator. admin must create a folder for each user, then
grant permissions ONLY to that user. The user will
then use User Specific Settings to specify that
the credentials stored in that folder is used to
override what is defined in the entries.

Each team uses the same credentials. Much like directly above, but all the members of
the team have access to the folder. All of them
must use the User Specific Settings.

Each user uses their domain account. Have the sessions configured to use My personal
credentials. Each user will be prompted to define
them once per workstation that they use.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Installation
Part III
40 | Remote Desktop Manager

3 Installation

3.1 Client

Remote Desktop Manager can be downloaded as setup files, or as a binary compressed (zip)
file.

INSTALLATION

Depending on the downloaded media, either run the setup, or extract the files from the archive in
any folder and launch the executable. If you wish to use a portable device, or run multiple
independent copies of the application, please consult Portable (USB).

LICENSE

Remote Desktop Manager Enterprise Edition comes with a 30 day-trial. If you possess a
purchased license of the Enterprise Edition, please follow the instructions at Register Enterprise
Edition. To register the Free Edition, please refer to the Register Free Edition.

DATA SOURCE

By default, a local data source is created using the SQLite format. You can add as many data
sources as needed. Please consult Data Source Overview for more information.

To use a SQL Server or SQL Azure data source, refer to the Configure SQL
Server topic.

EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS

Configure your installation path for all external applications you intend to utilize such as
RealVNC, Putty, Filezilla, etc. Set the paths in File – Options – Path.

REMOTE DESKTOP SERVICES

Please consult the Remote Desktop Services topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 41

3.1.1 Ancillary Files

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager generates ancillary files on your workstation. The table below lists out
an example of ancillary files and their locations.

As described in Configuration File Location, the default path for most of these files are
customizable. For this reason, we use the [CONFIG] token in this documentation to denote
when a file is stored in a configuration folder that can be relocated, or the [PROFILE] token to
indicate that they are stored in the local profile. By default, these point to the same exact folder.
The only method to separate them is by using a customized configuration.

Since you can also deploy on a portable device, sometimes known as using the XCOPY
deployment model, we will use the [INSTALLDIR] token to indicate that the file is in the same
location as Remote Desktop Manager.

The Override Source column indicates if an available mechanism can relocate the files of that
category elsewhere.

SUMMARY

FILE(S) LOCATION OVERRIDE SOURCE

Configuration File(s) [CONFIG] None

(*.cfg, *.ext)

Data File(s) (*.xml, [CONFIG] or custom path. None

*.db)

Default Settings [CONFIG] Data source settings (System

Settings)

Layout Files (*.lyt) [CONFIG] None

Log Files (*.log, [CONFIG] None

*.debug)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

42 | Remote Desktop Manager

FILE(S) LOCATION OVERRIDE SOURCE

Offline/Cache data [PROFILE]\[Datasource] Use application directory for

(offline.db) online cache will use instead
[INSTALLDIR]

Local Play lists [PROFILE]\[Datasource] Use application directory for local

\Playlists playlist will use instead
[INSTALLDIR]

Local Templates They are serialized None

directly in the
configuration file of the
application.

Themes [CONFIG] None

OFFLINE AND LOCAL PLAY LIST OPTION

Offline and local play list options can be accessed by navigating to File - Options - Advanced.

Options - Advanced

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 43

3.1.2 Configuration File Location

DEFAULT LOCATION

Remote Desktop Manager saves its configuration in a file named RemoteDesktopManager.cfg.

This file contains all of the application settings and configured data sources. All of the data
source settings are encrypted for security reasons.

You can retrieve the installation folder of Remote Desktop Manager by clicking
File – Options – Advanced. A hyperlink displays the installation folder.

Options - Advanced

The configuration file can be located in different folders depending on certain conditions:

CASE CONFIGURATION FILE LOCATION

%LocalAppData%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager
Installed under "Program Files" or
"Program Files (x86)"

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

44 | Remote Desktop Manager

CASE CONFIGURATION FILE LOCATION

Application running on Terminal %AppData%

Server \Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager. This is
the roaming profile and avoids multi-user
conflicts.

Other Installation folder

Having the configuration file in the installation folder allows you to run multiple
versions of the application side-by-side.

OVERRIDE THE DEFAULT PATH

There are two ways to change the folder where the configuration file is stored:

1. Create a file named "Override.cfg" in the application folder. Remote Desktop Manager
opens this file and reads the first line. It should contain the desired installation folder (without the
file name). If you wish to use the current installation path, put a period in the file. Here are a few
examples:

EXAMPLES

c:\RDM The config file is saved in the designated folder.

. The period is used to specify the Remote

Desktop Manager installation folder.

% AppData% Specify the application roaming data folder.

\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManag
er

2. By adding a key in the registry: CurrentUser\SOFTWARE\RemoteDesktopManager,

OptionPath. Set the desired path in the key OptionPath. You must not include the file name in
the value, just the path.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 45

DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE DESKTOP SERVICES

ENVIRONMENT

Please refer to Remote Desktop Services for details.

3.1.3 Custom Installer Service

DESCRIPTION

· Generate and download custom installation packages for

Remote Desktop Manager.

· Include preconfigured data sources in the package for quick

enterprise wide deployment.

· Insert license serial in the installation package for easier

management.

· Download the installer as a Windows Installer (.MSI file) or as an

executable (.EXE file).

The Custom Installer Service, offered through our Devolutions Customer Portal services,
replicates the configuration from a Remote Desktop Manager instance. This configuration is
used to create an installer file (*.rdi), which will be used to create the installation package
intended for distribution. The configuration can contain the license serial, data sources,
credentials, database templates and more. It is best practice to have a Remote Desktop
Manager installation used specifically to create the installation package.

The Custom Installer Service uploads a configuration file to our online services.
You should not use the service to redistribute passwords for data sources or an
Online Database account.

Please note that you MUST create an installer file using Remote Desktop
Manager before creating the installer on the Web portal. This is described here in
the Installer File Generator topic.

The Custom Installer Service can be found in with the Devolutions Account tools, located in File
– Devolutions Account – Tools. You must be signed in to access it.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

46 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Devolutions Account - Tools

The following topics will help you get started to set up your customized installers with Remote
Desktop Manager.

· Create an Installation Package

· Installer File Generator

· Option Selection Dialog

3.1.3.1 Installer File Generator

DESCRIPTION

When creating an installation package with the Custom Installer Manager, an installer file is
necessary to determine what to include in the installation configuration. It is risky to create an
installer file for each new version since you have to repeat the process manually every time.
Instead, it is possible to create the configuration once, save the resulting file (*.rdi), and reuse it
as many times as needed.

CREATING AN INSTALLER FILE

1. Click on File – Devolutions Account – Installer File Generator.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 47

File - Devolutions Account - Installer File Generator

2. Select which data sources to include. You can also include the name and serial key for the
registration.

Installer File Generator

3. Click on Generate and save the file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

48 | Remote Desktop Manager

Save the installer file

An information dialog is displayed when the file has been generated.

Pack age.rdi has been generated successfully

This file can be used in the Custom Installer Manager when creating an installation package.

For more information on how to create a custom installer package, please consult our Custom
Installer Manager topic.
3.1.3.1.1 Option Selection Dialog

DESCRIPTION

When generating the installer file, you must decide what to include in the configuration. This
process will replicate the configuration of the Remote Desktop Manager instance currently used,
and will generate an installer file (*.rdi). Once it has been generated, the installer file can be used
as many times as needed to create custom installers. For security reasons, some settings that

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 49

may contain credentials, such as Saved Templates, are disabled by default. Enable these at
your own risk.

The same dialog is used for the Custom Installer Service and for exporting the
Remote Desktop Manager configuration file. Some options must NOT be used
for the Custom Installer Service to prevent sharing credentials that must stay
confidential. Please read the documentation carefully.

Remote Desktop Manager may install required add-ons automatically when it

detects that they are needed (configured in File – Options – General –
Application Start). If you need to customize the application's installation path of
an Add-on, you must perform the modification, then create the installation
package. This setting will be replicated in the installer file (*.rdi).

SETTINGS

You can open the Installer File Generator from File – Devolutions Account – Installer File
Generator.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

50 | Remote Desktop Manager

Installer File Generator

REGISTRATION INFORMATION

Installer File Generator - Registration Information

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Company registration name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 51

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Registration email if using a generic address.

Key License serial.

MISCELLANEOUS

Do not redistribute the Devolutions Account credentials. Doing so would share

these to ALL users having access to the online account used to create the
installer package.

All Local templates will be included. If any contain credentials, it may cause a
security risk. Ensure you are sharing only what is needed.

The data sources you decide to redistribute should NOT contain identifiable
credentials. Use of integrated security is highly recommended. You can also use
environment variables for the username.

Installer File Generator - Miscellaneous

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Saved installation Preserves your installation paths configured for external third party
paths applications. Use this only when all of the user's machines use the
same paths.

Saved templates Includes your local templates in the custom installer. Database
templates are stored in the data source and may be a better option
in you need to share them.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

52 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Filter history Preserves your search/filter history

Proxy settings Includes your Internet proxy settings

Devolutions Includes your Devolutions Account credentials used to create the

Account custom installer. Please, consult security warning above.
credentials

Include data Includes the credentials for all selected data sources below. Please,
source consult security warning above.
credentials

DATA SOURCES

Data Source List

Select the data sources that must be included in the configuration. In the description column you
will see details about each data sources. You should ONLY share data sources that are either
using Integrated Security, or that are using an environment variable for the username.
Passwords for accessing a data source should NEVER be shared.
3.1.3.2 Custom Installer Manager

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 53

For stability reasons, in large installation bases, the latest official release is not
available to the Custom Installer Service for an undetermined period while we
ensure that no major issues are present. We recommend using this time with your
organization to perform integration tests on a few workstations before upgrading
your entire team.

Please ensure you have read and understood the content of Custom Installer
Service Overview prior to subscribing to the service.

CREATE AN INSTALLATION PACKAGE

1. Click on File – Devolutions Account – Sign-in to connect to your Devolutions Account.

Devolutions Account Sign-in

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

54 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Click on Custom Installer Manager to create a new custom installer with specific settings.

File - Devolutions Account - Custom Installer Manager

3. Click on New Package.

Custom Installer Manager - New Pack age

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 55

4. Select the application version, enter a name for your package and click on Create. You can
either create a new configuration or use an existing Remote Desktop Manager Installer (*.rdi)
file. For more information, please consult our Installer File Generator topic.

Installation Pack age Creation

When choosing to create a new configuration, select what to include in the custom installer, then
click on Generate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

56 | Remote Desktop Manager

Installer File Generator

5. Once the installation package has been created, the request is submitted to our online
service. A confirmation dialog window appears if successful.

New pack age successfully created

6. The Custom Installer Manager will display an hourglass icon indicating that the package is
being processed. When the package has been successfully generated, the Custom Installer
Manager will display a green check mark . Note that this process can take a while.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 57

Custom Installer Manager

setup.exe is in fact what is called a bootstrapper, it will ensure the installer runs
with the required privileges. Use the msi only if you are sure the installer will run
with all rights and process elevation.

DOWNLOADING AN INSTALLATION PACKAGE

Upon completion you will receive a confirmation email.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

58 | Remote Desktop Manager

Email Confirmation - Custom Installer Processed

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 59

From here, there are two ways of downloading the package. You can download it directly from
the Custom Installer Manager, or you can log in to the Devolutions Account you created the
installer with.

DOWNLOAD WITH THE CUSTOM INSTALLER MANAGER

From the Custom Installer Manager, click on Download EXE or Download MSI.

Custom Installer Manager - Download Pack age

DOWNLOAD FROM THE DEVOLUTIONS CUSTOMER PORTAL

From the Devolutions Customer Portal you created the custom installer with, navigate to the
Custom Installer section. Click on .msi or .exe to download the custom installer on your
computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

60 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Customer Portal - Download Custom Installer Pack age

3.1.4 For All Users

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager's current installation package does require to install with elevated
privileges, as well as making the application available to all users of the computer where you are
installing. That being said, feedback has shown that it does complete successfully across a wide
spectrum of our community's environments. Follow this procedure to reduce deployment issues
in the future.

PROCEDURE

This procedure registers all file types associations, this mean that rdp files will
from now on be opened with Remote Desktop Manager. If you wish to avoid
this, install manually using the Custom mode, and choose every option but that
rdp association.

1. Copy the installer to a folder available for all users of the workstation. e.g. c:\Deploy

2. Open an Elevated Command prompt (right click on the shortcut and select Run as
administrator).

3. Run the following command, adapted for the version that you are installing
msiexec /i Setup.{APPNAME}.{VERSION}.msi /Quiet /Passive INSTALLMODE=Complete

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 61

We also recommend disabling the auto-update check as all further installations or upgrades
should be performed by an administrator AND using elevated privileges.

If you wish to proceed with upgrades from within Remote Desktop Manager, it must have been
started using Run as administrator.

NOTES

The Microsoft installer technology copies the installer package under a new randomized name
as well as register it in a database. Our experience shows that this copy has a way of
disappearing and that the database becomes corrupted. We often have to direct our community
to use https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/mats/program_install_and_uninstall
The Quiet and Passive parameters are just to ensure that you do not have to make a choice during the installation.
We found that this reduces the risk of errors.

3.1.5 Portable (USB)

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager can be used as a portable application. Here are the steps required
to ensure that it runs correctly:

The portable installation mode allows you to run multiple versions of Remote
Desktop Manager, using various license serials and configurations.

This procedure is not recommended for running Remote Desktop Manager from
a network shared by multiple users. This would prevent identifying individual users
and there would be conflicts with user preferences.

Remote Desktop Manager stores the offline cache in your Windows profile by
default. If you are using an Advanced Data Source and plan to use the offline
mode, use the Options in the Advanced category to have the offline cached
stored in the application folder instead.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

62 | Remote Desktop Manager

The following steps ensures true portability and ease of maintenance. It can easily
be adapted to your liking.

PROCEDURE

1. Download the "Zip" package of Remote Desktop Manager.

Zip File Download

2. Create a RemoteDesktopManager folder on your portable device.

3. In the installation folder created in step 2, create two folders:

3.1. A config folder.

3.2. A data folder.

3.3. A tools folder (optional, only if you intend to use external tools like Filezilla).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 63

4. Unzip Remote Desktop Manager in the installation folder.

5. Create a text file named override.cfg in the installation folder. Set the content of the file to .
\config

6. Open Remote Desktop Manager and display the data sources window using File – Data
sources.

7. Create a new data source of a type that can be stored on your portable device. i.e. SQLite,
XML, etc.

8. Configure the data source using a relative path so it is stored on the portable device: .
\Data\Connections.db

SQLite Data Source

10. Configure your portable applications (FileZilla, UltraVNC, etc.) in the same manner (relative
to the installation folder). Click on Configure Installation Path to select your preferred portable
application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

64 | Remote Desktop Manager

Options - Path - Configure Installation Path

Filezilla Installation Path

11.You can now delete the pre-existing Local data source that had been created automatically.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 65

3.1.6 Previous Version

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes you may need an older version installer package. If the version wasn't an official
release or had been replaced by an ulterior build, you may not always see it on your download
page.

PROCEDURE

All our builds are available and it's easy to recreate the download link by simply changing the
version number from other download links.

For example, downloading Remote Desktop Manager 11.0.12.0 can be done using this
hyperlink: http://cdn.devolutions.net/download/Setup.RemoteDesktopManager.11.0.12.0.exe

You can simply copy the link to your address bar, and replace the version number by the one you
are looking for. Ex:
http://cdn.devolutions.net/download/Setup.RemoteDesktopManager.11.0.8.0.exe

You can download the needed version from one of the links in the sections below as well.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ENTERPRISE EDITION .EXE

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ENTERPRISE EDITION MSI PACKAGE

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ENTERPRISE EDITION ZIP FILE

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FREE EDITION .EXE

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FREE EDITION .MSI PACKAGE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

66 | Remote Desktop Manager

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FREE EDITION ZIP FILE

3.1.7 Registration

DESCRIPTION

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ENTERPRISE EDITION

Please refer to the Enterprise Edition topic to properly register your version. If you decide not to
register at the end of the 30 days trial, your data will not be altered or erased, and you will have
full access to it once you provide a valid license serial.

REQUEST A TRIAL

It is possible to request a 30 days trial to try Remote Desktop Manager - Enterprise Edition with
all its features. Form more information, please consult the Trial Request Topic.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FREE EDITION

Remote Desktop Manager Free Edition is similar to the Enterprise edition. Remote Desktop
Manager Free Edition must be registered following the 30 days trial period to ensure continued
use. Registration is free, please refer to the Free Edition topic.

DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD SERVER

Consult Create Devolutions Password Server Instance to register a new Devolutions Password
Server instance.

If you want to activate your renewal license key, consult How To Activate Your Renewal
Subscription for Devolutions Password Server.

DEVOLUTIONS ONLINE DATABASE

Please consult Online Database Registration to register a new Devolutions Online Database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 67

3.1.7.1 Enterprise Edition

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager can be registered by manually providing a license serial or with a
license serial stored in a data source.

It is possible to request a trial to try Remote Desktop Manager for 30 days. If

you decide not to register the application with an Enterprise Edition license
serial at the end of the 30 days period, your data will not be altered or erased,
and you will have full access to it once you provide a license serial.

MANUAL REGISTRATION

To register your Remote Desktop Manager - Enterprise Edition, open Help – Register
Product.

Help - Register Product

License serials are delivered by email. Locate the email containing the Remote Desktop
Manager license serial.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

68 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions License Serial Email

Enter the username, email, and serial number, then click OK.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 69

Register Enterprise Edition

REGISTRATION FROM THE DATA SOURCE

When the license serial is stored in the Data Source Settings (System Settings) of an Advanced
Data Source, there is no need to register Remote Desktop Manager as the license serial is
retrieved directly from it. When launching the application for the first time, simply add the data
source containing the serial.

FOR ADMINISTRATORS

To add a license serial, navigate to Administration - Licenses.

Administration - Licenses

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

70 | Remote Desktop Manager

In Licenses, click on Add License. Enter the license serial and click OK.

User and Security Management - Add License

3.1.7.2 Free Edition

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager Free Edition requires a free registration after 30 days to be able to
continue the use of the application.

The Register the Application window will display at each Remote Desktop Manager launch
until you have registered the product license. It shows the number of remaining days and your
registration choice.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 71

Register the Application

USE REGISTRATION FROM DEVOLUTIONS ACCOUNT

Every owner of a Devolutions Account is assigned a free license serial for Remote Desktop
Manager in their Customer Portal.

To get a Devolutions Account, click on Create a Free Account in the register window.

To register your application follow these steps:

1. Select Use registration from Devolutions Account.

2. Click Ok.

3. Fill in your credentials and Continue.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

72 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Account Login

The license serial will be retrieved automatically.

REGISTER THE FREE EDITION WITHOUT AN INTERNET CONNECTION

In the event that you need to register the application without an internet connection, the
information must be entered manually. You will need the license serial from your Customer
Portal.

Log in to Customer Portal and click on My Serials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 73

Customer Portal - My Serials

Copy the license serial for the Free Remote Desktop Manager Edition.

Free Product Licenses

Paste the license serial, enter an email address and press Ok.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

74 | Remote Desktop Manager

3.1.7.3 Register from Devolutions Portal

DESCRIPTION

It is possible to register the product with a license serial stored in a Devolutions Customer
Portal.

When creating a Devolutions Account a free license serial is provided for the free edition of
Remote Desktop Manager. License serials purchased for the enterprise edition can be stored in
the My Serials section of the Devolutions Customer Portal.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 75

Devolutions Customer Portal - My Serials

1. To register the product, navigate to Help – Register Product.

2. In the Select your Application Edition window, select Use registration from Devolutions
Account.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

76 | Remote Desktop Manager

Select the Registration

3. Enter the credentials of the Devolutions Account, then click Connect.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 77

Prompt for Devolutions Account credentials

3.1.7.4 Trial Request

DESCRIPTION

When launching Remote Desktop Manager for the first time, the application registration window
is displayed. If you are not ready to buy Remote Desktop Manager, you must request a trial to
use the application. The trial is valid for 30 days, after which the application cannot be used
unless a valid Enterprise Edition license serial is provided.

Navigate to Help – Register Product, click on Request Trial, and fill in the form.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

78 | Remote Desktop Manager

Trial request for Remote Desk top Manager

When the trial has been requested, an email containing the trial license serial is sent to the
address provided in the form above.

Register Enterprise Edition Trial

3.1.8 Remote Desktop Services

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 79

Remote Desktop Manager has an excellent support for running under a Remote Desktop
Services environment. A master configuration file can be created to distribute settings for all new
users of the system or even to update existing user's configuration.

Please ensure that you have followed Microsoft's recommendation on how to

set up an RDS environment. It will severally impact the performance if default
Windows installations are performed.

https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/administration/performance-
tuning/role/remote-desktop/session-hosts

Each user must have a unique application data folder (Roaming profiles or similar
technologies). Remote Desktop Manager saves some user preferences to the
local configuration file. The folder can be wiped out whenever the user logs out of
the Windows Session, but it must be accessible for the duration of Remote
Desktop Manager execution.

The Devolutions Web Login (DWL) was created for a normal desktop
environment. It uses Inter-process communication (IPC) with the client
application. Using it on a remote desktop server introduces a level of risk that
may be unacceptable for corporate users.

If you insist on using it, it is critical that each user is assigned a distinct port and
that port be kept secret. An application key must be set as well. The first client
application that starts will be able to use the port exclusively. ALL Devolutions
Web Login calling on that port will get the responses, unless an application
key is set.

In summary, safe usage of DWL requires a manual configuration of both RDM

and DWL on each user profiles.

PROCEDURE

1. Install by following the procedure For All Users. This ensures that the Microsoft Installer
Database does contain all of the needed information for all user profiles of the host.

2. After installing Remote Desktop Manager, configure your preferences. We recommend going
through all the configuration options to find the set of options that you wish to distribute. The
data sources deserve special interest since it is much better when they are configured by an
administrator. You may even take the opportunity to lock the data sources to protect against
any modification by the users. Please refer to Lock Data Source for more information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

80 | Remote Desktop Manager

When using Advanced Data Sources, for effective logging methods, proper
session security and user-based features, it is CRITICAL that each user has their
own account to authenticate against the data source.

Redistributing a data source registration should follow one of the patterns below:

o The data source is configured to always ask the username and password;

o You are using integrated security against SQL Server;

o You use environment variables for the username, and require the password.
(we recommend %USERDOMAIN%\%USERNAME% or %USERDNSDOMAIN%\%USERNAME
%)

3. When Remote Desktop Manager is configured to your liking, use File – Options – Export
Options. This will allow you to choose exactly the data sources to include, as well as the
various categories of settings. Please refer to Export Options for further details. Save the file
with the name default.cfg

Do not check the options to include Devolutions Account Credentials as well

as any data source that contains saved credentials while also enabling Include
data source credentials.

4. Move that file in the installation folder of Remote Desktop Manager, if you have used the
default installation settings, it is under %ProgramFiles(x86)%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager.

WORKFLOW

NEW USERS

Whenever a new user creates a profile on the system, Remote Desktop Manager detects the
presence of the default.cfg file and uses it as a template to create the user's configuration file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 81

EXISTING USERS

A group policy exists to force the new configurations to be accepted

automatically.

If the user chooses to ignore the new configuration file when presented with the
dialog below, he will not be presented with the choice until the date/time of the
default.cfg file has changed.

If the main concern is deploying a new license key, and you are using of of the
Advanced Data Sources, you should rather use the Data source settings
(System Settings) - Serial feature.

Whenever Remote Desktop Manager is started and it detects a new default.cfg file, the
following dialog will appear:

New default.cfg detected

By selecting Use New Configuration (Lose Mine), the user's configuration is simply
overwritten. If you only wish to update the Remote Desktop Manager license key after a renewal,
choose Retrieve New Registration Only.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

82 | Remote Desktop Manager

3.2 Database Upgrade

DESCRIPTION

This topic applies to installations with data sources that are using a database as their data
store.

Some Remote Desktop Manager releases must alter the database structure. These are
performed automatically for you but it is best practice to perform a backup of your data source
beforehand. Additionally, If you are in a team environment you must be the sole user
connected to the database during the upgrade.

The user performing the update must have administrative privileges on the
underlying database. (SYSDBA or DB_OWNER).

Perform a database backup and ensure that you can quickly perform a restore
if required.

If your organization allows for a read/write offline cache, ensure that all of your
users have merged their offline edits.

STEPS

Follow these steps for a successful version update:

1. Ensure you are the sole user of the database during the upgrade process. If you
environment allows for offline use, have your team switch to the offline mode; or have them
switch to another data source.

2. Back up your database using the database tools.

3. Install the desired version of Remote Desktop Manager, using the Portable (USB)
deployment model may be desirable if you are doing this on your personal workstation.

4. Open Remote Desktop Manager while logged on as a user with administrative rights. You
must also be SYSDBA or DB_OWNER.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 83

5. You may be prompted with an upgrade message when your data source is accessed. If
so accept the upgrade.
or
Using File – Data sources, locate your data source to upgrade and open its property
window. Switch to the Upgrade tab, then click on Update Database

6. Wait for a confirmation dialog.

7. Close the dialog.

8. Ensure your Remote Desktop Manager application is currently using that data source.

9. Press CTRL-F5 to force a full refresh.

10. Validate the content and perform a check of the technologies that are critical in your
environment.

11. Update the client software on all workstations.

3.3 Uninstall

INSTRUCTIONS

Remote Desktop Manager doesn't install anything in the Windows System directory. The only
registry settings created are for the auto-run functionality and the installation path. As a result,
Remote Desktop Manager can be uninstalled easily.

You can run the uninstaller if it was installed with the default setup file or delete the installation
folder directly if it was installed from the binaries.

The application configuration files are saved in "% LocalAppData%

\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager" or "% AppData%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager" by default. It's possible that you may want to delete
this folder for a complete uninstall.

Please note that if you are using a local data source like SQLite or XML, your
data source may be saved in the configuration folder. Perform a backup of the
data source prior to the deletion of the folder.

3.4 Update

The Update feature prompts the user to update to a newer version of the application and
displays the release notes. The user's choice for the previous update is shown as selected.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

84 | Remote Desktop Manager

Update

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Remind me later Remind to update the next time the application is opened.

Skip this version Do not update the application with this version.

Download this version Download the version and wait for the application to be
and install when the closed before installing.
application is closed

Download installer using Download the installer externally using your default web
your default browser browser.

Download this version Immediately download the new version and install it.
and install now

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

User Interface
Part IV
86 | Remote Desktop Manager

4 User Interface

4.1 Main Screen

Illustrated below is the default Remote Desktop Manager main screen. Go to File – Options –
User Interface to change the current style. We have various settings for you to customize your
experience, such as different themes, shortcuts and more!

Overview of the default user interface

MENU USER INTERFACE STYLE

With the Menu user interface style, the Ribbon is been replaced by a standard menu, and the
Quick Access toolbar is not present. This setting can be found in File – Options – User
Interface – Ribbon Interface.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 87

Menu user interface style

4.2 Style

Remote Desktop Manager supports different User Interface Styles (sometimes known as skins).
These greatly influence the visual aspect of the User Interface as well as its mode of operation.
Three styles currently exist:

· Ribbon

· Menu

CONFIGURATION

To select the User Interface style you must go in File – Options – User Interface and modify
the Ribbon interface.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

88 | Remote Desktop Manager

Options - User Interface

EXISTING STYLES

RIBBON

The latest style sports a ribbon. Icons and text makes it easy to explore features.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 89

Ribbon User Interface

Previous generation style, it holds a standard menu to invoke commands.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

90 | Remote Desktop Manager

Default User Interface

CUSTOMIZING YOUR UI

Customizable styles (Default Ribbon and Default Menu) have dockable areas that can be
rearranged to your liking. Simply left-clicking then dragging the sub-components will result in
drop zones appearing. This allows you to drop the sub component where you choose, even
outside of the main form if you'd like.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 91

4.3 Theme

The themes will modify the color and shade of Remote Desktop Manager.

User Interface - Theme

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

92 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Default - Light Use the default theme, which is the Light theme.

Legacy Use the old look of Remote Desktop Manager (version 7 of RDM)

Light Use a clear theme with tones of white, gray, and blue.

Dark Use a dark theme with tone of gray and black.

Black Use the darkest theme, mainly with tones of black.

4.4 Top Pane

The Top Pane contains the Quick Access Toolbar and the Ribbon / Menu.

Remote Desk top Manager top pane

It can be hidden to maximize the work area.

Hide the top pane completely

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 93

Hide the ribbon

If you end up confused by your modified settings and would like to reset it to its original layout,
navigate to the Windows tab and select Reset Layout.

Windows – Reset layout

4.4.1 Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access Toolbar, which is found at the top of the application, It is composed of
multiple parts:

· System menu icon.

· Favorite commands.

· Quick Connect control.

· Lock command.

Quick Access Toolbar

Quick Access Toolbar buttons are flagged locally on the current machine by
the current user. These local buttons are saved in a file named
RemoteDesktopManager.qtb. By default, this file is located in % localappdata
% \Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

94 | Remote Desktop Manager

FAVORITE COMMANDS

Commands contained in the ribbon can be added in the quick access toolbar. These are the
favorite commands. To add a command to the quick access toolbar, right-click any icon in the
ribbon the select Add.

Favorite Commands

COMM DESCRIPTION
AND

Create a new entry in your current data source.

Open the properties window of your selected entry.

Refresh your data source.

Open the filter dialog window to allow you to do a quick search.

Right-Click on any command to display the contextual menu. To remove an item from the quick
access toolbar, right-click on the item and select Remove. To add an item to the quick access
toolbar, right-click an item in the ribbon and select Add. Use this to customize your workspace
with your preferences.

QUICK CONNECT CONTROL

Please refer to Quick Connect for a detailed description.

LOCK APPLICATION COMMAND

This command will minimize the application. When you attempt to restore it you will be prompted
for the password. Applies only to data sources protected by a password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 95

4.5 Navigation Pane

DESCRIPTION

The Navigation Pane is one of the main components of Remote Desktop Manager user
interface. It lists all the available entries in the current data source, and allows to switch to
another data source or Vault.

Navigation Pane

ELEMENT DESCRIPTION

Data source Allows to switch to another configured data source.

selector

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

96 | Remote Desktop Manager

ELEMENT DESCRIPTION

Entry list Displays the content of the current data source, depending on the
selected tab. It allows to select entries and perform action on them.

Vault selector Allows to switch to another configured Vault in the data source.

Tabs Allows to switch to different views of the entry list, such as the
Favorite entries or the Opened sessions.

COLUMN CHOOSER

Choose the columns to display in the tree view. Right-clicking on the column name in the
Navigation Pane and select Column Chooser.

Navigation Pane – Column Chooser

For more information on each tab, please consult the following topics:
· Vault
· Private Vault

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 97

· Opened Sessions
· Favorite Entries
· Most Recently Used Entries

4.5.1 Opened Sessions

DESCRIPTION

The Opened Sessions tab shows currently running sessions by type, and for the local machine
only. You can give the focus to an opened session by double-clicking it from the list. All of the
embedded sessions are listed, and the external sessions will appear if Remote Desktop
Manager is able to discover the specific type of session.

LOCAL SESSIONS

Local Opened Sessions

GLOBAL SESSIONS

With the SQL Server and Devolutions Online Database data sources, you can monitor currently
running sessions, provided that they have been opened within Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

98 | Remote Desktop Manager

Global Opened Sessions

For many reasons beyond our control, it's possible for a session to be terminated without
Remote Desktop Manager knowing that this has taken place. This can happen, for example, if
Remote Desktop Manager isn't running when another application ends. As a result, any
terminated session will remain listed in the log. You may manually mark it as closed via the
contextual menu by selecting Flag as Closed.

To review a detailed log, double click on a session entry.

HIDDEN SESSIONS

Some sessions, like SSH Port Forward, can be hidden from the dashboard when the
connection is established. When these sessions are hidden, they are not displayed in the Local
Sessions. Select Hidden Sessions from the combo box above the entry list to display hidden
sessions only.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 99

Local Sessions Versus Hidden Sessions

VPN GROUPS

Sessions can be configured to use a VPN Group. When multiple session are using the same
VPN group, it will appear in this section with the count of opened connections using this VPN
group.

VPN Groups

NOTES

· Remote Desktop Manager tries to detect opened sessions even if they weren't launched from
the application. It uses the name of the process to accomplish this task.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

100 | Remote Desktop Manager

· VPN sessions do not appear in the list.

4.5.2 Favorite Entries

DESCRIPTION

The Favorites tab contains entries flagged as favorite by the current user. Favorites are not
shared and they roam with the user profile.

This is useful when the number of managed entries becomes too great or when a strict directory
structure must be maintained.

The favorites feature has been completely reorganized in beta version 12.9.0.0.
To revert to the legacy interface, navigate to File – Options – User Interface –
Favorites, then enable the Use legacy favorite UI option.

New and Legacy favorite UI

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 101

When using the legacy favorite interface, the favorites view can be personalized the same way
as the Vault. Click on to select a preferred View.

FLAG AN ENTRY AS FAVORITE

Right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane, then select Favorite.

Flag an entry as favorite

The same command is located in the ribbon Home tab in the Miscellaneous section.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

102 | Remote Desktop Manager

Home – Miscellaneous – Favorite

ORGANIZE THE FAVORITES

Favorites does not necessarily replicate the folder structure of the Vault. Add folders in the
favorite view to organize your favorite entries, or enable the legacy favorite interface.

Add folders to organize favorites

ICON OVERLAY

If desired, an icon overlay can be displayed in the Vault over favorite entries. To display the
icon overlay, navigate to File – Options – User Interface – Favorites, then enable the Show
favorite icon in connection list option.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 103

4.5.3 Most Recently Used Entries

DESCRIPTION

This tab show the most recently used sessions on the local computer.

Most Recently Used Entries

The most recently used entries view can be personalized the same way as the tree view. Click
on the button to select your preferred view.

To delete the most recently used entries history, select Clear Most Recently Used Entries...

By default, 10 items will be kept in the most recently used entries history. This setting can be
changed in File - Options - General - Recent.
4.6 Content Area

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

104 | Remote Desktop Manager

The content area contains the various dashboards to manage RDM, as well as embedded
sessions. There is a single dashboard active at a time, depending on the currently selected
node in the Navigation Pane.

The options change depending on the entry:

· Sessions.

· Information Entries.

· Folders.

· Credentials.

· Macros/Scripts/Tools.

4.6.1 Embedded Sessions

DESCRIPTION

The Embedded (tabbed) display mode allows you to open multiple sessions as tabs withing
Remote Desktop Manager, similar to the tabs in your standard web browser. Embedded
sessions are one of the 3 available display modes, the other 2 being External and Undocked.

Display Mode Settings

SPLIT WINDOWS

Within a Remote Desktop Manager embedded session is the option to display multiple tabbed
windows simultaneously. As illustrated below, select and hold down on a tab and drag it towards

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 105

the center of the screen to access the four-sided directional control. Aim the directional control to
anchor the tab to the top, bottom, left or right of the adjacent tab.

Split Window - Drag And Drop

Below is an example of a side-by-side split window.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

106 | Remote Desktop Manager

Split Window - Side-By-Side

Below is an example of a top-down split window.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 107

4.6.2 Dashboard

DESCRIPTION

The Dashboard displays commands and information related to the selected entry. The
dashboard contents depend on the type of the selected entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

108 | Remote Desktop Manager

Dashboard for credential entry

The different tabs available in the dashboard:

· Actions - Add special Open actions to dashboard, similar to Open Session or Properties in the
contextual menu. Configure in File – Options – User Interface
· Overview
· Documentation
· Macros/Scripts/Tools
· Management Tools: Configure the Hyper-V, VMware, XenServer Dashboard before using the dashboard.
· Information
· Sub Connections
· Attachments
· Logs
· Recordings

The tabs can be hidden if they are not necessary for a user.

Simply right-click any tab, then select an item to toggle the visibility of its
relative tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 109

4.6.3 Wake-on-LAN

DESCRIPTION

Wake-on-LAN is an Ethernet computer networking standard, which allows a computer to be

turned on or woken up by a network message. This is an OS-agnostic feature that works by
broadcasting a specially crafted “magic” packet at the data link layer. The target computer sits in
a low-power state with only its network card switched on, and when it receives the magic packet,
the network card “wakes up” the computer, powering it on and booting it up.

Wake-on-LAN is supported in the Enterprise edition of Remote Desktop Manager. Plus, the
destination motherboard must support it, and it must be enabled. The computer must also be in
the local area network (LAN) and not connected in a VPN.

An important thing to note is that Wake-on-LAN operates below the IP level. This means that the
sending machine needs to be on the LAN, so we cannot send them over remote IP-based
connections, such as over SSH or VPN. WOL broadcasts packets to the target computer over
UDP. You can configure which port it uses, the default is 9. If you want to wake up a machine on
a different subnet, your router must forward UDP port 9, or whatever you change the port
assignment to. Most users do not have to configure their router or worry about this.

ENABLING WAKE-ON-LAN

The first step is to check that your computer supports Wake-on-LAN. There’s a few things to
check:

· Your network card must support Wake-on-LAN

· Your power supply must support Wake-on-LAN

· Wake-on-LAN must be enabled in BIOS

· Your router must be configured to forward broadcast packets

· Your OS must be configured to enable Wake-on-LAN

CONFIGURE REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

110 | Remote Desktop Manager

You must add a valid MAC address (Media Access Control address) in the session's
configuration. The input field can be found in the Information tab and in the Computer child tab.
The field name is MAC.

Session configuration - Wak e-on-LAN

You can use the Discover button to automatically determine the MAC address. If this is
unsuccessful, you will need to enter it manually.

ABOUT THE MAC ADDRESS DISCOVERY

The discovery process will initially attempt using the ARP protocol. This is fast and does not
require authentication, but there are requirements on the network aspect that may not be met. If
ARP was not successful, another attempt is made using WMI. This is slower and requires
authentication. RDM will use the credentials as configured in entry properties, or the credentials
entered in the session tools tab (custom credentials or Credential repository).

USE WAKE-ON-LAN

If the settings are correctly configured, you can invoke the Wake-on-LAN from the session's
context menu, which can be found in the Macros/Scripts/Tools - Wake-on-LAN menu.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 111

Session tools - Wak e-on-LAN

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

112 | Remote Desktop Manager

4.7 Panes (Footer)

DESCRIPTION

Although the panes are by default in the footer, most tabbed windows can be moved around and
docked to your liking. That applies to the Default (Ribbon) or Default (Menu) styles.

Use the View – Footer commands from the ribbon to control the visibility of individual panes.

Footer Area

DOCKED FOOTER

Upon first use, the footer panes are undocked by default. You can dock them to a single panel
with a simple drag & drop. Just drag a pane into another one, then drop the it in the center of the
directional control.

Here, we drop the Details pane to make it tabbed with the Description pane.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 113

Dock a footer pane into another

You can use the same directional control to dock the footer panes into the main window.

Here is a personalized setup of the footer panes.

Footer panes dock ed in the main window

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

114 | Remote Desktop Manager

4.7.1 Attachments

DESCRIPTION

Files are attached to an entry and are stored directly in the database.

To enable the attachment pane, navigate to View – Footer in the ribbon, then select
Attachments.

View – Footer – Attachments

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

The files in attachment are not available in offline mode.

For architectural reasons, the documents stored in our Advanced Data Sources
are NOT protected from deletion. Once they are deleted, they cannot be
restored. Please keep a safe copy of all documents in another storage device.
Support for this feature will be added in a coming update to our products.

Attachment list

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 115

The attachment type and size are limited only by your bandwidth and the data source. You can
also view a saved attachment from:
· the session context menu;
· the session properties; or
· directly on the dashboard.

The refresh button allows you to update directly the selected document. Use it to save your local
modifications after an edit.

ACTIONS

Use the toolbar above the attachment list to manage the selected attachment.

Attachment toolbar

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Add attachment Select a local file to add.

Edit attachment Edit the selected attachment.

Update document Update the selected attachment.

View attachment Open the selected attachment.

Save attachment Save the attachment on a local drive.

as...

Delete attachment Delete the selected attachment.

Details Display details about the selected attachment, above the

attachment list.

Refresh Refresh the attachment list.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

116 | Remote Desktop Manager

4.8 Status Bar

The status bar rests at the bottom of the application. It is composed of multiple parts

· Search / Filter.

· Remote Desktop Manager version label.

· The Online / Offline toggle.

· Grab input toggle.

Status bar

SEARCH / FILTER

Please consult the Search/Filter for detailed explanations.

ONLINE / OFFLINE TOGGLE

This feature is indicated by the green globe between the version label and the Grab input toggle.
Clicking it will change your connection between offline and online (for RDM only). You can tell
which connection state you are currently using by the color of the globe. Green is online and
orange is offline.

GRAB INPUT TOGGLE

Please consult Grab Input for detailed explanations.

4.8.1 Search/Filter

It is possible to apply a filter in the Navigation Pane tree view by typing some characters in the
filter box. The filter is applied using the specified settings in the application File – Options –
User Interface – Filter.

ELLIPSIS BUTTON

Select the ellipsis button to display the options.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 117

Ellipsis button

The filter expression is matched against fields as selected in the filter options such as:

· Search multiple or all Vaults at once.

· Field Options (Include Folder, Host, Username, etc.).

· General Information (Domain, IP, etc.).

· Contact Information (Name, Email, Phone number, etc.).

· Hardware Information (Serial number, Manufacturer, etc.).

It's possible to exclude results by choosing to display entries that match certain criteria:

· Session types (credentials, script tools, VPN, etc.)

· If the session is marked as a Favorites

In Navigation options, you can limit the search parameters to specific entry types. Such as
Sessions, Data Entries, etc.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

118 | Remote Desktop Manager

Search Types

The Search Options offers the chance to customize your search, such as including shortcuts or
favorites, making it case sensitive, and more!

Search Options

KEYBOARD SHORTCUT

Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+F to quickly have access to the Search / Filter control. This
can be disabled in File - Options - User Interface - Keyboard.

You can set the focus back on the Navigation Pane by using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+L, this
also can be disabled in the options.

BOOLEAN FILTER

Here a few implementation notes for the Boolean filter:

· We use the C# nomenclature (&& for AND, || for OR)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 119

· Evaluated left-to-right

· No parentheses matching

· Double-quotes (") are not required or removed, they are part of the text filter, do not use them
unless you are looking for a double-quote.

· Leading/trailing white-spaces are trimmed

EXAMPLES (THIS WILL WORK)

· Boise && Laptop

· Boise&&Laptop

· Boise && Laptop

· Baton Rouge || Boise && Laptop

· Laptop && Baton Rouge

EXAMPLES (THIS WILL NOT WORK AS EXPECTED)

· Laptop && "Baton Rouge"

- Will work but filter for the string "Baton Rouge" and not the string Baton Rouge

· Laptop && (Baton Rouge || Boise)

- Will work but filter for Laptop and the string (Baton Rouge || Boise)
4.8.2 Grab Input

DESCRIPTION

The grab keyboard input is used to capture the keyboard shortcuts when a session is running.
It can be disabled momentarily to ensure that the shortcut is sent to the running session.

Ctrl+F is a shortcut that often interferes. It is used to focus Remote Desktop Manager's
search/filter toolbar. However, it is almost always present in applications in the remote session
and when you use the shortcut, Remote Desktop Manager sets the focus in the search/filter
toolbar instead. This conflict can be avoided by disabling the feature.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

120 | Remote Desktop Manager

Grab k eyboard input

4.9 Tray Icon

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows the user to control the application from the Windows system
tray. You can also customize its content.

TRAY ICON CONTEXT MENU

Right-click on the Windows tray menu bar to access the context menu. You can launch sessions,
change data source, use the Quick Connect feature, and more.

Tray Icon Context Menu

OPTION DESCRIPTION
Sessions List Displays the sessions from the current data source. Sessions are listed by default. It is
possible to show only those marked as favorites.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 121

OPTION DESCRIPTION
Refreshes the data source.
Refresh
Lists all the currently open sessions.
Opened
Sessions
Recent Lists the Most Recently Used Entries.

Play List Allows the user to launch a Play List from the tray icon.

Data Sources Lists the available Data sources and allows the user to switch from one to another. This
section appears only if enabled and more than one data source is configured.

Tools Lists all the configured tools.

Prompts for the Quick Connect dialog to open an add-hoc connection with a specific
Quick type, or a selected template.
Connect

Filter Launches the Search/Filter feature.

Maximize Restores the application to full screen.

Restore Restores the application from minimize.

Minimize Minimizes the application in the task bar.

Exit Closes the application.

TRAY ICON PREFERENCES

The application options contain many settings that allows for customizing the system tray icon
preferences. To change these, Navigate to File – Options – User Interface –
Trayicon/Taskbar.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Data Sources
Part V
Contents | 123

5 Data Sources

DESCRIPTION

The data sources are at the heart of Remote Desktop Manager, they are the container that holds
entries.

SETTINGS

A data source can be a local file or a database (either local or shared). Multiple data sources
can be managed at the same time as seen below.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

124 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Source

CREATE A DATA SOURCE

Please consult our Create a new data source topic for more information.

MULTIPLE DATA SOURCES

Multiple data sources can be configured, but there is only one active at a time.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 125

Switch from one data source to another by using the data source drop down list.

Select a Data Source

STARTUP DATA SOURCE

You may assign a data source to open automatically when Remote Desktop Manager starts.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

126 | Remote Desktop Manager

Startup Data Source

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use default data Select the data source to connect to when the application starts.
source

Last used data Connect to the last used data source.

source

Prompt for data Prompt the user to for a data source to connect to.
source

DATA SOURCE SETTINGS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)

Advanced Data Sources can manage a lot more settings related to the database and security.
Those settings are saved directly in the database. For more information, please consult the Data
Source Settings (System Settings) topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 127

5.1 2-Factor Authentication

DESCRIPTION

This feature is only available for the following data sources: Devolutions
Password Server, MariaDB, Microsoft Access, Microsoft SQL Azure, Microsoft
SQL Server, MySQL and SQLite.

Two-factor authentication identifies users by two different components: something that the user
knows (often a password) and something that the user possesses (e.g. a validation code sent to
a mobile device).

If one of the components is missing or supplied incorrectly, the user's identity is not established
with sufficient certainty and then access to the data source will remain blocked.

Remote Desktop Manager supports Google Authenticator, Yubikey, Duo and AuthAnvil.

HOW TO CONFIGURE TWO-FACTOR AUTHENTICATION

Example of how to configure 2FA with Google Authenticator

SETTINGS

1. Two factor authentication is set in the Data Source Configuration. You can set 2FA when
creating a new data source or edit an existing data source. To edit your data source, click File –
Data Sources. Click the pencil to edit the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

128 | Remote Desktop Manager

Edit - Data Source Configuration

2. To set 2FA on the data source, click the None hyperlink.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 129

Data Source Configuration

3. In the next window, click Change.

Two-Factor Configuration window

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

130 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. Choose the type of 2-Factor Authentication you wish to use.

Two-Factor Configuration window

4. Once you have selected your 2FA click Save to start the configuration.

To configure the 2FA you use, please see the topic about supported 2FA types:

· Google Authenticator

· Yubikey

· Duo

· AuthAnvil

5.1.1 Google Authenticator

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to use Google Authenticator to provide an additional
security layer when opening a data source.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 131

Before you start the configuration, make sure you have installed the Google
Authenticator application on a supported device.

1. Select Google Authenticator as your 2-Factor Authentication and click on Save.

Google Authenticator Configuration

2. Once you have installed the application, scan the QR code on your screen with the Google
Authenticator application to setup Remote Desktop Manager in Google Authenticator. When
Remote Desktop Manager is configured in Google Authenticator, enter the Validation code
provided by Google Authenticator in Remote Desktop Manager. Enter the Validation code and
then click on Validate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

132 | Remote Desktop Manager

Google Authenticator Setup

3. Relaunch Remote Desktop Manager and select the protected data source to be prompted for
the Google Authenticator code.

Google Authenticator Validation

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 133

Google Authenticator generates a new validation code every 30 seconds. Please

consult your device application documentation for more details.

5.1.2 Yubikey

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to use a Yubikey to provide an additional security layer
when opening a data source.

SETTINGS

Before you start the configuration, make sure you have a Yubikey in your
possession.

1. Select Yubikey as your 2-Factor Authentication and click on Save.

Yubik ey Configuration

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

134 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Insert the Yubikey into a USB port of your computer and hold the gold button on the Yubikey to
have the code filled in the field, then click on Save.

Yubik ey Authentication

3. Relaunch Remote Desktop Manager and select your protected data source to be prompted
for a Yubikey code.

Yubik ey Application login

5.1.3 Duo

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to configure a Duo Authentication to provide an additional
security layer when opening a data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 135

SETTINGS

Before you start the configuration, make sure you have created yourself a Duo
account and also have installed the Duo application on your compatible device.

There is three methods to use with Duo: by land line, by text message or by using their
application.

1. In your Duo account you will need to protect the application Web SDK.

Web SDK application

2. In Remote Desktop Manager select Duo as your Two factor authentication and click on Duo –
General Settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

136 | Remote Desktop Manager

2-Factor Configuration

3. All the information necessary to fill in the Duo Settings fields will be generated by your Duo
account.

Duo Account - Web SDK

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 137

4. Copy and paste all the information and click on Check to validate the information.

Duo Settings

5. Click on Save to authenticate yourself with your Duo account that has just been activated.

Duo Confiugration - Save settings

6. If you have more than one device connected to your Duo account, select the device you wish
to use for your 2-Factor authentication.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

138 | Remote Desktop Manager

Duo setup - Choose a device

7. Select the method by which you would like to receive your Duo Passcode.

· Duo Push: The code is "pushed" to your Duo application.

· Send SMS: You will receive the code by SMS on your registered phone number.

· Phone: You will receive a phone call and a computer generated voice will dictate the code
to you.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 139

Duo Setup

Once you have completed all the steps, you will be prompted with the Duo Authentication every
time you connect to your secured data source.
5.1.4 AuthAnvil

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to use AuthAnvil Authenticator to provide an additional
security layer when opening a data source.

SETTINGS

Before you start the configuration in Remote Desktop Manager, make sure you
have created and configured your AuthAnvil account. For more information please
consult https://authanvil.com/features/two-factor-authentication.

1. Select AuthAnvil in Remote Desktop Manager as your 2-Factor Authentication and click on
Save.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

140 | Remote Desktop Manager

AuthAnvil Configuration

2. Enter the information of your AuthAnvil account and click on Check to validate the entered
information.

AuthAnvil Settings

5.2 Caching

DESCRIPTION

The caching mode will determine how the client will refresh the content of the data source when
changes are detected. On large data sources caching is essential as it increases performance
significantly.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 141

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

If the cache is outdated, press CTRL + Refresh or CTRL + F5 to refresh the

local cache. This will force the application to retrieve the entire content of the data
source to recreate the cache.

SETTINGS

The Caching mode option can be access via the File – Data Sources – Edit Data Source –
Advanced tab of an Advanced Data Source.

Caching Mode

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disabled No client caching.

Intelligen Intelligent cache has the ability to handle many more sessions without
t experiencing performance degradation.

In the case of intelligent cache each modification performs a token update on

the server. When Remote Desktop Manager performs a refresh action it will
query the data source for any changes (delta) of changes to be applied client
side since it last checked the data source. The delta of the changes is then
sent to the application and applied locally.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

142 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

When first opening the data source Remote Desktop Manager will loaded the
session from the offline file then refresh to get the up-to date information.

LOCATION

The client cache is persisted to disk in %LocalAppData%

\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager\[GUID:DataSourceID]

There are three engines for the cache:

· SQLite (offline.db).
· MCDF (offline.mcdf).
· MCDF v2.0 (offline.mcdf2).

If using a version of Remote Desktop Manager prior to 11.2, the default engine will be the
SQLite, in that case the database is encrypted using a non-portable computed key hash.

If using version 11.2 or newer of Remote Desktop Manager the default cache engine will be the
Microsoft Compound Document Format (MCDF) files.

You can enhance the security of the offline file by setting the Enhanced security in
File – Options – Security – Offline Security.

Depending on the configuration of the Caching mode & the Offline mode the
offline file may still exist since the file servers as a dual purpose caching & offline
line support.

5.3 Create a data source

SETTINGS

1. Open the Data Source Configuration window by clicking the ellipsis button at the top of
the Navigation Pane.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 143

Open Data Source menu

2. Click the Add a New data source button.

Add a new Data Source

3. Select the type of data source to create.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

144 | Remote Desktop Manager

Select your Data Source type

4. Configure the connection settings. To validate the information, click the Test Server or Test
Connection (depending on the type of data source being creating).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 145

SQL Server - Connection Tab

5. Once created, select the new data source by selecting it from the data source drop down list
at the top of the Navigation Pane.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

146 | Remote Desktop Manager

Select your Data Source

5.4 Data Source Types

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager supports multiple types of data source. To start, decide which data
source you’ll be using.

Upon initial installation, you will be running from a local data source which is a
SQLite database.

DATA SOURCE TYPES

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

Devolution Remote Desktop Manager uses Pros:

s Online Devolutions Online Drive to store and

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 147

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

Drive synchronize your sessions. Access · Quick.

your sessions from anywhere using a
simple Internet connection. · Reliable.

· The service is free.

For more information, please consult

our Online Drive topic.
Cons:

· No possibility for sharing.

· No security management.

Devolution Remote Desktop Manager uses Pros:

s Password Devolutions Password Server to store
Server session information. · Quick.

· Reliable.

For more information, please consult · Secure.

our Devolutions Password Server
topic. · Supports all features, such as
attachments, connection log, Offline
Mode and User Management.

· Active Directory integration.

Cons

· Installation required.

Dropbox Remote Desktop Manager uses the Pros:

Dropbox API to retrieve the XML file
from the configured repository. · Can be shared in read-only mode.

· Backups (by Dropbox) are

automatic.
For more information, please consult
our Dropbox topic. · Storage infrastructure is free (if
within your free storage quota).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

148 | Remote Desktop Manager

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

Cons:

· No security management.

· There is a possibility for conflict or

data corruption to occur.

· Doesn't support all features, such

as attachments, connection logs
and User Management.

MariaDB Remote Desktop Manager uses Pros:

MariaDB to save and manage all
sessions. This is one of the available · Quick.
data source for a multi-user
environment. · Reliable.

· The database is free and can be

installed on Linux.
For more information, please consult
our MariaDB topic. · Supports all features, such as
attachments, connection log, Offline
mode and User Management.

Cons:

· MariaDB needs to be installed.

Microsoft Remote Desktop Manager uses the Pros:

SQL Azure Microsoft cloud platform to save and
manage all sessions. · Quick.

· Reliable.

For more information, please consult · Secure.

our SQL Azure topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 149

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

· Supports all features, such as

attachments, connection log, Offline
mode and User Management.

Cons:

· Microsoft Azure needs to be

configured.

Microsoft Remote Desktop Manager uses SQL Pros:

SQL Server Server to save and manage all
sessions. This is one of the available · Quick.
data source for a multi-user
environment. · Reliable.

· Secure.

For more information, please consult · Supports all features, such as

our SQL Server (MSSQL) topic. attachments, connection log, Offline
mode and User Management.

· SQL Server Express is free.

Cons:

· SQL Server must be installed.

MySQL Remote Desktop Manager uses a Pros:

MySQL database to save and manage
all sessions. This is one of the · Quick.
available data source for a multi-user
environment. · Reliable.

· The database is free and can be

installed on Linux.
For more information, please consult
our MySQL topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

150 | Remote Desktop Manager

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

· Supports all features, such as

attachments, connection log, Offline
mode and User Management.

Cons:

· MySQL needs to be installed.

SQLite Remote Desktop Manager uses a Pros:

SQLite database to store session
information. · Quick.

· Reliable.

For more information, please consult · The database is free.

our SQLite topic.
· Supports all features, such as
attachments & connection logs.

Cons:

· No possibility for sharing.

· No security management.

WebDAV Remote Desktop Manager uses an Pros:

HTTP connection to retrieve the XML
file on a WebDav server. · Can be shared in read-only mode.

· Easy to deploy online.

For more information. please consult

our WebDAV topic.
Cons:

· No security management.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 151

NAME DESCRIPTION PROS AND CONS

XML Remote Desktop Manager saves the Pros:

settings directly in a file with the XML
format. · Easy backup.

· Can be edited manually or by an

external system.
For more information, please consult
our XML topic. · Nothing to install.

Cons:

· No possibility of sharing.

· No security management.

· There is a possibility for conflict or

data corruption to occur.

· Doesn't support all features, such

as attachments, connection logs
and User Management.

5.4.1 Advanced Data Sources

DESCRIPTION

Advanced Data Sources are highly configurable data sources, typically running on an
advanced management system, such as a database management system or our own online
services.

Advanced Data Sources greatly increase the set of managing features available to
administrators, such as:
· Document uploads and Entry Attachments.
· Auditing and logging.
· Advanced security with User management and Role-based security system.
· Offline mode.
· Multi-Factor Authentication

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

152 | Remote Desktop Manager

For architectural reasons, the documents stored in our Advanced Data Sources
are NOT protected from deletions. Once they are deleted, they cannot be
restored. Please keep a safe copy of all documents in another storage device.
Support for this feature will be added in a coming update to our products.

Currently the Advanced Data Sources are:

· Devolutions Password Server.

· MariaDB.
· MySQL.
· Microsoft SQL Azure.
· Microsoft SQL Server (MSSQL).

5.4.1.1 Devolutions Online Database

DESCRIPTION

Please consult topic Online Database for information on this service.

The Role Management feature is not available in Devolutions Online Database.

Only the Security Group Management system is offered with this type of data
source.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 153

Devolutions Online Database - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Always ask password Always ask password when connecting to the data source.

Create a Free account Create a new Devolutions Account.

Database Name of the data base created online. You must use the ellipsis
button to select it from the list of online data sources available to
the name.

Database ID Unique Key to identify the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

154 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication to access your data source.

Test Credentials Test the credentials that you have configured to connect on
Remote Desktop Manager Online.

PRIVATE VAULT

Connect your Devolutions Online Database to a Private Vault stored in a Devolutions

Online Drive file (.dod), thus creating your own Private Vault containing entries and credentials
that no one else has access to.

For more information please see Private Vault.

Devolutions Online Database - Private Vault

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 155

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Devolutions Online Database.

Devolutions Online Database - VPN

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

156 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Online Database - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching mode Determine how the entries will be loaded from the data source.
See Caching topic for more information.

Ping online method Indicate the prefer ping online. Select between:

· None

· Web request

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Prompt for offline Every time you will connect to your data source, you will be
mode on startup prompted to use the data source in offline mode.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 157

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto go offline If the ping online method doesn't work it will automatically go
offline.

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. The
application still can be locked but the user is not prompted for
the data source password when unlocking the application.

5.4.1.2 Devolutions Passw ord Server

DESCRIPTION

Devolutions Password Server (DPS) allows to control access to privileged

accounts and manage sessions through a secure solution. For more information,
consult the product's web site here.

HIGHLIGHTS

· Highly secured server for your company.

· Shared connection and credentials with multiple users.

· Installed on-premises; can be deployed online.

· Support Windows authentication and Active Directory group integration.

· Optimized client and server side caching.

Devolutions Password Server supports Microsoft SQL Server and

Microsoft SQL Azure as a data store.

For more information, please consult these topics:

· Devolutions Password Server installation instructions

· Devolutions Password Server Security Checklist

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

158 | Remote Desktop Manager

CONFIGURE THE SERVER DATA SOURCE ON ALL YOUR CLIENT

MACHINES

Enter a name of the data source and the URL for the Host. Ensure you use the correct protocol if
SSL is required by the server (https).

Export the data source, then import the file in your client workstations as described Import/Export
Data Source.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Devolutions Password Server - General

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 159

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter a name for the data source.

Host Enter the URL of the DVLS instance.

Example: http://<hostname or IP
address>/<instance name>

Use Windows Use the same credentials are your current Windows user.
authentication

Use Office365 Use the same credentials as your current Office365 user.
authentication

Always prompt for Always ask for the username and password when connecting to
credentials the data source.

Username Enter the username to connect to the data source.

Password Enter the password to connect to the data source.

Always ask Always ask for the password when connecting to the data source.
password

Test Connection Test the connection with Devolutions Password Server to validate
the credentials.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

160 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Password Server - Settings

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Remote tools Select whether the Remote Tools will be accessed locally or
access mode through the host.

Manage Cache Manage the data source cache. On large data sources caching is
a must and will increase performance significantly. For more
information, please consult the Manage Cache topic.

PRIVATE VAULT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 161

Devolutions Password Server – Private Vault

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select the type of Private Vault to use. Select between:

· Default: use the default Private Vault, which is stored in the

database.

· None: disable the Private Vault for all users.

· Online Drive: use a Devolutions Online Drive file (*.dod) as a

Private Vault.

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Devolutions Password Server.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

162 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Password Server - VPN

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 163

Devolutions Password Server - Avanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching mode Determines how the entries will be reloaded in the data
source. For more information, please consult the Caching
topic.

Ping online method Indicate the preferred ping online method. Select between:
· None

· Web request

Popup license Determine how the application advises of the license

expiration expiration. Select between:
· All

· Only Administrator(s)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

164 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Disabled

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Prompt for offline mode Ask to use the data source in offline mode when the user
on startup connects to the data source.

Auto go offline Use the data source in offline mode when the ping method
does not respond.

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. The
application still can be locked but the user is not prompted for
the data source password when unlocking the application.

5.4.1.3 MariaDB

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager uses MariaDB as a drop-in replacement for MySQL. It

is only supported in the Enterprise edition.

For added security, you can enable SSL Encryption to communicate with your
instance of MariaDB Server.

Please follow directions on https://dev.mysql.com/doc/connector-

net/en/connector-net-6-10-connection-options.html.

HIGHLIGHTS

· The data can be shared on a MariaDB database installed on any Operating System
MySQL supports.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 165

· Full connection log and attachments support.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

MariaDB - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Host Name of the host (server name) where the data source will be stored.

Username Username used to access the host server.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

166 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Password used to access the host server.

Always Always prompts for the user to input a password when connecting to the data
ask source.
password

Allow Allows the user to change the username. This specific setting will save the
change currently type username (unlike similar features such as "Always prompt for
username credentials").

Schema Name of the schema (database) on the MySQL server.

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication to access your data source.

Test Host Test the connection with the host (server name) to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

Test Test the connection with the schema to validate if the proper information has
Schema been provided.

PRIVATE VAULT

Connect your MariaDB to a Private Vault stored in a Devolutions Online Drive file (.dod),
thus creating your own Private Vault containing entries and credentials that no one else has
access to.

For more information please see Private Vault.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 167

MariaDB - Private Vault

UPGRADE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

168 | Remote Desktop Manager

MariaDB - Upgrade Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Test Host Test the connection with the Host (server name) to validate if the
proper information has been provided.

Create Schema Create the schema (database) on the MariaDB server to use Remote
Desktop Manager.

Update Schema Update the schema (database) on the MariaDB server, if required, to
use Remote Desktop Manager.

Test Schema Test the connection with the schema (database) to validate if the
proper information has been provided.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 169

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Schema Send your schema (database) to the Devolutions Support team.
to Support

View Upgrade Prompts a window to provide information about the Upgrade Script.
Script

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your MariaDB.

MariaDB - VPN

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

170 | Remote Desktop Manager

MariaDB - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching Determine how the entries will be reloaded in the data source. See
mode Caching topic for more information.

Ping online Indicate the prefer ping online. Select between:

method
· None

· Port Scan

Connection Waiting time before a connection timeout.

timeout

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 171

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Command Waiting time before a command timeout.

timeout

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Prompt for Every time you will connect to your data source, you will be prompted to
offline mode use the data source in offline mode.
on startup

Auto go If the ping online method doesn’t work it will automatically go offline.
offline

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. You can still lock the
application but you won't be prompted for the database password if this
option is disabled.

More Directly edit the connection string values.

Settings

5.4.1.4 Microsoft SQL Azure

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

172 | Remote Desktop Manager

With the Microsoft SQL Azure data source, Remote Desktop Manager uses the
Microsoft cloud platform to save and manage entries.

The following features are also supported:

· Always on availability group

· Clustering

· Log shipping

· Database mirroring

MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR AZURE SQL DATABASE FOR RDM

Microsoft SQL Azure offers different service tier in their purchase model for DTUS.

We recommend at minimum a Standard tier package S0 for 5 users and more.

Visit their website for more information

HIGHLIGHTS

· Supports User Management with a superior security model.

· Supports Offline mode for when the server or network is unavailable.

· Supports entry logs and attachments.

· Used to create an online database. Get more information on Microsoft SQL Azure.

For Azure AD authentication, download and install the “Microsoft Active Directory
Authentication Library for Microsoft SQL Server“.

Please download it here : https://www.microsoft.com/en-

us/download/details.aspx?id=48742.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 173

A proper database backup strategy should be implemented to prevent possible

data loss. Please refer to the Backups topic.

CONFIGURATION

Consult the Configure SQL Azure topic for more information on the configuration.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Microsoft SQL Azure - General

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

174 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter a name for the data source.

Host Enter the server hostname or IP address.

Login mode Specify the authentication mode to use. Select between:

· Database login

· Custom login

· Active Directory Password

· Active Directory Integrated

· Active Directory Interactive (with MFA support)

Username Enter the username to access the SQL Azure database.

Password Enter the password to access the SQL Azure database.

Always ask Prompt for the password when a user connects to the data source.
password

Allow change Allow the username to be edited when connecting to the data
username source.

(Only with Always ask password enabled)

Database Enter the name of the SQL Azure database.

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication.

Test Database Test the connection with the database to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 175

Microsoft SQL Azure - Settings Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Root filter Enter the name of a root level folder to display only the entries
contained in that folder.

Ping online Indicate the preferred ping online method. Select between:
method · None

· Ping

· Port Scan

Auto go offline Use the data source in offline mode when the ping method does not
respond.

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. You can still lock
the application but you won't be prompted for the data source
password if this option is disabled.

PRIVATE VAULT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

176 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft SQL Azure - Private Vault Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select the type of Private Vault to use. Select between:

· Default: use the default Private Vault, which is stored in the
database.

· None: disable the Private Vault for all users.

· Online Drive: use a Devolutions Online Drive file (*.dod) as a

Private Vault.

UPGRADE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 177

Microsoft SQL Azure - Upgrade Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Create Database Create the database on the SQL server to use Remote Desktop
Manager.

Update Update the database on the SQL server, if required to use Remote
Database Desktop Manager.

Test Database Test the connection with the database to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

Email Schema Send your schema to the Devolutions Support team.

to Support

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

178 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

View Upgrade Prompts a window to provide information about the Upgrade Script.
Script

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Microsoft SQL Azure database.

Microsoft SQL Azure - VPN

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 179

Microsoft SQL Azure - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching mode Determines how the entries will be reloaded in the data source. For
more information, please consult the Caching topic.

Connection Set the delay of the connection timeout.

timeout

Command Set the delay of the command timeout.

timeout

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Prompt for Ask to use the data source in offline mode when a user connects to
offline mode on the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

180 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

startup

Allow beta Allow beta upgrade of the database (when using a beta version of
database Remote Desktop Manager).
upgrade

Manage Cache Manage the data source cache. On large data sources caching is a
must and will increase performance significantly. For more
information, please consult the Manage Cache topic.

More Settings Edit the connection string values directly.

5.4.1.4.1 Configure SQL Azure

DESCRIPTION

1. Make sure that you have a valid Microsoft SQL Azure subscription to be able to create your
database.

2. Follow the steps in the Create a data source topic. On Step 4, before testing server or
otherwise verifying the connection, continue with the steps below.

3. Select the Upgrade tab and click the Create Database button. If the database is already
created on the Microsoft SQL Azure Server, click the Update Database button to add the
appropriate tables to the database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 181

Upgrade Tab

4. Once the database is created, create an administrator account for the database via the
Administration - User Management menu.

If the database is created using a system administrator (example: SA), we

recommend to keep this user only for the database creation and the database
upgrade. A Remote Desktop Manager administrator account must be created
first. Then, regular users are created with this administrator account.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

182 | Remote Desktop Manager

Create a Remote Desk top Manager Administrator Account

5. Connect on the Microsoft SQL Azure database with the Remote Desktop Manager
administrator account. To do so, edit the data source used to create the database and change
the login information for the administrator account that you have created.

Connection to the Database with the RDM Administrator Account

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 183

The Microsoft SQL Azure data source is now correctly configured.

5.4.1.4.2 Configure Active Directory Passw ord

DESCRIPTION

For Azure AD authentication, download and install the “Microsoft Active Directory
Authentication Library for Microsoft SQL Server“.

Please download it here : https://www.microsoft.com/en-

us/download/details.aspx?id=48742.

From the Ribbon, navigate to Administration – Users, and add a new user.

Select "Office365/Azure AD" as the authentication type;

Set the Authentication type to Office365/Azure AD

Note: When creating SQL Active Directory users, you must be logged in with an Azure Active
Directory user. Otherwise it will fail and you will be notified of the error.

Use the servers defined Azure AD Admin to create your other users (to start). Once you've
created other admin users, you can use them to create more users.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

184 | Remote Desktop Manager

Azure AD Portal
5.4.1.4.3 Configure Active Directory Interactive (w ith MFA Support)

DESCRIPTION

Active Directory Interactive (with MFA Support) allow you to authenticate on your Microsoft
SQL Azure data source using your Office365 account + MFA.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 185

Azure with MFA

1. Select Active Directory Interactive (with MFA Support) from the Login mode dropdown
menu.

2. If you have several Microsoft SQL Azure data sources, you would need to decide if you want
to authenticate on each of them at the first connection or only once for all of them.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Default Prompt to authenticate on each data source.

Shared Prompt to authenticate on the first data source and will use
the same login on the other data sources. Easier to switch
from one data source to another if you have several of them.

3. Enter the complete email address to authenticate in the Username field.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

186 | Remote Desktop Manager

4. Click on Configure to set the Azure App Settings.

App Registration

5. Configure the database to authenticate in the Database field.

5.4.1.4.3.1 Configure Azure Active Directory App Registration

DESCRIPTION

To be able to use the Active Directory Interactive (with MFA Support) authentication method
in Remote Desktop Manager, a new app needs to be registered in the Microsoft SQL Azure
console (Active Directory admin) with the appropriate API permissions.

SETTINGS

1. Login on Azure Portal.

2. In the Azure Active Directory section, select App registrations and then, New
registration.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 187

App Registration

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

188 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. Configure the Name, Supported account types and Redirect URL as indicated below.

Supported Account Types

4. Optional step: Click on the Authentication section and switch to Yes, if you desire the
Integrated Windows Authentification (IWA) option.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 189

Authentication

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

190 | Remote Desktop Manager

5. Click on the API Permissions section and configure it as indicated below.

API Permissions

6. Select Azure Active Directory Graph – Delegated Permissions – User – User.Read and
click on Add Permissions.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 191

Azure Active Directory Graph

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

192 | Remote Desktop Manager

User.Read

7. We would need to add a second permission. To do so, select APIs my organization uses,
then type Azure and select Azure SQL Database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 193

APIs my organization uses

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

194 | Remote Desktop Manager

8. Select Delegated permissions – user_impersonation and click Add permissions.

user_impersonation

9. The API permissions should look like this.

API / Permissions Name

10.Your Azure Active Directory App Registration is now completed.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 195

11.Copy the App Registration's Application (client) ID.

Application (client) ID

12.Paste the Application ID inside Remote Desktop Manager, in the App Registration
section.

App Registration

5.4.1.5 Microsoft SQL Server

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

196 | Remote Desktop Manager

With the Microsoft SQL Server data source, Remote Desktop Manager uses the
power of Microsoft SQL Server to save and manage entries.

Supported Microsoft SQL Server:

· 2019 on Windows and Linux (all editions)

· 2017 on Windows and Linux (all editions)

· 2016 Service Pack 2

· 2014 Service Pack 3

· 2012 Service Pack 4

The following features are also supported:

· Always on availability group.

· Clustering.

· Log Shipping.

· Database mirroring.

HIGHLIGHTS

· Supports user management with a superior security model.

· Supports Offline mode for when the server or network is unavailable.

· Supports full entry logs and attachments.

· Supports Vaults to organize thousands of entries.

A proper database backup strategy should be implemented to prevent possible

data loss. Please refer to the Backups topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 197

Depending on the Recovery Model of the underlying database, some

maintenance operations may have to be scheduled to run regularly in order to
maintain the health of the database. Please consult Recovery Model.

Using either Database Login or Integrated Security is inherently less secure

because it means that the end user can connect directly to the database using
any tool available. We do have table and column level security, but security
conscious organizations will consider this unacceptable. It is recommended to
use our Custom login model.

CONFIGURATION

Consult the Configure SQL Server topic for more information on the configuration.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

198 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft SQL Server - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter a name for the data source.

Host Enter the server hostname or IP address.

Login Specify the authentication mode to use. Select between:

mode · Database login

· Integrated Security (Active directory)

· Custom Login

Username Enter the username to access the SQL Azure database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 199

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Enter the password to access the SQL Azure database.

Always Prompt for the password when a user connects to the data source.
ask
password

Allow Allow the username to be edited when connecting to the data source.
change
username (Only with Always ask password enabled)

Database Enter the name of the SQL Azure database.

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication.

Test Test the connection with the server to validate if the proper information has
Server been provided.

Test Test the connection with the database to validate if the proper information
Database has been provided.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

200 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft SQL Server - Settings Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Root filter Enter the name of a root level folder to display only the entries
contained in that folder.

Ping online Indicate the preferred ping online method. Select between:
method
· None

· Ping

· Port Scan

Auto go offline Use the data source in offline mode when the ping method does not
respond.

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. You can still lock
the application but you won't be prompted for the data source
password if this option is disabled.

PRIVATE VAULT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 201

Microsoft SQL Server - Private Vault Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select the type of Private Vault to use. Select between:

· Default: use the default Private Vault, which is stored in the

database.

· None: disable the Private Vault for all users.

· Online Drive: use a Devolutions Online Drive file (*.dod) as a

Private Vault.

UPGRADE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

202 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft SQL Server - Upgrade Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Test Server Test the connection with the server to validate if the proper information
has been provided.

Create Database Create the database on the SQL server.

Update Update the database on the SQL server.

Database

Test Database Test the connection with the database to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

Email Schema Send your schema to the Devolutions support team.

to Support

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 203

OPTION DESCRIPTION

View Upgrade Open the upgrade script in a new window.

Script

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Microsoft SQL Server.

Microsoft SQL Server - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

204 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft SQL Server - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching mode Determines how the entries will be reloaded in the data source. For
more information, please consult the Caching topic.

Connection Set the delay of the connection timeout.

timeout

Command Set the delay of the command timeout.

timeout

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Prompt for Ask to use the data source in offline mode when the user connects to
offline mode on the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 205

OPTION DESCRIPTION

startup

Allow beta Allow beta upgrade of the database (when using a beta version of
database Remote Desktop Manager).
upgrade

Manage Cache Manage the data source cache. On large data sources caching is a
must and will increase performance significantly. For more
information, please consult the Manage Cache topic.

More Settings Edit the connection string values directly.

5.4.1.5.1 Configure SQL Server

DESCRIPTION

1. Install Microsoft SQL Server or Microsoft SQL Server Express.

Newly installed Microsoft SQL Server instances do not allow remote

connections. Please follow the directions in SQL Server.

For added security, you can enable SSL Encryption to communicate with your
instance of SQL Server. However, due to a framework limitation, this is not
compatible with our iOS and Android versions of Remote Desktop Manager.

Please follow directions on https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/316898

2. Follow the steps in the Create a data source topic. On Step 4, before testing server or
otherwise verifying the connection, continue with the steps below.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

206 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. Select the Upgrade tab and click the Create Database button. If the database is already
created on the Microsoft SQL Server, click the Update Database button to add the appropriate
tables to the database.

Upgrade Tab

4. Once the database is created, create an administrator account for the database via the
Administration - Users menu.

If the database is created using a system administrator (example: SA), we

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 207

Create a Remote Desk top Manager Administrator Account

5. Connect to the Microsoft SQL Server database with the Remote Desktop Manager
administrator account. To do so, edit the data source used to create the database and change
the login information for the administrator account created with Remote Desktop Manager.

Connection to the Database with the RDM Administrator Account

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

208 | Remote Desktop Manager

The Microsoft SQL Server data source is now correctly configured.

5.4.1.5.2 Recovery Model

DESCRIPTION

Microsoft SQL Server backup and restore operations occur within the context of the recovery
model of the database. Recovery models are designed to control transaction log maintenance.
A recovery model is a database property that controls how transactions are logged, whether the
transaction log requires (and allows) backing up, and what kinds of restore operations are
available. Three recovery models exist: simple, full, and bulk-logged. Typically, a database
uses the full recovery model or simple recovery model. A database can be switched to another
recovery model at any time.

If the Recovery Model is set to Full, it is critical that regular backups of BOTH
the database and the transaction log are performed. Not performing these
backups will result in the database files to increase in size at an alarming rate.
This will severely impact the performance in the long run.

For further information regarding SQL Recovery Models, refer to

https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-CA/library/ms189275.aspx.

5.4.1.5.3 Encrypting Connections to SQL Server

DESCRIPTION

To ensure that the communication between Remote Desktop Manager and the Microsoft SQL
Server database is encrypted, an extensive procedure must be followed on the Microsoft SQL
Server instance.

Please consult this Microsoft technet article that provides detailed instructions: Encrypting
Connections to SQL Server (technet).

After it has been properly configured, the only modification to perform in Remote Desktop
Manager is to set a property in the More Settings of the data source.

PROCEDURE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 209

1. Create or edit an Microsoft SQL Server data source, access the Advanced tab and click the
More Settings button.

2. Set the Encrypt property value to true. Click OK to validate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

210 | Remote Desktop Manager

5.4.1.6 MySQL

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager uses a MySQL database to store the session data. It is
only supported in the Enterprise edition.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 211

For added security, you can enable SSL Encryption to communicate with your
instance of MySQL Server.

Please follow directions in those links;

· https://dev.mysql.com/doc/connector-net/en/connector-net-tutorials-ssl.html

· https://dev.mysql.com/doc/connector-net/en/connector-net-6-10-connection-
options.html

We recommend using MySQL version 5.5.62 for this data source.

HIGHLIGHTS

· The data can be shared on a MySQL database installed on any Operating System MySQL
supports.

· Full connection log and attachment support.

· Integrated Security support (Requires a v5.5.16 commercial distribution of MySQL).

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

212 | Remote Desktop Manager

MySQL - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Host Name of the server where the data source will be store.

Port If not using the default port, enter your Port number.

Integrated When enabling the Integrated Security, the user and password field will be
Security disabled because the operating system will provide a cached copy
automatically. Please see Integrated Security for more information.

Username Username to access the MySQL server.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 213

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Password to access the MySQL server.

Always ask Prompt for the password when a user connects to the data source.
password

Allow Allow the username to be edited when connecting to the data source.
change
username (Only with Always ask password enabled)

Schema Name of the schema on the MySQL server for the utilization of Remote
Desktop Manager.

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication to access your data source.

Test Host Test the connection with the Host (server) to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

Test Test the connection with the schema to validate if the proper information
Schema has been provided

PRIVATE VAULT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

214 | Remote Desktop Manager

MySQL - Private Vault Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select the type of Private Vault to use. Select between:

· Default: use the default Private Vault, which is stored in the

database.

· None: disable the Private Vault for all users.

· Online Drive: use a Devolutions Online Drive file (*.dod) as a

Private Vault.

UPGRADE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 215

MySQL - Upgrade Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Test Host Test the connection with the host (server) to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

Create Schema Create the schema on the MySQL server to use Remote Desktop
Manager.

Update Schema Update the schema on the MySQL server, if required, to use Remote
Desktop Manager.

Test Schema Test the connection with the schema to validate if the proper
information has been provided.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

216 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Schema Send your schema to the Devolutions Support team.

to Support

View Upgrade Open the upgrade script in a new window.

Script

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your MySQL database.

MySQL - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 217

MySQL - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Caching mode Determine how the entries will be reload in the data source. See
Caching topic for more information.

Ping online Indicate the preferred ping online method. Select between:
method
· None

· Ping

· Port Scan

Connection Waiting time before a connection timeout.

timeout

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

218 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Command Waiting time before a command timeout.

timeout

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh

Prompt for Every time you will connect to your data source, you will be prompted
offline mode on to use the data source in offline mode.
startup

Auto go offline If the ping online method doesn’t work it will automatically go offline.

Disable lock Disable the option to lock the data source directly. You can still lock
the application but you won't be prompted for the database password
if this option is disabled.

More Settings Edit the connection string values directly.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Consult MySQL troubleshooting for more information.

5.4.1.7 Private Vault

DESCRIPTION

The Private Vault allows you to connect a personal Vault stored in a Devolutions Online
Drive file directly to your Advanced Data Source, thus allowing you to store information that
only you can have access to. For more information about the Private Vault please follow this link.

1. In the Private Vault tab of your Advanced Data Source, select Online Drive in the Type.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 219

Devolutions Online Database Data Source

2. Click on the ellipsis next to the Filename field. A list containing your pre-existing Devolutions
Online Drive files will prompt. You may choose to use an existing file (.dod) or if you wish you can
enter a name in the New data source field and click on Create to automatically create a new
Devolutions Online Drive file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

220 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Online Drive Data Source

5.4.2 DropBox

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager uses the Dropbox API to retrieve a XML file from the
configured repository. There is no need to install the Dropbox client on the machine
to open the data source. It is also possible to configure more than one Dropbox
account on the same machine.

HIGHLIGHTS

· This data source can be shared over the Internet between multiple locations.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 221

· The data source supports auto refresh.

· This is a file-based data source, based on the XML data source.

· To avoid data corruption, the session list should be modified in one location at a time.

· No need to have the Dropbox client installed to use the Dropbox data source.

· Each Dropbox data source can use a different Dropbox account.

Although it can be shared between multiple locations, there is no conflict

management for the configuration. If you share with other users you may get
update conflicts and run into issues. This data source type is meant for a single
user using multiple computers, not multiple users.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

222 | Remote Desktop Manager

Dropbox - General Tab

Remote Desktop Manager supports the 2-Factor Authentication of Dropbox.

When the button Validate with Dropbox is pressed and the 2-Factor
Authentication is enabled in Dropbox, a window prompt will open and ask for the
Dropbox account password, then a second prompt will open for the security code.
The security code can be received by SMS or generated by Google
Authenticator.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Mode Select the mode that is preferred to configure the data source. Select
between:

· Account

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 223

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Local

Local path Contains the local path where the Dropbox files are accessible.
(Local Mode)

Email (Accout Contains the email address associated with the Dropbox account.
Mode)

Validate with Button to validate the email address with the Dropbox account.
Dropbox
(Account
Mode)

Master key Add an additional layer of security to your data source by using master
key.

Always ask Connecting to the data source will always prompt for the master key.
master key

Dropbox Indicate the folder in Dropbox. It should not contains any drive since it's
directory stored online. Leave it empty to use the default Dropbox root.

Filename Indicate the filename used to store the data on the data source.

Compress Activate this option if you wish to compress your database file.
database file

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Dropbox.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

224 | Remote Desktop Manager

Dropbox - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 225

Dropbox - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto refresh Set the interval to use between each automatic refresh.

Use current Dropbox This option will use the Dropbox account who has been
session if available already validated without any other validation.

Always ask for Always ask for confirmation when connecting to the data
confirmation source.

Disable reveal password Disable the reveal password feature when a user access
this data source.

Allow offline mode Allow the data source to be used in Offline mode.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

226 | Remote Desktop Manager

5.4.3 Google Drive

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager downloads and uploads the session settings directly
from file located on an FTP site.

GENERAL

Google Drive - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter the name of the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 227

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Enter the Google email to access Google Drive.

Password Enter the password of the Google account.

Always Always ask for the password when connecting to the data source.
ask
password

Account Indicated if the account has been validated with Google Drive. Credentials
status must be validated before using the data source.

Validate This contextual button attempts validates the credentials currently in use (or
Google removes currently validated credentials).
Drive

Master Enter the master key of the data source (If enabled).
key

Always Enabling this option will prompt for a master key whenever you are
ask connecting to the data source.
master
key

Filename Enter the Google Drive path of the data source's file.

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Google Drive.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

228 | Remote Desktop Manager

Google Drive - VPN Tab

5.4.4 Devolutions Online Drive

DESCRIPTION

The Devolutions Online Drive stores and synchronizes your remote connections and credentials
data in our Cloud services. You can access your sessions from anywhere via an Internet
connection.

It is an online file storage service dedicated to a single file type, Remote Desktop Manager’s
connection list. Devolutions Online Drive is completely free and has no limitations as to how
many sessions you might have, it is for single users as it cannot share files.

Please consult the Online Drive topic for information on this service.

Since this service is hosted in the cloud, we strongly recommend that you
further encrypt your data by applying a Master key. This will ensure that the file
will be unreadable by no one but you.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 229

Even though this is a cloud service, you MUST use our Online Backup service
to keep history of your data. Devolutions offers a free backup service, and we
do not maintain multiple versions of the Online Drive content. This makes it
critical that you enable the backup feature. This service will keep multiple
versions of your file and is the best option.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Devolutions Online Drive - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter the name of the data source.

Create a free account Create a new Devolutions Account.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

230 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Always ask password Prompts for the password every time a connection to the
Devolutions Online Drive is attempted.

Test Connection Test the connection with Devolutions Online Drive to validate
the provided credentials.

Filename Indicate the filename used to store the data on the

Devolutions Online Drive.

Master key Contains a master key to access the data source.

Always ask master key Ask for the master key every time a connection to the
Devolutions Online Drive is attempted.

BACKUP

Please consult the Online Backup topic for information on this service.

Devolutions Online Drive - Back up Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 231

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Backup Choose the backup mode. Select between:

· None: No backup of the data source will be created.

· File backup: The backup will be saved to a local file when a

modification occurs in the data source.

· Online Backup: An Online Backup (using the Online Backup) will

automatically be created when a modification occurs in the data
source.

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your Devolutions Online Drive.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

232 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Online Drive - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 233

Devolutions Online Drive - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto refresh Set the interval to use between each automatic refresh.

Disable reveal Disable the reveal password feature when a user access the data
password source.

Allow offline Allows the data source to be used in Offline mode.

mode

Allow custom Allows the use of custom images.

images

Disable lock Disables the password query for locking application.

Clear Offline Clear the offline cache on the local computer. This can be very helpful
Cache when encountering offline issues.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

234 | Remote Desktop Manager

5.4.5 SQLite

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager's SQLite data source is ideal for single user and stand-
alone situations. More powerful and more flexible than the XML file format, it also
supports a few of the Advanced Data Source options like Logs and Attachments.

HIGHLIGHTS

· Full connection log and attachments support

· The Online Backup Service is available for this data source

All passwords are encrypted by default by Remote Desktop Manager. You can
specify a custom password to fully encrypt the content of the SQLite database.

Password recovery is not possible, the data will be unrecoverable if you cannot
authenticate. Please ensure you backup the password in a safe place.

SQLite supports an unlimited number of simultaneous readers, but will only allow
one writer at any instant in time. For this reason Remote Desktop Manager does
not support sharing a SQLite data source between several users by storing it on a
network drive. If you want to share your data and work in a team environment with
your colleagues, please use one of the Advanced Data Sources. Please consult
SQLite.org for more information.

PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

You can specify a password to further encrypt your data. Specify it at creation time. If the data
source already exists you can modify the password by using the File – Manage Password
dialog.

Change or clear the password of a SQLite data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 235

Manage password dialog

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

236 | Remote Desktop Manager

SQLite - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Database Indicates the filename of the SQLite database (.db).

Password Specify a password to further encrypt your data source.

Always ask Always ask for the password when connecting to the data source.
password

Test Test the current database path and password for conneciton.
Connection

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 237

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Two factor Enable the 2-Factor Authentication to access your data source.

BACKUP

SQLite - Back up Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Backup Select between:

· None: No backup of your data source will be created.

· File backup: Your backup will be saved to a chosen file but will not
automatically do backup every 30 seconds.

· Online Backup: An Online Backup (using Online Backup) will

automatically be created.

VPN

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

238 | Remote Desktop Manager

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your SQLite.

SQLite - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 239

SQLite - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Disable reveal Disable the reveal password feature when a user access this data
password source.

Disable caching Entries will be reloaded in Simple mode in the data source. See
Caching topic for more information.

Command Waiting time before a command timeout.

timeout

More Settings Use to directly modify the connection string value.

Manage File Contains multiple SQLite commands to facilitate managing. You

should usually only access these when our support teams demands it.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

240 | Remote Desktop Manager

5.4.6 WebDAV

DESCRIPTION

With the WebDAV data source, Remote Desktop Manager downloads and
uploads the session settings directly from a file located on a WebDAV site.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

WebDAV - General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 241

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter the name of the data source.

Host Enter the hostname or IP address of the remote device.

Port Enter the port of the remote device.

Use SSL Use the SSL encryption.

Username Enter the account username to access to the remote device.

Password Enter the account password to access to the remote device.

Always Always ask password input when connecting to the data source.
ask
password

Master Add an additional security layer by encrypting your data source with a master
key key.

Always Always prompt for the master key when connecting to the data source.
ask
master
key

Filename Enter the file name. If it does not exists, it will be created automatically.

Read-only Set the data source to read-only.

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your WebDAV.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

242 | Remote Desktop Manager

WebDAV - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 243

WebDAV - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto refresh Set the interval for the automatic refresh.

Log enabled Enables logging and its features.

5.4.7 XML

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager saves the settings directly in an XML file format.

HIGHLIGHTS

· This is a very simple data source and it can be modified or generated by an external tool.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

244 | Remote Desktop Manager

· It is possible to configure an auto refresh interval.

· The Online Backup is available for this data source.

Although it can be shared between multiple locations, there is no conflict

management for the configuration. If you share with other users you may get
update conflicts or otherwise run into issues. This data source type is meant for a
single user using multiple computers, not multiple users.

All passwords are encrypted by default. You can specify a custom password
(master key) to fully encrypt the content of the file. It is impossible to recover the
data if the master key is lost. Please make sure to remember or backup the
master key in a safe place.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

XML - General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 245

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the data source.

Filenam Specify the full path of the XML file used to save the data. Relative paths and
e environment variables can be used as well.

Master Add an additional layer of security by encrypting your data source with a master
key key.

Always Always prompts for the master key when connecting to the data source.
ask
master
key

BACKUP

XML - Back up Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

246 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Backup Select between:

· None: No backup of your data source will be created.

· File backup: Your backup will be saved to a chosen file but will not
automatically do backup every 30 seconds.

· Online Backup: An Online Backup (using Online Backup) will

automatically be created.

Backup name Specify the backup name that will allow you to automatically save your
sessions in a safe online storage space and restore them in the event
of problems.

VPN

Open a VPN to access your data prior to connecting to your XML.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 247

XML - VPN Tab

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

248 | Remote Desktop Manager

XML - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto refresh on Indicate if the application monitor the file changes to automatically
file change refresh the data source.

Disable reveal Disable the reveal password feature when a user accesses this data
password source.

Allow custom This will enable the loading of any custom images in the tree view.
images

Read-only Set the data source in read only. No new entry can be created and the
existing data cannot be edit.

5.5 Import/Export Data Source

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 249

To simplify deployment for multiple users, it is possible to export and import data source
configurations. The generated .rdd file contains all the information to recreate the configuration.
Please note that the .rdd file does not include the database content. Only the configuration is
exported. Use the entries's Export functionality to backup or copy the database's content.

Use File – Data Sources to access the import or export functionality.

Data Sources - Import and Export

Whether or not users can Read/Write in Offline mode is first decided at the data
source's Caching mode level. This cannot be changed remotely. If you wish to
prevent or allow remote users the Read/Write offline feature, you should do so
before exporting your data source.

A locked data source can be exported and imported, but the content will be
locked unless a password is entered when the data source is selected. See Lock
Data Source for more information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

250 | Remote Desktop Manager

5.6 Lock Data Source

LOCK DATA SOURCE

To protect sensitive data in your data source configuration (e.g. server URL or credentials), you
may wish to lock the data source configuration before you deploy it to your users. You can do it
by using the Lock/Unlock button from the toolbar.

SETTINGS

Lock Data Source toolbar

The locked data source will require a password. The password must be specify when the lock is
applied. Use the same password to unlock it or to modify the data source configuration.

Lock Data Source dialog

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 251

There is NO way of unlocking the data source if the password is lost or forgotten.
In such an event, you will need to configure a new data source. However the
content of the database will not be lost.

5.7 Offline mode

DESCRIPTION

The offline mode connects to a local copy of the data source when you are not connected to the
data source. This is useful when working from a remote location and the network is unreachable
or if there is any kind of connectivity issue.

The read/write offline mode adds to users the possibility to manipulate entries while
disconnected from the data source. This is useful for off-site personnel or when working in
environments that have sporadic network availability.

This feature is not available for all data sources, please consult the help topic of
the respective data source to know if it supports offline mode.

The offline cache is first encrypted using our own private key mixed with some
information taken from the local computer. This makes it impossible for a copy on
another machine to be readable. By default it is also encrypted with Windows
NTFS encryption, in which case there is no key saved anywhere.

For added security, offline files are set to expire after a delay. The default expiry is set to 7 days
but can be modified via the Data Source Settings (System Settings).

Remote Desktop Manager will prompt for offline mode when the application is unable to reach
the data source but the offline mode can be toggled manually with File – Go Offline.

Several features are not available in offline mode, such as:

· Attachments and logs.

· User management (Add/Edit/Delete users).

AVAILABILITY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

252 | Remote Desktop Manager

The offline mode availability relies on several settings:

· The data source offline cache must be enabled. (This step needs to be done before you export your data
source to other computers)
· The user's account.
· The data source settings.
· The group policies.
· At the Vault level.

The lowest setting (in terms of security) prevails over the others, which may prevent you from
using the offline mode. If the Go Offline button is not available, please consult your
administrator.

The Data Source Information displays the size of the offline cache file along with the effective
modes (disabled, read-only or read/write).

My Data Source Information - Offline mode

CACHING MODE

The caching mode must be set to Intelligent to enable the offline mode.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 253

This step cannot be modified remotely once you have exported your data source
settings. You should take a moment and think about the needs of your data
source and select what is appropriate before moving on to exporting.

Data Source configuration – Advanced – Caching mode

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disabled Prevent an offline cache from being used.

Intelligent Use the offline cache only for recent changes.

Read/Write offline mode is not available with the Basic subscription of

Devolutions Online Database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

254 | Remote Desktop Manager

Some features of Remote Desktop Manager are unavailable while offline. Even
with read/write access mode, you may not be able to perform all actions, such as
adding attachments or managing users since these features are not cached
locally. On the other hand, note that the Private Vault is still available in offline
mode.

GRANT/DENY OFFLINE

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disabled Prevents an offline cache from being used.

Read-only Allow to view and use entries only. The content of the data source cannot be
modified.

Read/Write Allow to view, use, and edit entries. Conflicts caused by offline modifications
are managed when back online.

Beyond the group policies, the Offline mode is controlled at four levels:
· User permissions.
· Data source settings (System Settings) (server configuration).
· In a Vault's configuration.

A user must be granted Read/Write at all three levels to allow read/write privileges.

USER DATA SOURCE Vault EFFECTIVE

PERMISSIONS SETTINGS CONFIGURATION ACCESS
(SYSTEM
SETTINGS)

Disabled or Read- Disabled or Read- Allow offline

Disabled
only or Read/write only or Read/write disabled

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 255

USER DATA SOURCE Vault EFFECTIVE

PERMISSIONS SETTINGS CONFIGURATION ACCESS
(SYSTEM
SETTINGS)

Disabled or Read- Disabled or Read- Disabled

Allow offline enabled
only or Read/write only or Read/write

Disabled or Read- Disabled Disabled

Allow offline enabled
only or Read/write

Disabled Disabled or Read- Disabled

Allow offline enabled
only or Read/write

Read-only or Read-only or Allow offline

Disabled
Read/write Read/write disabled

Read-only or Read-only or Read-only

Allow offline enabled
Read/write Read/write

Read-only or Read-only Read-only

Allow offline enabled
Read/write

Read-only Read-only or Read-only

Allow offline enabled
Read/write

Allow offline
Read/write Read/write Read/write
enabled

You want to know the current effective Offline mode while connected? See My
Data Source Information.

5.7.1 Offline Read/Write

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

256 | Remote Desktop Manager

The Read/Write offline mode allows the user to add, edit and delete entries while the data
source is offline. Those changes are saved locally and synchronized with the data source once it
is back online.

Some functionalities are not available while offline and you may not be able to
perform all actions. Note that the Private Vault is still available in offline mode.

Once offline, the users security settings still applies. Add/Edit/Delete privileges granted by the
administrator are still in effect. See User Management.

When an entry is edited by an online user while another user is offline, the local version of the
entry stored in the offline cache becomes different from the online version. This causes a conflict
when the offline user gets back online.

OFFLINE EDITS WORKFLOW

· Connect to the data source.

· Go offline with File – Go Offline.
· Edit any entry.
· Go back online with File – Go Online.

The Offline Edits window is displayed:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 257

Offline Edits

Use this dialog to accept/reject your offline changes.

You can use the Compare action to have a side by side comparison of your changes with the
current live entry.

Entries will be marked:

· Accept - when no outside changes have been detected.
· Conflict - when outside changes have been detected since you were last connected.

MULTIPLE OFFLINE EDITS

When multiple users edit the same entry offline simultaneously, a conflict occurs when the
second user is back online.

Here is an example of such a case to help resolving conflicts properly:

When the first user returns online, the Offline Edits window is displayed. Changes are accepted
by default.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

258 | Remote Desktop Manager

Offline Edits For The First User Back Online

When a second user returns online, a conflict occurs and the Offline Edits window is displayed.

Offline Edits For The Second User Back Online

When the conflict occurs, the user must decide to accept or reject the changes. The different
versions of the entry can be compared to view which changes has been made.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 259

COMPARE VERSIONS OF AN ENTRY

Click the Compare button to compare the versions of a conflicted entry. Analyze the XML
structure of the entry to decide to Accept or Reject the changes.

The content on the left represents the entry retrieved online, and the content on the right
represents the local version of the entry, edited in Offline mode.

Compare Session Modification

5.8 Manage Cache

DESCRIPTION

This option allows you to manage your cache which decides how the client will re-load entries
when changes are detected. On large data sources caching is a must and will increase
performance significantly.

This feature is only available when the offline engine is set to use SQLite. We
are phasing out this engine because of multiple issues reported by customers.
We recommend you use MCDFv2.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

260 | Remote Desktop Manager

The Manage Cache options should usually only be used upon request from our
Support Team when experiencing cache issue.

SETTINGS

The Manage Cache options will only be available when using an SQLite cache.

Manage Cache

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Clear Clear the output window.

output

Analyze Analyze will generate a report of everything that is contained in the cache. It
will read the offline data and perform a read/write test to verify if the offline file
is valid.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 261

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Vacuum This will run an SQLite command to reduce your cache size. The Vacuum
should only be used after trying to execute a Repair of your cache. If the
repair hasn't solved your issue running a Vacuum will usually solve issues
when dealing with a corrupted cache.

Repair The repair will run four different SQLite commands to repair a corrupted
cache:

§ PRAGMA integrigy_check

§ REINDEX DatabaseInfo

§ REINDEX Connections

§ REINDEX Properties

5.9 Private Vault

DESCRIPTION

The Private Vault is a user specific Vault for entries of any type. It allows each user to create
entries that only them can access. Not even administrators can access a user's Private Vault.

The Private Vault is available for all Advanced Data Sources.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

262 | Remote Desktop Manager

Navigation Pane – Private Vault

A NOTE ON CREDENTIALS

Credentials in the Private Vault can be used in two ways:

1. From a session using the Private Vault search.
2. When using the User Specific Settings feature.

These restrictions can easily be understood when you keep in mind that the Private Vault is in
fact contained in the user area of the database. It must be used from within the Private Vault, or
by using our extension mechanism that is user specific.
5.9.1 Private Vault Search

The Private Vault Search links a Private Vault credential entry to a session by providing the
name of the credential entry. Once the credential is found, it will automatically be used to open
your remote session.

SETTINGS

1. Create a credential entry in the Private Vault.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 263

Private Vault

2. Set the Global Availability property of the Private Vault credential to Available.

Global Availability

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Available Make the credential entry available for Private Vault search.

Default Use the setting defined in File - Options - Types - Credentials - Global
Availability.

Unavailable Ignore the credential entry when using the Private Vault search.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

264 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. In the remote session, set the Credentials property to Private Vault search and enter the
exact name of the Private Vault credential. The search is not case sensitive, if more than one
entry has the same name or if no entry matches the searched name, you will be prompted
with a list of all available Private Vault credentials. Variables are supported as well.

RDP Session - Private Vault Search

4. Open the session as you would normally proceed. Once the credential is found it will
automatically be used to open the remote session.

The Private Vault is linked to the database user. Another user will never be able
to see your Private Vault credentials even when the Global Availability is set to
Available.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Entries
Part VI
266 | Remote Desktop Manager

6 Entries

Every item you see in the Navigation Pane is an Entry. Create a new Entry from the ribbon by
using the New Entry button in the Edit tab or by right clicking in the Navigation Pane and
clicking on New Entry.

New Entry

Entries come in various types and are described in the following sections:
· Session
· Information
· Contact
· Credential Entry
· Document
· Folder
· Synchronizer
· VPN
· Macros/Scripts/Tools

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 267

Entry Types

6.1 Common Settings

Some settings are common to most entry types, meaning that they are almost the same for every
entry. These options are on the side menu of the properties of entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

268 | Remote Desktop Manager

Common Settings

For more information, please consult:

· General
· More
· Permissions
· Security Settings
· Session Recording
· VPN/SSH/Gateway
· User Interface
· Information
· Jump Host
· Events
· Logs
· Management Tools
· Advanced

6.1.1 General

DESCRIPTION

The General side menu contains general information about your entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 269

General side menu

SETTINGS

DESCRIPTION
Name Enter the name of the session that will be displayed in your treeview. This will be
copied to the host field as it's initial value as often the computer name is entered
here and can be used directly.

Folder Used to organize the session in different folders, either in the tray icon context
menu or in the tree view. Learn more here.

Display Allows the session to be opened embedded in Remote Desktop Manager or

externally. In the latter case, you may select the monitor on which it will be
displayed (if the application and work setup permits it).

Credentials Used to define the credential source:

· Default: Uses the username and password from the session type
configuration.
· Credential repository: Links this session to an existing Credential
repository entry. This is the solution that allows for reuse and lets you
maintain the minimum number of entries whenever the credentials need
updating.
· Embedded: Creates an embedded Credential repository entry. It will be
stored within this session's configuration.
· Inherited: This will use the credentials of the parent of the entry.
· My personal credentials: This setting will use your account-specific
personal credentials. These can be setup in File – My Account Settings.
· None: This will setup the entry without credentials.
· Private Vault search: This will allow you to use credential entries currently
located in your Private Vault.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

270 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.1.2 More

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager supports three ways of describing entries:

· Text

· RTF

· URL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 271

The description is displayed in a tooltip when hovering the described entry with the mouse in the
tree view.

Add tags to use smart folders and saved searches.

ALTERNATE HOST

Alternate Host handles changes in network topology. For example when having a laptop that is
being used at home and at the office you may need to connect differently for each location, in
those circumstances you can let the system detect how to connect.

EXPIRATION

Enter a date to automatically change your entry Status to Expired and to get it listed in the
Expired Session Report.
6.1.3 Permissions

DESCRIPTION

Access to entries is managed by permissions set on those entries. Combined together,

permissions create a strong layer of security to prevent unwanted access by users of the data
source. This system provide a large collection of permissions to choose from, providing great
flexibility in access management.

Security Groups have been deprecated, but are still available for reference
purposes. Do not use security groups and role-based access control at the
same time.

PERMISSIONS

POSSIBLE VALUES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

272 | Remote Desktop Manager

There are four possible values that define how permissions are granted:
· Inherited: Inherit the permission from parent folders.
· Custom: Specify which users/roles that have permission. Click Select roles or users to
define who has permissions.
· Everyone: Grant the permission to every user.
· Never: Block the permission for every user, except administrators.

For examples on using permissions, please consult the Role Based Access Control topics.

Permissions - General

SECURITY GROUPS

Security groups are a legacy method of controlling access. We strongly

recommend using the role-based access control instead.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 273

Security groups were used to protect sessions from a subset of system users. Assign your entry
to a security group then control who has access to it and how much control they have on the
entry.
6.1.4 Security Settings

DESCRIPTION

The Security Settings section is used to manage various settings regarding the edited entry.

Common settings – Security Settings

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Checkout mode The Checkout system locks an entry while it is being used or
modified. It prevents users from using or editing an entry at the same
time. For more information, please consult the Checkout system topic.

Checkout Prompt for a comment.

prompt

Allow offline Select if an entry can be used offline. Select between:

· Root (refers to the data source configuration)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

274 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· True

· False

· Inherited

Time Based The Time-based usage allows to limit the usage of resources to
Usage specific times. This feature is useful to prevent unattended use of
entries. Works with Advanced Data Sources.

Allow password Enable this setting for the $PASSWORD$ variable to be available
in variable with the command line.

6.1.4.1 Checkout system

DESCRIPTION

The Checkout system locks an entry while it is being used or modified. It prevents users from
using or editing an entry at the same time.

The checkout system can be enabled for sessions, documents, credentials, and
information entries.

You can set the check out mode at the root, folder or entry level.

This feature is only available when using SQL Server or Devolutions Password
Server data sources.

CHECKOUT SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Learn more about check out modes and setting check out on the root and folders

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 275

USE MANUAL CHECKOUT MODE

Configure Manual mode and avoid some common mistak es

SETTINGS

To access the check out system, edit an entry that supports checkout, and navigate to the
Security section.

Entry properties – Security – Check out settings

CHECKOUT MODE

Checkout mode enables or disables the checkout system. It also decides how the checkout
mode functions.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

276 | Remote Desktop Manager

Check out mode

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Root Inherits the checkout mode setting from the root folder.

Not available Disables the checkout system.

Automatic Checks out an entry automatically when the entry is opened and
automatically checks the entry in when the entry is closed. User can
edit properties without checking out the entry.

Manual Users need to check out the entry manually prior to opening or editing
the entry. No action can be performed without checking out the entry.

Inherited Inherits the check out mode from the parent folder.

Optional Offers the option to check out an entry manually or use (open and edit)
the entry without checking it out.

CHECKOUT PROMPT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 277

Checkout prompt sets if a user must enter a comment when they check out the entry.
Administrators can monitor the comments through the logs available on the entry or Activity
Logs.

Check out required

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Root Uses the checkout prompt setting from the root folder.

True Prompts the user for comment when they checkout an entry.

False Removes the prompt for comment.

Inherited Inherits the setting from a parent folder.

VAULT SETTING

The checkout system Vault refer to the settings in the vault root folder.

To set the checkout system vault settings:

1. Select the vault root folder in the navigation pane.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

278 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Click on the Vault Settings button in the Dashboard.

Access the Vault Settings

3. In the vault settings, navigate to the Security section.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 279

Check out system - Vault Folder

6.1.5 Session Recording

The session recording feature records videos of opened sessions for auditing purpose.

This feature generates two files when recording a session. A video file and an information file.

Session Recording Settings

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

280 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mode Select how the feature is applied to the session. Select between:
· Default: inherits the values from the vault settings.

· Optional: ask the user if they want to record the session at

opening.

· Required: record the session each time it is used.

· Never: disable session recording for the current session.

· Inherited: Retrieve the settings from parent folders.

Destination Select a location to save the recording.

Filename Select which name is applied to the recorded file.

6.1.6 VPN/SSH/Gateway

DESCRIPTION

A VPN connection can be configured in the session properties, in the VPN/SSH/Gateway

section. The connection can be established automatically, manually or when a specific condition
is met.

Although you can configure a VPN details in session properties, it is best practice to link a
session entry to a separate VPN entry. Please see, Configure a VPN for multiple sessions to
learn more.

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 281

VPN side menu

Each VPN type has its own set of properties to configure and you must know them in order to
properly configure them. For more information about settings see the VPN entry topic

VPN GROUP

Please consult VPN Group topic for more information.

VPN TYPE

Select which type of VPN you wish to configure inside your session. There are multiple natively
supported VPN connection types and many more are available through add-ons. Please consult
VPN Add-ons for more information.

INSTALLATION PATH

You can manually configure your VPN installation path. To use the default installation path, leave
the field empty.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

282 | Remote Desktop Manager

Installation Path

SETTINGS

Define the VPN settings in this tab. Enter the VPN name and credentials to properly connect to
your VPN.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 283

VPN Settings

VPN WITH PHONEBOOK

You can configure a Phone book with a VPN for a RDP Entry. This VPN entry can use the
default Phone book, a specific Phone book, an embedded Phone book or a reference to a type
of Phone book document.

This is only supported by the Microsoft VPN.

6.1.7 User Interface

DESCRIPTION

This section controls how your entry is displayed and what information is contained in it.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

284 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entries properties – User Interface section

CONTENT

· Tab page

· Color

· Other

TAB PAGE

TAB GROUP

Tab group group tabs by user-defined categories.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 285

Tab Page Section

Tab groups are displayed above the sessions' tabs.

Tab group location

Click on a tab group to filter the opened sessions and display only sessions from that group.

Tab groups – Filter on the Contact category

Much like the Folder feature, a hierarchical structure can be defined by entering a backslash to
indicate a sub-level.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

286 | Remote Desktop Manager

Tab group structure

You can also use left click to drag out the tap groups as a separate window.

Tab groups structure (View – Tab Groups)

TAB PAGE TITLE

Tab page title

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 287

Indicate a tab title to display instead of the name of the session. You can use a variable to add a
prefix or a suffix.

VISIBILITY

This setting is useful for VPN connections and entries that don't necessarily need interaction
when opened. If the value is set to False, the session's tab is hidden when the session is
opened.

Visibility

To view hidden sessions in the Navigation Pane, select the view Opened Sessions tab and
then select Hidden Sessions.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

288 | Remote Desktop Manager

Hidden Session

KEEP TAB PAGE OPENED ON DISCONNECT

Enable this setting to keep the tab page opened when the application detects a closed
connection. For more information, please consult Keep Tabs Opened for more information.

Keep Tab page opened on disconnect

This setting can be changed in multiple sessions at the same time using the Batch Edit feature.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 289

COLOR

It is possible to change the default color of the tab page to easily identify it.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Color Set the entry's tab page color.

Fore color Set the foreground color of the name of the entry in the Navigation
Pane.

The application colors the border of the embedded window along with the tab.

OTHER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

290 | Remote Desktop Manager

Other

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Sort priority Set the number to a higher number to increase the sorting priority in
the Navigation Pane.

Show in trayicon Allow access to the entry from the tray icon.

Embedded Display a footer under the session.

footer visible

6.1.8 Information

DESCRIPTION

The Information side menu contains general information regarding your computer, software,
hardware, expiration warranty, etc...

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 291

Information side menu

The various sections of this feature are mostly for you to input information regarding the entry's
specifics (usually the target host). The sections are divided as follows:
· General: Enter specific information regarding the computer, such as operating system, MAC
address and hardware description. This will also enable certain actions within the dashboard,
for example the Wake-on-LAN.
· Software: Here you can input a list all software installed on the remote computer as well as
indicate the server roles.
· Hardware: Specify the hardware information of the remote computer.
· Contact: Enter contact information or link to a contact entry. It can be useful when managing a
third party server.
· Purchase: Enter information related to the invoice or the purchase of the equipment.
· Custom Fields: Define custom properties and values that can then be access via variables
($CUSTOM_FIELD1$, $CUSTOM_FIELD2$, etc.) in child connections or
Macros/Scripts/Tools. You must be an administrator or have additional privileges to reveal
password in order to view the protected values.
· Statistics: View who created or update the entry, as well as the date.

6.1.9 Jump Host

DESCRIPTION

Indicates if the entry is a Jump Host. Please consult our Jump Online Help for more details on
Remote Desktop Manager Jump.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

292 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.1.10 Events

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager gives you the flexibility to automatically run operations before or after
establishing a connection.

These operations are defined via the Events section of a session's properties. Define a script
or a command line which executes at the appropriate time with the provided parameters, such
as the session ID or username. For example, events can be used to execute an external batch file or
application that prompts the user for more information, or to update a log on a remote server.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 293

Session properties – Events

SETTINGS

The Events section is composed of four tabs. All of them can execute the same events. but at
specific times, such as before the connection is established or after its interruption.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None No script, command line or message prompt is executed.

Script Select a script file to execute The VBScript (*.vbs) file is the only
supported format.

Command Line Enter a command line to execute.

Message Prompt Enter a message to display.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

294 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Macros/Scripts/To Select a Macros/Scripts/Tools entry from the data source.

ols

PowerShell Select a PowerShell script from a local drive.

Copy to clipboard Provide text to copy to the clipboard.

BEFORE CONNECT – MISCELLANEOUS

The Miscellaneous section of the Before Connect tab allows to power on the remote device
before trying to establish the connection.

Please note that for the Wake-on-LAN feature to work:

· The remote device must support the Wake-on-LAN feature.
· The MAC address must be filled out in the Information section of the session properties.

Before Connect – Miscellaneous

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 295

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Power On Enable the Wake-on-LAN.

Mode

Wait timeout Enter the delay before retrying the to wake the remote device.

Retry count Enter the number of time to try to wake the remote device.

AFTER CONNECT – MACRO

Event - After Connect

This feature simply uses a basic mechanism of sending keystrokes provided by

the .NET framework, emulating someone using the keyboard. It sends the
keystrokes to the operating system itself, and they are handled by WHATEVER
application has the focus at that time. If the focus is switched to another
window, the credentials will most likely be revealed by being typed in a text
area.

Be advised that using this feature in an environment where passwords

must be hidden from the user is highly discouraged.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

296 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Execute Execute the macro automatically when the session is opened.

automatically

Initial wait Enter the delay before the macro is executed.

Type Select how the macro is executed. Select between:

· Default: enter a typing macro manually.

· Link: select an existing Macros/Scripts/Tools from the data source.

Typing macro Enter the typing macro to execute. For more information, please consult
the Typing Macro topic.

Macro Enter a password to prompt for before executing the macro.

password

Delay time Enter the delay time for the {DELAY} instruction.

Command Enter the delay time between each command.

6.1.10.1 Typing Macro

DESCRIPTION

The Typing Macro automatically executes once a connection has been established.

This feature simply uses a basic mechanism of sending keystrokes provided by

Be advised that using this feature in an environment where passwords

must be hidden from the user is highly discouraged.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 297

Auto typing macro

SETTINGS

TYPING MACRO

Keyboard keys are represented by predefined tags between braces. To specify a single
keyboard character, use the character itself without braces. For example, represent the letter A
by typing the "A" character in the typing macro. To represent more than one character, such as
Hello, append each additional character to the preceding one: "Hello".

SPECIAL KEYS

To specify characters that aren't displayed when you press a key, such as ENTER or TAB, as
well as the keys that represents actions rather than characters, refer to the codes in the following
table.

KEY CODE

BACKSPACE {BACKSPACE}, {BS}, or {BKSP}

BREAK {BREAK}

CAPS LOCK {CAPSLOCK}

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

298 | Remote Desktop Manager

KEY CODE

CTRL + ALT + DELETE` {CTRL-ALT-DEL}

DEL or DELETE {DELETE} or {DEL}

DOWN ARROW {DOWN}

END {END}

ENTER {ENTER}

ESC {ESC}

HELP {HELP}

HOME {HOME}

INS or INSERT {INSERT} or {INS}

LEFT ARROW {LEFT}

NUM LOCK {NUMLOCK}

PAGE DOWN {PGDN}

PAGE UP {PGUP}

PRINT SCREEN {PRTSC}

RIGHT ARROW {RIGHT}

SCROLL LOCK {SCROLLLOCK}

TAB {TAB}

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 299

KEY CODE

UP ARROW {UP}

F1 {F1}

F2 {F2}

F3 {F3}

F4 {F4}

F5 {F5}

F6 {F6}

F7 {F7}

F8 {F8}

F9 {F9}

F10 {F10}

F11 {F11}

F12 {F12}

F13 {F13}

F14 {F14}

F15 {F15}

F16 {F16}

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

300 | Remote Desktop Manager

KEY CODE

Keypad add {ADD}

Keypad subtract {SUBTRACT}

Keypad multiply {MULTIPLY}

Keypad divide {DIVIDE}

To specify keys combined with any combination of the SHIFT, CTRL, and ALT keys, precede the
key code with one or more of the following signs.

KEY CODE

SHIFT +

CTRL ^

ALT %

To specify that any combination of SHIFT, CTRL, and ALT should be held down while several
other keys are pressed, enclose the code for those keys in parentheses. For example, to specify
to hold down SHIFT while E and C are pressed use "+(EC)". To specify to hold down SHIFT
while E is pressed, followed by C, without SHIFT, use "+EC".

SPECIAL COMMANDS

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

{DELAY} This command introduces a delay of 300 ms (default value) before the
next command.

{WINDOW:???} This command focus a window containing the specified name after the
semi colon.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 301

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

{PREV-WINDOW} Select the previous window before executing the remaining commands.

MACRO PASSWORD

You can define a password to be use within the typing macro exclusively. Use the variable
$MACRO_PASSWORD$ to access the password.
6.1.11 Logs

DESCRIPTION

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

When using a Devolutions Online Database data source, an Enterprise

Subscription is required to have access to logging features.

The Logs section controls settings related to the logs of entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

302 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry's properties – Logs section

It also has a feature to warn you if you attempt to open a session, from the same data source, as
another user. The application uses the logs to detect an open connection. Note that applications
closed while being Offline will not register in the logs as closed, and must be manually closed
with a right click.

There are also options to prompt for a comment, optional or required, when a session is opened
or closed. Prompt for comment on open will also prompt for comments when a password is
viewed or copied.

The Warn if already opened option is supported in Embedded (tabbed) display

mode only.

Both prompt for comments are supported in embedded and external display
mode.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 303

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Warn if already Monitors all users of the current data source to verify if the
opened session is already opened. This prevents "stealing" sessions
from other users.

Prompt for comment Prompt the user for a comment when launching the session and
on open when viewing or copying the password. These comments are
logged in the entry's logs.

Open comment is Forces the user to enter an Open session comment.

required

Prompt for comment Prompt the user for a comment when closing the session. Close
on close comments are logged in the entry's logs.

Close comment is Force the user to enter a Close session comment.

required

Right click on the log entry to display the contextual menu to show the log details. You can export
the log or view more information about users.

Right-click on a log entry to display the Log Details contextual menu.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

304 | Remote Desktop Manager

Log details contextual menu

VIEW DETAILS WINDOW

The View Details window has three tabs: General, Details and Comments.

GENERAL TAB

The General tab displays session information to identify the entry and also displays the session
running time. Notes can be entered using the contextual menu in the log entry grid.

DETAILS TAB

The Details tab display information on the user and computer from which the session was
started and on the destination host. It also displays information if the session was forcibly closed
using the Close menu.

COMMENTS TAB

The Comments tab displays the On Open comment and On Close comment.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 305

6.1.12 Management Tools

DESCRIPTION

The Management Tools tab allows you to configure different settings used by the
Macros/Scripts/Tools including credentials when the remote credentials are required. It contains
all of the authentication settings related to the session tools (e.g. Services, Wake-on-LAN, Shutdown Remote
Computer, etc.) available in the application. For example it is used to execute a remote WMI query or a
remote PowerShell script.

The applications available are:

· ControlUp

· IntelAMT

· Is Online (Ping/Port scan)

· Remote Desktop Commander

· Remote Management

· Home Page

· Remote Tools

· Spiceworks

· Wake-on-LAN

SETTINGS

The settings depend on the tool selected.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

306 | Remote Desktop Manager

Tools side menu

CREDENTIALS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use default Use the default credentials. Please note that the application does not
credentials set anything and assume that the current Windows user has all the
privileges required to execute the tool.

Use session Use the same credentials defined in the session directly or in the
credentials linked credential entry.

Custom Use a specific username, password and domain.

credentials

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 307

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Credential Uses a linked Credential Entry which can also be an external

repository credential like KeePass. It is very useful for sharing or reusing
credential among entries.

My personal Use one set of credentials to replace or emulate the ones from your
credentials Windows session. See My Personal Credentials topic.

Prompt for Specify the credentials every time.

credentials

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open VPN before Specifies that the session defined VPN should be activated prior to
execution running the Macros/Scripts/Tools. The application will open it if it's
not already opened.

6.1.12.1 Wake-on-LAN

DESCRIPTION

Wake-on-LAN is an Ethernet computer networking standard, which allows a computer to be

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

308 | Remote Desktop Manager

a different subnet, your router must forward UDP port 9, or whatever you change the port
assignment to. Most users do not have to configure their router or worry about this.

ENABLING WAKE-ON-LAN

The first step is to verify that your computer supports Wake-on-LAN. There’s a few things to look
out for:

· Your network card must support Wake-on-LAN.

· Your power supply must support Wake-on-LAN.

· Wake-on-LAN must be enabled in BIOS.

· Your router must be configured to forward broadcast packets.

· Your OS must be configured to enable Wake-on-LAN.

CONFIGURE REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

You must add a valid MAC address (Media Access Control address) in the session's
configuration. The input field can be found in the Information tab and in the General child tab.
The field name is MAC.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 309

Session configuration - Wak e-on-LAN

You can use the Ellipsis button to automatically determine the MAC address. If this is
unsuccessful, you will need to enter it manually.

ABOUT THE MAC ADDRESS DISCOVERY

The discovery process will initially attempt to use the ARP protocol. This is fast and does not
require authentication, but there are requirements on the network aspect that may not be met. If
ARP was not successful, another attempt is made using WMI. This is slower and requires
authentication. RDM will use the credentials as configured in the entry's properties or the
credentials entered in the Management Tools tab.

USE WAKE-ON-LAN

If the settings are correctly configured, you can invoke the Wake-on-LAN from the session's
context menu, which can be found in the Macros/Scripts/Tools - Wake-on-LAN menu.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

310 | Remote Desktop Manager

Session tools - Wak e-on-LAN

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 311

6.1.13 Advanced

DESCRIPTION

The Advanced tab contains settings such as the internal data source ID and session ID. These values can be
used to invoke Remote Desktop Manager from a command line or even a web protocol handler.

SETTINGS

MISCELLANEOUS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Override domain Allow you to override the domain when the credential are sent to
the remote session. Select between:

Default: Use the domain from the domain field in the session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

312 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use Host Name: Use the host name (computer name) as the
domain.

Custom Domain: Use the domain in the Domain field from the
Information section (in entry overview).

Use Domain from UPN: Use the UPN's domain.

Allow open multiple When a connection is already open and you reopen it, create a
connections new instance instead of focusing on the other session.

Username format Determines the username's format. Useful when connecting to

remote systems that have a single field for the username but
where you still need to send the domain name in order to
authenticate. The possible values are:

· No Change: Does not change the username.

· {Domain}\{User}: Formats the username by prefixing with the

domain name.

· {User}@}Domain}: Formats the username by appending the

domain name.

· {User}: Trims the domain to keep only the username.

Custom host port With this you can input a customizable port for the host.

Undock maximized Display mode undocked will be maximized when launched.

Automatically close Check if you want your session to automatically close after a
session after given number of minutes.

IDS (USED IN A COMMAND LINE OR IN POWERSHELL SCRIPTS)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 313

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Database ID Internal RDM database ID. Used as a Command Line

Arguments or when using RDM PowerShell module.

Data Source ID Internal RDM data source ID. Used as a Command Line
Arguments or when using RDM PowerShell module.

Session ID Internal RDM session ID. Used as Command Line Arguments

or when using RDM PowerShell module.

Command line Fully defined command line to start this session via a
command line. Hit the copy button to copy the entire command
line.

Create Desktop Automatically create a Remote Desktop Manager shortcut on

Shortcut your desktop.

Create web URL Automatically create a web URL. Requires that the protocol
handler has been registered by our installer.

Creation source The creation source is used when deleting and moving entries
using the Synchronizer.

6.2 Sessions

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager separates the connection types in four different categories:

· General

· Remote connections

· Virtualization

· File Browser

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

314 | Remote Desktop Manager

· Other

GENERAL

This category contains the more popular and frequently used sessions.

REMOTE CONNECTIONS

This category contains all of the remote connections types that are used to connect to remote
systems, including computers, switches, VPNs, printers, etc.

VIRTUALIZATION

This category contains all of the virtualization connections, including the local virtual machines
tools and server tools. Remote Desktop Manager supports tools from Microsoft, VMware,
Oracle and more.

FILE BROWSER

This category contains all the cloud file browser integrated in Remote Desktop Manager.

OTHER

This category contains many useful session types that are not directly supported, or those
that are neither a virtualization nor a remote connection. For example we find the Command
Line (External Application), the Inventory Report and the Play List session types in this group.
6.2.1 Open a Remote Connection

There are two ways of establishing a connection. It is possible to either:

· Add entries in the connection list.

· Use the Quick Connect feature.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 315

Depending on the method, Remote Desktop Manager can use a completely different application
or library. For example, the external mode for Remote Desktop uses the Microsoft Remote
Desktop's client (mstsc.exe), and the embedded mode uses the Remote Desktop ActiveX
control.

CONFIGURED CONNECTION

There are many ways to open a session:

· Double-click the entry in the connection list.

· Press enter while the entry is selected.

· Use the context menu (right-click).

· Click Open Session on the Home tab (ribbon).

· Use the commands in the dashboard.

All entry types have a default action associated with them (e.g. Open, Navigate URL). These
actions are executed when you use any means described above. The default action is often
"Open", but you can modify it for certain entry types.

Remote Desktop Manager provides three display modes:

· External

· Embedded (tabbed)

· Undocked

Please note that not all sessions support the three modes. It depends on the integration and the
availability of the third party application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

316 | Remote Desktop Manager

Display mode

EXTERNAL MODE

With the External mode, the session is opened as an external process with no direct link to
Remote Desktop Manager.

This display mode usually launches the native application. For example the native application for
RDP is mstsc.exe. The external mode will automatically run on the Primary monitor. Depending
on the type of session, an external mode session view will be updated if Remote Desktop
Manager can detect that its running.

EMBEDDED (TABBED) MODE

An embedded session runs within Remote Desktop Manager window and displays tabs at the
top of the Dashboard. This mode centralizes the opened session in the application which makes
it easy to switch from one to another.

There are several session-specific actions available by right clicking (Contextual Menu) on a tab
title.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 317

Web session opened in Embedded mode

UNDOCKED

While the embedded mode is useful in some cases, you may prefer to move the content in an
external window. If so, this can be easily done using the contextual menu. Remote Desktop
Manager will create a new window to contain the tabbed session allowing you to move it
anywhere else (i.e. on another screen).

To dock the content back to its original place, use the context menu by right clicking on the
window icon.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

318 | Remote Desktop Manager

Undock ed session window context menu

Undocked mode supports different configurations for multiple monitor setups.

OPEN WITH PARAMETERS

You may specify different connection options when opening an entry. Click the arrow below
Open Session on the Home tab or use the right-click context menu.

Examples of special actions:

· Open Full Screen.

· Embedded/External Display Mode.

· Console or admin mode with the RDP protocol.

· Force prompt for credentials.

· Open with or without the configured VPN.

· Open from a template.

6.2.2 Remote Connections

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 319

This category contains all of the connection types that are used to connect to a remote system,
including computers, switches, VPNs, printers, etc.

Session - Remote Connections

SUPPORTED REMOTE CONNECTIONS:

We support a very wide range of connections, ranging from Apple Remote Desktop, Web
Browser (http/https), LogMeIn and much more. Explore to your heart's content!.
6.2.2.1 Apple Remote Desktop

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

320 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure an Apple Remote Desktop session.

· Remote management of · Embedded Mode · Undocked Mode

macOS devices

· Supports Credential · Show Opened Session · Supports Logging

repository

Apple Remote Desktop is our integration of the remote connection protocol created by Apple.
This session allows to remotely control or monitor macOS devices.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Apple Remote Desk top - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the host name or IP address of the remote device.

Ellipsis button Provides the list of computers discovered on your network. This can
take a few moments to generate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 321

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Port Enter the port to access the remote computer. Set the value to 0 to
use the default port.

Port generator Click the icon to display the Port Generator.

Username Enter the username to connect to the remote computer.

Password Enter the password to connect to the remote computer.

View / Hide Click the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click the hide icon to hide your password.

Password History Click the icon to display the Password History.

Password Indicates the strength of the password.

Analyzer

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

322 | Remote Desktop Manager

Apple Remote Desk top - Settings

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Scaled Scale the remote display to fit the window.

Screen Select the screen where you want to display the remote connection.
Select between:

· Default: Use the setting in File – Options – Types – Others –

Apple Remote Desktop (ARD).

· Primary: Display the primary screen.

· Custom: Select which screen to display.

· Prompt: Prompt at opening to select the remote display if there is

more than one.

View only (input Connect in view only mode. This option disables the keyboard and
ignored) mouse while in session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 323

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Request shared The remote user will be prompted with a request to share his
session session.

Disable clipboard Disable the clipboard sharing.

transfer

Authentication Select the authentication mode for the connection. Select between:
type
· ARD

· ARD ask observe

· ARD ask control

ADVANCED

Apple Remote Desk top - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mouse cursor Select the way the mouse cursor is handled. Select between:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

324 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Track remote cursor locally

· Let remote server deal with mouse cursor

· Don't show remote cursor

Emulate 3 buttons (with Emulate mouse button 3 when clicking on both button 1 and
2-button click) button 2.

Swap mouse buttons 2 Invert mouse buttons 2 and 3.

and 3

Apply Windows key Select where the key combinations are sent. Select between:
combinations
· On the local computer

· On the remote computer

· In full screen mode only

Keyboard layout Select the keyboard layout. Select between:

· Azerty

· Qwerty

Preferred encoding Change the encoding to use less bandwidth. From the least to
the most bandwidth used, select between:

· Zlib 16 gray (black and white)

· Zlib halftone (black and white)

· Zlib thousands (in color)

· Zlib (you can choose your custom compression level)

· Default (color)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 325

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Custom compression Available only with the Preferred encoding - Zlib encoding.
level

Find out more information about Apple Remote Desktop on https://support.apple.com/en-ca/remote-

desktop.

6.2.2.2 BeyondTrust Passw ord Safe Dashboard

DESCRIPTION

BeyondTrust Password Safe Dashboard connects to your BeyondTrust Password Safe

account. You need to include the BeyondTrust API key in the entry properties.

This entry is used to define and configure a BeyondTrust Password Safe

Console session. It supports the following:

· Credential repository · Copy Password · Support Logging

· Support Host · Show Opened Session

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

326 | Remote Desktop Manager

BeyondTrust Password Safe Dashboard

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the server name and port (ex: https://yourserver:8080)

Username Enter the username to connect on the server

Domain Enter the domain to connect on the server

Password Enter the password to connect on the server

Application Enter the Application API key. Consult the section How to obtain the
API key Application API key below to retrieve the Application Key.

HOW TO OBTAIN THE APPLICATION API KEY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 327

Connect on BeyondInsight, go in the Password Safe section and then go in Application API
Registration.

BeyondInsight

6.2.2.3 FTP

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager includes built-in FTP and SFTP entries. We also support Filezilla and
WinSCP.

To set the default application for FTP (Third Party), go to File – Options – FTP. The choices
are Windows Explorer, Filezilla or WinSCP.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

328 | Remote Desktop Manager

FTP entry properties

6.2.2.4 Host

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a generic host session that could be used as the
parent for others. You can define a subset of templates to apply at the execution.

This entry is used to define and configure a Host session. It supports the following:

· Auto Login (embedded · Copy Password · Credential repository

mode only)

· Embedded Mode · External Mode · Show Opened Session

Since no session can be established with simply a Host entry, this is mostly useful to either apply
templates, or to serve as a parent for sub-connections. Please see Templates for more details.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 329

GENERAL

Host - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use host from Use the template host (if using a template).
template

Host Enter the hostname or IP address of the remote device.

Elipsis button Provides the list of computers discovered on your network. This can
take a few moments to generate.

Always prompt Prompt you every time for the hostname or IP address.
for host

Use credentials Use the template credentials (if using a template).

from template

Username Enter the username that applies to the host.

Domain Enter the domain that applies to the host.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

330 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Enter the password that applies to the Host.

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click on the hide icon to hide your password.

Password Click the icon to display the Password History.

History

Password Indicates the strength of the password.

Analyzer

ADVANCED

The template selected is the one executed when either pressing enter, double-clicking or by
using the Open Session command.

Host - Advanced

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 331

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Template Will display a dialog allowing you to choose which template to apply.

Select You can filter the list of templates by using this command. Using click
templates and ctrl-click to make your selection.

6.2.2.5 LogMeIn

DESCRIPTION

LogMeIn remote access products use a proprietary remote desktop protocol that is transmitted
via SSL. An SSL certificate is created for each remote desktop, and is used to cryptographically
secure communications between the remote desktop and the accessing computer. You can find
more information here.

This entry is used to define and configure a LogMein session. It supports the
following:

· Auto Login · Built in · Copy Password

· Credential repository · Embedded Mode · External Mode

· Show Opened Session · Support Logging · Support Reconnect

Users access remote desktops using an Internet-based web portal and, optionally, the LogMeIn
Ignition stand-alone application. The portal also provides status information for the remote
computers and, optionally, remote computer management functions.

AUTOMATIC LOGIN

You have two modes available to achieve the Auto Login in embedded view.

· LogMeIn Desktop shortcut (LogMeIn Pro only)

· LogMeIn portal with auto login (works with any LogMeIn account)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

332 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

GENERAL

LogMeIn - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Hide navigation bar Hide LogMein navigation bar.

Sandbox process Enable the use of sandbox (computer security) process.

Auto submit Enable the Auto-submit of the credentials.

Hide script errors Hide script errors that can be present in some websites.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 333

LogMeIn - Login

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Login - Enter your Host username.

Username

Host Login - Enter your Host password.

Password

Portal Login - Use the various credential features provided by RDM to set your
Credentials credentials.

Portal Login - Enter your LogMeIn account email address.

Password Enter your LogMeIn account password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

334 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.2.2.5.1 Desktop Shortcut

DESCRIPTION
Note: as stated on the LogMeIn web site (LogMeIn) Desktop Shortcut is a Pro Edition feature.

1. Log in to the LogMeIn website.

2. Select the desired computer.

3. Select the option Settings.

4. Select the tab "Desktop Shortcut".

5. Drag and drop the computer icon in Remote Desktop Manager.

LogMeIn - Edit Computer

6.2.2.5.2 Portal (Host Url)

DESCRIPTION

This connection method can be used with all versions of LogMeIn. This method
requires the session to run Embedded and the use of Internet Explorer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 335

If you are using Internet Explorer 11, you need to change the IE emulation mode to
Internet Explorer 10.

Please consult the LogMeIn troubleshooting topic for more information on how to
proceed.

SETTINGS

1. Log in to the LogMeIn website.

2. Right-Click the URL shortcut of the computer and use the copy command.

LogMeIn - Home screen

3. Paste the information in the LogMeIn portal (host URL) field

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

336 | Remote Desktop Manager

LogMeIn Session - Settings

4. In the Login tab populate both Portal Login and Host Login information

LogMeIn Session - Login

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 337

6.2.2.6 Microsoft Remote Desktop (RDP)

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Microsoft Remote Desktop (RDP)
session.

· Auto Login · Built in · Copy Password

· Credential repository · Embedded Mode · External Mode

· Full Screen · Support Host · Multi Monitor Support

· Show Opened Session · Support · Support Logging

BeforeDisconnectEvent

· Support Reconnect · Support · Batch Edit

AfterDisconnectEvent

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

338 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the host name or IP address of the remote computer.

Ellipsis button Provides the list of computers discovered on your network. This
can take a few moments to generate.

Port Click on the link to modify the port number. Set the port to 0 to use
the default port.

Port generator Click on the icon to display the Port Generator.

RDP Type Select the RDP session type. Select between:

· Normal

· Azure

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 339

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Hyper-V (embedded only)

Username Enter the username to connect to the remote computer.

Domain Enter the domain to connect to the remote computer.

Password Enter the password to connect to the remote computer.

Password Analyzer Indicates the strength of the password.

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click on the hide icon to hide your password.

Password Generator Click on the icon to display the Password Generator.

Password History Click on the icon to display the Password History.

Always ask Always ask password when connecting to the remote computer.
password

Store password Use the Windows Credential Manager to store passwords. It is

locally not the best option because it has the following limitations:

· The Credential Manager will hold only one entry per host,
therefore if you have multiple sessions towards the same host,
the last saved entry will overwrite whatever was stored.

· The one host limitation ignores the port, therefore multiple sessions towards
the same host, but with different ports, will conflict as well. Last saved entry
overrides whatever was stored.

Open console Connect to the console session of a server using Remote

(Admin mode) Desktop for Administration. Normally required for TS Session
Hosts only, please consult Note 1.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

340 | Remote Desktop Manager

DISPLAY

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Display

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Screen sizing mode Scale the client window display of the desktop
when resizing between:

· Scrollbar.

· Smart reconnect (reconnect the session

when the window size changes).

· Smart sizing (stretch the remote display to fit

the window).

Remote Desktop Size Select the screen size for the remote computer.

Custom width Specify a custom width number for the screen size.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 341

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Custom height Specify a custom height number for the screen size.

Colors Select the color quality when connected on the

remote computer.

Display the connection bar when Display the connection bar at the top of your screen
in full screen mode in full screen size mode.

Connection bar pinned (full Fix the connection bar at the top of the screen.
screen)

LOCAL RESOURCES

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Local Resources

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

342 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Remote computer Indicate what to do with the sound on the remote computer.
sound Select between:

· Bring to this computer

· Do not play

· Leave at remote computer

Remote audio Indicate what to do with the audio recording on the remote
recording computer. Select between:

· Do not record

· Record from this computer

Keyboard Specify how key combination should be executed. Select

between:

· On the local computer

· On the remote computer

· In full screen mode only

Local devices and Select the devices and resources that you wish to use on the
resources remote computer. Select between:

· Printers

· Serial Ports

· Hard drives

· Clipboard

· Prompt for selected resources (Only available in

external mode)

· Other supported Plug and Play (PnP) devices

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 343

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Smart cards

All drives Select this option if you want all of your drives to be present on
the remote computer.

Specific drives Select one or more specific drive that you want to be present
on the remote computer.

PROGRAMS

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Programs

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Start the following program Enable to specify a program to launch on the remote
on connection (alternate computer when the connection is established.
shell)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

344 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Program path and filename Specify the program path and filename to start when the
connection is established.

Start in the following folder Specify the working folder used by the program in the
previous step.

Use RemoteApp (seamless Open an rdp connection, starts a specified program,

mode) maximizes the application window and runs without the
windows desktop.

Program Specify the program for the RemoteApp.

Parameters Specify the parameters for the RemoteApp.

Execute the following Enable if you wish to automatically run a program

program after login immediately after login.

EXPERIENCE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 345

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Experience

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Choose the connection speed to Specify the connection speed to use to optimize the
optimize performance remote session performance. Select between:

· Default

· Modem (56 kbps)

· Low-speed broadcast (256 kbps - 2 Mbps)

· Satellite (2-16 Mbps with high latency)

· High-speed broadcast (2-10 Mbps)

· WAN (>10 Mbps with high latency)

· LAN (> 10 Mbps with low latency)

Allow the following Enable the following features on the remote

computer:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

346 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Desktop background

· Font smoothing

· Desktop composition

· Show window contents while dragging

· Menu and window animation

· Visual styles

· Persistent bitmap caching

· Redirect DirectX

· Redirect video playback

· Load plug-ins in embedded mode

· Enable data compression

· Detect network automatically

· Detect bandwith automatically

· Reconnect if connection is dropped

Cache Select the type of cache that will be used for the
remote session:

· Default: Use the value set in File – Options –

Type – RDP – Cache.

· Full mode: This protocol is full Windows 8

Remote Desktop protocol.

· Thin client: This protocol is limited to using the

Windows 7 with SP1 RemoteFX codec and a
smaller cache. All other codecs are disabled. This
protocol has the smallest memory footprint.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 347

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Small cache: This protocol is the same as Full

mode, except it uses a smaller cache.

Keep alive Data will be sent to the remote computer to keep the
session alive. You can determinate the time
between that and when the data is send. This option
is only available in embedded mode.

CONNECTION

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Connection

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Server authentication verifies If the actual verification does not meet minimum
that you are connecting to the policy requirements, select what needs to be done
intended remote computer by the remote computer between the following:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

348 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Connect and don't warn me

· Do not connect

· Warn me

Activate network level Network Level Authentication completes user

authentication (SingleSignOn) authentication before you establish a remote
session and the logon screen appears. This is a
more secure authentication method.

Automatically detect RD The RD Gateway server settings will be detected by

Gateway server settings the application automatically.

Use these RD Gateway server Indicate the specific settings to connect on the RD
settings Gateway server.

Host Enter the RD Gateway server/host name.

Logon method Select the logon method between:

· Ask for password (NTLM)

· Smart card

· Allow me to select later

· Use a gateway access token

Gateway access token Provide the access token if the Logon method is
set to Use a gateway access token.

Open gateway only when unable Establish a connection with the RD Gateway server
to ping host only when it is not possible to ping the remote
computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 349

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Bypass RD Gateway server for Bypass the RD Gateway server when connecting on
local addresses a remote computer who has a local IP address.

Use same RD Gateway Use your personal RD Gateway credentials to

credentials as remote computer connect on the remote computer.

Credentials See RDP Gateway credentials section below.

Do not use RD Gateway server Don't use any RD Gateway server to connect on the
remote computer.

RDP GATEWAY CREDENTIALS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

350 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Gateway Credentials

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use custom Use a specific username, domain and store the password on
credentials the local computer or store the password in the database.

Store password on the This will use the Windows Credential Manager. It is not the best
local computer option because it has the following limitations:

· The Credential Manager will hold only one entry per host,
therefore if you have multiple sessions towards the same
host, the last saved entry will overwrite whatever was stored.

· The one host limitation ignores the port, therefore multiple

sessions towards the same host, but with different ports, will

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 351

OPTION DESCRIPTION

conflict as well. Last saved entry overrides whatever was

stored.

Store password in the The password will be store in the database.

database

Domain Set the domain name.

Use Credential Use a linked credential entry.

repository

Inherited Use inherited credentials.

Use my personal Use the credentials stored in My Personal Credentials.

credentials

Use Private Vault Use the Search string to search for credential entries in the
search Private Vault.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

352 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Remote Desk top - (RDP) - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Enable CredSSP support RDP will use the Credential Security Support Provider
(CredSSP) for the authentication on the remote
computer. Select between:

Log off mode Select the log off method between:

· Default

· Automatic

· RDM Agent

· Remote Desktop Services API

· Macro

Automatically logoff when Automatically log off your RDP session when
disconnecting disconnecting.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 353

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Reconnect mode Select the reconnect behavior. Select between:

· Default

· Full

· Smart reconnect

· Legacy

RDP Version Select the Remote Desktop Protocol version.

Minimal input send interval Set the minimum time in milliseconds between the
input is send to the remote computer.

Background input The remote computer can accept input even when the
focus is not on the session.

Restriced admin mode This enables the restricted admin mode.

Enable super pan Enabling super pan will take the entirety of your screen
for the RDM session.

Prompt for credentials on Always prompt for credentials when launching client.
client

Public mode Public mode is a security feature that limits the

security information stored on the remote station. It
also limits the amount of time this information can be
stored.

Workspace ID Enter the Workspace ID that contain the setting

associate to the RemoteApp and Desktop ID.

Use redirection server Redirect a remote computer to the RDP session host.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

354 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Alternate full address Indicate an alternate name of the remote computer

that you want to connect on.

Load balance info Indicate the load balance info when the load balancing
feature is enable on the RD Connection Broker.

NOTE 1

As per knowledge base article 947723, since rdp 6.1 (Windows 2008), using the admin mode is
not necessary except when the server itself is a RD Session Host.
6.2.2.6.1 Azure RDP

OVERVIEW

Azure RDP is a Windows Remote Desktop session directly into an Azure role instance without
having to use the Azure Management Console (https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/).

SETTINGS

1. Enable Azure RDP access by following these instructions:

2. Open the Azure Portal (https://portal.azure.com) and select the deployment you would like to
connect to. You'll need the DNS name (Computer), Role Name & Role IDs.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 355

Azure Portal

3. Create a new RDP session with the following values:

Host: Azure DNS
Role Name: Azure role name
ID: The azure role ID (if you have 8 instances running, then 0 - 7 are the IDs)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

356 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Azure
6.2.2.6.2 Hyper-V RDP

DESCRIPTION

You can connect to a Hyper-V instance using RDP through the Hyper-V server. There is no
need to enable RDP on the Hyper-V instance, because Remote Desktop Manager features two
levels of authentication.

Auto login to the Hyper-V instance is not supported.

The credentials provided are for the Hyper-V server (not the instance).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 357

SETTINGS

To use Hyper-V Remote Desktop Manager needs to be run as an

administrator.

Hyper-V RDP session

Create a new RDP session on the Hyper-V server. Input your login credentials prior to selecting
the Hyper-V instance.

The Hyper-V enhanced sessions mode is supported in Remote Desktop

Manager.

The Hyper-V session support the Hyper-V v2 with a Windows Server 2012 R2
destination.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

358 | Remote Desktop Manager

ENHANCED SESSION MODE

Enhanced session mode allows redirection of local devices and resources from computers
running Virtual Machine Connection.

Enhanced session mode provides the following capabilities:

· Display Configuration
· Audio redirection
· Printer redirection
· Full clipboard support (improved over limited prior-generation clipboard support)
· Smart Card support
· USB Device redirection
· Drive redirection
· Redirection for supported Plug and Play devices

You don’t need a network connection to the Virtual Machine session like you would with RDP.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Try using Hyper-V Tools for Remote Administration: https://technet.microsoft.com/en-

us/library/cc794756.aspx
6.2.2.7 Pow erShell Remote Console

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a PowerShell Remote Console

session.

The PowerShell Remote Console performs PowerShell operations on a remote device.

SETTINGS

The remote system must be configured to allow remote commands. Please

consult Enable and Use Remote Commands in Windows PowerShell.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 359

GENERAL

PowerShell Remote Console - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select the type of connection. Select between:

· Computer name

· Connection uri

· VM name

· VM Id

Host Enter the host name or IP address of the remote device.

Ellipsis button Provides the list of computers discovered on your network. This can
take a few moments to generate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

360 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Port Enter the port to access the remote computer. Set the port to 0 to
use the default port.

Port generator Clicking on the icon to display the Port Generator.

Use SSL Secure the connection with SSL encryption (https).

Configuration Enter the PowerShell session configuration name.

Username Enter the username of the remote device.

Domain Enter the domain of the remote device.

Password Enter the password of the remote device.

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click on the hide icon to hide your password.

Password Click on the icon to display the Password Generator.

Generator

Password History Click on the icon to display the Password History.

Password Indicates the strength of the password.

Analyzer

RUN AS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 361

PowerShell Remote Console - Run As

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None Turns off the Run As function.

Current session Use the credential provided under the General tab.

Custom Use custom Username, Password and Domain.

Credential Select an existing credential entry with the combo box or the ellipsis
repository button.

My personal Retrieve the credentials from My Personal Credentials. Click on the

credentials ellipsis button to edit your personal credentials.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

362 | Remote Desktop Manager

PowerShell Remote Console - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Other parameters Enter additional parameters you wish to use.

PowerShell Select the PowerShell version to use. Select between:

version
· Default (Current Version)

· Version 2

Resize window Force window resize (buffer & window).

Run as Run PowerShell command as a administrator.

Administrator

Run in 64-bit Run RDM CmdLet in 64 bits version.

mode

Single thread Starts Windows PowerShell using a single-threaded apartment.

apartment

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 363

6.2.2.8 ScreenConnect

DESCRIPTION

ScreenConnect offers lightning-fast remote support and remote access to connect and solve
problems faster.

This entry is used to define and configure a ScreenConnect session.

· Auto Login · Copy Password · Show Opened Session

· External Mode · Show Opened Session · Support Logging

Consult the How-to Configure ScreenConnect 5 in Remote Desktop Manager

topic if you want to configure a ScreenConnect 5 session.

To use version 2.3 of the ScreenConnect extension, you must have Remote
Desktop Manager version 13.5.5.0 or above.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

364 | Remote Desktop Manager

Screenconnect - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the name or IP address of the ScreenConnect server. You

also need to specify the port.

Username Enter the username of the ScreenConnect server.

Password Enter the password of the ScreenConnect server.

Password Analyzer Indicates the strength of the password.

Always ask Always ask password when connecting to ScreenConnect server.

password

Use One Time Uses the OTP setting.

Password

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 365

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Session name Select or enter the machine name or session name to connect.

Always prompt for With this option the system will ask you which session you wish to
session name start each time you open the session.

Use session name Use the session name as a filter to reduce choices.
as filter

Connection type Specify the connection type. Select between:

· Guest

· Host

Auto create If the sessions doesn't exist it will be created with these settings.

Session group Specify the session group. Select between:

· User Sessions

· Meetings

Session type Specify the session type. Select between:

· Published

· Secure Code

· On invitation only

Secure code Specify the secure code to use. Only available when the Session
Code session type is selected.

INVITATION EMAILS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

366 | Remote Desktop Manager

Screenconnect - Invitation emails

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Invitation An invitation email will be sent at the session opening for each email in
Emails the list. One email per line needs to be enter.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 367

Screenconnect - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Version Select the version of ScreenConnect that you want to use in the
application.

· Default: Use the default version of ScreenConnect that you have set
in File - Options- Types - ScreenConnect.

· Version 4.x and lower: Use the version 4 and lower of

ScreenConnect.

· Extension (Version 5 or higher): You need to install the extension

from the ScreenConnect browser extension to use this version of
ScreenConnect.

User display With this setting you can decide whether you want to display your
name windows username or data source username.

6.2.2.9 Spicew orks

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

368 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a Spiceworks session. At this time, it is
simply a wrapper to open the dashboard, submit your credentials, and optionally
focus to a group or a device.

SETTINGS

Spicework s - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Spiceworks host Enter the URL of the Spiceworks server. Ensure that the protocol and
port are specified. i.e. http://spiceworks:9675

Email Email address used as account identifier on Spiceworks services.

Password Enter the password to access the Spicework Host.

Web browser Select the web browser to use.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 369

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mode Select between the following modes:

· Dashboard

· Group

· Help Desk

USAGE

Specify the server URL and enter valid credentials. By default, the dashboard view will be shown
after the credentials have been submitted and accepted.

You can elect to show directly a specific group by choosing the group option, then using the
ellipsis to select the specific group to display.

You must have the required permissions to view groups to use the group link
feature.

You can alternatively elect to display a specific device by choosing the device option, then using
the ellipsis to select the specific device to display.

You must have the required permissions to view the devices to use the device
link feature.

6.2.2.10 Telnet

DESCRIPTION

Telnet is a network protocol used to provide a bidirectional interactive text-oriented

communication facility using a virtual terminal connection.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

370 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a Telnet session.

· Embedded Mode · Show Opened Session · Support Logging

· External Mode · Credential repository

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Telnet - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter your Telnet remote host name to connect.

Port Enter the port to connect to the remote host.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 371

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Username Enter your account username.

Password Enter your account password.

Always ask Always ask password when connecting to the session.

password

User prompt string Type down a string for user prompt.

Password prompt Type down a string for password prompt.

string

Delay Set active delay between actions on connection.

POST LOGIN

Telnet - Post Login

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

372 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Automatic {ENTER} Emulates the keystroke {ENTER} automatically between

after command commands, use with delay for best result.

Delay Delay between commands.

Commands Set up commands to send.

PROXY

Telnet - Proxy

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 373

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Proxy type Select your Proxy type between:

· None

· Socks4

· Socks5

· HTTP

· Telnet

· Local

Credential Use the Credential repository of RDM for your proxy connection.
repository

Host Enter the proxy host address.

Port Enter the proxy port.

Username Enter the username of the proxy host.

Password Enter the password of the proxy host.

Excluded hosts The Excluded hosts box may contain more than one exclusion
range, separated by commas. Enter hosts that would automatically
be excluded.

Consider proxying Connections to the local host are never proxied, even if the proxy
local host exclude list does not explicitly contain them. It is very unlikely that
connections this behaviour would ever cause problems, but if it does you can
change it by enabling this option Consider proxying local host
connections.

DNS name lookup If you are using a proxy to access a private network, it can make a
at proxy end difference whether DNS name resolution is performed by WinSCP

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

374 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

itself (on the client machine) or performed by the proxy. The Do

DNS name lookup at proxy end configuration option allows you
to control this, select between:

· Automatic: WinSCP will do something it considers appropriate

for each type of proxy. Telnet, HTTP and SOCKS5 proxies will
have host names passed straight to them; SOCKS4 proxies will
not.

· No: WinSCP will always do its own DNS, and will always pass
an IP address to the proxy.

· Yes: WinSCP will always pass host names straight to the proxy
without trying to look them up first.

Telnet/local proxy If you are using the Telnet proxy type, the usual command required
command by the firewall’s Telnet server is connect, followed by a host name
and a port number. If your proxy needs a different command, you
can enter an alternative here.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 375

Telnet - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Internet protocol This option allows the user to select between the old and new
Internet protocols and addressing schemes, choose between:

· Default (WinSCP)

· IPv4

· IPv6

Initial keypad mode This option sets the initial status of the keypad

· Default

· Application

· Normal

Close on Close the session when disconnecting or when an error occur.

disconnect or error

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

376 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.2.2.11 VNC

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a VNC session.

· Auto Login · Built in · Copy Password

· Credential repository · Embedded Mode · External Mode

· Full Screen · Support Host · Multi Monitor Support

· Show Opened Session · Support · Support Logging

AfterDisconnectEvent

Only Ultra VNC and our Default VNC is supported in Embedded mode. All other
VNC applications supported by Remote Desktop Manager are available only in
External mode.

Providing the password in external mode is only supported by UltraVNC.

SETTINGS

Embedded UltraVNC is the recommended mode for maximum compatibility. It also supports
chats and files transfer while connected.

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 377

VNC - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

VNC Select your VNC application. The drop-down menu will have different
application option depending if you wish to run your session in Embedded or
External mode.

Embedded mode:

· Default

· VNC

External mode:

· RealVNC

· TightVNC

· UltraVNC

· VNC Viewer plus

Custom By selecting Custom configuration you will have to enter all required
configuration information regarding the remote computer in the Settings and
Advanced tabs. The screen size, color depth and the encryption level

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

378 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

can only be customized when selecting the Custom configuration

option.

Config Enter the path of your configuration file.

filename

Host The host supports a distinct syntax to specify the port and display
number. They must be set as the server requires. This syntax has been
proven to work: {HOSTNAME}::{PORT}:{DISPLAY}.
i.e. $HOST$::5902:2

Port Enter the port number if not using the default port.

Arguments Fully define a command line argument to start the session with.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 379

VNC - Settings

OPTION DESCRIPTION

VNC Password Enter the password for the VNC server

Windows NTLM Enter your NTLM credentials (username, password and domain) to
authentication be authenticated.

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click on the hide icon to hide your password.

Password Click on the icon to display the Password Generator.

Generator

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

380 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password History Click on the icon to display the Password History.

Password Indicates the strength of the password.

Analyzer

Color depth Select the display color depth for the remote computer between:

· True color

· 256 colors

· 64 colors

· 8 colors

· 8 bit color

· 8 grey color (32 bits color screen resolution)

· 4 grey color (32 bits color screen resolution)

· 2 grey color (32 bits color screen resolution)

Scaled The remote display is automatically scaled to fit the size of the
window.

Other parameters Enter any other parameters you wish to use.

Embedded delay Adjust this value if more initialization time is required.

(x64 only)

Request shared Allows several clients to share the same VNC session. If this option
session isn't set, only one client can be connected to the same Server. If a
new "non-shared" client is connected, existing clients are
disconnected, or new connection is dropped, depending on the
server's configuration.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 381

OPTION DESCRIPTION

View only (input Disable the session's input. No keyboard or mouse events are sent
ignored) from the viewer to the server.

Hide toolstrip Hide the toolstrip.

Show status Enables you to view the status window.

window

Disable clipboard Disable the clipboard synchronization (used for the copy-paste).
transfer

ADVANCED

VNC - Advanced

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

382 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mouse cursor Select the mouse cursor behavior. Select between:

· Track remote cursor locally

· Let remote server deal with mouse cursor

· Don't show remote cursor

Emulate 3 buttons Emulate mouse button 3 when clicking on both button 1 and
(with 2-button click) button 2.

Swap mouse buttons Switch your mouse buttons 2 and 3.

2 and 3

Track mouse Track the mouse movement in real-time.

movement

Preferred encoding Change the encoding to use less bandwidth. From the least to
the most bandwidth, select between:

· Default

· Auto

· CoRRE

· Hextile

· Raw

· RRE

· Tight

· Ultra

· Zlib

· ZlibHEX

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 383

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· ZRLE

Custom compression Option available only when choosing the Preferred encoding
level Zlib.

JPEG compression For information value only.

level

DSM filename If you choose to use a DSM plug-in for your connection, you can
choose between:

· MSRC4 plugin

· SecureVNCPlugin

· SecureVNCPluginARC4

Proxy If using a proxy server enter the host and port to connect.

6.2.2.12 Wayk Now

This entry is used to define and configure a Wayk Now session.

· Embedded Mode · External Mode · Full Screen

· Support Host · Show Opened Session

Wayk Now allows to take control of a remote computer to offer assistance. For more
information about this product, please consult the Wayk Now Online Help.

HOW TO USE WAYK NOW

A brief demonstration of how to use Devolutions remote access protocol, Wayk Now.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

384 | Remote Desktop Manager

To use Wayk Now from Remote Desktop Manager, Wayk Now must be installed
on the remote computer.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Wayk Now - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Wayk Den source Select between the Wayk Den source:

· Default (Cloud)

· Cloud

· Local

Connection mode Connect with the host or a unique ID.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 385

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the remote computer’s Source ID (6-digit identification

number) or IP address.

Preferred Select between the authentication mode to use:

authentication · Default

· Prompt For Permission

· Secure Remote Password

· Secure Remote Delegation

Username Enter the username of the remote computer. Only when using the
secure remote delegation authentication mode.

Password Enter the password of the remote computer.

View / Hide Click on the icon to view or hide the password.

password

Password Click on the icon to display the Password Generator.

generator

Password history Click on the icon to display the password history for this session.

Password Indicates the strength of the password.

Analyzer

Friendly name Enter a custom name for the remote user to recognize you in the
chat window.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

386 | Remote Desktop Manager

Wayk Now - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Quality Choose the quality of the remote session:

Mode · Default

· Low

· Medium

· High

Scaled Automatically scale the remote session to fit the window.

Apply Select where the Windows key combinations are applied:

Windows · On the local computer
key · On the remote computer
combinatio · In full screen mode only
ns

WAYK NOW SESSION IN REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 387

Example of Wayk Now Session in Remote Desk top Manager

For more information about available settings during an active session, please see the Wayk
Now online help.
6.2.3 Virtualization

DESCRIPTION

This category contains all of the virtualization session types that are used to connect to a virtual
remote system.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

388 | Remote Desktop Manager

Virtualization Entries

Here is a list of our Virtualization remote session:

· VMware (Player, Workstation, vSphere)
· Microsoft Hyper-V Dashboard
· XenServer Dashboard
· VMWare Dashboard
· Oracle VirtualBox
· Amazon Aws Dashboard
· Microsoft RDS Dashboard (Terminal Server)
· VMware Remote Console

6.2.3.1 Amazon Aw s Dashboard

DESCRIPTION

The Amazon Web Services (AWS) Dashboard allows you to perform operations
against the different AWS services.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 389

PREREQUISITES

Existing AWS account for the services supported by the console and currently valid access keys.

WORKFLOW

GENERAL

Amazon Aws Dashboard - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Friendly name Note: Field will be deprecated in RDM version 2020.2

(Deprecated)

Access key ID This is the User used to authenticate the access to AWS.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

390 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Secret access key This is the Password used to authenticate the access to AWS.

View / Hide Click the view icon to view your password.

Password
Click the hide icon to hide your password.

Password History Click on the icon to display the Password History.

Region Select the appropriate region for best results.

CREDENTIALS

This tab supports a variety of RDM's credential feature to best suit your needs.
6.2.3.2 Microsoft Hyper-V Dashboard

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Hyper-V session.

SETTINGS

To use Hyper-V Remote Desktop Manager needs to be run as an

administrator.

The Microsoft Hyper-V Dashboard is illustrated below, and provides a platform to configure your
Hyper-V session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 391

Hyper-V Console

GENERAL

The following connection type uses vmconnect.exe. Please refer to Hyper-V RDP for further
details.

Hyper-V - General Tab

We recommend using a Hyper-V RDP for a built-in and embedded view support.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

392 | Remote Desktop Manager

Hyper-V (embedded only)

ADVANCED

The Resources monitoring tab is only available in the console mode. The costly columns will
appear only when the corresponding option is selected.

Hyper-V - Advanced Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 393

OPTION DESCRIPTION

VM processor Monitor the processor usage of the virtual machine

usage

VM Memory Monitor the memory demand of the virtual machine.

Demand

6.2.3.3 VMw are Dashboard

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a VMware Dashboard session. The
VMWare Console allows for basic administrative tasks of a VMWare host.

There are multiple steps to properly configure the PowerCLI on client

workstations. Please follow the instructions thoroughly.

Some operations are not allowed on the Free edition of VMware Esxi.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

394 | Remote Desktop Manager

Simply enter the host name or IP, the username and the password of a user with administrative
rights on the host.

VMware Dashboard - General Tab

SETTING DESCRIPTION

Host Host name of the vSphere server.

Ellipsis button Performs network discovery to offer a list of servers.

Username Username used to connect to the server.

Password Password used to connect to the server.

Hide/Reveal Shows or hides the clear text password. Available for:

password
· Administrators.

· Users that have the Allow Reveal Password privilege.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 395

SETTING DESCRIPTION

· For entries that have the Allow password for everybody

setting.

Generate Displays the Password Generator.

password

Always ask Select to force entry of the password upon every use. Disables the
password Password entry control.

Console Choose between:

connection mode
Default: Uses the VMware remote console.

VMware Player: Uses the VMware player.

VMware remote console: Uses the VMware remote console.

ACTIONS

ACTION DESCRIPTION

Power on Powers on the virtual machine

Power off Powers off the virtual machine

Suspend Suspends the virtual machine

Shut down Shuts down the virtual machine. Only available when the VMware guest
guest tools are running.

Restart Restarts the virtual machine. Only available when the VMware guest tools
guest are running.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

396 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION DESCRIPTION

Connect Connect with the technology specified in the Console Connection mode
setting of the console

New Creates a persistent entry for the selected virtual machine.

Host Name of the VMware Dashboard entry

Refresh Refreshes the list of virtual machines

Auto Select to enable automatic refreshing of the content at a regular interval.

refresh

6.2.4 File Browser

DESCRIPTION

This category contains all of the File Browser session types that are used to connect to cloud
remote system.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 397

6.2.4.1 Microsoft OneDrive Ex plorer

SETTINGS

This entry is used to define and configure a Microsoft

OneDrive Explorer session. Microsoft OneDrive Explorer
allows to perform everyday operations with documents stored
in Microsoft OneDrive using the Windows Explorer, as if the
files were on the local computer.

To configure an OneDrive for Business session, please consult the OneDrive for
Business topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

398 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

OneDrive Explorer - General Tab

GENERAL

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Microsoft Account Enter the email of the Microsoft Account used to access OneDrive.

Password Enter the password of the Microsoft account used to access

OneDrive.

Password Analyzer Indicates the strength of the password.

Always ask Always prompt for the password when the session is launched.
password

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 399

OPTION DESCRIPTION

OneDrive type Select your OneDrive type. Select between:

· Consumer

· Business

Account Status This label will tell you whether or not the entry is validated and
ready for use.

Validate OneDrive You can use this toggle on and off the validation of the entry.

Default Directory Enter the default directory to access OneDrive.

Auto accept API Automatically accept the API permission. If not enabled you will
permissions have to accept the API permission manually when asked to.

Show files in tree Display the storage files in the session tree view (display using
view hierarchy).

ADVANCED

OneDrive Explorer - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Show local files Show local files in the left pane of the session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

400 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Local path Enter the default local file path to open in the local file pane.

6.2.4.1.1 OneDrive for Business

DESCRIPTION

An Office 365 subscription and an Azure subscription are required to get

started. Remote Desktop Manager must be registered in Azure Active
Directory and then request permissions for OneDrive for Business.

In the properties of a OneDrive Explorer session, select Business as the OneDrive type.

OneDrive for Business - General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 401

GENERAL

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Application ID To obtain your Client ID follow Microsoft OneDrive for Business

instructions.

Secret key To obtain your Secret ID follow Microsoft OneDrive for Business
instructions.

REGISTER REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER WITH THE AZURE

MANAGEMENT PORTAL

To authenticate with OneDrive in Remote Desktop Manager, the application must be registered
with the Microsoft Azure Management Portal.

For step-by-step information on how to register your application with OneDrive

Business and how to specify the Office 365 permissions please follow this link.

1. In the Azure Active Directory section, select App registrations, then click on New
application registration.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

402 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Azure Management - Active Directory

2. Name the application, specify that it is a Web application, and also enter
https://login.live.com/oauth20_desktop.srf as the Sign-on URL (Reply URL) as
below.

Microsoft Azure Management - Single Sign-on

The only important URL is the Sign-on URL. Other URLs will not be used by
Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 403

3. Two alphanumeric keys must be retrieved from the Azure Portal to authenticate Remote
Desktop Manager.

3.1. The Application ID. Find it in the properties of the registered application.

3.2. The Secret key. Find it in the Keys blade of the registered application settings. Note
that this key is visible only at the time it is generated. Leaving the blade will hide the key
indefinitely.

Application ID and Secret k ey

OFFICE 365 API PERMISSIONS

You will need to specify permissions for Office 365 SharePoint Online that Remote Desktop
Manager requires. In your permissions to other applications select the Delegated
Permission drop down list of your Office 365 SharePoint Online and add the Read and write
user files and Read user files.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

404 | Remote Desktop Manager

Office 365 SharePoint Online Permission

6.2.4.2 WinSCP

WinSCP is an open source free SSH client for Windows with the focus on secure file transfer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 405

WinSCP Other Parameters

Change the default shell with the Other parameters settings in the general tab.
6.2.5 Others

DESCRIPTION

This category contains other kind of session types that can be used.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

406 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.2.5.1 Data Report

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Data Report session. A Data Report is
composed of a database connection string and a database query to be executed.
The result is displayed in a read only grid with export capabilities. It is useful to
quickly integrate data into the application.

· Auto Login · Copy Password · Credential repository

· Embedded Mode · Show Opened Session · Support Logging

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 407

WORKFLOW
You must configure your connection string and your SQL query. You will also need to know how
to write an SQL statement as this is database dependent.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Data Report - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Source Select your source between:

· Default: The connection string is defined directly within the session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

408 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Credential repository: Use a linked Connection String credential entry

as the connection string.

· Inherited: Navigate down the inheritance graph of the object to find the
connection string.

· Prompt: At open connection time, the system will prompt the user to
select the desired Connection String from credential entry list.

Data source Contains the data source type like ODBC, OLEDB or native. This value is
read only and is automatically extracted from the connection string.

Data Specify the provider used for the database access. This value is read only
provider and is automatically extracted from the connection string.

Connection This value contains the database connection string and can be
string hidden/encrypted for a better security.

Host Contains the connection server name. This value is read only and is
automatically extracted from the connection string.

Username Contains the username used to access the database. This value is read
only and is automatically extracted from the connection string. If using
Windows Authentication the field will be empty.

Password Contains the username used to access the database. This value is read
only and is automatically extracted from the connection string. If using
Windows Authentication the field will be empty.

When the source is set to Prompt you will see a dialog box prior to opening the
connection.

Only the Connection String credential entries from your data source are listed.
Select the entry to use and the report will be executed.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 409

PARAMETERS

Using parameters is quite simple. Write your query with parameter place holders (@Param1
or ? depending of the data provider you use). On the Parameters tab define the parameter type
and default value. When opening the session, you will be prompted for the parameter values.

Data Report - Parameters Tab

Parameter placeholders syntax depends on the chosen data provider:

.NET Framework Data Provider for SQL Server: Uses named parameters in
the format @parametername

.NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB: Uses positional parameter
markers indicated by a question mark (?).

.NET Framework Data Provider for ODBC: Uses positional parameter

markers indicated by a question mark (?)

.NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle: Uses named parameters in the
format: parmname

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

410 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select between 3 types:

· Unused

· Text

· Secured

· Integer

· Numeric

· Date

· DateTime

· GUID

Default value Enter the default value.

Exec Query Once your have set the default value of your parameter you can
execute your query fields.

Show parameters in Show the parameter name in the report header. You can change
report header the parameter name by clicking on Parameter.

QUERY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 411

Data Report - Query Tab

Enter the query in the Query tab, which features an SQL syntax-highlighted text box with line
numbers which must be compatible with the data provider.

This supports multiple queries in the statement and will display the results in
different tab pages. Most native drivers support it. For ODBC, you must locate an
advanced setting named MultipleActiveResultSets or MARS_Connection and
turn it on. If you do not see such a property, then it is not supported by your driver.

TROUBLESHOOTING

While setting up the connection use the Test Connection button of the Connection Properties Window
to ensure the connection is configured properly.

Use the Exec Query button on the Parameters tab to preview the query result.

More information is available in the Tips and Tricks Data Report topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

412 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.2.5.2 Pow erShell

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a PowerShell session.

· Auto Login · Built in · Copy Password

· Credential repository · Embedded Mode · External Mode

· Multi Monitor Support · Show Opened Session · Support Logging

SETTINGS

The remote system must be configured to allow remote commands. Please

consult Enable and Use Remote Commands in Windows PowerShell.

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 413

PowerShell - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Command Enter the PowerShell command.

Filename Select a PowerShell file on the network or on the computer.

Arguments Arguments that are appended to the Command.

Execution mode Select your execution mode between:

· Default

· Command

· Encoded command

PowerShell version Select your PowerShell version between:

· Default (current version)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

414 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Version 2

No exit Does not exit after running startup commands

No profile Does not load the Windows PowerShell profile.

Resize window Force window resize (buffer & window).

Single thread apartment Starts Windows PowerShell using a single-threaded

apartment

Run as administrator Run PowerShell command as a administrator.

Debug Show debug

No Logo Hides the copyright banner at startup.

Load RDM CmdLet Load RDM CmdLet Snap-in in the PowerShell session.

Run in 64-bit mode Run RDM CmdLet in 64 bits version.

Non interactive Does not present an interactive prompt to the user.

(suppress error
message)

HOST AND CREDENTIALS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 415

PowerShell - Host and Credentials Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Select the host computer to execute the Powershell command.

Usernam Enter the username to access the host computer.

Domain Enter the domain to access the host computer.

Passwor Enter the password to access the host computer.

RUN AS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

416 | Remote Desktop Manager

PowerShell - Run As Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None Will not be running the session as a different user.

Current session Use the same credentials as defined in the session.

Custom Use specified custom credentials.

Credential Use a linked Credentials Entry in Remote Desktop Manager,

repository which can can be external credentials like KeePass for example.
Very useful for sharing or reusing credentials among entries.

My personal Please consult My Personal Credentials for more information.

credentials

6.2.5.3 SNMP Report

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 417

This entry is used to define and configure a SNMP Report session. SNMP Reports
will provide you information from devices on your network such as routers, switches,
servers, workstations, printers and more.

Remote Desktop Manager uses a specific tool (NET-SNMP) for the SNMP
Report. You will be prompted to download the tool if it wasn't already installed on
your computer.

You can use the following SNMP versions to run your SNMP reports entries

· SNMP Version 1

· SNMP Version 2c

· SNMP Version 3

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

418 | Remote Desktop Manager

SNMP Report - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Host name / IP address of host.

SNMP version Select your SNMP version between:

· SNMP Version 1

· SNMP Version 2c

· SNMP Version 3

Command Determine the content of the report between:

· List available OIDs and values

· Get specific OIDs values

· Status of the host

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 419

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Community Community equal to the password. By default, the password is the

word public.

MIB Directory Location of the MIB database.

OIDs Object identifier for an object in the MIB. This help you reduce the
items in the report.

Trim MIB names Remove MIB names.

Prompt for Options to change the command or to specify an OIDs before the
options report execution.

More commands can be added to Remote Desktop Manager upon request,

please post a feature request on our forum.

OIDS EXAMPLES

· sysDescr.0

· sysObjectID.0

· sysUpTimeInstance

· sysContact.0

· sysName.0

V3 SPECIFIC

If your network uses the SNMP V3, you will also need to enter information in the
V3 Specific tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

420 | Remote Desktop Manager

SNMP Report - V3 Specific Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Authentication Select your authentication protocol between:

protocol
· None

· MD5

· SHA

Authentication Enter your authentication protocol password.

passphrase

Privacy protocal Choose between None or DES

Privacy Enter your privacy protocol password.

passphrase

Security engine Enter your security engine ID which is part of the target host
ID configuration

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 421

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Security name Enter your security name which is part of the target host configuration

Context engine Scanning engine to retrieve context-sensitive information from the

ID target host.

Context name Scanning engine to retrieve context-sensitive information from the

target host.

Destination Select your destination engine between:

engine
· Not specified

· Boots

· Time

FUNCTIONS

EXECUTION LOGS

When a SNMP Report is open, at any time you can look at the bottom in the execution log
window to see if the report has encountered a problem.

SAVE

You can save the report or the execution log in a Text document to keep your information or to
print it.

Save button

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

422 | Remote Desktop Manager

REFRESH

The refresh button can be used to refresh your report or to generate a different report from the
current one. You can change the Command and/or specify some OIDs.

Refresh window

6.2.5.4 SQL Server Management Studio

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a SQL Server Management Studio
session.

· Auto Login · Built in · Copy Password

· Credential repository · Embedded Mode · Show Opened Session

· Support Logging

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 423

If you are sending a command line from a computer that is not on the domain to
a computer that is on the domain, check Net Only when using Run As
different user.]

SETTINGS

SQL Server Management Studio - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the full Host name. If a default instance has been used, you
could just enter the server name.

Database Enter the SQL database you wish to connect upon login (optional).

Integrated Enable this option if you wish to use Active Directory.

security (Active
Directory)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

424 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Run as different If using Integrated security you have the option of running your
user (Active session as a different user.
Directory only)

Net Only (Active If you are sending a command line from a computer that is not on the
Directory only) domain to a computer that is on the domain, enable the Net Only
setting for credentials of the Running As.

Username Enter the username for the SQL Server Authentication.

Password Enter the password for the SQL Server Authentication.

Default query file Specify the file to be opened in the editor. Please see Add-On
documentation for more information.

Show splash Enable SQL Server Management Studio to display its splash screen.
screen

If choosing Run as different user you will have to specify which credentials to use when starting
with Run As.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 425

Run as options

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None Will not be able to run your session as a different user.

Current session Use the same credentials as the ones defined in the session

Custom Use specified custom credentials to be defined in the username,

password and domain fields.

Credential Use a link to an already existing credential entry.

repository

My personal Use a link to your private credentials entry.

credentials

6.3 Information

Information entries are used to store information that is meant to be shared with other users of
the data source, such as websites, alarm codes, serial numbers, etc.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

426 | Remote Desktop Manager

Add a new Information Entry

WEBSITES

The Website entry is for online accounts. It can store a website url address and a set of
credentials. The website can be opened in Remote Desktop Manager or externally.

The entry can be linked with our Devolutions Web Login browser extension. When opening a
website externally our browser extension Devolutions Web Login fills the username and
password for you.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 427

Example of Devolutions Web Login injecting a password for an online log-in form

6.4 Contact

DESCRIPTION

Contact entry types are used to manage your contacts in Remote Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

You can choose between 7 different types of contacts:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

428 | Remote Desktop Manager

CONTACT TYPE DESCRIPTION

Company Used to define and configure a "Company"

contact.

Used to define and configure a "Customer"

Customer
contact.

Used to define and configure a contact with no

Default defined type. Use this type of entry if your contact
does not fit in any other category.

Employee Used to define and configure a "Employee"

contact.

Family Used to define and configure a "Family" contact.

Supplier Used to define and configure a "Supplier"

contact.

Support Used to define and configure a "Support" contact.

Enter all the information related to a contact to create your entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 429

Contact Entry

GENERAL

Use this subsection to enter basic information about the contact, such as their name, gender and
job title.

The Credentials link allows to embed a set of credentials in the entry.

Click on the Customer # link to change the name of the field.

ADDRESS

Use the middle-left subsection to enter information about the contact's company and address.

Use the View Map button to open Google Maps with your default web browser.

COMMUNICATION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

430 | Remote Desktop Manager

Use the middle-right subsection to enter the contact's communication information, such as their
email address or phone number.

Click on the Email Contact button to send an email to the specified email address with your
default email application.

Click on the Call (Skype) button to call the specified number with Skype. A Skype username
can also be specified in the Skype field.

Click on the Open Website button to navigate to the specified website with your default web
browser.
6.5 Credentials

DESCRIPTION

Credential entries store account information, such as usernames, passwords, domains, etc.
Credentials entries are grouped in a Credential repository, a collection of all the credentials
stored in the data source.

Credential entries offer flexibility in Remote Desktop Manager.

· Set multiple sessions to use a specific credential entry in the data source. Choose Credential
repository from the Credentials list in the entry properties. One benefit is you only need to
change information in one entry, when required. See Credential repository below.

· Use Dynamic Credential Linking and Credential Redirection with third-party password
managers.

· Configure User Specific Settings or a Private Vault Search in entry properties to link
credentials stored in a Private Vault with entries in shared Vaults.

To create a credential entry, use the New Entry button and select the Credentials section.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 431

Credential entries

THE CREDENTIAL BRANCH

By default, credentials are stored in the same list as other entries are. This behavior can be
changed so credentials are stored in a separated list.

To separate credentials from other entries, navigate to File – Options – User Interface – Tree
View. Under UI Options, disable the Merge credential list with sessions option. You must
also disable this option in the Data Source Settings (System Settings) – Applications –
Type Settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

432 | Remote Desktop Manager

Credentials node from the tree view

THE CREDENTIAL REPOSITORY

The Credential repository is the collection of all the credentials stored in the data source. The
Credential repository allows you to use the same credential entry for multiple session.

The Credential repository is available almost anywhere in RDM, including Folders, Sessions,
Synchronizers, VPN and Website entry types.

When configuring a session select Credential repository from the Credential drop down list,
then select the desired credential entry from the credentials list.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 433

Select a credential entry

To configure the Credential repository to prompt you to select a set of credentials, which allows
for using multiple credentials for the same host, select Prompt on connection from the
credential list.

AVAILABLE CREDENTIAL ENTRIES

We support a multitude of credential entry types, both integrated and external! Explore to your
heart's content.
6.5.1 Credential Redirection

DESCRIPTION

Some tools do not provide an Application Programming Interface (API) or support command line
parameters to interact with them. 1Password, Firefox Password Manager, Google Password
Manager and LastPass are such tools.

In order to leave the credentials in the external tool, and be able to use these credentials with
Remote Desktop Manager, we have implemented a mechanism to request the credentials from
the tool, then redirect them to a chosen resource.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

434 | Remote Desktop Manager

This is achieved by running a local-access only applicative web server, then displaying a page
that will allow you to store the credentials in your Credential repository. Remote Desktop
Manager redirects the credentials from your chosen repository to the remote resource.

PRE-REQUISITES

· The tool must be installed on your computer or used with a web browser as an extension.

· The browser extension for your Credential repository must be installed and enabled. Follow
your repository documentation for details (see below for the URLs that are currently valid.

PROCEDURE

There are three steps:

1. Create the credential entry.

2. Use a link to these credentials in a Remote Desktop Manager entry.

3. Open the session and use your provider to fill in the credentials.

We will use LastPass in our example, but the steps are the same for 1Password.

Your chosen tool may require to be unlocked once or multiple times depending on
your configuration. These steps are not covered by this guide as it may change
for each installation.

CREATING THE CREDENTIAL ENTRY

1. Create a new LastPass entry.

2. Enter a name for your LastPass entry.

3. Select the option Credential redirection.

4. Enter a Name ID (case sensitive). This must be unique within your LastPass repository. It will
be used to identify the credentials and will be exposed as a subdirectory of the URL used to
intercept the credentials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 435

LastPass credential

5. Optionally select a specific browser, or use the default one.

6. Press the Enter Credentials button. This will launch the following sequence of events.

7. Remote Desktop Manager displays the following dialog.

RDM - LastPass

8. The chosen browser is launched for a URL that looks like

http://127.0.0.1:8000/[email protected]/login.aspx. Notice the middle part is the Name ID
entered previously.

9. Enter your credentials to save in the browser

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

436 | Remote Desktop Manager

10. Depending on the configuration of your provider, you have to press a keyboard combination,
or press on a button for the tool to save the credentials. Please refer to the documentation of
your tool for more information.

11. In Remote Desktop Manager, save your credential entry.

12. Using your password provider, confirm that the credentials are saved.

CREATING A SESSION USING THE CREDENTIAL ENTRY

1. Create a new entry, we will use an RDP session for the example.

2. Enter a name for your RDP session.

3. For Credentials select Credential repository and then your newly created credential entry

Credential repository

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 437

USING THE SESSION

Select your session then launch it. This will initiate the following sequence of events:

1. Remote Desktop Manager will display this informative dialog

2. The chosen browser is launched with the URL associated to the session

3. Depending on your configuration, the credentials are entered automatically, or you have to
press a key combination to initiate your tool. Please refer to the documentation of your tool for
more information.

4. In the web browser, press submit. The page will be closed after a delay

5. The RDP session is launched and authentication is successful

1Password instructions: https://support.1password.com/browser-extension/

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

438 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.5.2 Dynamic Credential Linking

DESCRIPTION

Dynamic credential linking creates a single credential entry for a supported credential manager
and use this credential with any entry type that supports the Credential repository.

SUPPORTED CREDENTIAL MANAGERS

Here is the list of all implemented credential managers that support dynamic credential linking:

· 1Password

· AuthAnvil Password Server

· Bitwarden

· Dashlane

· Devolutions Password Hub

· Devolutions Password Server

· KeePass

· Keeper

· LastPass

· Mateso Password Safe

· PassPortal

· Password List

· Password Manager Pro

· Password Safe

· PasswordState

· Password Vault Manager

· Pleasant Password Server

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 439

· RoboForm

· Secret Server

· Sticky Password

· TeamPass

· True Key

· Zoho Vault

A dynamic credential link can also be applied to a Folder or a VPN entry type if
desired.

SETTINGS

1. Create a credential entry and check Always prompt with list.

1Password Settings

2. When creating a entry, select Credential repository from the Credentials drop down list,
then select the credential entry created in the previous step. Notice that a new action appears
just below the credential selection drop down list.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

440 | Remote Desktop Manager

Select from List

3. Select a credential from the list.

LastPass Credentials list

4. The link changes to the name of the credential. To remove linked credential and bring back
automatic list prompt, simply click on the "X".

Name of the credential

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 441

6.5.3 Types
6.5.3.1 AuthAnvil Passw ord Server

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a AuthAnvil Password Server

credential entry.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

AuthAnvil Password Server – General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Service URL Enter the AuthAnvil Password Server URL to connect.

Example: https://<ServerHostname>/AAPS/AAPS.svc

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

442 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Certificate Select a specific certificate to connect to your AuthAnvil Password

Server. For more information, please consult the Certificate section
below.

Use "My Account Use the information configured in My Account Settings to connect.
Settings"

Organization ID Indicate your password Vault Organization ID.

Username Enter the username to connect to your AuthAnvil Password Server.

Password Enter the password to connect to your AuthAnvil Password Server.

Credentials list Indicate the credential list that you want to display. Select between:
mode
· All credentials

· Public credentials only

· Private credentials only

Private Vault key Indicate the Private Vault key.

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 443

AuthAnvil Password Server – Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Always prompt Always prompt with the list of credentials when connecting.
with list

Credentials Select a specific credential on your AuthAnvil Password Server.

Validate Validate the connection to the server to confirm that the credentials are
working.

CERTIFICATE

The certificate for the AuthAnvil entry can be downloaded from the AuthAnvil server web
interface. Navigate to Admin – External Settings – Third Party Certificates, and download
the SSO certificate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

444 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.5.3.2 Connection String

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Connection String credential entry.
Connection string credential entries are exactly the same as a Database Folder
with the exception that they are not limited by the inheritance hierarchy of folders
and sessions.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 445

Connection String

GENERAL

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Data source Contains data source types like ODBC, OLEDB or native. This
value is read only and is extracted from the connection string.

Data provider Specify the provider used for the database access. This value is
read only and is extracted from the connection string.

Connection string This value contains the database connection string and it can be
hidden/encrypted for higher security.

Eye/Lock button Revels or hides the connection string

Ellipsis button Displays the standard Windows Connection string builder dialog.

Host Connection server name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

446 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Username Username to connect on the server.

Password Password to connect on the server.

6.5.3.3 Custom

This entry is used to define and configure a Custom credential entry.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Custom - General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 447

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Powershell Select between:

· PowerShell:Type your PowerShell command in the Command field

· Linked PowerShell: Link your credential entry to a pre-existing

PowerShell command

Command · Create links of HyperText in a PowerShell message using this

syntax:

<href=UrlOfYourSite>Text</href>

PARAMETERS

Custom - Parameters Tab

You can use parameters in your PowerShell script, just type $PARAMETER1$ for the first
parameter, $PARAMETER2$ for the second parameter, etc...
6.5.3.4 CyberArk

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

448 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a CyberArk credential entry. Retrieve
credentials directly from a CyberArk Vault using their REST APIs.

A Remote Desktop Manager Site License is necessary to use the CyberArk

integration.

As per this initial implementation, you must create a credential entry FOR
EACH credential that you want to access from Remote Desktop Manager. A
feature to list accounts is being implemented at this time. You can alternatively
use the PACLI to generate a CSV file that can be paired with a CSV
Synchronizer to have entries generated automatically at a regular frequency.

SETTINGS

To retrieve the information easily, match the numbers from the credential entry picture below in
Remote Desktop Manager with the same numbers from the CyberArk portal.

The images from the CyberArk portal are below as well.

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 449

CyberArk - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Web services URL Enter the Privileged Account Security (PAS) URL. (It
typically is ends by PasswordVault although just the root is
need in this field.) e.g. if accessing the PAS using
https://server.domain.com/PasswordVault, you would
simply specify https://server.domain.com in this field.

Virtual Directory Used to specify when the PAS solution is not deployed at
the root of a web site. It would be the case when there is an
extra folder between the root of the address (.com) and the
PasswordVault string

Version Select which version you wish to use.

Use "My Account Use the username/password combination stored in File –

Settings" My Account Settings – CyberArk.

Username Enter the username to connect on Cyberark's PAS

solution.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

450 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Enter the password to connect on Cyberark's PAS

solution.

Safe name Enter the name of the safe where the entries are stored.

Folder Enter the folder name where the entries have been stored.
Provided by your CyberArk administrator. The default value
is "root"

Keywords Enter the keywords that will help locate the entry.Their API
will perform a partial match in their Name field. Note that if
the keywords match with multiple results, an error will be
displayed.

ADVANCED

CyberArk - Advanced Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 451

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Domain search method Specify how you wish to search for the Domain.

Domain field Specify the field (and possibly content) of the Domain field.

CYBERARK PAS SCREEN

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

452 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.5.3.5 CyberArk AAM

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a CyberArk AAM credential entry. Retrieve
credentials from CyberArk AAM server and improve credentials security.

A Remote Desktop Manager Site License is necessary to use the CyberArk

AAM entry.

As per this initial implementation, you must create a credential entry FOR
EACH credential that you want to access from Remote Desktop Manager. A
second phase is planned where the REST API will be used rather then AAM.

SETTINGS

All the needed information's to create a CyberArk credential entry in Remote Desktop Manager
is provided below. To retrieve the information easily, match the numbers from the credential
entry picture below in Remote Desktop Manager with the same numbers from the CyberArk
portal.

The images from the CyberArk portal are below as well.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 453

CyberArk AIM Credential Entry

Privileged Account Security Portal

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

454 | Remote Desktop Manager

CyberArk Applications Tab

CyberArk Accounts Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 455

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Web services URL Enter the Privileged Account Security URL.

Use "My Account Use the username stored in File – My Account Settings
Settings" – CyberArk AAM.

Username Enter the username to connect on Cyberark.

Application server URL Enter the URL to the CyberArk AAM web server.

Example:
https://<host.domain>/AAMWebService/v1.1/AAM.asmx

Application ID Enter the name of the name of the application ID for the
CyberArk Central Credential Provider web services. This
information will be provided by your CyberArk
administrator.

Show / Hide Click to view the Application ID.

Application ID
Click to hide the Application ID.

Safe name Enter the name of the safe where the entries are created.

Folder Enter the folder name where the entries have been
created. Provided by your CyberArk administrator. The
default value is "root"

Object Enter the object name of the entry.

6.5.3.6 KeePass

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

456 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a KeePass credential entry. Use a
KeePass plugin to send the credential to Remote Desktop Manager. The KeePass
application must be running and the database must be opened.

KeePass 1.X is not supported.

Download the KeePass plugin

This type has recently been improved to support linking to multiple KeePass
databases simultaneously. Simply add all the paths separated by semi-colons
in the Database control.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

KeePass - General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 457

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Database The default KeePass database is selected by

Remote Desktop Manager.

Set database path manually This option needs to be checked if you wish to
manually indicate the location of your database. If you
wish to use multiple databases at once, simply list
their respective paths separated by semi-colons.

Install Plug-in Install the KeePass Plug-In on your computer.

More information (installation Provide information on the KeePass Plug-In.

and required settings)

ADVANCED

KeePass - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Uuid Universal Unique Identifier of the entry in the database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

458 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name of the entry in the database.

Always prompt with Always prompt with the list of credentials when connecting.
list

Allow view Enables the View credentials command.

credentials action

See Dynamic Credential topic for more information on Dynamic Credential Linking.
6.5.3.7 LastPass

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a LastPass credential entry.

LastPass offers different features per subscription plans. Remote Desktop Manager supports
certain features of each plan:

Standard 2-Factor Authentication (Google Authenticator) and Secure Notes. The ones
: that contain both a Username and Password are displayed in Remote
Desktop Manager (Server, Email account, Database, Instant Messenger).

Premium: 2-Factor Authentication (YubiKey), please see LastPass, Yubikey and mobile
access section below.

Enterpris Shared Folders.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 459

GENERAL

LastPass - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mode Select between:

· Credential Redirection

· Integrated

Account name LastPass account name (Email address).

Password Password to access the LastPass account.

Always ask Always ask password when connecting to LastPass.

password

Title Use the ellipsis to select the credential in your LastPass

database, its title will be displayed when there is a selection.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

460 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Uuid Universal Unique Identifier of the entry in the database.

Always prompt with Always prompt with the list of credentials accessible from
list LastPass.

ADVANCED

LastPass - Advanced Tab

CREDENTIAL REDIRECTION MODE

Please refer to Credential Redirection for full instructions.

DYNAMIC CREDENTIAL LINKING

Please refer to Dynamic Credential for more information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 461

6.5.3.8 Mateso Passw ord Safe

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Mateso Password Safe credential
entry. The integration with Mateso Password Safe requires a Mateso Enterprise
Plus subscription.

Make sure web services is installed on the Mateso Password Safe server.
You also need a certificate from a trusted Certification Authority installed in the
Trusted Root Certification Authorities.

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the Mateso Password Safe server address.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

462 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Example: mateso.yourcorporatedomain.com

Database Select the database which the passwords are retrieved from.

Username Enter a Mateso account username.

Password (1) Enter a Mateso account password.

Password (2) Use the ellipsis button to select a password from the Mateso
database.

Always prompt with Always prompt with a list of available credentials in the Mateso
list database when using the entry. Useful to create a Credential
repository to link with other entries in Remote Desktop Manager.

6.5.3.9 One Time Passw ord

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a One Time Password credential entry.

The One Time Password credential type is used as a second authentication factor that allows
a user to secure its account with a generated verification code changing over time.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 463

One Time Password - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Key Enter the secret key given by the website or the application.

Time step Enter the amount of time for which the generated verification code
is valid.

Code size Select the amount of digits the generated verification code
contains. Select between:

· 6 Digits

· 8 Digits

Hash algorithm Select the secure hash algorithm used to generate the verification
code. Select between:

· SHA-1

· SHA-256

· SHA-512

ENABLING MULTIFACTOR AUTHENTICATION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

464 | Remote Desktop Manager

To use the multifactor authentication, this feature must be enabled from the user's account of a
service or website that supports multifator authentication. Usually, you can find the multifactor
authentication settings in the security preferences of a user's account. The name of the feature
should be similar to two-factor authentication, two-step verification, or multifactor
authentication.

When enabling multifactor authentication, a list of recovery codes might be

generated as well by the website or application. Carefully store these in a safe
place. These recovery codes will be useful if the user happens to lose the One
Time Password entry.

Website security preferences - Two-step verification

The website or application could ask if you want to receive verification codes by text messages
or generate them by an application. Choose to generate the codes by an application. This will
generate a secret key to enter in Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 465

Choose to receive verification codes by an authenticator application

Copy the key to the clipboard and paste its content in the Key field of the One Time Password
entry. If there are spaces in the key, remove them.

Two-step verification secret k ey

Accept the changes in the website or application, and in Remote Desktop Manager.

When connecting to the account, click on the View Password button to display the generated
verification code. Enter the verification code when prompted by the website or application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

466 | Remote Desktop Manager

One Time Password Entry - View Password

6.5.3.10 Passw ord Hub

This entry is used to define and configure a Devolutions Password Hub

credential entry.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 467

Devolutions Password Hub Credentials in Remote Desk top Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name the credential entry.

Folder Choose the folder where then entry will be stored in Remote
Desktop Manager.

Global Availability Accessibility option used when the credentials are from a private
vault. By default they are unavailable and won't show in the prompt
list.

Host Click on the refresh button to connect to a Devolutions account. In

the drop-down menu, choose your Devolutions Password Hub.

Master key Enter the Devolutions Password Hub master key.

Vault Choose the vault where the credential is stored.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

468 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Entry Choose the credential entry.

Always prompt with Check the option to always prompt with the list of credentials when
list connecting.

6.5.3.11 Passw ord List

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Password List credential entry.

The Password List credential type allows for storing multiple credentials in one entry. These
credentials can then be used in sessions. Each entry within the password list entry contains a
usename, a domain, a password, and a description. An expiration date can also be set on each
credential entry in the password list.

A great advantage of the password list is that it contains multiple credentials in a single entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 469

Credentials vs. Password List

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

470 | Remote Desktop Manager

Password List - General Tab

ACTION DESCRIPTION

Add Add credentials to the list.

Edit Edit the selected credentials.

Delete Delete the selected credentials.

ADD CREDENTIALS

From the password list entry properties, click on Add .

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 471

Password List - Add Password

OPTION DESCRIPTION

User Enter the username to which the password is associated.

Domain Enter the domain of the user.

Password Enter the password of the user.

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view the password.

password
Click on the hide icon to hide the password.

Password Click on the icon to display the Password Generator.

generator

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

472 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Expiration Set an expiration date for the password.

Custom Tab Here you can add custom information to your Password lists.

Roles Tab You can Assign roles or Users directly to your credentials.

6.5.3.12 Passw ord Server

This entry is used to define and configure a Devolutions Password Server

credential entry.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 473

Devolutions Password Server Credentials in Remote Desk top Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Name the credential entry.

Folder Choose the folder name where the entry will be stored in Remote
Desktop Manager.

Global Availability Accessibility option used when the credentials are from a private
vault. By default they are unavailable and won't show in the prompt
list.

Server Enter the Devolutions Password Server address.

Authentication Choose one of the authentication options provided to connect to

the server. Manual entry of the credentials is possible in the
username and password fields below.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

474 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Username Enter a username.

Password Enter a password.

Vault Choose the vault where the credential is stored.

Credential Choose the credential entry.

Always prompt with Check the option to always prompt with the list of credentials when
list connecting.

6.5.3.13 Pleasant Passw ord Server

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Pleasant Password Server credential
entry.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 475

Pleasant Password Server

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use "My Account Use the username and password configured in My Account
Settings" Settings to connect.

Service URL Enter the URL to connect on Pleasant Password Server.

Port Enter the port to connect to Pleasant Password. The default port is
10 001.

Open website Click Open website if you wish to test the connection to Pleasant
Password.

Username Enter the username to connect to your Pleasant Password Server.

Password Enter the password to connect to your Pleasant Password Server.

Always prompt with Always prompt with the list of credentials when connecting.
list

Credential Select the credential in the database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

476 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.5.3.14 Secret Server

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Secret Server credential entry.

The Secret Server integration requires its Web Services feature to be enabled.
For more information, please refer to the Secret Server documentation.

Currently, the Remote Desktop Manager integration of Secret Server supports

Radius and Duo Pin as a second authentication factor. Duo Push is not
supported.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Secret Server – General Tab

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 477

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Service URL Enter the URL of the Secret Server web services endpoint. Please
see note below.

Organization Enter the Organization Code. Required by Secret Server when using
the online edition.

Domain Enter the Domain. Required when Secret Server is configured with
domain authentication.

Use "My Account Use the credentials configured in My Account Settings to connect.
Settings"

Username Enter a Secret Server username. The password is prompted upon

validating the settings or when selecting a secret.

CREDENTIAL SELECTION

Secret Server – Credential Selection Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Look up Select how the secret is retrieve from Secret Server. Select between:
· Default: select from the available secrets.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

478 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· By Name: provide a name that matches a secret.

· Prompt For List

Mode Select the secret mode. Select between:

· As Credential
· As Private Key

Default

Secret Server – Credential Selection – Default

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Template Click on the ellipsis button to display a list of available secrets. This
control displays the name of the template for the selected secret.

Name Displays the name of the selected secret.

Test Settings Click to be prompted for the password and validate the credentials.

Name

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 479

Secret Server – Credential Selection – By Name

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Secret name Enter the partial or full name of the secret to use. Variables can be
used, which means you could set up a naming structure for your
secrets that would match the structure you are using for your
sessions.

Prompt For List

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Always prompt Select the secret from a list upon every use.
with list

AUTHENTICATION

There is no field to hold the Secret Server password in the entry's properties. When it is required
to connect to Secret Server, the following dialog is prompted.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

480 | Remote Desktop Manager

Secret Server Database Opening

The password is cached in memory for the current session only.

NOTES

SECRET SERVER SERVICE URL

Secret server supports Windows Authentication depending on the version

being used and the web server that hosts the application. The Service URL in
that case would use the following form: <Secret Server
URL>/winauthwebservices/sswinauthwebservice.asmx. Please refer to the
Secret Server documentation to see if it is supported for your edition, and for
how to enable it. As soon as we detect that the endpoint being used is for
Windows Authentication, it will be used seamlessly

Follow this procedure to obtain the proper service URL:

1. Log in to the Secret Server web application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 481

2. Go in the administration - Configuration section.

3. Locate the View Webservices hyperlink.

4. Right-click and copy the hyperlink.

5. Paste the value in the Service URL field.

Secret Server – Admin – Configuration – Web Services

USERNAME

Variables are supported in the username field. If the names are similar across your domain and
Secret Server, you could do one of the following:

· %username%@%userdomain%, this uses windows environment variables that hold your identity.

· % username% @somedomain.com, mix of environment and plain text.

DYNAMIC CREDENTIAL LINKING

Please refer to Dynamic Credential for more information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

482 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.5.3.15 Sticky Passw ord

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a Sticky Password credential entry.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

Stick y Password - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Enter the Sticky Password account's email.

Password Enter the Sticky Password account's password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 483

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Always ask password Check this option to be prompted for the password upon every
usage of this entry. It also has the effect of preventing the
password from being specified.

Credentials Displays the currently selected credentials. Select the

credential with the ellipsis button.

Always prompt with list Displays a list of the available credentials when the Sticky
Password entry is used.

CLOUD SYNC

To use Sticky Password in Remote Desktop Manager, the Cloud Sync option must be activated
in Sticky Password. Note that this feature is available only with Sticky Password Premium.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

484 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.6 Documents

DESCRIPTION

Document entry types are used to store any type of document directly in the data source.

Entry - Document

DOCUMENT TYPES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 485

In most cases, updating a document saves the new file name. Exceptions are: Email and HTML.

The different document types include settings to access the document:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Link to file Enter the path to a file located on your PC or on your network.

Url Open a file using a URL. You can also use your default Windows
Credentials to open the file.

Stored in Select a file that will be stored in the database. Some data sources do
database not support this mode.

6.7 Folder

DESCRIPTION

Folders are used to organize your entries. You can set permission on folders to limit who can
access the folder and what those users can do.

You can also set properties (e.g. Session Recording or Checkout mode) on the folder and then
set child entries to inherit folder settings.

You can assign a folder type (e.g. Server) or use variables as a folder name (for more
information, please consult the Variables topic).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

486 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry - Folder

FOLDER PROPERTIES

To decide how to access folder settings through properties or a specific folder properties button,
the Show folder details/description option is available in the dashboard when a folder is
selected.

1. Disable Show folder details/description: Use Folder Properties to edit folder settings
and Properties to modify a selected entry.

2. Enable Show folder details/description: Use Properties to edit folder settings (The
Folder Properties button is unavailable).

If the option Show folder details/description is unchecked (default setting), click Folder
Properties to edit or view folder settings. Click Properties to edit the selected entry settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 487

Dashboard for a selected folder - Show folder details/description disabled

When the option Show folder details/description is checked, the Folder Properties button is
unavailable. Click Properties to edit the selected folder instead of the entry.

FOLDER SETTINGS

Much of the information in folder properties is optional. Only include Credentials, Username or
Password on the folder if you want to protect it. In most cases, leave the information blank (a).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

488 | Remote Desktop Manager

Folder Properties

You can set other settings on the folder. After set the entries within the folder to inherit the
permissions.

Below is an example of a folder where the VPN is set at the folder level. All session entries
within the folder inherit the VPN settings. The folder is also a Server type.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 489

Example of VPN settings in Folder properties and an excerpt of the Navigation Pane to show the folder
structure

Another example is setting Permissions at the folder level to restrict access to sensitive
information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

490 | Remote Desktop Manager

Permissions - Folder Properties

FOLDER TYPES

Multiple folder types are available. They have special icons to represent the type. You can
access information from special entry types through variables: $FOLDERTYPE_variables$. For
example, $COMPANY_variables$.
· Company
· Customer
· Database
· Device (router, switch firewall)
· Domain
· Folder
· Identity
· Printer
· Server
· Site
· Software
· Workstation

DATABASE FOLDER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 491

The Database folder provides a some of the functionality of the Database session. In properties,
press the ellipsis button to select the data source and data provider. This will generate the
connection string with the information you enter in the dialog.
6.8 Synchronizer

DESCRIPTION

The Synchronizer family is a category of entries that can maintain Remote Desktop Manager in
sync with an external data source. It will create sessions from information obtained from the
source.

You should use security to prevent non-privileged users from using them.

Our recommendations are;

1. Disable the "Synchronize automatically" setting. If enabled, it runs after

every data source refresh.

2. Use our "command line" feature and schedule a task to run it at the frequency
of your choice. You can get the proper command line in the advanced
properties of the synchronizer itself.

3. If the synchronizer changes a lot of sessions, it may be best to use a "RDM

service account", meaning an account not used by one of your users. It will help
clear our historical data from our logs.

Remote Desktop Manager has the following synchronizers:

· Active Directory: Creates session entries for each computer in Active Directory.
· Comma Separated Values (CSV): Create entries for devices. See Import Strategies and File Format for
more information about using the wizard and entry templates.
· Spiceworks
· ConnectWise Control (ScreenConnect)
· Hyper-V: Creates sessions for virtual machines on a Hyper-V server.
· Device (router, switch firewall)
· VMWare
· Entrie s (.RDM, .PVM): Synchronize entries from a Remote Desktop Manager file.
· Amazon EC2: Create session entries for virtual machines on the web service.
· KeePass Xml Synchronizer: Create credential or website entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

492 | Remote Desktop Manager

DUPLICATE ENTRIES

If running the synchronizer results in duplicate entries or other things you did not expect with
entries, configure Action on entry mismatch. The option is on the Advanced tab in the
Synchronizer entry properties.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Action on entry Choose the action to be executed when there is a mismatch between
mismatch the entries:

· None: No action will be taken on the mismatch entry.

· Delete: The mismatch entry will be deleted.

· Move to: Move the mismatch entry to a designated folder.

· Make expired: The mismatch entry won't be deleted, but will be

expired and unusable. It can only be reactivated by an administrator.

6.8.1 Active Directory

DESCRIPTION

The Active Directory Synchronizer creates sessions for computers located in your Active
Directory structure.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 493

Active Directory - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mode Select the mode that the synchronizer will be use. Choose between:

· Custom

· LDAP

· My Domain

Domain Enter the domain machine name to perform the sync.

machine

Domain Enter the domain on which the sync need to be done.

OU/Container Enter the specific OU/Container if only one OU/Container need to be

DN sync.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

494 | Remote Desktop Manager

Active Directory - Settings Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Destination Group Select the folder where the sessions will be import in Remote
Desktop Manager.

Template Select a template to create your sessions.

Import description Import the computer description from Active Directory.

Create groups from Create the sub-folders from the OU/Containers.

OU/Containers

Level Select the level where the creation of the sub-folders will start.

Session name Select how the session name will be display in Remote
Desktop Manager after the sync. Choose between:

· Common name

· DNS Host name (FQDN)

Host Select how the Host field will be populate. Choose between:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 495

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Same as session name

· Common name

· DNS Host name (FQDN)

Active Directory - Login Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Username Enter the username who has access to perform the sync.

Password Enter the password of the username.

FILTERS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

496 | Remote Desktop Manager

Active Directory - Filters Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select if all the servers and workstations will be sync or only the
servers. Choose between:

· All

· Server

Other filter Indicate the LDAP query that needed to be use for the filter.

Preview Preview of the LDAP query that would be execute.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 497

Active Directory - Search Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Search scope Select where the search scope will be done. Choose between:

· Subtree

· One-level

Duplicate check Select when the duplicate check needs to be done. Choose between:

· Root

· Destination group

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

498 | Remote Desktop Manager

Active Directory - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Silent mode When the sync is completed, a sync result window appear to illustrate
the result of the sync and that the sync is now completed. Enable this
option and the confirmation window will not appear.

Action on entry Choose the action to be executed when there is a mismatch between
mismatch the entries:

· None: no action will be taken on the mismatch entry

· Delete: the mismatch entry will be deleted

· Move to: move the mismatch entry to a designated folder

6.8.1.1 Active Directory Sample Structure

DESCRIPTION

Here is the sample structure used in the Active Directory topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 499

To create OU containers, you may have to change a policy, search on Microsoft's

site for information applicable to the operating system of your domain controller.

Some AD structures use Advanced features of the mmc snapin, you must enable
the Advanced Features toggle in the View menu.

SAMPLE STRUCTURE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

500 | Remote Desktop Manager

6.8.2 Amazon EC2

DESCRIPTION

The Amazon EC2 Synchronizer allows to synchronize virtual machines from the Amazon EC2
web service. The synchronizer creates sessions for each virtual machine instance from EC2.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 501

Amazon EC2 Synchronizer

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Access key ID Enter the AWS Access Key ID.

Secret access Enter the AWS Secret Acess Key.

key

View / Hide Click on the view icon to view your password.

key
Click on the hide icon to hide your password.

Password Click this icon to display the password (Secret access key) history of
History the entry.

Region Select the region in which the EC2 service hosts the virtual machines.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

502 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Destination Select the destination folder of the created entries.

group

Duplicate check Check for already created entries. Select one of the following
location:

· Root: Check all entries

· Destination folder: Check entries in the destination folder only.

Silent mode Enable to suppress the Sync Result output.

Create virtual Create entries in virtual groups/folders.

groups

IMPORT SETTINGS

The Import Settings section replaces the values of the synchronized entries. The Custom option
allows to use variables.

EC2 Synchronizer – Import Settings

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 503

PROPERTY VARIABLE

Instance name $Name$

Instance Id $InstanceId$

Platform $Platform$

Type $InstanceType$

State $StateName$

Group Id $GroupId$

Key name $KeyName$

Public DNS $PublicDnsName$

Private DNS $PrivateDnsName$

Public IP $IpAddress$
address DNS

Private IP $PrivateIpAddress$
address

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

504 | Remote Desktop Manager

Amazon EC2 Synchronizer - Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Action on entry Select the action to perform when an entry configuration has changed.
mismatch Select between:

· None

· Delete

· Move to

· Make expired

Destination Enter the destination folder of entries that have changed

group configuration. Only with Move to as the Action on entry mismatch.

6.9 VPN

DESCRIPTION

VPN Entry is used to configure a VPN. One VPN entry can be linked to multiple sessions. See
Configuring a VPN for multiple sessions to see the step-by-step guide.

VPNS AND ACCESS TO YOUR DATA SOURCE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 505

Many organizations configure their devices to channel ALL traffic through the
VPN. This may break the connection to your data source. When you are subject
to this constraint, it is best to enable the Offline Mode in Data Source Settings
(System Settings), then configure the VPN options to automatically Go offline
on connection.

For more information on how to manage VPN, please consult VPN Management topic.

SUPPORTED VPNS

There are multiple VPN entries already included in Remote Desktop Manager and many more
are available through add-ons. Please consult VPN Add-ons for more information.

Supported VPNs include:

· Apple VPN
· CISCO VPN
· Microsoft VPN
· Sonicwall VPN
· OpenVPN
· And more!

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

506 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry - VPN

OPTIONS

GO OFFLINE ON CONNECTION AND GO ONLINE ON DISCONNECT

The Go Offline on connection and Go Online on disconnect options are

essential when all traffic is tunneled through the VPN and you lose connection to
the data source. The data source must be configured to allow for Offline
availability.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 507

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Go Offline on The session goes offline once connected to the VPN.

connection

Go Online on The session goes back online once disconnected from the VPN.
disconnect

Use adapter to Use the adapter to detect the VPN connection.

detect connection

Close connection Close the VPN connection after the number of minutes indicated.
after

Detect reachable Automatically close the VPN wait dialog when the host is
host in wait reachable.

AFTER EXECUTE WAIT

You can adjust the time Remote Desktop Manager waits for the VPN to open.

In the sec box, enter the a time in seconds.

-1 sec is the default time (5 seconds). Change the default time for all VPN entries in File –
Options – Types – VPN – VPN default pause

COMMANDS

In VPN properties – Advanced Tab, you can add commands. With custom commands you can
execute any command after the VPN connects and/or before VPN disconnect.
6.9.1 Microsoft VPN

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

508 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a Microsoft VPN session. It integrates
rasdial.exe and rasphone.exe

SETTINGS

GENERAL – DETAIL

Microsoft VPN - General Tab - Detail

OPTION DESCRIPTION

VPN name Name of the VPN.

Username Username to connect on the Microsoft VPN.

Password Password to connect on the Microsoft VPN.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 509

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Domain Domain to connect on the Microsoft VPN.

Show console Display the console errors or messages during the connection. Use
error this setting to diagnose if any connection problem appears. The
application will capture the command line trace and it will display the
result.

Ignore error This will ignore the error code and allow you to continue. It will flag the
code VPN connection as failed.

Use certificate Only the certificate (VPN name) will be used for authentication, the
only username, password or domain will not be requested.

Run in 64-bit Specify to use the processor architecture in 64-bit.

mode

Use rasphone Used to open a VPN created with the Connection Manager
(Connection Administration Kit or when you need to force the rasphone usage.
Manager
Administration
Kit)

Default Use the default Phonebook on the computer usually located in %

Phonebook userprofile%
\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Network\Connections\Pbk\rasphone.pb
k

RAS phone Enter the remote access service phone number

number

Phone book Select a phone book file to use for the connection. Specify a local file
or network file to share it.

Embedded Embed the phonebook directly in the session to make it more

Phone book portable. Please note that if you use the same phonebook for multiple
VPN it's better to create a Phone Book Document to reduce the size
of the database.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

510 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Phonebook Select a Phone Book Document entry from the list populated by the
document application.

GENERAL - ADVANCED

Microsoft VPN - General Tab - Advanced

For more information on the Advanced settings, please consult the VPN Management topic.
6.9.1.1 Microsoft VPN Phone-book Management

DESCRIPTION

The Microsoft VPN needs a phone-book file (*.pbk) to be able to establish a connection. This file
contains one or more definitions of "network connections".

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 511

When a "pre-shared" key is required by the server, it is not stored in the *.pbk
file, but rather encrypted and managed by Windows. The first connection to the
server will need to be handled manually and the pre-shared key typed in once
per client workstation.

SETTINGS

CREATING A NEW PHONE-BOOK FILE

1. In a working folder on your computer, create a new text file and name it *.pbk (make sure to
change the extension. By default file extensions are not displayed, and the .txt extension will
simply be appended to the new name you type).

To display file extensions, in the View tab of the Windows File Explorer,
enable the File name extensions option.

Phone-book folder

2. Double-click on the new phone-book file to start the configuration, an information dialog is
displayed. click OK

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

512 | Remote Desktop Manager

Empty phone-book

EDITING AN EXISTING PHONEBOOK FILE

Simply double-click the file or use right-click – Open on it. If the phone-book is stored in
Remote Desktop Manager, use the Save Document As feature to save it on the computer
drive during the modifications.

CREATING A NEW VPN CONNECTION

1. Select Workplace network to connect using a VPN.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 513

Set up a new connection - Work place network

2. Specify the host name or IP address and click on Create.

Address to connect

3. The new phone-book is now created. Use the Properties button to adjust the required
settings, such as the type of VPN or security settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

514 | Remote Desktop Manager

Phone Creation completed

ADDING THE PHONE-BOOK TO REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

The documents are stored in Remote Desktop Manager and are not protected
by versioning. Please ensure you keep a copy in a safe place outside of
Remote Desktop Manager.

1. In Remote Desktop Manager, create a Phonebook document. you can choose to simply
create a link to the file, or even better upload it to the data source. Save your document when
done.

Phonebook Document Entry

2. Create a new VPN entry type Microsoft VPN, and select the document from the previous
step in the phone-book document setting

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 515

Microsoft VPN Entry

UPDATE A PHONE-BOOK THAT IS STORED IN REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

If the phone-book was already in Remote Desktop Manager, use the Update Document action
in the Dashboard to update to this new version.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

516 | Remote Desktop Manager

Update Document Dashboard Action

6.10 Macros/Scripts/Tools

DESCRIPTION

The session script tools can be either a script, a command line, or a helper applicable to a
selected session. Each can be configured and shared in the data source.

They are listed in the dashboard under the Macros/Scripts/Tools section or in the context
menu under Macros/Scripts/Tools.

Session tools are commonly used to retrieve information, perform an action, change an item, or
change a configuration on the session host. It can also be used to share properties between
groups of sessions using PowerShell, PSExec or keyboard macros.

Macros/Scripts/Tools can be used to run against a host as well as run your macro through the
RDM Agent.

Session Variables can be used as parameters for the Macros/Scripts/Tools.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 517

MACROS/SCRIPTS/TOOLS MANAGER

Entry - Macros/Scripts/Tools

GENERAL SETTINGS

Those settings will be identical for every Macro/Scrip/Tools entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

518 | Remote Desktop Manager

Macros/Scripts/Tools - More Settings

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Allow run via agent Allows you to launch a script through an Agent.

Automatically open target Force the opening of a connection before executing the
connection Macros/Scripts/Tools.

Close target connection Automatically close the connection after executing the
after connection Macros/Scripts/Tools.

Allow batch execute Allows you to execute the macro on multiple machines at
the same time.

Prompt for host Automatically prompt for the host on every use.

Prompt for confirmation Always prompts for a confirmation on use.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 519

6.10.1 PowerShell (Local)

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to integrate a PowerShell (Local) session/script/tool.

We suggest to use either relative paths or in general paths without spaces or

use the PowerShell Session to execute a script with parameters. Here some
examples:

· Macro that can use Session Variables:

.\Data\ConnectAfterReboot.ps1 -strHost $HOST$ -OpenRDMSession

· Session that can specify a filename and arguments:

.\data\New-RDM-Data.ps1

-AddNewOnly

SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

520 | Remote Desktop Manager

PowerShell (Local) - General Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Command Enter the PowerShell command.

Assign file icon to Assign the file icon in the address bar of the session.
session

Arguments Enter your command line argument. For more information please
see Command Line Arguments.

Working directory Working directory to set for the script execution.

PowerShell version Select your PowerShell version between:

· Default

· Version 2

Wait for application Executes the script while the application waits for completion. Is it
to exit (Remote a synchronous operation therefore it will be unresponsive while the
Desktop Manager script runs.
will be unavailable)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 521

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open Open the PowerShell macro embedded.

embedded/tabbed

Run as Run PowerShell macro as a administrator.

administrator

Resize window Force window resize (buffer & window).

Run in 64-bits mode Run CmdLet in 64 bits version.

Run as different Run the PowerShell macro as a different user.

user

Load RDM CmdLet Load CmdLet Snap-in in the PowerShell session.

No exit Leaves the PowerShell window open after the script has
completed.

Debug Show debug

ADVANCED

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

522 | Remote Desktop Manager

PowerShell (Local) - Advanced Tab

OPTION DESCRIPTION

No exit Leaves the PowerShell window open after the script has
completed.

Use SSL Use the SSL setting.

Resize window Force window resize (buffer & window).

Run as Run PowerShell macro as a administrator.

Administrator

Open Open the PowerShell macro embedded.

embedded/tabbed

Debug Show debug

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 523

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Load RDM CmdLet Load CmdLet Snap-in in the PowerShell session.

Run in 64-bit mode Run CmdLet in 64 bits version.

Run as different Run the PowerShell macro as a different user.

user

Use session Use the current session credentials.

credentials

6.10.2 Template

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to apply an existing Template to an entry. By configuring a

specific template, it's possible to open a session with a completely different
connection type. The original parameters will be merged with the one from the
specified template.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

524 | Remote Desktop Manager

Template - General Tab

For more information regarding using a template with an existing connection,

please consult the link below:

https://help.remotedesktopmanager.com/tipsandtricks_typesconnections.htm

6.11 Variables

DESCRIPTION

Variables can be used in any entry's configuration or with any templates. The variables will be
replaced by their corresponding values just prior to establishing a connection.

You can select a variable by double clicking on it directly in the dialog. For ease of use there is a
button at the bottom of the edition screen that allows you to select a variable to insert in the
currently focused field.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 525

Variables

Variables are case-sensitive and must be typed in UPPERCASE.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

526 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry variables

The variables are classify under multiple tabs. Not all contexts are available depending on the
entry being edited, for example the Parent tab is present only when editing a sub connection.

GENERAL

$PASSWORD$: For security reason, this is only available with the command line
session type and some specific types. You must enable it in the Security Settings
of the entry with "Allow password in variable" option.

For an Advanced Data Source, the administrator can disable usage of this
variable for the whole data source in Data Source Settings (System Settings), at
the bottom of the Password Management tab.

ENTRY VARIABLES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 527

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$APPLICATION_NAME Returns the application name.

$CONTACT_DOMAIN$ Returns the contact's domain.

$CONTACT_PASSWOR Returns the contact's password.

$CONTACT_USERNAM Returns the contact's username.

$CURRENT_CLIPBOA Returns the current clipboard content.

RD$

$CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the custom field field 1 value.

$CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the custom field field 2 value.

$CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the custom field field 3 value.

$CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the custom field field 4 value.

$CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the custom field field 5 value.

$DATA_SOURCE_ID$ Returns the data source id for the current session.

$DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured credentials.

$DYNAMIC_PORT$ Returns the dynamic port used when the entry uses an SSH
VPN with a dynamic port set up.

$HOST$ Returns the host name if it's available (server name or IP

addess...).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

528 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$HOST_WITH_PORT$ Returns the host including the port if it is available.

$HOST_WITHOUT_DO Returns the host name without the domain if it is available.

MAIN$

$INFORMATION_COMP Returns the company specified in information.

ANY$

$INFORMATION_EMAIL Returns the email specified in information.

$INFORMATION_IP$ Returns the information IP.

$INFORMATION_MACH Returns the machine name specified in information.

INE_NAME$

$IP$ Returns the IP specified in information.

$KEYWORDS$ Returns the keywords/tags.

$MAC$ Returns the MAC address specified in information.

$MACHINE_DOMAIN$ Returns the machine domain specified in information.

$MACRO_PASSWORD Returns the typing macro password.

$NAME$ Returns the entry name.

$ONE_TIME_PASSWO Returns a timed one time password.

RD$

$PASSWORD$ This variable is replaced by the password. It's only available

when enabled in the advanced options.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 529

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$PORT$ Returns the host port if it's available and when it's not the
default.

$QUICK_CONNECT$ This variable is replaced by the quick connect value (Note).

Use this variable when you create a template used specifically
for the quick connect.

$REMOTE_MANAGEM Returns the Remote Management Server url (if configured).

ENT_SERVER$

$REMOTE_MANAGEM Returns the host part of the Remote Management Server url (if
ENT_SERVER_HOST$ configured).

$SERIAL$ Returns the serial number from invoice tab.

$SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field specified in information.

$SESSION_ID$ Returns the current session id (guid).

$TAGS$ Returns the tags.

$TOOL_DOMAIN$ Returns the tool domain.

$TOOL_PASSWORD$ Returns the tool password.

$TOOLS_USERNAME$ Returns the tool username.

$USERNAME$ Returns the username found in the configured credentials.

$VIRTUAL_MACHINE_I Returns the virtual machine ID specified in information.

$VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ Returns the virtual machine's type.

TYPE$

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

530 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$VPN_DOMAIN$ Returns the VPN's domain.

$VPN_HOST$ Returns the VPN's host.

$VPN_PASSWORD$ Returns the VPN's password.

$VPN_USERNAME$ Returns the VPN's username.

GLOBAL VARIABLES

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$APPLICATION_PA Returns the application path.

TH$

$APPLICATION_US Returns the current data source logged user.

ER$

$DATE$ Returns the current date.

$DATE_TEXT$ Returns the current date in a text format to use in a file name. Ex:
January 30th 2013 - 20130130.

$DATE_TEXT_ISO$ Returns the current date in a basic ISO 8601 format. EX: January
30th 2013 - 20130130.

$FULLSCREEN_HE Returns the screen full screen height.

IGHT$

$FULLSCREEN_WI Returns the screen full screen width.

DTH$

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 531

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$LOCAL_IP$ Returns the local IP v4 address.

$MY_MACHINE_NA Returns the current machine name.

ME$

$PUBLIC_IP$ Returns the public IP exposed on the internet.

$TIME$ Returns the current time.

$TIME_TEXT$ Returns the current time in a text format to use in a file name. EX:
8h15 30 - 081530

$TIME_TEXT_ISO$ Returns the text of the current time in the basic ISO 8601 format.
EX: 8h15 30 - 081530

$WORKAREA_HEIG Returns the screen work area height.

HT$

$WORKAREA_WID Returns the screen work area width.

TH$

GLOBAL - DATA SOURCE VARIABLES

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DATA_SOURCE_DOMAIN$ Returns the current data source domain.

$DATA_SOURCE_NAME$ Returns the current data source name.

$DATA_SOURCE_PASSWOR Returns the current data source password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

532 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DATA_SOURCE_USERNAME Returns the current data source username.

$DATA_SOURCE_USERPROF Returns the current data source user's email.

ILE_EMAIL$

$DATA_SOURCE_USERPROF Returns the current data source user's firstname.

ILE_FIRSTNAME$

$DATA_SOURCE_USERPROF Returns the current data source user's lastname.

ILE_LASTNAME$

$DATA_SOURCE_USERPROF Returns the current data source user's phone number.

ILE_PHONE$

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

This context allows you to access ANY environment variable defined in your system. The ones
available in the form are the standard ones, but any value enclosed by the percent sign will be
expanded using the Windows environment. You could use this to set a custom security token in
your user profile and use it from within Remote Desktop Manager.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

% ALLUSERSPROFILE C:\ProgramData
%

% APPDATA% C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming

% C:\Program Files\Common Files

COMMONPROGRAMFIL
ES%

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 533

OPTION DESCRIPTION

% C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files

COMMONPROGRAMFIL
ES(x86)%

% COMPUTERNAME% {computername}

% COMSPEC% C:\Windows\System32\cmd.exe

% HOMEDRIVE% C:

% HOMEPATH% \Users\{username}

% LOCALAPPDATA% C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Local

% LOGONSERVER% \\{domain_logon_server}

% PATH% C:\Windows\system32;C:\Windows;C:
\Windows\System32\Wbem;{plus program paths}

% PATHEXT% .com;.exe;.bat;.cmd;.vbs;.vbe;.js;.jse;.wsf;.wsh;.msc

% PROGRAMDATA% %SystemDrive%\ProgramData

% PROGRAMFILES% %SystemDrive%\Program Files

% %SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86) (only in 64-bit version)

PROGRAMFILES(X86)%

% PROMPT% Code for current command prompt format. Code is usually

$P$G {Drive}:

% PSModulePath% %SystemRoot%
\system32\WindowsPowerShell\v1.0\Modules\

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

534 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

% PUBLIC% %SystemDrive%\Users\Public

% SystemDrive% C:

% SystemRoot% %SystemDrive%\Windows

% TEMP% %SystemDrive%\Users\{username}\AppData\Local\Temp

% TMP% %SystemDrive%\Users\{username}\AppData\Local\Temp

% USERDOMAIN% {userdomain}

% USERNAME% {username}

% USERPROFILE% %SystemDrive%\Users\{username}

% WINDIR% C:\Windows

GROUP

PARENT

This context exists only when in a sub-connection. It returns the corresponding value taken from
the parent entry.

$PARENT_PASSWORD$: For security reason, this is only available for use in

the keyboard macro. If you must use the credentials stored in the parent to
connect, you must choose Parent in the credentials drop down list of the general
tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 535

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$PARENT_APPLICATION_NA Returns the application name.

ME$

$PARENT_CURRENT_CLIPB Returns the current clipboard content.

OARD$

$PARENT_CUSTOM_FIELD1 Returns the parent custom field field 1 value.

$PARENT_CUSTOM_FIELD2 Returns the parent custom field field 2 value.

$PARENT_CUSTOM_FIELD3 Returns the parent custom field field 3 value.

$PARENT_CUSTOM_FIELD4 Returns the parent custom field field 4 value.

$PARENT_CUSTOM_FIELD5 Returns the parent custom field field 5 value.

$PARENT_DOMAIN$ Returns the parent domain found in the parent

configured credentials.

$PARENT_HOST$ Returns the parent host name if it's available (server

name or IP address...).

$PARENT_HOST_WITH_POR Returns the parent host including the port if it's

T$ specified.

$PARENT_HOST_WITHOUT_ Returns the host name without the domain if it's

DOMAIN$ available.

$PARENT_INFORMATION_C Returns the company specified in the parent

OMPANY$ information.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

536 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$PARENT_INFORMATION_E Returns the email specified in information.

MAIL$

$PARENT_INFORMATION_M Returns the machine name specified in information.

ACHINE_NAME$

$PARENT_IP$ Returns the IP address specified in parent information.

$PARENT_MAC$ Returns the MAC address defined.

$PARENT_MACHINE_DOMAI Returns the domain field specified in parent information.

$PARENT_MACRO_PASSWO Returns the typing macro password.

RD$

$PARENT_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$PARENT_PASSWORD$ Returns the password from the parent configured

credentials. It's only available when enabled in the
parent advanced options.

$PARENT_PORT$ Returns the host port if it's available (server name, IP

address...).

$PARENT_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$PARENT_SERVICE_TAGS$ Returns the service tag field located in the information

tab.

$PARENT_SESSION_ID$ Returns the parent session id (guid).

$PARENT_TOOL_DOMAIN$ Returns the tool domain.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 537

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$PARENT_TOOL_PASSWOR Returns the tool password.

$PARENT_TOOL_USERNAM Returns the tool username.

$PARENT_USERNAME$ Returns the username from the parent configured

credentials.

$PARENT_VIRTUAL_MACHI Returns the virtual machine ID specified in information.

NE_ID$

DATABASE

The following context will find any Folder Database entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy
above you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to
the current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DB_APPLICATION_NAME$ Returns the application name.

$DB_CURRENT_CLIPBOARD$ Returns the current clipboard content.

$DB_CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the database custom field field 1 value.

$DB_CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the database custom field field 2 value.

$DB_CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the database custom field field 3 value.

$DB_CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the database custom field field 4 value.

$DB_CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the database custom field field 5 value.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

538 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DB_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$DB_INFORMATION_COMPANY Returns the company specified in the database

$ information.

$DB_INFORMATION_EMAIL$ Returns the information email.

$DB_INFORMATION_MACHINE_ Returns the information machine name.

NAME$

$DB_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$DB_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$DB_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$DB_VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID$ Returns the virtual machine ID.

DOMAIN

The following context will find any Folder Domain entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy above
you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to the
current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DOMAIN_APPLICATION_NAME Returns the application name.

$DOMAIN_CURRENT_CLIPBOA Returns the current clipboard content.

RD$

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 539

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$DOMAIN_CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the domain custom field field 1 value.

$DOMAIN_CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the domain custom field field 2 value.

$DOMAIN_CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the domain custom field field 3 value.

$DOMAIN_CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the domain custom field field 4 value.

$DOMAIN_CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the domain custom field field 5 value.

$DOMAIN_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$DOMAIN_INFORMATION_COM Returns the company specified in the domain

PANY$ information.

$DOMAIN_INFORMATION_EMAI Returns the information email.

$DOMAIN_INFORMATION_MAC Returns the information machine name.

HINE_NAME$

$DOMAIN_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$DOMAIN_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$DOMAIN_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$DOMAIN_VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ Returns the virtual machine ID.

ID$

COMPANY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

540 | Remote Desktop Manager

The following context will find any Folder Company entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy
above you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to
the current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$COMPANY_APPLICATION_NA Returns the application name.

ME$

$COMPANY_CURRENT_CLIPB Returns the current clipboard content.

OARD$

$COMPANY_CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the company custom field field 1 value.

$COMPANY_CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the company custom field field 2 value.

$COMPANY_CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the company custom field field 3 value.

$COMPANY_CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the company custom field field 4 value.

$COMPANY_CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the company custom field field 5 value.

$COMPANY_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$COMPANY_INFORMATION_CO Returns the company specified in the company

MPANY$ information.

$COMPANY_INFORMATION_EM Returns the information email.

AIL$

$COMPANY_INFORMATION_MA Returns the information machine name.

CHINE_NAME$

$COMPANY_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$COMPANY_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 541

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$COMPANY_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$COMPANY_VIRTUAL_MACHIN Returns the virtual machine ID.

E_ID$

SOFTWARE

The following context will find any Folder Software entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy
above you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to
the current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$SOFTWARE_APPLICATION_N Returns the application name.

AME$

$SOFTWARE_CURRENT_CLIP Returns the current clipboard content.

BOARD$

$SOFTWARE_CUSTOM_FIELD1 Returns the custom field field 1 value.

$SOFTWARE_CUSTOM_FIELD2 Returns the custom field field 2 value.

$SOFTWARE_CUSTOM_FIELD3 Returns the custom field field 3 value.

$SOFTWARE_CUSTOM_FIELD4 Returns the custom field field 4 value.

$SOFTWARE_CUSTOM_FIELD5 Returns the custom field field 5 value.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

542 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$SOFTWARE_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$SOFTWARE_INFORMATION_C Returns the information Company.

OMPANY$

$SOFTWARE_INFORMATION_E Returns the information email.

MAIL$

$SOFTWARE_INFORMATION_M Returns the information machine name.

ACHINE_NAME$

$SOFTWARE_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$SOFTWARE_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$SOFTWARE_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$SOFTWARE_VIRTUAL_MACHI Returns the virtual machine ID.

NE_ID$

SITE

The following context will find any Folder Site entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy above
you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to the
current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$SITE_APPLICATION_NAME$ Returns the application name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 543

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$SITE_CURRENT_CLIPBOARD Returns the current clipboard content.

$SITE_CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the site custom field field 1 value.

$SITE_CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the site custom field field 2 value.

$SITE_CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the site custom field field 3 value.

$SITE_CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the site custom field field 4 value.

$SITE_CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the site custom field field 5 value.

$SITE_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$SITE_INFORMATION_COMPAN Returns the company specified in the site

Y$ information.

$SITE_INFORMATION_EMAIL$ Returns the information email.

$SITE_INFORMATION_MACHIN Returns the information machine name.

E_NAME$

$SITE_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$SITE_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$SITE_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$SITE_VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID$ Returns the virtual machine ID.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

544 | Remote Desktop Manager

COMPUTER/HARDWARE

The following context will find any Folder Device, Printer and Workstation entry type as long as it
is in the hierarchy above your current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry
closest in the hierarchy to the current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$COMPUTER_APPLICATION_N Returns the application name.

AME$

$COMPUTER_CURRENT_CLIP Returns the current clipboard content.

BOARD$

$COMPUTER_CUSTOM_FIELD1 Returns the computer custom field field 1 value.

$COMPUTER_CUSTOM_FIELD2 Returns the computer custom field field 2 value.

$COMPUTER_CUSTOM_FIELD3 Returns the computer custom field field 3 value.

$COMPUTER_CUSTOM_FIELD4 Returns the computer custom field field 4 value.

$COMPUTER_CUSTOM_FIELD5 Returns the computer custom field field 5 value.

$COMPUTER_DOMAIN$ Returns the computer domain found in the

configured credentials.

$COMPUTER_HOST$ Returns the host name if it's available (server name,

IP address...).

$COMPUTER_HOST_WITHOUT Returns the host name without the domain if it's

_DOMAIN$ available.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 545

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$COMPUTER_INFORMATION_C Returns the company specified in the computer

OMPANY$ information.

$COMPUTER_INFORMATION_E Returns the information email.

MAIL$

$COMPUTER_INFORMATION_M Returns the information machine name.

ACHINE_NAME$

$COMPUTER_IP$ Returns the IP Address.

$COMPUTER_MAC$ Returns the MAC address defined.

$COMPUTER_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$COMPUTER_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$COMPUTER_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$COMPUTER_VIRTUAL_MACHI Returns the virtual machine ID.

NE_ID$

IDENTITY

The following context will find any Folder Identity entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy above
you current entry. If there is multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy to the
current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$IDENTITY_APPLICATION_NAM Returns the application name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

546 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$IDENTITY_CURRENT_CLIPBO Returns the current clipboard content.

ARD$

$IDENTITY_CUSTOM_FIELD1$ Returns the identity custom field field 1 value.

$IDENTITY_CUSTOM_FIELD2$ Returns the identity custom field field 2 value.

$IDENTITY_CUSTOM_FIELD3$ Returns the identity custom field field 3 value.

$IDENTITY_CUSTOM_FIELD4$ Returns the identity custom field field 4 value.

$IDENTITY_CUSTOM_FIELD5$ Returns the identity custom field field 5 value.

$IDENTITY_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$IDENTITY_INFORMATION_CO Returns the company specified in the identity

MPANY$ information.

$IDENTITY_INFORMATION_EMA Returns the information email.

IL$

$IDENTITY_INFORMATION_MAC Returns the information machine name.

HINE_NAME$

$IDENTITY_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$IDENTITY_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$IDENTITY_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$IDENTITY_VIRTUAL_MACHINE Returns the virtual machine ID.

_ID$

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 547

CUSTOMER

The following context will find any Folder Customer entry type as long as it is in the hierarchy
above you current entry. If there IS multiple matches it will take the entry closest in the hierarchy
to the current entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$CUSTOMER_APPLICATION_N Returns the application name.

AME$

$CUSTOMER_CURRENT_CLIP Returns the current clipboard content.

BOARD$

$CUSTOMER_CUSTOM_FIELD1 Returns the customer custom field field 1 value.

$CUSTOMER_CUSTOM_FIELD2 Returns the customer custom field field 2 value.

$CUSTOMER_CUSTOM_FIELD3 Returns the customer custom field field 3 value.

$CUSTOMER_CUSTOM_FIELD4 Returns the customer custom field field 4 value.

$CUSTOMER_CUSTOM_FIELD5 Returns the customer custom field field 5 value.

$CUSTOMER_DOMAIN$ Returns the domain found in the configured

credentials.

$CUSTOMER_INFORMATION_C Returns the company specified in the customer

OMPANY$ information.

$CUSTOMER_INFORMATION_E Returns the information email.

MAIL$

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

548 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

$CUSTOMER_INFORMATION_M Returns the information machine name.

ACHINE_NAME$

$CUSTOMER_NAME$ Returns the session name.

$CUSTOMER_SERIAL$ Returns the serial number in the invoice tab.

$CUSTOMER_SERVICE_TAG$ Returns the service tag field located in the

information tab.

$CUSTOMER_VIRTUAL_MACHI Returns the virtual machine ID.

NE_ID$

CUSTOM FIELDS

Custom fields can contain any required data and can be accessed using the
*_CUSTOM_FIELD* variables. To access custom fields, select an entry, then click Information in
the entry overview in the dashboard. Finally, choose the Custom Fields tab.

QUICK CONNECT

The $QUICK_CONNECT$ variable will be replaced by the value in the Quick Connect control
as described in Quick Connect. It is only useful when a template connection is selected.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Commands
Part VII
550 | Remote Desktop Manager

7 Commands

7.1 Context Menu

DESCRIPTION

The Context Menu contains several entry-specific actions. The available actions depend on
which type of entry is selected. Right click on an entry to display the context menu.

Context Menu

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 551

7.1.1 Open with Parameters

DESCRIPTION

The Open with Parameters menu all options available to open a session.

Open with Parameters

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open (External) Open a session as an external process, with no direct link to

Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

552 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open Open the session within the confines of the Remote Desktop
(Embedded/Tabbed) Manager dashboard and display tabs at the top of the window.

Open via Jump... Open the session through a Jump host.

Open (Full Screen) Open the session with the full screen display mode.

Open in Connect to the console session of a server using Remote

Console/Admin Mode Desktop for Administration.

Open (Select Prompts you with the list of the credentials link to your Data
Credentials)... Source to allow you to chose the one needed to open your
session.

Open in No Open your session normally and prompt your for your
Console/Admin Mode credentials to connect.

(Prompt for
Credentials)

Open Share Folders Open the shared folders of the remote computer.

Open with a Open from a template that you have already created.
Template...

VPN Select between:

· Open (Without VPN).

· Open VPN Only.

· Close VPN Only.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 553

7.1.2 Documentation

DESCRIPTION

The Documentation feature allows for storing information about resources in the data source.
To access an entry's documentation, select an entry in the Navigation Pane, then select the
Documentation tab in the dashboard. Alternatively, right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane,
then select View – Documentation.

The documentation is written using Markdown, a plain text formatting syntax.

This feature is available with Devolutions Password Server, MariaDB, MySQL

and SQL Server data sources.

Documentation of an entry

7.1.2.1 Editor

DESCRIPTION

The documentation editor is a simple plain text editor. The text is formatted using the Markdown
text formatting syntax. Markdown is a markup language designed to be as easy-to-read and
easy-to-write as possible.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

554 | Remote Desktop Manager

Documentation editor

MARKDOWN FORMATTING TAGS

· Paragraphs

· Emphasis

· Headers

· Lists

· Horizontal rulers

· Links

· Images

· Blockquotes

· Code examples

PARAGRAPHS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 555

A paragraph is one or more consecutive lines. Normal paragraphs should not be indented with
spaces or tabs.

EMPHASIS

Two methods of text emphasis are available:

**Bold text**

*Italic text*
Output:

HEADERS

There are two ways of creating headers with Markdown.

First and second level can be created by "underlining" the text with equal signs (=) and hyhens
(-).
First level header
==================

Second level header

-------------------
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

556 | Remote Desktop Manager

More levels of headers can be created by using one to five hash symbol (#) at the beginning of
the line.
# First level header

## Second level header

### Third level header

#### Fourth level header

##### Fifth level header

Output:

LISTS

Use asterisks, pluses, and hyphens to create an unordered bulleted list. These three markers
are interchangable.
* Item 1
* Item 2
* Item 3

or
+ Item 1
+ Item 2
+ Item 3

or
- Item 1
- Item 2
- Item 3
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 557

Use regular numbers, followed by periods, to create an ordered bulleted list.

1. Item 1
2. Item 2
3. Item 3
Output:

HORIZONTAL RULERS

Use three undersocres, asterisks, or hyphens to create a horizontal ruler.

___

or
***

or
---
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

558 | Remote Desktop Manager

LINKS

Use square brackets to delimit the text you want to turn into a link.

There are two ways of creating links: inline and reference.

Use parentheses immediately after the link text for inline-style links:
Navigate to the [Devolutions website](https://devolutions.net).
Output:

Optionally a title attribute may be included in the parentheses.

Navigate to the [Devolutions website](https://devolutions.net "Website of Devolutions").
Output:

For reference-style links, define the links elsewhere in the document, then refer to a link by its
name in another set of square brackets.
Navigate to the [Devolutions website][mainwebsite] or the [Devolutions forum][forumwebsit

[mainwebsite]: https://devolutions.net/ "Website of Devolutions"

[forumwebsite]: https://forum.devolutions.net/ "Forum of Devolutions"
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 559

The title attribute is optional again. Link names may contain letters, numbers and spaces, but
are not case sensitive.

IMAGES

Image syntax is very similar to link syntax. Images must be added in the image manager before
referencing them.

To add images in the image manager, click the Manage images button.

Documentation editor – Image manager

Click Add to select an image from the computer. Select the image in the list, and click Insert to
place the image in the text.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

560 | Remote Desktop Manager

Documentation editor - Add an image

BLOCKQUOTES

Quote a passage of text by inputting a greater-than (>) symbol at the beginning of the line of text.
> Quoted passage of text
Output:

Blockquotes can easily be nested.

> Quoted passage of text
>> Nesting a quoted passage of text
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 561

CODE EXAMPLES

Inline code is created by enclosing the text in backthicks (`).

Inline `code`.
Output:

Code blocks are created be indenting the text with four spaces at the beginning of each lines
There must have an empty line before.
// Testing indented code

var markdownAwesomeness = 0;

if (indentedCodeWorks) {
markdownAwesomeness++;
}
Output:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

562 | Remote Desktop Manager

A specific syntax highlighting can be specified as well.

```javascript
var s = "JavaScript syntax highlighting";
alert(s);
```
Output:

7.1.3 Entry History

DESCRIPTION

Entry History feature allows you to view details regarding different version of your sessions and
also gives you the option of performing compares between different versions.

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 563

For architectural reasons, the documents stored in our Advanced Data Sources
are NOT protected from modifications. Once they are modified, the previous
version cannot be restored. Please keep a safe copy of all documents in
another storage device. Support for this feature will be added in a coming update
to our products.

You must be an administrator of the data source to perform this action.

SETTINGS

Home - Entry History

Session History

To display the entry history, right-click on an entry and select View - Entry History.

ENTRY HISTORY VIEW

The entry history view dialog allows you to compare two entries and manage history revisions.
To compare simply select any two entries then use the Compare button. You can delete any
history revision or the entire history using the Delete and Delete All buttons.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

564 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry history view

Compare session modifications

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 565

VIEW DELETED ENTRIES

Use the Administration - View Deleted to manage and resurrect deleted entries.

Deleted Entries

7.2 File

DESCRIPTION

The File menu contains many actions regarding the application and the data source. This menu
is contextual and depends on the connected data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

566 | Remote Desktop Manager

File

GO OFFLINE/ONLINE

Toggle the data source offline mode.

For more information, please consult the Offline mode topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 567

LOCK APPLICATION

Lock and minimize the application.

The user is prompted for the data source password when the application is restored (if required
by the configuration).

MY DATA SOURCE INFORMATION

Display configuration information relative to the current data source.

For more information, please consult the My Data Source Information topic.

DEVOLUTIONS ACCOUNT

Connect to a Devolutions Account, create custom installer for Remote Desktop Manager,
manage license serials, and more.

For more information, please consult the Devolutions Account topic.

REFRESH

Refresh the data source and retrieve the most recent data.

For more information, please consult the Refresh topic.

DATA SOURCES

Open the data source configuration screen.

For more information, please consult the Data Sources topic.

BACKGROUND SERVICES

View and execute synchronizers.

For more information, please consult the Background Services topics.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

568 | Remote Desktop Manager

MY ACCOUNT SETTINGS

View information about the current user and edit personal credentials.

For more information, please consult the My Account Settings topic.

CHANGE MASTER KEY

Prompts to change the current Master Key

For more information, please consult the Change Master Key topic.

IMPORT

Import entries in the data source.

For more information, please consult the Import topic.

EXPORT

Export entries from the data source.

For more information, please consult the Export topic.

OPTIONS

Edit the application options.

For more information, please consult the Options topic.

TEMPLATES

Edit templates and default settings for entries.

For more information, please consult the Templates topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 569

7.2.1 Go Offline/Online

DESCRIPTION

Toggle the data source Offline Mode.

Use the offline mode to connect to a local copy of the data source when the remote database is
unavailable. This is useful when working from a remote location and the network is unreachable
or if there is any kind of connectivity issue.

There are security considerations to take into account when enabling the offline
mode.

The offline mode availability relies on several settings, refer to the Offline Mode topic.

The lowest setting (in terms of security) prevails over the others, which may prevent you from
using the offline mode. If the Go Offline button is not available, please consult your
administrator.

The Data Source Information displays the size of the offline cache file along with the effective
modes (disabled, read-only or read/write).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

570 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Source Information - Offline mode

Several features are not available in offline mode, such as:

· Attachments and logs.

· User management (Add/Edit/Delete users).

7.2.2 My Data Source Information

DESCRIPTION

The Data Source Information displays various information related to the current data source,
such as the current user and security access.

The My Data Source Information view can be different depending on the Data
Source Type. This topic uses an SQL Server data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 571

File – My Data Source Information

USER AND SECURITY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

572 | Remote Desktop Manager

GENERAL

The General tab displays information about the current user and data source configuration.

My Data Source Information - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Database user The name of the user currently logged to the database.

User The actual windows user.

Description Display the description of the user connected to the data

source.

Is administrator Indicates if the user is an administrator.

Allow offline mode Indicates if the user can use the data source in offline mode.

Allow drag-and-drop Indicates if the user can drag-and-drop entries in the data
source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 573

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Is Auto Refresh Indicates if the data source auto refreshes.

Auto refresh interval Indicates the delay for the auto refresh to occur.

Is Two Factor Indicates if the data source is configured with a second

Configuration factor of authentication.

ENTRIES

My Data Source Information – Entries

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Add, Edit and Delete Indicates if the user has the right to add, edit, or delete
entries entries.

View information section Indicates if the user can view the information section of
entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

574 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Import and Export entries Indicates if the user has the privilege to import or export
entries.

Allow add entry in vault Indicates if the user can add entries in the vault root of the
root folder data source.

SECURITY GROUPS

The Security Groups are now a Legacy setting. We strongly recommend using roles instead.

ROLES

The Roles tab displays the roles that the user is a member of and the rights related to those
roles.

This feature is only available with an SQL Server/SQL Azure and a Devolutions
Password Server (DPS) data source.

7.2.3 Devolutions Account

DESCRIPTION

Use File – Devolutions Account to create/connect Remote Desktop Manager to your

Devolutions Online Database account. The Devolutions Online Database is free for customers
and includes access to the custom installer manager.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 575

Devolutions Account

DEVOLUTIONS ACCOUNT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Sign-in or Sign-out Sign-in with your Devolutions Online Database (DODB)

account that has already been created.

Sign-out of your Devolutions Online Database (DODB)

account.

Create a New Create a new Devolutions Online Database (DODB)

Devolutions Account account.

Edit Devolutions Account Edit your Devolutions Online Database (DODB) account.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

576 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Automatically sign-in Automatically sign-in to your Devolutions Online Database

at startup (DODB) account at the startup of the application. This feature is
of particular importance if you are using a Devolutions Online
Database data source or our Online Backup service.

TOOLS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Installer File Create a Remote Desktop Manager Installer File (.rdi). Consult
Generator topic Installer File Generator.

Custom Installer Consult topic Custom Installer Manager.

Manager

Import Online Import Online database configuration in the application.

Database
Configurations

7.2.4 Backup

DESCRIPTION

Please consult topic Online Backup for information on this service.

7.2.4.1 Settings

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 577

The Online Backup allows you to backup your Devolutions Online Drive, SQLite, XML or
Microsoft Access data sources in a safe online storage. The backup option is available through
File – Backup menu.

SETTINGS

1. Click on File – Backup to Sign-in with your Devolutions Account.

2. Click on View Subscription.

Online Back up - View Subscription

3. Click on the ellipsis to enter your Backup name.

Back up Name

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

578 | Remote Desktop Manager

4. You will need to specify a unique backup name in the field New backup for each of your data
source which will then be used to backup and restore the data source. Click on Create to
automatically create your Online Backup.

Create Back up

5. Once you've completed all the steps, perform a change in the data source to properly activate
the Online Backup.

6.The backup logo will display a green arrow meaning your backup is now enabled.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 579

Online Back up Activated

You must perform this for all your Devolutions Online Drive, SQLite, XML or
Microsoft Access data sources in order to be fully protected!

The automatic backup is executed in the background 30 seconds after any

modification is made to the data source content.

7.2.4.2 Restore

DESCRIPTION

Before being able to restore a backup, you MUST create an empty data source
and define the backup name before being able to use it. You need to create a
new SQLite, XML, Online Drive or Microsoft Access data source in File – Data
Sources.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

580 | Remote Desktop Manager

At some point, you may need to restore a backup of your Devolutions Online Drive, SQLite, XML
or Microsoft Access data sources. The restore option is accessible from the menu File –
Backup – Restore.

SETTINGS

1. To restore a data source from a backup, select it as the current data source.

2. Click on File – Backup – Restore.

Back up Restore

3. Select the backup that you wish to restore from the list and click on Select.

Select your Back up

4. The Online Backup wizard will display a brief description of the backup. Click on Next.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 581

Back up Wizard

5. Select the restore destination. It is not necessary to select the option Perform a backup
data source before restoring the selected backup since it is empty.

Restore Destination

6. Click on Finish to perform your backup restore.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

582 | Remote Desktop Manager

7.2.5 Refresh

DESCRIPTION

Refreshing the data source allows for updating its content. Data sources are usually refreshed
automatically after a set period of time.

To refresh the data source, use File – Refresh. Do a refresh to make sure that the data source
is up to date.

SIMPLE REFRESH

A simple refresh updates the data source to retrieve only the modified content. Use the above-
mentioned File – Refresh or the refresh button in the Quick Access Toolbar.

Refresh the Data Source

LOCAL CACHE REFRESH

A refresh of the local cache resets the local cache of the data source. All the content is retrieved
from the database and the local cache file is recreated. Click the refresh button while holding
the Ctrl key or use the Ctrl+F5 key combination. A local cache refresh may also help when
experiencing Cache issues.
7.2.6 Change Master Key

DESCRIPTION

Use File – Change Master Key to encrypt the data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 583

The master key prevents unauthorized users to access the data source without knowing the
master key. It is highly recommended to apply a master key to the data source if you're using
Remote Desktop Manager in a portable environment (i.e. USB Flash Drive, USB Hard Drive).

A master key can be used with the following data sources:

· Devolutions Online Drive
· Dropbox
· FTP
· Google Drive
· WebDAV
· XML

Since version 14.0.4.0, the user is automatically prompted to add a master key
when connecting to one of the above mentioned data sources for the first time.
The master key is completely optional (yet highly recommended).

Change Master Key

7.2.7 Data Sources

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

584 | Remote Desktop Manager

Use File – Data Sources to manage data sources. Remote Desktop Manager supports
multiple types of data source. Most are available only with an Enterprise Edition of Remote
Desktop Manager.

Please refer to the Data Source Types topic for more information on all supported types of data
sources.

Data Sources

SETTINGS

ADD A NEW DATA SOURCE

Use the Add button to create a data source configuration.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 585

EDIT/DUPLICATE/DELETE DATA SOURCE

Use the – – buttons to respectively edit, duplicate or delete the selected data source
configuration.

Only the configuration will be deleted but the actual file or database will still be
available.

IMPORT/EXPORT DATA SOURCE CONFIGURATION

Use the – buttons to respectively import or export the selected data source configuration.
The configuration is exported as a .RDD file.

LOCK DATA SOURCE

Use the lock button to lock the data source with a password to prevent any modification to a
data source configuration. This is useful when having sensitive credentials that you wish to
protect from other users.

UNLOCK DATA SOURCE

Use the unlock button to unlock a data source locked with a password.

ON START UP

Choose which data source to connect to when the application starts.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use default data Set the data source that you always want to open at start up.
source

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

586 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Last used data Open with the last used data source.
source

Prompt for data A message box will open on startup for the data source selection.
source

7.2.8 Background Services

SYNCHRONIZERS

Synchronizers centralizes all your synchronizers entry in one place.

When experiencing a performance degradation with Remote Desktop Manager you will be able
to verify if a synchronizer is running in the background causing the system to slow down.

Synchronizers

IS ONLINE

Is Online allows you to verify and change the settings of your server's online availability.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 587

Is Online

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Enable check for Server is ping to determine if they are available. Server will be
server availability displayed in "red" in the tree view if not available.

Execute automatic Execute the online check automatically each determined amount
check every of minutes.

Check is online If the option is On the application will verify if the server is online.

Online detection If Check is online option is enable, select the detection method
between:

· Ping

· Port scan

7.2.9 Import

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Import to import entries in Remote Desktop Manager. You can import entry types
from multiple sources.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

588 | Remote Desktop Manager

We support native import formats from many popular tools on the market. In case we don't
support the native format, or don't support the third party, we have wizards to import from a csv
file.

The import feature is only active if the import Permission has been enabled inside
the user account.

SETTINGS

File - Import

IMPORT ENTRIES

Import Entries is used to import sessions stored in files, such as:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 589

· .rdm (Remote Desktop Manager native export format)

· .pvm (Password Vault Manager native export format)

· .xml (it must be a specific format compatible with the application)

IMPORT COMPUTER WIZARD

The Import Computer Wizard is only available in the Enterprise edition.

You can import computers from different sources. These sources includes:

· Network neighborhood

· Your current domain or another domain on your network

· List of computers from a file

Please refer to Import Computer Wizard for more information.

IMPORT WITH NETWORK SCAN

Consult Import with Network Scan to learn more about this option.

IMPORTING FROM CSV FILES

Three wizards are available to import content from csv files:

· Import Session

· Import Software Serials

· Import Login

Each wizard specifies the list of supported columns and identifies which are mandatory.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

590 | Remote Desktop Manager

IMPORT FROM

Consult topics below to import sessions, logins and contact from many tools:

· Import Sessions

· Import Logins

· Import Contacts

7.2.9.1 Import Computer Wizard

DESCRIPTION

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

The Import Computer Wizard allows you to create sessions for computers using one of the
following sources:
· Network neighborhood
· Active directory: your current domain or another domain on your network
· Host list: List of computers from a file

OVERVIEW

The wizard has a few major-steps:

1. select computers by using one of the three sources;
2. optionally apply a template from which to base new sessions on; and
3. optionally edit each newly created session prior to them being saved.

The template selection should not be overlooked, in fact it is probably the most important step to
ensure your newly created sessions are usable right after being created. You should divide the
sessions in batches based on which template you need to apply and import one batch at a time.

WORKFLOW

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 591

Upon launching the wizard, you are prompted for the source to use.

The Resolve IP address option must be checked if you want to use the IP address in the host
field of your sessions instead of the host name.

Import Session Wizard

Refer to the sections below depending on the chosen source.

NETWORK NEIGHBORHOOD

The next screen will immediately be populated with the result of the network discovery.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

592 | Remote Desktop Manager

Import Session Wizard - Netwok Neighborhood

If you prefer your sessions

to use the IP address instead of the Host name to connect to the
devices, check the "select by IP address" option. This requires that the "Resolve by IP
address" was selected in the first screen of the wizard. Select the computers for which you want to
create session and proceed to Template Selection below. Multi-select is allowed by using CTRL-click and
SHIFT-click.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 593

Import Session Wizard - Template

ACTIVE DIRECTORY

The following screen allows you to select the domain to interrogate after which you must press
refresh to load the list of computers that are available.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

594 | Remote Desktop Manager

Import Session Wizard - Active Directory

After the query is executed the results are displayed in the grid.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 595

Import Session Wizard - Domain list

If you prefer your sessions

to use the IP address instead of the Host name to connect to the
devices, check the "select by IP address" option. This requires that the "Resolve by IP address"
was selected in the first screen of the wizard. Select the computers for which you want to create
session and proceed to Template Selection below. Multi-select is allowed by using CTRL-click and SHIFT-click.

HOST LIST

The following screen allows you to enter a list of hosts in an Edit control. If you prefer that your sessions use the
IP address to connect to the hosts, you must enter the host name, a pipe, then the IP address.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

596 | Remote Desktop Manager

Import Session Wizard - Host List

Proceed to Template Selection below.

TEMPLATE SELECTION

The template selection is an optional step, but its the only way that you have to choose a protocol
type other then RDP. It also allows you to set your preferences and have them used by all the
created sessions. In fact we recommend you to import in batches for each of the session type
that you need to import.

If you intend to modify each of your imported

sessions as they are created, check the Edit
imported entry option. Note that each session will be displayed sequentially so you can
perform your modification and save. A Batch Edit is probably preferable if you have more then a
few sessions to import.
7.2.9.2 Import Session CSV Wizard

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 597

This version of the wizard has been greatly enhanced to support not only all entries general fields
but also sub-fields. This gives you access to all properties, even for types provided by add-ons,
therefore unknown by Remote Desktop Manager.

For a discussion on the CSV file format, and the impact of decisions made in this
entry, please consult Import Strategies and file format

SETTINGS

Once you've selected the CSV file to process you will be presented with the template selection
screen.

If you have selected a template as suggested, you will see a list of templates available to your
system.

Import Csv Wizard

If you wish to review each and every session as they are imported you can check the Edit
imported entry, but it is not really recommended for a large number of sessions.

Press finish and the import will proceed using your chosen settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

598 | Remote Desktop Manager

7.2.9.2.1 Import Strategies and file format

DESCRIPTION

The most important decision is about if and how to apply a template as part of the process.

Both methods of importing from CSV allows you to choose a template for newly created entries.
If you do choose a template as part of the process, it will be apply to ALL entries created from
that batch. Sometimes, it may be a good strategy to split the entries in different CSV files by
grouping them by type of entries you wish to create.

If you need finer control, you can specify the template to use in a Template column of the CSV
file. But since you're able to specify the entry type from within the CSV file it may not be
necessary. Please consult CSV Samples below.

COLUMNS

Some validations on entry settings are not in the business layer but rather in the
property dialogs. This means that using the import process can result in invalid
entries that trigger errors. Please validate the resulting entries carefully.

In the CSV file, only the Host field is mandatory. If no template is specified, the RDP type will be
used as a fallback type.

We cannot provide the list of all supported fields for all entry types because Remote Desktop
Manager uses an open architecture and therefore is not even aware of all the fields of entry
types that are provided by our Add-On system. A good method of finding out the field structure is
to create an entry of the desired type and to use Clipboard – Copy, then paste the content in
your favorite editor. You will see the structure and the field names.

Default values for fields are NOT serialized. This means that they are simply left
out of the serialized structure.

Implementing support for all fields comes at a cost. The import process is time
consuming because of all the dynamic field access that takes place. A massive
initial import of entries should be separated in batches of manageable size.
Please perform trials and tune the number of entries to achieve acceptable
performance.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 599

All of our entries share a basic set of fields, the rest are tied to the specific technology being
interfaced with (RDP, SSH, etc). Some fields are grouped in structures like the Information Tab
for instance. This means that those fields are accessible only when providing the structure name
as a prefix, for example: "MetaInformation\OS" or "MetaInformation\PurchaseDate"

Note that the content of the CSV file can contain our variables and they will be
resolved upon saving. For instance you could use the $HOST$ variable in fields
like Description, URL, Putty\CustomSessionName, etc. It will be replaced by
the corresponding value.

Here is a list of some relevant fields.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Host name of the device, this is the only mandatory field.

Name Name of the entry

ConnectionType Token representing the connection type. It is best to use the

Clipboard-Copy method to obtain the acceptable values.

Group Destination folder. Note that if the import process itself had a
Destination Folder defined as well, the folder listed here would be
created below the one from the process.

Description Description of the entry.

Open (Embedded) Boolean value (true or false) that indicates to open the session
embedded. The default value is false, meaning that the native
client will be used depending on the technology. MSTSC.EXE for
instance.

Username Username used to open a session to the device.

Domain Domain used to open a session to the device.

Password Password used to open a session to the device. Please note that
this field is encrypted and stored into another field upon being

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

600 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

imported.

MetaInformation\Ser Serial Number of the device.

ialNumber

MetaInformation\Ser Service Tag of the device

viceTag

MetaInformation\Pur Purchase date in a ISO8601 format, i.e. yyyy-mm-dd

chaseDate

CSV SAMPLES

WITH SPECIFIED SESSION TYPES

Host,Name,Template,ConnectionType,ConnectionSubType,SubMode,Group,Username,Domain,Passwor
192.168.10.001,one,,Microsoft Remote Desktop (RDP),,,QA Lab,,,,Description001,
http://online.remotedesktopmanager.com,two,,Web Browser (http/https),,,QA Lab,,,,Descript
192.168.10.003,three,,LogMeIn,,,QA Lab,,,,Description003,
192.168.10.004,four,,"Telnet, SSH, RAW, rLogin",,0,QA Lab,,,,"This is the Putty sub-type"
192.168.10.005,five,,"Telnet, SSH, RAW, rLogin",,1,QA Lab,,,,"This is the Telnex (Rebex)
192.168.10.006,six,,"Telnet, SSH, RAW, rLogin",,2,QA Lab,,,,"This is the SSH Shell (Rebex
192.168.10.007,seven,,"Telnet, SSH, RAW, rLogin",,3,QA Lab,,,,"This is the SSH (Rebex) su
192.168.10.008,eight,,VNC,,,QA Lab,,,,Description008,
192.168.10.009,nine,,Citrix,,,QA Lab,,,,Description009,

7.2.9.3 Import Netw ork Scan

DESCRIPTION

The Import from Network allows you to perform a network scan based on a predefine range of
IP address to find sessions to import.

Once the scan is completed select the sessions you wish to import (by default every session will
be selected) and click on OK to import those sessions in your data source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 601

If you wish to review each and every session as they are imported you can check the Edit
imported entry, however we do not recommend this for large number of sessions.

Import from your Network

7.2.9.4 Import Sessions

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Import – Import from – Session to import sessions from other software into
Remote Desktop Manager.

The import feature is only active if the import Permission has been enable inside
the user account.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

602 | Remote Desktop Manager

Import from Session

IMPORT FROM SESSION

You can import your sessions from an existing application or an existing file format. Some
application encrypt the data but it must be in plain text to allow the application to parse the
content. Please note that all entries will be imported in the current folder. For some applications
it's not possible to extract the password.

We support a Multitude of Sessions, explore to your heart's content!

7.2.9.5 Import Logins

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Import – Import from – Login to import different logins or credentials from other
software into Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 603

The import feature is only active if the import Permission has been enable inside
the user account.

SETTINGS

Import from Login

IMPORT FROM LOGIN

You can import the credentials from a wide array of formats exported by various password
management solutions. The export content must not be encrypted in order to parse the content.
Please note that all the entries will be imported in the current folder. We support a multitude of
Login imports, explore to your heart's content!
7.2.9.6 Import Contacts

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Import – Import from – Contact to import contacts from other software into
Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

604 | Remote Desktop Manager

The import feature is only active if the import Permission has been enable inside
the user account.

SETTINGS

Import Contact menu

IMPORT FROM CONTACT

It's now possible to import the contact from different sources:

· Microsoft Outlook

· Real VNC

· VCard

Please note the all the entries will be imported in the current folder.

Microsoft Outlook contacts sub-folders are also supported.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 605

7.2.10 Export

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Export to export entries from Remote Desktop Manager. Below is a list of export
options:

· Export All Entries (.rdm).

· Export All Host List (.csv).

· Export All Entries (.csv).

· Export All Entries (.html).

· Export All Entries (.xml) (It's exactly the same content as a .rdm file but with the XML
extension).

If you have used Document entries in the Stored in database mode, or used
attachments, the binary content of the documents is NOT exported in any of
our export formats. These documents/attachments MUST be handled manually.

The export feature is only active if the import Permission has been enabled inside
the user account.

The only appropriate format to import the entries back into Remote Desktop
Manager is the .rdm format.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

606 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Export

When using an Advanced Data Source, export capabilities can be disabled via
security policies at the data source level (no one can export) or at a user level
(particular users can't export). See Security Group Management for more
information.

EXPORT ALL ENTRIES (.RDM)

Export all entries in a .rdm file that can be imported into any Remote Desktop Manager data
source. You can also include credentials in this export format and secure your file with a master
key.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 607

By default the credentials are NOT included. It's critical to check the
Credentials option in order for the exported data to include the credentials.

Specifying a master key will encrypt the whole content of the .rdm file to protect
its content. It is highly recommended as a backup measure, but the key is
absolutely necessary for decryption. Preserve this as well in a separate storage
device for safekeeping.

Export entries in .rdm

EXPORT ALL HOST LIST (.CSV)

Export a simple host list in .csv format. You will be prompted to see if you wish the export to be
slightly more detailed and include the following information: Host, Description, Display Name,
Group, Security Group.

EXPORT ALL ENTRIES (.CSV)

Export all entries using the .csv format file. For security reasons the .csv file will be contained
within a password encrypted zip file. This type of security can be hacked using brute force
attacks, it should be used only when the zip file is under your exclusive control.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

608 | Remote Desktop Manager

Please note that the csv columns will vary depending on entry types being
exported. This makes it the wrong format if ever you want to import the data back
in Remote Desktop Manager. Use this only to migrate to another system.

EXPORT ALL ENTRIES (.HTML)

Export all entries within a AES-256 to encrypt self contained html file. See Export Html
Encrypted topic for more information.

EXPORT ALL ENTRIES (.XML)

Because it brought confusion to our user base, this export format has been converted to perform
the exact same export as the "Export all entries" but sets the file extension to .xml instead.

EXPORT ALL DOCUMENTS

Export Documents

Export all attachments or all document entries that are linked to your data source.
7.2.10.1 Encrypted Html

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 609

The Html Encrypted export format was designed for simple and secure exports of entries. It
allows for an html export of the entry information while using symmetric encryption (AES-256) to
encrypt sensitive information such as passwords. The file is an ultra portable self contained html
file that requires no external script files or installs. As long as you have a web browser with
JavaScript enabled you can get to your encrypted data.

With a secure encrypted document you can freely send the information via email
or any other protocol without compromising the sensitive data. Use the export as
means of sharing or as a backup for sensitive information.

SETTINGS

Select the entries to export or export all entries. Right-click and select Export – Export Special
– Export All Entries (.html) or use File – Export – Export All Entries (.html). You will be
prompted for a password for the symmetric encryption key. Select the file name for the new
document. Once the export is completed the file will open in your default browser.

Ensure you do not forget the password as you will not be able to decrypt the data
without it.

When exporting multiple entries that are all contained within the same file, at decrypt time, each
encrypted value must be decrypted individually for security reasons. Once you're done with the
sensitive data simply hit F5 to refresh the file or simply close it. Your data is now safe from prying
eyes.

AES-256

We use AES-256 to encrypt/decrypt your sensitive data. Since the decryption is done entirely in
the browser, there’s no need for external tools, downloads or installs.

Encrypted Value

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

610 | Remote Desktop Manager

SAFE & SMART VIRTUAL BACKUP

In addition, HTML Export using symmetric encryption is a great way to securely backup your
passwords and other sensitive information. It allows you to share information via email or simply
send the file to your personal email account as a backup.
7.2.11 Options

DESCRIPTION

There are multiple options available to manage and customize your Remote Desktop Manager
in the menu File – Options. Most of these options are related to changes to the local instance.

Use the Search property to find a specific option.

File - Options

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 611

Options you configure:

· General: Application Start (including update options), Application Close, Notification, Proxy (Web), Custom
Variables

· User Interface

· Types: Settings for different types of entry, terminal, ssh keys, etc.

· Reports

· Browser Extensions: Settings for Devolutions Web Login

· Key Agent: Hold SSH Keys in memory already decoded and ready for them to be used. Fore
more information see Key Agent Manager
· Security: Local application security only; You can set security for all users in the data source

· Tools

· Path: Customize installation paths for Remote Desktop Manager, logs, documents, templates and add-ons

· Cloud

· Advanced

· Import Options

· Export Options

· Search Option Property

7.2.11.1 Advanced

DESCRIPTION

Use the File – Options – Advanced tab to control the application behavior as it pertains to low
level settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

612 | Remote Desktop Manager

Options - Advanced

SETTINGS

ADVANCED

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Debug level Set the level of debugging information that Remote Desktop
Manager will capture. This should only be modified upon request
from a Devolutions support technician as it might cause your
system to slow down .

Logs The logs can be saved in a file or in a database file. Select

between:

· Both: Logs will be saved in a text file and in a database file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 613

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Database: Logs will be saved in a file named

RemoteDesktopManager.log.db. The file is located in the
installation folder of the application.

· File: Logs will be saved in a file named

RemoteDesktopManager.log. The file is located in the
installation folder of the application.

Connection The connection constructor is used for memory optimization

constructor when using legacy. We strongly recommend to leave this option
at Default. Only change this option upon request from a
Devolutions support technician.

Offline engine You can choose your Offline engine between the SQLite or
OpenMCDF. Only change this option upon request from a
Devolutions support technician.

Force "localhost" Forces the use of "localhost" when using the VPN dynamic port.
when using VPN
dynamic port

Confirm on multiple Select a target number where mass opening sessions will
session open if open demand confirmation.
count greater than

OTHER OPTIONS - CONNECTIONS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Auto close embedded Automatically closes all tabs for embedded sessions when
tab on disconnect they are disconnected.

Confirm on multiple When opening more than one session you will be presented
sessions open with a confirmation dialog. This typically occurs when doing an
Open session on a folder.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

614 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disable embedded 32 Disable the shell embedded 32 execute in Windows for

shell execute embedded sessions.

Disable logoff When pressing the logoff button in an embedded RDP

confirmation message session, Remote Desktop Manager, will disconnect the
session without the logoff confirmation message.

Disable multi-thread This setting allows Remote Desktop Manager to use multiple
loading threads to load the data. Disabling this option will decrease
the performance.

Disable multi-thread This setting allows Remote Desktop Manager to use multiple
offline file threads in offline file. Disabling this option will decrease the
performance.

Disable RDP virtual Turning off virtual channel disables some Remote Desktop
channel Services features such as clipboard and printer redirection.

Enable advanced This option creates an AdvancedTelnetSSH.log file in %

Logging for Telnet and LocalAppData%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager. This
SSH file can be helpful when retrieving logs for Telnet/SSH
(AdvancedTelnetSSH.lo connections.
g)

Enable offline Activate locks for the Offline read/write rights.

read/write locks

Ensure that KeePass is Validate that KeePass is running on your computer before
running accessing any KeePass data.

Force refresh before Perform a refresh of the entry before entering in edit mode.
edit entry This is useful in a multi-user environment with a shared data
sources. This ensure that you are editing the most recent
version of the entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 615

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Force restore When double-clicking on the desktop shortcut it will restore the
application with application that is already open. If the option is unchecked a
desktop shortcut second Remote Desktop Manager window will open.

Open shortcut session Disable the command line warning message when using a
silent shortcut.

Use connection loader Only enable this option upon request from our Support team.
optimization

Use DirectX rendering By default this option is enabled to use DirectX rendering
in VNC when available for VNC connection.

Use NTFS Encryption When using Offline Mode, a local file is created to hold a copy
for Offline mode of the data source. If this is enabled the local file is encrypted
using the built-in NTFS encryption of Windows. This setting
may cause delays when accessing the data source because
the local file is refreshed on every access.

Use Secret Server Enable to use the Secret Server Legacy interface.
Legacy Interface

OTHER OPTIONS - GENERAL

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Allow multiple Allows more than one instance of Remote Desktop Manager
instances to run concurrently. This is not a recommended practice.

Allow non upgraded Allow Remote Desktop Manager to work on an older data
data source source that has not being upgraded.

Confirm on drag and When session(s) are moved by drag and drop, a confirmation
drop move message will appear to confirm the move.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

616 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disable Analytics Disable the computational analysis of data or statistics.

Disable stack trace Disable the stack trace details when an error occurs in
Remote Desktop Manager. This is a security feature.

Focus content on Set focus on the last embedded session when the application
application activation is activated.

Use application Use the installation folder to save the local play list that has
directory for local play been created.
list

Use application Use the installation folder to save the offline cache file.
directory for offline
cache

OTHER OPTIONS - UI OPTIONS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Always show "Go Always display the "Go Offline" button in the status bar when
Offline" button Offline Mode is active.

Disable custom images Disable the loading of any custom images in the tree view.
Too many custom images could dramatically increase the size
of the data source and increase the load time at the same
time.

Expand all tree nodes After creating a new credential entry, the tree nodes expands
on select credential automatically.
entry

Hide last opened play Hide the last opened play list at startup in the play list dialog.
list in play list

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 617

OPTION DESCRIPTION

management

Use old entry sort Use the old entry sort from previous version of Remote
Desktop Manager.

INFORMATION

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Created on Creation date of Remote Desktop Manager configuration

folder.

Source Source of Remote Desktop Manager configuration settings.

Path Shortcut to access the configuration folder directly.

7.2.11.2 Import Options

SETTINGS

Select the Configuration File to import in Remote Desktop Manager and click on Open.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER OPTIONS FILE IMPORTER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

618 | Remote Desktop Manager

Application Options File Importer

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use the selected Use the RemoteDesktopManager.cfg file as a new

configuration file as the new configuration file for your application.
one

Choose options to replace Select which options to replace in your actual

RemoteDesktopManager.cfg file. See below for more
information.

Create a backup (.old) Create a backup of your old

RemoteDesktopManager.cfg

CHOOSE OPTIONS TO REPLACE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 619

Application Options File Importer

Decide which options to replace with the one from RemoteDesktopManager.cfg that you wish to
import. Select Replace to replace an existing setting with a new one or select Ignore if you want
to keep the setting that you already have.
7.2.11.3 Ex port Options

DESCRIPTION

Use File – Options – Export Options to control the options to export from your application
configuration. Use this to easily transfer settings to another machine.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

620 | Remote Desktop Manager

Sharing the exported file with a colleague would effectively give that person
whatever credentials you have set in your data source definitions, including
credentials set in your DODB.

Devolutions does not recommend sharing any credential to a team data

source.

Configuration file export dialog

SETTINGS

REGISTRATION INFORMATION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 621

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Company registration name.

Email Registration email.

Key Serial key.

MISCELLANEOUS

The local templates may contain credentials, ensure you do not share the
exported file.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Proxy settings Includes your proxy settings.

Saved Preserve your installation paths configured for the external application.
installation
paths

Saved Include your local templates in the export.

templates

DODB Includes your Devolutions Online Database credentials.

Credentials

Include data Include your data source credentials.

source
credentials

DATA SOURCES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

622 | Remote Desktop Manager

The data source configurations you select will be exported with the
username/password as they are currently configured. If you are creating a file to
quickly set up new employees, you must be careful not to give away your
credentials. Using the Custom Installer Service is recommended for this case.

All your configured data sources will be displayed in this section. Select the one(s) that you want
to include in the export. Please note that the content of the data source is not exported.

When your settings are customized to your liking, click on Export. You will be prompted to save
your settings in a RemoteDesktopManager.cfg file.
7.2.12 My Account Settings

DESCRIPTION

Use File – My Account Settings to configure accounts that connect to different web platforms.
Set up account settings one time and use it in entries as many time as required. This section
also allows to manage Personal Credentials, Personal Private Key and Specific Settings
lists.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 623

My Account Settings

INFORMATION

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Database user Indicates the current user connected to the application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

624 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

User Indicates the user of the current Windows session.

Administrator Indicates if the current user is administrator or not.

My Personal Please consult My Personal Credentials topic for more information.

Credentials

My Personal Configure a personal private key for further use in sessions.

Private Key

User Specific Provide a list of all the User Specific Settings configured in
Settings List Remote Desktop Manager.

Local Specific Provide a list of all the Local Specific Settings configured in
Settings list Remote Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

We support a specifics settings for a variety of Credentials, explore to your heart's content!
7.2.12.1 My Personal Credentials

DESCRIPTION

The My Personal Credentials feature is a single credential entry which is locally stored on your
computer in your Windows profile.

It is typically used to hold the Windows credentials for your running sessions because Remote
Desktop Manager can't access them. If you can't use integrated security then you must store
your credentials in My Personal Credentials.

This allows you to centralize one special credential to replace or emulate the ones for your
Windows session. When a password change is needed you simply need to change it once in
My Personal Credentials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 625

If you want to change the credential type, go in %LOCALAPPDATA% (Default) or %

APPDATA% (Remote Desktop Services)
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager and delete the Credentials.rdt file to
reset it.

My Personal Credentials

My Personal Credentials can be selected in your entries under Credentials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

626 | Remote Desktop Manager

Credentials - My personal credentials

7.2.12.2 User Specific Settings List

DESCRIPTION

The User Specific Settings List feature will provide all entries that are overridden with user
Specific Settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 627

User Specific Settings List dialog

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Edit Edit the selected User Specific Settings.

Delete Delete the selected User Specific Settings.

Import Import a list of user Specific Settings from a .rds file. As this file is
encrypted using a mandatory password, you will have to provide
the password to successfully import the content of the .rds file.

Export Export a list of user Specific Settings into a .rds file. A password is
required to encrypt the .rds file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

628 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

7.2.13 Templates

DESCRIPTION

Templates are useful to have predefined values when creating an entry. Use templates to:
· Add preconfigured entries
· Use with the Quick connect feature
· Open entries as a template
· Create an import wizard
· Create password templates

To access and manage templates, navigate to File – Templates.

It's possible to create local and database templates.

· Local templates are saved in the Remote Desktop Manager configuration file. They are available only to the
current user of the machine.
· Database templates are saved in the database. They are available to all users of the data source.

This allows for creating predefined templates available to use with the quick connect feature or
when creating or importing a entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 629

By default, standard users cannot create or manage templates. To allow users

to create or manage templates, the permission must be granted to users using
the Management section of the Data source permissions (System
Permissions).

In Advanced Data Sources , local templates are disabled by default. They can
be enabled from the Data Source Settings (System Settings).

File – Templates

AVAILABILITY

When creating a template, its availability can be specified in the properties.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

630 | Remote Desktop Manager

Template properties – Template Settings

USAGE

Templates can be used in the following cases:

CREATE A NEW ENTRY

By default, when creating an entry of a type that has templates configured for, the user is
prompted for a template to use. This behavior can be modified in the Data Source Settings
(System Settings).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 631

Select a template

The template can be selected before creating the entry as well. Simply use the Template
section of the Add New Entry window.

Add New Entry – Template

RUN A QUICK CONNECT SESSION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

632 | Remote Desktop Manager

Templates can be used with the Quick Connect feature. For example, the same template can
be used to connect to different hosts.

Quick Connect

IMPORT WIZARD

The import session wizard uses a template for the imported sessions.

Import Session Csv Wizard

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 633

7.2.13.1 Creating Templates

DESCRIPTION

There are many ways to create template for entries. You can create a new template, save an
entry as a template, import entries as templates, and duplicate a existing template. It is also
possible to create group templates.

In this topic:
· New Template

· Save as Template

· Import Template

· Duplicate Template

· Template Groups

CREATE A NEW TEMPLATE

1. Navigate to File – Templates and select Templates.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

634 | Remote Desktop Manager

File – Templates

2. In the Templates window, click the Add template button.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 635

Add a new template

3. Select an entry to create the template for.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

636 | Remote Desktop Manager

Select an entry to create the template for

4. Enter a name for the template, and configure the properties as necessary.

Template Properties

SAVE ENTRY AS TEMPLATE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 637

It is possible to save entries as templates to use their properties in other entries. Furthermore,
this can be achieve on folders to include all their child items in the template.

From the Navigation Pane, right-click an entry and select Add – Save as Template...

Save as Template...

IMPORT TEMPLATE

It is possible to import previously exported entries as templates.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

638 | Remote Desktop Manager

1. Navigate to File – Templates, and select Templates.

1.1. From the Templates window, click on the Import template button.

Import Template

2. Select the *.rdm file to import to create a template for each entry in the file.

DUPLICATE TEMPLATE

It is possible to duplicate a template to edit a copy of the properties.

Navigate to File – Templates, and select Templates. From the Templates window, click on the
Duplicate template button.

Change the template name to distinguish the copy from the original, and edit the properties to
meet your requirements.

TEMPLATE GROUPS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 639

It is possible to save a set of selected entries or a folder and all its child items to a unique
template.

Right-click a selection of entries or a folder, select Add, then Save as Template...

7.2.13.2 Default Settings

DESCRIPTION

Default Templates create default settings for new entries. Every entry type is supported and can
have a default settings template defined.

· Session

· Information

· Credential Entry

· Folder

· Contact

· Document

· Synchronizer

· Macros/Scripts/Tools

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

640 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Templates - Default settings

SETTINGS

To help you locate the entry type you want to customize, all entry types are organized by
category.

Select a category of entry from the File – Templates menu, then select the specific entry type to
be edited.

Please note that a [No default] notice is displayed below each type that does not have a default
template defined.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 641

All entry types without the [No default] notice have a default template. You can double-click on
the type to edit the template or press the edit button.

If you want to remove the default settings template, press the delete button.

Default Type Template Management

7.2.13.3 Passw ord Templates

DESCRIPTION

Password templates set requirements for the password format: characters usage, patterns,
readability.

Password templates are available in the password generator. Password templates can be
optional or required.

SETTINGS

CREATE A PASSWORD TEMPLATE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

642 | Remote Desktop Manager

1. Go to File – Templates, and click Password Templates.

File – Templates – Password Templates

2. The Password Templates window provides an overview of current templates, as well as

add, edit and delete commands.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 643

Password Template Window

3. To add a new template click Add (plus sign).

4. a) Enter a template name.

b) Choose a Mode and configure the settings.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Default General settings about length and minimum amounts for characters
and symbols.

Advanced Granular character settings (e.g. special characters and symbols,

settings inclusions, exclusions).

Readable Settings for syllables, numbers and symbols.

password

Use a pattern Set a pattern for the passwords using the key.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

644 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Pronounceable Settings for length, case, digits and characters.

password

c) Choose specific settings

5. The password is now available in the Password Generator (Tools menu).

USE A PASSWORD TEMPLATE WITH PASSWORD GENERATOR

1. On the Tools tab, click Password Generator. Or open the password generator from an entry
.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 645

2. To choose a password template, select the title from the list. Default is equivalent to no
template, until it is configured by an administrator. When you select a template the options are
unavailable because they were saved in the template.

3. Click Generate to list possible passwords.

Password Generator using a password template

SET A DEFAULT PASSWORD TEMPLATE

The default template in the Password Generator is set to "no template" until an administrator
configures the template.

1. On Administration, click Data Source Settings (System Settings).

2. Click Password Templates.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

646 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. Choose the template. The chosen template will now be the Default in Password Generator.

4. If you want to force one template, check Force default template. No other choices will be
available in the password generator.

System Settings – Password Templates

7.3 Home

DESCRIPTION

The Home ribbon tab allows you to apply an action on the currently selected session. The ribbon
will display the following tab when the session is embedded.

Ribbon - Home
· Connect.
· Macros.
· Clipboard: Configure clipboard in File – Options.
· Miscellaneous.

7.4 Actions

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 647

The Actions tab is only available when a session is open. Available actions differ depending on
the action.

For our example we are running an RDP session. The ribbon will display the following tab when
the session runs with the Embedded (tabbed) display mode.

Ribbon - Actions

CONNECTION

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Reconnect Quickly close the session and then re-open it automatically. Use it to
update the resolution of your embedded RDP connections when you
resize the window.

Close Close the active session.

LogOff Logoff the RDP session. See Logoff topic for more information.

ACTIONS

Option Description

Execute Execute the selected macro or script in the previous window or in the
current tab. This is only available when there is something to Execute.

Macro/Script Displays a window where you can select a macro or script, as well as the
execution options.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

648 | Remote Desktop Manager

Option Description

Type Send the content of the clipboard over to the opened session.
Clipboard

DISPLAY

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Undock Undock your embedded session and move it anywhere outside Remote
Desktop Manager or even on another monitor.

Embedded Re-embed your session when your session is undocked. This option will
only appear if your session is not already in an embedded mode.

Full Screen Display your session in full screen outside Remote Desktop Manager.

Work Area This mode allows you to open the connection in full screen but to also
Screen have access to your local taskbar.

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Keep tab on Your session tab will stay after a session disconnect. For more
disconnect information, see Keep Tab Opened topic.

Smart Sizing Enable or disable the RDP smart sizing. This setting will determine
whether or not the client computer can scale the content on the
remote computer to fit the window size of the client computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 649

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Smart Reconnect Automatically reconnect your session with the most appropriate
band.

Windows Key on When enabling Windows key, it will send the function to your host
the Remote instead of running it on your computer.
Computer

COMMANDS

This tab contains multiple type of commands and keystrokes combinations to affect the current
session in a variety of instances. As such, these commands depend on the currently selected
(and opened) entry. For a few example scenarios, refer to the following topics:
· RDP
· VNC
· SSH Shell (Rebex)
· Telnet

Session add-ons may add custom command in this section, they will not be
documented in these topics but rather in the add-on documentation.

SCREENSHOT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Send to Performs a typical capture to the clipboard.

Clipboard

Save to File Prompts for a file name and saves the capture to that file.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

650 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Save to File and Prompts for a file name and saves the capture to that file, then
Open automatically open the file using your default editor.

VIDEO

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Record Record your screen in an MP4 format. We recommend the use of a VLC
player to view the recorded video.

Alternatively, these actions are also available by right-clicking on the tab of an embedded
session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 651

Actions Context Menu of an Embedded Session

7.4.1 Commands
7.4.1.1 RDP

DESCRIPTION

The commands for an RDP session allows you to send remote commands to your host.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

652 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Commands

OPTION DESCRIPTION

View Only Prevent the session from receiving any input from the keyboard or
the mouse. This feature was requested to allow monitoring while
preventing manipulation errors. Use it to have a read only access
to the remote server.

Send Send the key combination CTRL+ALT+DELETE to the host.

Ctrl+Alt+Delete

Charms On Windows 8 or Windows 2012 server, displays the Charms bar

(Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings bar).

App Bar On Windows 8 or Windows 2012 server, displays the App bar to
show navigation, commands, and tools.

Snap On Windows 8 or Windows 2012 server, allows you to run two

applications side-by-side.

Start Screen Open the Start menu on the host computer.

App Switch On Windows 8 or Windows 2012 server, switches from an

application to another.

7.4.1.2 VNC

DESCRIPTION

The VNC Commands allows you to send remote commands to your host. You will also notice
another toolbar holding more defined commands for a VNC session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 653

SETTINGS

VNC Commands

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Refresh Screen Refresh the host screen.

Window Start Menu Open the Start menu on the host computer.

Send Ctrl-Alt-Delete Send the key combination CTRL+ALT+DELETE to the host.

Send Custom Keys Send custom keys combination to the host.

Alt Send ALT to the host.

Ctrl Send CTRL to the host.

View only mode This will prevent the session from receiving any input from the
keyboard or the mouse. This feature was requested to allow
monitoring while preventing manipulation errors. Use it to have a
read only access to the remote server.

Remote input Keyboard and pointer events will be sent to the server and the local
and remote clipboard will be synchronized.

Open file transfer Open the file transfer with the host computer.

Open chat dialog Open a chat dialog with the host computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

654 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Options Open the Connection Options window.

Information Open the window containing information regarding your VNC

connection status and traffic.

7.4.1.3 SSH Shell (Rebex )

DESCRIPTION

The commands for a SSH Shell session allows you to send remote commands to your host.

Actions – SSH Shell (Rebex) Commands

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Find Open a find window to search for a specific word.

Copy All to Copy all selected text to the Clipboard.

Clipboard

Clear Clear the scrolling display that precedes the current line.
Scrollback

Reset Reset host terminal connection.

Terminal

START RECORDING

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 655

Recording type

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Ansi Record all of the activity in the SSH session using the Ansi format. This
Recording can be replayed like a video using Tools - Tools - Terminal playback
(Ansi).

Log file (plain Record all of the activity in the SSH Shell (Rebex) session using a text
text) format.

CONNECTION INFORMATION

Provides connection host information in a form as shown below.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

656 | Remote Desktop Manager

SSH Connection Information

7.4.1.4 Telnet

DESCRIPTION

The actions for a Telnet session allows you to send remote commands to your host.

SETTINGS

Telnet Commands Actions

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 657

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Find Open a find window to search for specific words.

Copy All to Copy all selected text to the Clipboard.

Clipboard

Clear Clear the scrolling display that precedes the current line.
Scrollback

Reset Reset host terminal connection.

Terminal

START RECORDING

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Ansi Will record all of the activity in the SSH session using the Ansi format.
Recording This can be replayed like a video using Tools - Tools - Terminal
playback (Ansi).

Log file (plain Will record all of the activity in the SSH session using a text format.
text)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

658 | Remote Desktop Manager

7.5 Edit

DESCRIPTION

The Edit tab contains operations to quickly Add, Edit, Overrides, Batch Edit or Export entries.

Ribbon - Edit

ADD

OPTION DESCRIPTION

New Entry Create a new entry (session, folder, information entry, credentials,
etc.).

Duplicate Create a duplicate of your entry.

Create Shortcut Link your entry to more than one group. For more information, consult
the text below.

Save as Template Save the selected entry as a local or database template.

A shortcut is the reiteration of an existing entry. In contrast to a duplicated entry, which has its
own ID and properties, a shortcut is a link to an entry and its properties. You can create shortcuts
easily by right-clicking the entry Edit – Create Shortcut or by using the aforementioned button in
the Edit tab. There are a few scenarios where a user would want to use the same entry
differently, such as connecting to two different hosts with a single RDP session.

For example, it is possible to:

· Assign different access to the same entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 659

· Create a favorite folder with everything centralized.

· Reuse a document for different scenarios.

These two entries are the exactly the same

Entries reiterated this way also have both folder paths indicated in their Folder field in their
properties, the paths are separated by a semi-colon.

There is no visual differences between the shortcut and the original entry.
Therefore, you’ll need to delete all entries to completely remove said entry. You
will be asked for confirmation when attempting to delete said shortcut.

EDIT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

660 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Properties Edit the properties of the selected entry.

Rename Rename the selected entry.

Move Move the selected entry to another folder.

Delete Delete the selected entry. A confirmation dialog is displayed to

confirm the action.

Play List Use the various play list features.

The Play List feature in Remote Desktop Manager is a lot like a music play list. It opens a list of
entries, in a specific order, automatically.The Play List can be used to create groups of sessions
for a specific task or for security reasons. You can build your own Play List and start all entries
from a Play List at the same time.

· Create and Edit a Play List

· Using a Play List

SETTING OVERRIDES

OPTION DESCRIPTION

User Specific Override properties of the selected entry with settings with settings
Settings specific to the current user. For more information, please consult
the Specific Settings topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 661

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Local Specific Override properties of the selected entry with settings specific to
Settings the local machine. For more information, please consult the
Specific Settings topic.

A Specific Settings column can be added in the Navigation Pane. Right-click on

the column Name in the Navigation Pane and select Column Chooser. Double-
Click on Specific Settings to add the column. Now, if there is a specific setting
applied to an entry, it is displayed next to the entry's name.

Navigation Pane - Column Chooser

BATCH

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

662 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Edit (Special Perform special actions on the selected entries, such as change
Actions) the type, run a script, and more. For more information, please
consult the Batch Actions Samples.

Batch Edit Perform an action on multiple entries at once. This is particularly

useful for doing mass modifications of entries (such as changing
the display mode after modifying the workspace or their credential
entries when changing your passwords). Multiple entries must be
selected for this feature to be visible. For more information, please
consult the Batch Edit topic.

Move to Vault Transfer the selected entries to another Vault in the database.

EXPORT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Export Entry as Remote Export the selected entries in a Remote Desktop File
Desktop File (.rdp) (.rdp) format.

Export Selection (.rdm) Export the selected entries in a .rdm file that can then be
imported into any Remote Desktop Manager data source.
You could choose to include the credentials of your entry in
your export format and secure your file with a master key.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 663

7.5.1 Edit
7.5.1.1 Play List
7.5.1.1.1 Create and Edit a Play List

DESCRIPTION

You can create Local or Shared play List in Remote Desktop Manager. There's several methods
to create or edit a Play List:

· Using the Play List Management.

· Create Play List depending on entries state and selection.

· Edit an existing Play List

You can also use the context menu to create and edit your Play List. When your
entries are selected, right-click in the Navigation Pane and select Play List –
Create Play List or Add to Play List.

SETTINGS

USE THE PLAY LIST MANAGEMENT

You can access this by selecting Play List Management in the ribbon.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

664 | Remote Desktop Manager

Local Play List

Play lists can be saved three different ways:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Local The Play List is saved locally and can only be accessed as such.
These can only be launched through the Play List Management.

Shared The Play List is saved in the database. It can be accessed by anyone
on the data source. These can be launched through the Play List
Management or by using the entry itself.

Private Vault The Play List is saved in your Private Vault and can only be
accessed by the user. These can be launched through the Play List
Management or by using the entry itself.

ACTIONS

CREATE PLAY LIST DEPENDING ON ENTRIES STATE AND SELECTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 665

1. If you wish to pre-determine a list of entries, select them for your Play List in the Navigation
Pane.

Selected Entries in the Navigation Pane

2. On the Edit ribbon menu, click Play List, then select whichever setting you prefer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

666 | Remote Desktop Manager

Edit - Play List - New

OPTION DESCRIPTION

New Creates a new Play List directly, a window prompt will ask you where
you wish to save it and which selection you would like to highlight.

Create from Brings up the window for creating a new Play List with all currently
Opened Sessions opened session already selected for the Play List. You can select
and remove additional entries if desired.

Add Selection to Prompts a window where you can select currently accessible Play
Existing Play List Lists and adds the selection in the Navigation Pane to the Play List.
(X Entry)

3. Choose if you wish to save your Play List locally, in a shared Vault or in your Private Vault.
Saving it locally will prompt a different window. This window will contain everything needed for a
local Play List.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 667

Save New Play List

4. The next window lets you choose how you want your current selection or opened sessions to
affect your playlist.

Selected Entries in Navigation Pane

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Selected Entries All currently selected entries in the Navigation Pane will already be
in Navigation selected for your Play List. You can still add and remove entries to

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

668 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Pane the Play List if you desire.

Opened Tabbed All currently opened sessions (Embedded only) will already be
Sessions selected for your Play List. You can still add and remove entries to
the Play List if you desire.

No Selection No pre-determined selection will be taken into account, create your

Play List from a fresh start.

5. a) Enter a name for your Play List.

b) You can review, add or remove entries from the play list on the connections tab.
c) In Advanced you can set how the entries open.

Play List Editor

And there you have it, your Play List is ready for use.

EDIT EXISTING PLAY LIST

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 669

1. On Edit, click Play List Management.

View - Play List Management

2. Select the Play List you wish to modify and click Edit.

Play List Management

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

670 | Remote Desktop Manager

If the Play List is shared or saved in your Private Vault, you can also right-click
the entry and click Properties to access it.

7.5.1.1.2 Play List Management

SETTINGS

USING A PLAY LIST

First, open your Play List Management Edit – Play List – Play List Management.

There are five methods to using your Play List.

Default Mode

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 671

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open Launch the selected Play List.

Open Embedded Overrides the display selection of entries inside the Play Lists and
launches them as Embedded (some entries might not support this).

Select in Selects all entries the Play List contains in the Navigation Pane.
Navigation Pane

Execute Script This will prompt for you to select the Typing Macro (exclusively) you
Against... wish to execute against your Play list.

Launch at startup Here you can select a specific Play List you would like launched
whenever the application starts. You can also default back to None
or Last opened Connections.

7.5.2 Setting Overrides

7.5.2.1 Specific Settings

DESCRIPTION

Specific Settings are used to override the properties of an entry. Several settings can be
overridden, such as the credentials or the display mode. There are two types of Specific
Settings: user Specific Settings and local machine Specific Settings.
· User Specific Settings override an entry's properties for a single user.

· Local Specific Settings override an entry's properties for all users of a specific device.

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source. A setting on
the data source allows usage of Specific Settings. Contact your administrator if
the menu is grayed out.

If both User Specific Settings and Local Specific Settings are defined on the
same entry, Local Specific Settings have the priority.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

672 | Remote Desktop Manager

These can also be accessed by using the right-click on an entry and going to Edit
– User/Local Specific Settings.

Context menu – Edit – User and Local Specific Settings

SPECIFIC SETTINGS INDICATOR

An indicator icon is displayed in the dashboard when an entry with Specific Settings is
selected. Click on the icon to open the Specific Settings dialog.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 673

Specific Settings indicator

WORKFLOW

In the majority of cases, editing the Specific Settings displays the following dialog:

User Specific Settings

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

674 | Remote Desktop Manager

Specific settings are context sensitive, and several settings might not be
available for some entry types.

7.5.3 Batch
7.5.3.1 Batch Edit

DESCRIPTION

The Batch Edit feature changes the settings of multiple entries in one operation. For example, it
can be used to remove or update the credentials of a group of sessions.

Edit - Batch Edit

ADVANCED SELECTION

Select multiple entries by using the usual Ctrl/Shift + Left-click, etc. For a method with a little
more power, use the Advanced Search feature, which allows to select multiple entries at once,
based on the defined criteria. The advanced search is available in View – Advanced Search. If
required, you can achieve similar result with the Multi Vault Advanced Search.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 675

Advanced Search

Press on Select in Navigation Pane to select the same entries as in the Advanced Search
dialog. Then use Edit – Batch Edit to edit all the selected entries.

SETTINGS

CHANGE SPECIFIC SETTING

You can choose to change a specific setting, for instance, the Host name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

676 | Remote Desktop Manager

Change Host Name

RESET ALL SAVED CREDENTIALS OR PASSWORD

Clear all the existing credentials of all the selected sessions or specifically the password if
desired.

EDIT SESSIONS (GENERAL SETTINGS)

Edit Sessions (General Settings) allows you to change the common settings of all the selected
entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 677

Batch Edit – Common settings

EDIT SESSIONS (SESSION TYPE SETTINGS)

Change settings that are is available only for specific session types, such as Microsoft RDP.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

678 | Remote Desktop Manager

Sessin Type Settings

EDIT SESSIONS (USER/LOCAL SPECIFIC SETTINGS)

Specific Settings can be modified in a batch if supported by the type of the edited entries.
7.6 View

DESCRIPTION

The View ribbon is used to control different feature regarding the views, layout and logs of
Remote Desktop Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 679

Ribbon - View

Refer to the following topics for more information:

PANELS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Vault Access the view mode for your Navigation Pane for the current Vault.

My Private Vault Display your Private Vault in the Navigation Pane.

Opened Sessions Display the currently Opened Sessions in your Navigation Pane.

Favorites Display your Favorite entries and folder in your Navigation Pane.

Recent Display your Recently Opened Sessions in your Navigation Pane.

Task List Display your current Task List.

VIEW

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Advanced Search Use the Advanced Search feature.

Multi Vault This functions essentially the same way as Advanced Search, but it
Advanced Search searches all the Vaults of the database.

Activity Logs Open the Activity Logs.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

680 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Quick Connect Launch a Quick Connect session.

Entry Lists Prompts a window that displays all the Credential,

Macros/Scripts/Tools, VPN or Synchronizer entries in the database
(restricted by user rights).

Documentation Allows you to filter entries through their Documentation, such as

Search Description or Procedure.

Filter This prompts a window to filter the Navigation Pane.

Tab Groups Open a docked window to browse through the various Tab Groups.

Notification Open an undocked window to browse threw the various notifications

(such as entries expired or about to be, or tasks).

LAYOUT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Navigation Toggle the Navigation Pane.

Dashboard Toggle the Dashboard.

Thumbnails Toggle the Thumbnails.

Top Pane Toggle the Ribbon. (Right-click the Application header to bring it
(Ribbon/Menubar back or use Alt+F11).
)

Grouped Tab Bar Toggle the grouped tab bar. (Must have group tabs to work).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 681

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Status Bar Toggle the Status bar.

FOOTER

The Footer section allows you to show or hide the various panes that are provided with Remote
Desktop Manager.

Although they are by default displayed in the footer, all those panes can be
dragged and docked anywhere within Remote Desktop Manager.

7.6.1 Panels
7.6.1.1 Task List

DESCRIPTION

Create a list of tasks to keep track of work that needs to be done by the team. You can perform
a search to filter out the list of displayed tasks. You can search by Due Date, username or by
Status.

Task lists can be exported in different types of files for printing or reviewing. Right-click the task
list to export in html, xls, xml or csv. You can also export filtered task lists.

Task list

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

682 | Remote Desktop Manager

This feature is only available for the following data sources: Devolutions
Password Server, MariaDB, MySQL, SQL Azure, SQL Server and SQLite.

CREATING A TASK

1. Click on Add new task.

Add a task

2. Enter your task information, like the name of the task, the priority, the due date, the
description, etc.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 683

Task Management

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name Enter a custom name for the task

Entry Displays the entry currently selected in the Navigation Pane. The
task is assigned to this entry. Read-only field.

Priority Set the priority of the task.

Due date Set a deadline for the task.

Description Enter a description of the task for the assigned user.

User Assign a user to the task.

Assign to me Click this button to assign the task to yourself.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

684 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Clear assigned user Clear the assigned user.

Status Set a status for the task. Select between:

· Open

· Assigned

· In progress

· Closed

· Done

· Canceled

· Postponed

Comment Enter a comment for the task.

7.6.2 View
7.6.2.1 Activity Logs

DESCRIPTION
The shared session log offers a more robust solution. Through it, it's possible to monitor an
opened session for all users that are using an Advanced Data Sources. The log is available for
specific sessions in the context menu, in the session properties (Log tab page) and in the
dashboard.

SETTINGS

The log contains all the CRUD (add, edit and delete) operations, passwords being viewed,
credentials being used by other sessions, etc...

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 685

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Folder The Folder where your entry is situated.

Connection The connection being used to open your entry.

Message Indicate the action that was done on your entry or session.

On Open The Open Comment is defined in the Log tab of your session, to learn
Comment more please see Logs Options

On Close The Close Comment is defined in the Log tab of your session, to learn
Comment more please see Logs Options

Log Date Indicate the date and time your session was opened or your entry was
edited.

End Indicate the date and time when the session or entry was closed.
Date/Time

Active Time Only available for sessions in embedded mode. It will record your session
active time, meaning the time your session was opened in embedded
mode and you were active in your session. If your session is opened but

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

686 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

your view is on your Dashboard tab and not on your session tab, no Active
Time will be recorded.

Duration Only available for sessions in embedded mode. When sessions are
opened in embedded mode the Duration time will be recorded, meaning
that even if your view is on your Dashboard and you are not actively
working in your session but your session tab is opened, Duration will
record how long it was opened for.

User Indicate the Windows username and domain.

Database Indicate the database username.

username

Connection Indicate the Connection user.

user

Machine Indicate the machine name.

Connection Indicate the connection type that was used.

Type

7.6.2.2 Advanced Search

DESCRIPTION

The Advanced Search allows to search for entries based on multiple criterias.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 687

Advanced Search Window

SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Name You can select between different criteria to tweak your search:

· Name

· Connection type

· Contact Reference

· Creation date

· Custom field

· Description

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

688 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· Domain

· Group

· Host

· Is favourite

· Keywords/tags

· Last update date

· Name

· OS

· Password strength

· Security group

· Status

· Username

Load Load searches that has been previously saved.

Save Allows you to save your search locally and reuse it.

Save as Use to save a previously saved search but under another name.

Export Export the entries of your search result as a Csv, Html, Xls or Xml
file. Sensitive information will be encrypted using AES.

Search Once you have selected your search criteria click on Search to
display the search result.

Reset Reset all your fields to proceed with a new Search.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 689

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Select in Select your search result in your Navigation Pane. This option can
Navigation Pane be used in combination with a Batch Edit.

There will be a drop-down list next to certain fields (ex: Name) to give you search options for:
· Contains - any name that includes the characters you have entered, anywhere in the field name.
· Starts With - any name beginning with the characters you have entered.
· Ends With - any name ending with the characters you have entered.
· Exact Expression - will find names that match every character you have entered, exactly as entered.

7.6.2.3 Documentation Search

DESCRIPTION

We can search documentation pages linked to entries. Documentation search provides a

preview of the documentation pages, page title and related entry details. The tool searches the
current repository.

Documentation Search is available with Devolutions Password Server,

MariaDB, MySQL and SQL Server data sources.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

690 | Remote Desktop Manager

Documentation search dialog window

USER INTERFACE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 691

Documentation search

USER INTERFACE

ELEMENTS DESCRIPTION

Navigation Pane (1) Lists search results by entry

Content area (2) Page preview

Drop down menu Page title; When one entry contains multiple documentation pages
(3) with the search term, a list of the page titles is available.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

692 | Remote Desktop Manager

SELECT AN ENTRY

Click Select in Navigation Pane to choose the entry in your main tree view.

CLEAR A SEARCH

Click Reset to clear the search results.

7.7 Administration

DESCRIPTION

The Administration tab allows to manage settings and users of a data source, view reports
such as the activity logs, and much more. This tab is only available to administrators of the data
source.

Most features contained in the Administration tab are only available when using
an Advanced Data Source.

Ribbon - Administration

MANAGEMENT

These feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 693

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Users Opens the User Management.

Security Groups Security Groups are now a Legacy option, and although we have left
(Legacy) documentation in the online help to help users identify it, we strongly
recommend switching to Roles instead.

Vaults Opens the Vault Management tab of User Management.

Roles Opens the Role Management tab of User Management.

REPORTS

The logs feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Reports Open the Reports section to select which type of report best suit your
current needs.

Administration Opens the Administration Logs.

Logs

Deleted Entries Open a log of all Deleted Entries (since last clean up).

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

694 | Remote Desktop Manager

These feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Vault Settings Opens the Vault Settings. The Vault Root Folder is the one at the top
of the navigation pane (in Tree View). It is the one from which all
entries and folder stem. By default, lower level folders inherit settings
and security from parent folder until reaching the vault root. Therefore,
using permissions on the vault root folder allows to secure all entries
below the vault root level. Refer to Default security for entries for
more information.

System Settings Opens the System Settings. There are many features here, all meant
(Data Source to help you customize your data source and security needs.
Settings) Remember that these settings applies to all users that have access
to the data source.

System Modify System Permissions.

Permissions

Security Provider Set up a Security Provider for an additional layer of security.

CLEAN UP

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 695

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Clean Up Deleted Perform a partial or full clean up of the Deleted History.

History

Clean Up Entry Perform a partial or full clean up of the Entry History.

History

Clean Up Activity Perform a partial or full clean up of the Activity Logs. You also have
Logs the option to clean up the Administration Logs if desired.

Pack Data Source The Pack Data Source (Optimize) feature analyzes all entries,
(Optimize) compress and save them, thus saving space in your data source.

7.7.1 Management
7.7.1.1 User Management

DESCRIPTION

The Users Management allows to create and manage users and their privileges. You can set
the default privileges on the user type in Data Source Settings (System Settings). Remote
Desktop Manager offers advanced user rights management that allows for restricting access to
entries. Please note that availability of some features depends on the active data source.

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

A user can be created using default security (specify the password) or Integrated
Security. Not all Advanced Data Sources support the use of Integrated Security.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

696 | Remote Desktop Manager

In order to create users and assign rights, you must be administrator of not only
Remote Desktop Manager, but also of the underlying database.

MANAGE USERS

To create, edit, delete, rename or otherwise manage users as a whole, simply use the buttons in
the toolbar.

User and Security Management - Toolbar

USER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS

GENERAL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 697

User Management - General

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Authentication type Select the user's authentication type:

· Custom (Devolutions): create a user specific to Remote

Desktop Manager without creating an SQL login.

· Database (SQL Server): authenticate using the SQL login

from your SQL Server.

Username Enter the username for the user. When using Integrated
Security the user must be selected from the directory.

Integrated security Specifie to use Active Directory to authenticate to the data

(Active Directory) source. Applies only to SQL Server and Devolutions
Password Server, depending on their configuration. For more
information, please consult the Integrated Security topic.

Password Enter the user's Password. This field is disabled when using
Integrated Security.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

698 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

User type Select the type of user to create, select between:

· Administrator: Grant full administrative rights to the user.

· Read only user: Grant only the view access to the user.

· Restricted user: Select which rights to grant to the user.

· User: Grant all basic rights to the user (Add, Edit, Delete).

For more information, please consult the User Types topic.

User license type Select the license type of the user. Select between:

· Default

· Connection Management

· Password Management

Full name Enter the First name and Last name of the user.

Email Insert the user's email address.

INFORMATION

The Information section allows to store information regarding the users, such as their name,
address, and more. The Information section is divided in three sub-sections: Details, Address,
Phone.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 699

User Management - Information - Details

ROLES

Select roles to assign to the user.

User Management - Roles

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

700 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Roles Check the Is Member box to assign the role to the user.
Consult Role Management topic for more information.

PRIVILEGES

User Management - Privileges

OPTION DESCRIPTION

View information Allow the user to view the information section.

section

Activity logs Allow the user to view the Activity logs.

Import Allows the user to Import sessions (Clipboard - Paste as well).

The import menu (File – Import) and the import feature in the
context menu will be grayed out if the option is not active.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 701

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Export Allows the user to Export sessions (Clipboard - Copy as well).

The export menu (File – Export) and the export feature in the
context menu will be grayed out if the option is not active.

SECURITY GROUPS (LEGACY)

Security Groups are a legacy setting, we strongly recommend switching over to Roles instead.

VAULTS

Select which repositories the user has access to. For more information, please consult the
Vaults topic.

User Management - Vaults

APPLICATION ACCESS

The application access section allows to restrain access to Remote Desktop Manager or
Devolutions Web Login.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

702 | Remote Desktop Manager

User Management - Application Access

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Select if the user can access to the data source from Remote
Manager Desktop Manager.

Devolutions Web Select if the user can access to the data source form Devolutions
Login Web Login.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 703

User Management - Settings

Allow the user to enable the Offline Mode on the data sources. This also depends on the data
source being configured to allow it. There are 4 modes available:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Disabled No offline cache allowed for the user.

Cache only Allow to save a cache of the data source but not the offline mode.

Read-only A read-only cache. The user will not be able to edit data in the data
source. This mode is allowed for Advanced Data Sources only.

Read/Write An advanced cache, with change synchronization. This mode is allowed

for Advanced Data Sources only.
7.7.1.1.1 User Types

DESCRIPTION

When creating users in Remote Desktop Manager, four types of user are available. Basic rights
are granted to the created users depending on their type.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

704 | Remote Desktop Manager

User Management - User Type

TYPE DESCRIPTION

Administrator Grant all rights and permissions to the user.

User Grant all the basic rights to the user (Add, Edit, Delete).

For more information, please consult the Rights section below in this
topic.

Restricted user Personalize the rights to grant to the user.

Read only user Grant only the view access to the user.

RIGHTS

When setting a user to the Restricted User type, rights must be granted manually. These rights
have an immediate influence on which actions the user can perform on unsecured entries.
Therefore, rights must be granted for users to be able to perform actions on entries, as
permissions cannot override the absence of right.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 705

Once rights are granted, they can be restricted with the Role-Based Security or Security Groups.

The Add right also displays the Add in root option. This must be enable for users to be able to
add entries into the vault root folder of the data source.

User Management - Rights

7.7.1.1.2 Integrated Security

DESCRIPTION

Integrated Security is a Microsoft technology, which uses the credentials of the current Windows
session and send them automatically to the remote resources for authentication.

This feature is available with the SQL Server or Devolutions Password Server
data sources.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

706 | Remote Desktop Manager

To use the Integrated Security, enable the Integrated Security box in the User Management
window. The Password field is disabled because the operating system will provide a cached
copy automatically.

Integrated Security

When the option is activated, an ellipsis button either appears or is enabled. Click this button to
display the Select User dialog.

Select User

Ensure the appropriate domain is displayed in the From this location field.
Sometime the location defaults to the local computer. Click the Locations button
to browse for the domain instead.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 707

When using Integrated Security, the currently running windows session must be from a user of
the domain. If you need to use other credentials, Remote Desktop Manager must be started
using the RUNAS command as described in Running Remote Desktop Manager as Another
User.
7.7.1.1.3 TLS Options

DESCRIPTION

MySQL and MariaDB databases can verify X509 certificate attributes alongside the usual
authentication method.

For more information on TLS options, please consult the following topics:
· MySQL GRANT syntax (Other Account Characteristics)

· Maria DB Knowledge base (Per-Account SSL/TLS Options)

CONFIGURATION

When the user is created, select the desired TLS option:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

708 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Not specified Do not specify any TLS option.

REQUIRE NONE Allow the connection without any certificate.

REQUIRE SSL Allow the connection only with SSL encryption.

REQUIRE X509 Allow the connection only with valid X509 certificate.

7.7.1.2 Role Management

DESCRIPTION

Roles in Remote Desktop Manager manages multiple users at the same time by grouping them.
The management of permissions granted to roles are quite similar to the corresponding notions
for users, but instead of a single user, they apply to all users to which you've assigned the role.

This feature is only available with an Advanced Data Source.

ROLES IN DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD SERVER

Roles in Devolutions Password Server are in fact links to Active Directory groups. By leveraging
Active Directory integration you can easily define access rights for all domain users in your
organization. Once a domain user log in the Devolutions Password Server data source, their
user account will be created if needed and users rights will be controlled by the defined groups.

Please note that the Unsecured group permissions (the ones above the grid) are
ignored. You must set them on each user individually.

For more information please see Devolutions Password Server Role Management.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 709

CREATE ROLES

Roles in Remote Desktop Manager are mainly used to group users. You can assign multiple
roles to each user. The end result is the union of all permissions given to the roles.

To create a role, in the User and Security Management window, click the Add User button in
the Roles section. From the same menu, you can also edit, assign users, delete or refresh.

Roles - Add Role

7.7.2 Reports
7.7.2.1 Reports

DESCRIPTION

The Reports section automatically generates reports detailing Remote Desktop Manager
usage related to: Entries, Expired Assets, Passwords, Security and Users. You have the option
to export your generated report, as well as executing and exporting reports through a command
line.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

710 | Remote Desktop Manager

Generate Report

From this window, you can browse and select a wide variety of Report Types. Explore to your
heart's content.

Once Generated, a report will provide you with all the information you selected during this step.
These final results can take various shapes and have different features (such as editing a
specific entry or printing the result) depending on what the report actually is.

These logs are still restricted by user rights. A user with restricted access wouldn't
be able to select Password and Security for example.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 711

7.7.2.1.1 Export Reports

DESCRIPTION

The Export Reports is a way to execute and export reports through a command line. You can use
this feature in a shortcut or in a batch file and use the Windows task scheduler to execute it.

You will be able to export Data Report, Inventory report as well as most of the reports found in
our Generate Report list except for the Password Usage and Security Group.

You must have the rights to run report in Remote Desktop Manager to use this
feature.

SETTINGS

For Reports containing settings, you will have to start with exporting your report settings to create
the *.rdr file that the command line use to generate the reports. Here is a list of reports
containing settings:

1. Select your Report in Administrations – Report and then select the option Export Settings
in the More text button. It will create an *.rdr file containing all your report settings. This is also
where you Report ID is located (this will be useful later on).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

712 | Remote Desktop Manager

Export Settings

2. In your Windows Command Prompt enter the following command line:

C:\*** /DataSource:*** /report:***/reportoutput:"***" /reportsettings:"***.rdr"

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

C:\ Enter the path used to start your Remote Desktop Manager
application (path of the RemoteDesktopManager.exe file)

/DataSource Specify the data source ID.

/report Specify the type of report to generate or the report ID.

/reportoutput Specify the path to save your report and the name for the newly
generated report.

/reportsettings Specify the path of your report settings file (.rdr).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 713

To find your Data Source ID and the Command Line use to start Remote Desktop Manager edit
one of your session from your data source and select the Advanced section.

RDP Session - Advanced Section

Here is a list of types of Reports you can find in Remote Desktop Manager and the name to
enter in the command line to generate the report:

REPORT TYPE IN REPORT NAME (TYPE) TO INSERT IN THE COMMAND

Remote Desktop LINE
Manager

Usage Log SharedConnectionLog

Entry Information EntryInformation

Expiration Schedule CalendarExpiredEntry

Expired Entry List ConnectionExpiredEntry

Expired Passports ConnectionExpiredPassports

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

714 | Remote Desktop Manager

REPORT TYPE IN REPORT NAME (TYPE) TO INSERT IN THE COMMAND

Remote Desktop LINE
Manager

Expired Softwares ConnectionExpiredSoftwares

Expired Warranties ConnectionExpiredWarranties

Entry Status ConnectionStatus

Credential Entry CredentialEntryUsage

References

Entry Validity Report EntryValidity

VPN References VPNEntryUsage

Entry List Connection

Duplicate Entries DuplicateEntry

Password Complexity PasswordComplexity

Password Analyzer PasswordAnalyzer

Here is an example of a command line for an Entry Information Report:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager\RemoteDesktopManager.exe /DataS
/reportoutput:C:\dev\devolutions\Rapport\rapportEntry.csv /reportsettings:C:\dev\devoluti

7.7.2.2 Deleted Entries

DESCRIPTION

The Administration – View deleted option allows you to view the deleted entries as well as
restoring them.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 715

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

Administrators can permanently delete some or all deleted entries.

Sub-connections are not retained in the View Deleted window. To restore a sub-
connection, please have a look at Entry History.

SETTINGS

MANAGE DELETED ENTRIES

The Deleted Entries will generate a list containing all the entries previously deleted from your
data source. You may resurrect an entry, meaning it will become an active entry again and will be
shown in your data source. You may also chose to permanently delete your entries, once you
have permanently deleted your entries you won't be able to resurrect them afterward.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

716 | Remote Desktop Manager

Deleted Entries

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Delete Permanently delete the selected entry.

Resurrect Entry Use this button to restore an entry.

Delete All Permanently delete all the deleted entries.

Deleted entries can be resurrected as long as the Security Provider has not been
changed since the deleted action.

EXPORT DELETED ENTRIES LIST

You can use the Right-click button on one or several lines to export them in CSV, HTML or XML
format.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 717

7.7.3 Settings
7.7.3.1 Root (Settings)
7.7.3.1.1 Default security for entries

DESCRIPTION

In the vault settings, navigate to the Permissions section. Under Inherited Permissions,
change the Permission drop down list to the desired settings.

· Custom allows to select specific roles/users for each permission below.

· Never denies any access to all users.

For more information on the discrete permissions, please consult the Security – Permissions
topic.

Vault – Permissions

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

718 | Remote Desktop Manager

To confirm the change, edit an entry below the vault root and navigate to the Security –
Permissions section. All permissions set to Default inherit the value from Data Source
Permissions (System Permissions) or the user. Inherited values are displayed next to the
permissions.
7.7.3.2 System Settings
7.7.3.2.1 General

GENERAL

The General section allows to manage the availability of different features related to the
database.

These settings applies to all users that have access to the data source.

System Settings - General

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 719

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Allow user Specific Allow users to save User Specific Settings.

Settings

Allow database Allows logs and deleted history to be cleaned up. For more
clean up information, please consult the Clean up topic.

Allow shortcuts Allow the reiteration of entries through the shortcut feature.

Allow entry states Allow entries to be locked when used or edited.

(Lock, Running,
Checkout)

Allow virtual folders Allow to store entries in virtual folders. (Not supported with
Devolutions Password Server.)

Automatic check in Forces checked out entries to check in automatically after a set
after delay.

Allow sub Allow users to create sub connections.

connections

Add entry mode Select if users are prompted to choose a template when creating
a new entry. Select between:
· Default

· Template list (include default)

· Template list only

· No template selection

COMMENTS DESCRIPTION

Allow log Enable the log comment editing for all users.
comments editing

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

720 | Remote Desktop Manager

COMMENTS DESCRIPTION

Minimum length Set the minimum length (in characters) allowed for comments.
(char)

FILE SIZE DESCRIPTION

Maximum file size Limit the size of attachments and document entries to avoid to
(MB) over load the data source.

7.7.3.2.1.1 Security

SETTINGS

System Settings - General - Security

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 721

DATA SOURCE DESCRIPTION

SECURITY

Create Vault with Automatically secure the vault settings when creating a
restricted access by repository. Therefore, the permissions settings are set to
default Never.

Force data source 2- Require the users to have a 2-factor configuration applied on
factor configuration the data source. Not shown with Devolutions Password Server
as 2FA set elsewhere.

Resolve credentials in Displays username and password fetched from a Credential

overview repository in the entry overview in the dashboard. Uncheck this
option if it takes too long to resolve.

Use legacy security Use the old system of managing privileges: security groups.

TIME-BASED USAGE DESCRIPTION

Time of day Select the hours which the data source is limited to. Select
between:

· Any time: the session can be used at any hour.

· Custom: manually select the time frame the session is

available for.

Time of week Select which days the data source is available for. Select
between:

· Any day: the session can be used any day of the week or
week-end.

· Week days: the session can be used only the week days.

· Week ends: the session can be used only the week ends.

· Custom: manually select each day the session is available

for.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

722 | Remote Desktop Manager

TIME-BASED USAGE DESCRIPTION

Time Zone Select the time zone you are currently in.

7.7.3.2.1.2 Allow Passw ord Access From External System

DESCRIPTION

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

Accessing passwords stored in your data source by querying the underlying database is not
possible because of the encryption we apply on the passwords. For those of you that need to
access passwords directly in the database, for example by a CRM system, we have created a
way to achieve this.

SETTINGS

The session information, which is an XML structure, is stored in the Data field of the
Connections table in the underlying database.

However, getting the encrypted password from the database requires the Allow password for
external system to be configured.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 723

Password Policy - Allow Password For External System

Enter an encryption key in the Key field. Once a key is provided it will cause the system to
extract a copy of the password from our XML structure, this will then be re-encrypted using the
key you have provided and stored back into the UnsafePassword field of the Connections
table.

Security Provider

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

724 | Remote Desktop Manager

DECRYPTION CODE

Use the following .net code to decrypt your passwords.

public static string Decrypt(string encryptedString, string key)
{
if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(encryptedString))
{
return encryptedString;
}

try
{
TripleDESCryptoServiceProvider tripleDesCryptoServiceProvider = new TripleDESCrypt
MD5CryptoServiceProvider cryptoServiceProvider = new MD5CryptoServiceProvider();

string strTempKey = key;

byte[] byteHash = cryptoServiceProvider.ComputeHash(Encoding.ASCII.GetBytes(strTem

tripleDesCryptoServiceProvider.Key = byteHash;

tripleDesCryptoServiceProvider.Mode = CipherMode.ECB;

byte[] byteBuff = Convert.FromBase64String(encryptedString);

string strDecrypted =
Encoding.UTF8.GetString(
tripleDesCryptoServiceProvider.CreateDecryptor().TransformFinalBlock(
byteBuff, 0, byteBuff.Length));

return strDecrypted;
}
catch (Exception)
{
return null;
}
}
7.7.3.2.2 Application

DESCRIPTION

The Applications section manages the availability of different features related to Remote
Desktop Manager application.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 725

ALLOW ACCESS DESCRIPTION

Operating systems Enable access to the data source from the selected operating
systems.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Allow local Specific Allow users to save Local Specific Settings.

Settings

Allow templates (local) Allows to locally save entry's templates.

Disable entry drag-and- Disable entries drag and drop from one folder to another. This
drop setting is useful for avoiding accidental drag and drop.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

726 | Remote Desktop Manager

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Disable quick connect Disable the Quick Connect feature for all users of the data
source.

Disable RDM Agent and Disable the option to activate a session as an RDM Agent or
Jump Jump.

Disable stack trace Disable the stack trace details when an error occurs in
Remote Desktop Manager. This is a security feature.

PASSWORD DESCRIPTION

Allow local password Allows password templates to be saved locally.

templates

Disable password Prevent users to save or change the passwords stored in the
saving for data source data source configurations.
access

Disable password Prevent users from saving passwords in the properties of

saving (local) entries.

WELCOME PAGE DESCRIPTION

Use web or html Enter an URL to use as the application's welcome page.
welcome page

SECURITY DESCRIPTION

Force application Require the users to authenticate with their Windows

security with Windows credentials at application startup.
credentials

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 727

SECURITY DESCRIPTION

Force application Require the users to authenticate with Google Authenticator at

security with Google application startup.
Authenticator

Lock application Set the application to lock:

· On Minimize: lock application when minimized in the

taskbar for all users of the data source.

· On Idle: automatically lock the application when it is not

used after a determined amount of time.

· On Windows lock: lock the application on Windows lock.

· On standby: lock the application when on standby.

7.7.3.2.2.1 Offline

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

728 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Offline mode Set the global data source Offline Mode availability. The offline
mode is useful when using a VPN connection that makes using
local network impossible.

Expiration Number of days before the offline cache expires. You must go
online prior to the end of that period to re-validate the data.

Prompt for Force the user to provide their credentials before going offline.
credentials before
going offline

Prompt for 2FA Force the user to provide their 2FA before going offline.
before going offline

It is not recommended to set the Expiration to 0, as this will disable the

expiration of the offline cache.

7.7.3.2.2.2 Serial Number

DESCRIPTION

Store an Enterprise Edition Site or Global License serial to share in the data source.

When you add a data source with a saved serial in an unregistered version of
Remote Desktop Manager, the license serial is automatically retrieved from
data source settings.

SETTINGS

You can manage your licenses through a shortcut in Administration - System settings - Serial
Number.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 729

System Settings - Serial Number

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

730 | Remote Desktop Manager

User and Security Management - Add License

7.7.3.2.2.3 Type availability

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 731

System Settings - Types - Availability

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Type Select entry types to exclude. Excluded entries will not be in the Add
Availability New Entry window.

7.7.3.2.2.4 Version Management

DESCRIPTION

The Version Management allows the administrators to manage the data source availability in
other versions of Remote Desktop Manager.

WINDOWS AND MACOS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

732 | Remote Desktop Manager

Version Management

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Minimal version Forces users of the data source to use a minimal version
of Remote Desktop Manager. Enter the entire version
number (2019.1.0.0) to force a specific version. Use this
to disable connecting to the data source with an older
version.

Minimal version custom Enter a custom message for the minimal version
message notification.

Maximal version Forces users of the data source to use a maximal

version. Enter the entire version number (2019.1.0.0) to

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 733

OPTION DESCRIPTION

force a specific version. Use this to disable connecting to

the data source with a newer version.

Maximal version custom Enter a custom message for the maximal version
message notification.

Disable auto update Disable the auto update notification message. Use this to
notification manually update the application and prevent from getting
notified when new versions are available.

Download URL Use in conjunction with the minimal or maximal version,

once a minimal or maximal version requirement is not
met the system will prompt the user that the version is no
longer valid and it will open the link (path/URL) to
download the newer or older version.

7.7.3.3 System Permissions

DESCRIPTION

The System Permissions allows to grant some administrative permissions to standard users
without making them administrators. The Default setting inherits the permission set on the user
or role. For more information about permissions, consult General Security.

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

ENTRIES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

734 | Remote Desktop Manager

System Permissions - Entries

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Import Allow users/roles to import entries in the data source.

Export Allow users/roles to export from the data source.

Add in root Allow users/roles to create entries in the root folder.

Root properties Allow users/roles to access the root properties.

MISCELLANEOUS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 735

System Permissions - Miscellaneous

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Activity logs Allow users/roles to view the activity logs.

Reports Allow users/roles to generate and view reports.

View deleted entries Allow users/roles to view and restore deleted entries.

View administration Allow users/roles to view the administration logs.

logs

Check in (force) Allow users/roles to check in entries with the checked out state.

TOOLS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

736 | Remote Desktop Manager

System Permissions - Tools

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Console Allow users/roles to use console management tools.

management tools

Buit-in tools (Wake- Allow users/roles to use session related tools.

on-LAN, NetStat,
Ping, ...)

Macros/Scripts/Tool Allow users/roles to use Macros/Scripts/Tools entries.

s entry

Management Tools Allow users/roles to use Management Tools.

Web management Allow users/roles to use web management tools.

tools

MANAGEMENT

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 737

The Default value in Tools is equivalent to Never.

System Permissions - Management

OPTION DESCRIPTION

User Allow users/roles to access the user management.

Security Group Allow users/roles to access the security groups management.

Role Allow users/roles to access the roles management.

Vault Allow users/roles to manage Vaults.

Data source Allow users/roles to access data source settings.

settings (System
Settings)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

738 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Template Allow users/roles to create and manage templates.

Password template Allow users/roles to create and manage password templates.

7.7.3.4 Security Providers

DESCRIPTION

The Security Provider allows for encrypting the data source content. To access the security
provider, navigate to Administration – Security Provider.

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

Regardless of the selected security provider, passwords stored in data sources

are ALWAYS encrypted using AES 256 bit encryption.

By using a security provider, you ensure that nobody can read entries
configuration data, even when people have a direct access to the database(s) or
a backup. Shared data sources should always be secured with a security
provider especially Devolutions Online Database.

Prior to applying a new or changing an existing security provider, make sure that
every users are disconnected from the data source. If you are changing an
existing Shared Passphrase or Certificate, please note that users will get back
access to the data source when they the new Shared Passphrase or Certificate
on their computer.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 739

Please note that changing a security provider on a data source with a great
number of entries is a lengthy operation.

Applying a new security provider does process the whole database, therefore we
advise you to create a backup prior to this operation.

1. Click on Change Security Settings to change the security provider.

Security Provider

2. Select a security type from the drop down list.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

740 | Remote Desktop Manager

Security Type

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Default This is the legacy security provider. The data is encrypted if the entry
configuration is set accordingly in the advanced settings of the entries.

Shared Set up a shared passphrase for the Security Provider.

passphrase

Certificate Set up a Certificate for the Security Provider.

SHARED PASSPHRASE

If the passphrase is lost, nothing that can be done to recover the data. When
using a passphrase, always copy it to a secure location.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 741

Security Provider - Shared Passphrase

Entries configuration data is encrypted using a mix of a key stored in Remote Desktop Manager
and the passphrase you've entered.

The passphrase is required only when configuring the data source. A policy can be enabled to
always prompt for the passphrase when connecting to the data source. For more information,
please consult the How to modify Group Policy Templates topic.

CERTIFICATE

When choosing Certificate as Security Provider, entries configuration data is encrypted using a
mix of a key stored in Remote Desktop Manager and the private key contained in the certificate.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

742 | Remote Desktop Manager

Security Provider - Certificate

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Location Indicate the certificate location. Select between:

· Current user

· Local machine

Store Indicate the store location of the certificate. Select between:

· Address book

· Authorization root

· Certificate authority

· Disallowed

· My

· Root

· Trusted people

· Trusted publisher

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 743

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Thumbprint Select an existing certificate.

CREATE CERTIFICATE

It is possible to create a Self Signed certificate by clicking on Create Certificate.

Self Signed Certificate

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Common name Name of the certificate.

Key size (bits) Indicate the key size (bits) of the certificate. Select between:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

744 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· 384

· 512

· 1024

· 2048

· 4096

· 8192

· 16384

Valid from Start date of the certificate.

Valid to End date of the certificate.

Save to file Save the certificate as a pfx file and secure this certificate with a
(pfx) password.

Save to Indicate the location and the store to save the certificate.
certificate store

7.7.4 Clean up
7.7.4.1 Clean Up Deleted History

DESCRIPTION

The Deleted History permanently delete entries that had been previously deleted. Full history is
always preserved because every entry "version" is kept in historical tables.

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 745

You must be an administrator of the data source to perform this action.

SETTINGS

1. Select prior to which date you wish to permanently delete your deleted entries.

Clean up Deleted History

2. Confirm your choice prior to permanently delete your deleted entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

746 | Remote Desktop Manager

Confirmation window

There will be no backup of your History. We strongly recommend to do a Backup

before proceeding.

7.7.4.2 Clean Up Entry History

DESCRIPTION

The Entry History deletes the history attached to your entry, you can find the history by right
clicking on your entry and selecting View – Entry history.

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

You must be an administrator of the data source to perform this action.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 747

1. Select prior to which date you wish to permanently delete your Clean up entry history.

Clean up Entry History

2. Another window will appear to confirm your choice of deleting all the history prior to the
chosen date.

Confirmation window

No History backup is created. We strongly recommend to do a Backup before

proceeding.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

748 | Remote Desktop Manager

7.7.4.3 Clean Up Activity Logs

DESCRIPTION

The Clean Up Activity Logs will delete your data source's Activity Logs, you also have the
option to clean up the Administration logs and set up a back up if desired..

This feature requires an Advanced Data Source.

You must be an administrator of the data source to perform this action.

SETTINGS

1. You must confirm your choice prior to permanently deleting your data source logs.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 749

Clean up Data Source logs

A backup of your log will be created as an XML file although it will then be
impossible to import this file in Remote Desktop Manager.

2. Once you have entered your Backup file name and proceeded with the clean up a delete log
result window will appear.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

750 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Source Delete log result

7.7.4.4 Pack Data Source (Optimize)

DESCRIPTION

When holding a great number of entries in your data source it is a best practice to compress
them to avoid slowness issues when using your data source. The Data Source (Optimize) will
analyze all your entries, compress them and then re-saves them, thus saving space in your data
source.

SETTINGS

1. Open the data source you wish to optimize. In Administration click on Pack Data Source
(Optimize) and then click on Analyze.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 751

Pack Data Source (Optimize) - Analyze

2. Once the Analyze is completed click on Optimize to proceed with the optimization of your
data source. You can select which Vault you wish to Analyze and Optimize, or use the
Optimize All feature to perform the Optimize action on all available Vaults.

7.8 Tools

DESCRIPTION

The Tools tab contains your Add-on and Extensions manager as well as your Devolutions
Password Server Console, Generators and multiple useful tools.

Ribbon - Tools

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

752 | Remote Desktop Manager

GENERATORS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Opens the Password Generator window. You can use this to
Generator generate password according to pre-determined criteria for better
security.

SSH Key Launches the SSH Key Generator. SSH keys provide a secure way
Generator of logging into a virtual private server with SSH than using a
password alone.

Certificate Launches the Certificate Generator. With this you can create a self-
Generator signed certificate, which is an identity certificate that is signed by the
same entity whose identity is certified.

Port Generator Launches the Port Generator. With this you can generate ports for
your connections.

TOOLS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Password Opens the Password Analyzer. This is used to evaluate the strength
Analyzer of passwords stored in the data source. This feature is restricted to
Administrators only.

My Inventory Set up a My Inventory report.

Key Agent Opens the Key Agent Manager. This is used to hold all your SSH
Manager Keys in memory, already decoded and ready for them to be used.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 753

OPTION DESCRIPTION

PowerShell (RDM Opens the PowerShell (RDM CmdLet).

CmdLet)

Wayk Now Launches the Wayk Now application.

More Tools The More Tools window contains a variety of application tools such
as: Chocolatey Console, Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager,
Playback (Ansi), RDM Agent and more.

MANAGERS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Add-on Manager Opens the Add-on Manager. It is used to simplify the management of
different add-ons.

Extensions Opens the Extensions Manager. This is used to simplify the

Manager management and installation of Web Browser extensions and other
miscellaneous extensions.

Macros/Scripts/T Opens the Macros/Scripts/Tools Manager. This is used to simplify

ools Manager the import of some pre-determined sessions tools.

Translation Opens the Translation Manager. A cloud based translation repository

Manager that is managed by an external application named Devolutions
Localizer.

7.8.1 Generators
7.8.1.1 Passw ord Generator

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

754 | Remote Desktop Manager

The Password Generator is available in the Tools – Password Generator menu. It allows to
create random passwords that are and difficult to interpret or predict, due to a mix of uppercase
and lowercase letters, numbers and punctuation symbols.

You can also create password generator templates to generate passwords. After you have
selected your mode and settings, you can then create your template.

MODE

DEFAULT

Customize all criteria you would want your password to have.

Password Generator - Default

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 755

ADVANCED SETTINGS

Select the type and amount of characters to include in the password.

Password Generator - Advanced Settings

READABLE PASSWORD

Generate passwords that are readable but are not actual words.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

756 | Remote Desktop Manager

Password Generator - Readable password

USE A PATTERN

Press the button and select any pattern you need to create the passwords, you can also
exclude certain characters if desired. A list of the most recent used pattern will also be created.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 757

Password Generator - Use a pattern

The following are supported patterns:

DESCRIPTION KEY SAMPLE

Lower-Case a abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789

Alphanumeric

Mixed-Case A ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmn

Alphanumeric opqrstuvwxyz 0123456789

Bracket b ()[]{}<>

Lower-Case c bcdfghjklmnpqrstvwxyz
Consonant

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

758 | Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION KEY SAMPLE

Mixed-Case C BCDFGHJKLMNPQRSTVWXYZ bcdfghjklmnpqrstvwxyz

Consonant

Digit d 123456789

Lower-Case Hex h 0123456789 abcdef

Character

Upper-Case Hex H 0123456789 ABCDEF

Character

Lower-Case Letter l abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

Mixed-Case Letter L ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmn

opqrstuvwxyz

Punctuation p ,.;:

Printable 7-Bit s !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?[\]^_{|}~

Special Character

Printable 7-Bit S A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?[\]^_{|}~

ASCII

Upper-Case Letter u ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

Upper-Case U ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789

Alphanumeric

Lower-Case Vowel v aeiou

Mixed-Case Vowel V AEIOU aeiou

High ANSI x From '~' to U255 (excluding U255)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 759

DESCRIPTION KEY SAMPLE

Upper-Case z BCDFGHJKLMNPQRSTVWXYZ
Consonant

Upper-Case Vowel Z AEIOU

Escape (Fixed \ Use following character as is

Char)

Escape (Repeat) {n} Repeats the previous character n times

Custom character [x] Define a custom character sequence

PRONOUNCEABLE PASSWORD

Generate passwords that are pronounceable, but are not actual words.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

760 | Remote Desktop Manager

Password Generator - Pronounceable password

STRONG PASSWORD

Generate an 8 character passwords with alphanumeric and special characters.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 761

Password Generator - Strong password

7.8.1.2 SSH Key Generator

DESCRIPTION

SSH keys provide a secure way of logging into a virtual private server with SSH than using a
password alone. While a password can eventually be cracked with a brute force attack, SSH
keys are nearly impossible to decipher by brute force alone.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

762 | Remote Desktop Manager

SSH Key Generator

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Key algorithm You can choose between:

RSA: RSA can be used for signing/verification and also for

encryption/decryption. When using RSA it is recommended to
use a 2048 bits key size.

DSA: It is faster in signing but slower in verifying. It can only be

used for signing/verification it does not encrypt/decrypt.
When using DSA it is a recommended to use a 1024 bits key
size.

Key size You can choose your SSH Key size between:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 763

OPTION DESCRIPTION

1024 bits: Minimum key size

2048 bits: Default and recommended key size

4096 bits: Maximum key size

Comment Enter your username and the name of the computer you're
transferring your key to.

Load Private Key This feature will allow you to import a previously saved SSH Key.

Save Public Key Saving the public key will generate a *.pub file. Simply enter a
file name when prompted.

Save Private Key You will have the option of saving your Private Key in different
format, choose between:

· PKCS #8 Private Key (*.pri)

· PuTTY Private Key (*.ppk)

· OpenSSH Private Key (*.pri)

If you did not specify a passphrase you will have to confirm that you do not wish to use a
passphrase.

If using the Key Agent Manager you must chose the PuTTY Private Key (.ppk) file
format or the OpenSSH Private Key (.pri) file format. The PKCS Private Key is not
a supported file format for the Key Agent Manager.

7.8.1.3 Certificate Generator

DESCRIPTION

The Certificate Generator allows you to create a self signed certificate which is an identity
certificate that is signed by the same entity whose identity is certified.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

764 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

Certificate Generator - Self Signed Certificate

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Common name Name of the certificate.

Key size (bits) Indicates the key size (bits) of the certificate. Select between:

· 1024

· 2048

· 4096

· 8192

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 765

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· 16384

Valid from Starting date of the certificate.

Valid to Expiration date of the certificate.

Save to file Save the certificate into a *.pfx file and secure this certificate with a
(pfx) password.

Save to Indicate the location and the store to save the certificate.
certificate store

Location Indicate the location of the certificate. Select between:

· Current user

· Local machine

Store Indicate the store location of the certificate. Select between:

· Address book

· Authorization root

· Certificate authority

· Disallowed

· My

· Root

· Trusted people

· Trusted publisher

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

766 | Remote Desktop Manager

Self Signed Certificate

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Store Indicate the store where the certificate will be located.

Browse Store Browse the store that is indicated in the store field.

Thumbprint Display the certificate thumbprint.

View Display the certificate that you have created.

Certificate

Private Key Display the certificate private key

View Private View the private key file on your computer.

Key

7.8.1.4 Port Generator

DESCRIPTION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 767

The Port Generator allows you to generate ports for your connections.

SETTINGS

Port Generator

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Boundaries Determinate the port range to generate the ports between

those 2 numbers.

Include well known Include ports from range 0 to 1023. They are the well-known
ports ports or system ports. They are used by system processes
that provide widely used types of network services

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

768 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Include registered ports Include ports from range 1024 to 49151. They are assigned
by IANA for specific service upon application by a requesting
entity. On most systems, registered ports can be used by
ordinary users.

Include ports used by Include the ports that are already used by other sessions.
others sessions

7.8.2 Tools
7.8.2.1 Passw ord Analyzer

DESCRIPTION

The information in this topic is how the "Legacy" mode of password analysis
works. The mode can be changed in the System Settings for ZXCVBN . The
"Legacy" mode is not the default mode.

The Password Analyzer evaluates the strength of passwords stored in the data source. To
access the password analyzer, navigate to Tools – Password Analyzer.

A password analyzer control is also displayed under most password fields of entries.

Entry Properties - Password Field With Password Analyzer

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 769

The password analyzer follows a set of rules to determine the strength of the password with a
score from 0 to 100. There are two categories of rules.

REINFORCE

These are the rules which make the passwords stronger:

· The password length

· The number of uppercase letters (A-Z)

· The number of lowercase letters (a-z)

· The number of digits (0-9)

· The number of symbols (!, @, #, $, etc.)

· The number of digits or symbols in the middle of the password

· Three or more of the rules above are met

The minimum requirements for a Strong password are:

· The password is at least 5 characters long

· The password contains uppercase and lowercase characters

· The password contains digits

WEAKENING

These are the rules which make the passwords weaker:

· The password contains only letters

· The password contains only digits

· The password has repeated characters

· The password has consecutive uppercase letters (two or more)

· The password has consecutive lowercase letters (two or more)

· The password has consecutive digits (two or more)

· The password has sequential letters (ABCD, DCBA)

· The password has sequential digits (1234, 4321)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

770 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

Tools - Password Analyzer

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Show all Shows you all the entries in your session, including those without
password.

Show VPN Add the VPN Host column.

analysis

Edit Open the current entry to edit it.

Forbidden Create a list of prohibited passwords.

Password

Export Export the password analyzer settings.

Settings

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 771

7.8.2.2 Key Agent Manager

DESCRIPTION

The Key Agent Manager is used to hold all your SSH Keys in memory, already decoded and
ready for them to be used. It has the same use as Pageant (SSH Key Manager) has for Putty
except that the Key Agent Manager is used with Remote Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

1. When opening the Key Agent Manager you will notice at the bottom right that the agent is not
running you will need to click on Start Agent. If you wish to always have your Key Agent running
you can activate the option in File – Option – Key Agent – Start agent on application start.

Key Agent Manager - Start Agent

2. Click on Add key and select the file to open your SSH key.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

772 | Remote Desktop Manager

Key Agent Manager - Add Key

3. All your added SSH Key will appear in your Key Agent Manager.

4. In your SSH Shell Session in the General tab enter a Username and leave the Password field
blank.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 773

SSH Shell session - General Tab

5. In the Private Key tab of your SSH Shell session leave the option for the Private Key to No
Private Key.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

774 | Remote Desktop Manager

SSH Shell session - Private Key Tab

6. In the Advanced tab of your SSH Shell session activate the option Use Agent. The Use
Agent automatically take the information of the SSH Key kept in your Key Agent Manager.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 775

SSH Shell session - Advanced

PRIVATE KEY CREDENTIAL

When creating new Private Key credential entry in Remote Desktop Manager you have the
option of loading them automatically in your Key Agent Manager.

1. Create your new Private Key credential.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

776 | Remote Desktop Manager

New Credential Entry - Private Key

2. In the Advanced tab of your Private Key entry activate the option Automatically load to key
agent.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 777

Private Key - Advanced Tab

7.8.2.3 Pow erShell (RDM CmdLet)

DESCRIPTION

The PowerShell (RDM CmLet) automatically opens an embedded PowerShell window. RDM
snap-in allows for quick and robust automation of actions such as add/edit/open of sessions, the
possibilities are endless.

Since its release, this highly-requested feature has become very useful in solving user requests.
A quick search through our forum reveals many usages of the cmdlets, such as automating the
creation of Windows Start Menu shortcuts for every RDM session.

To learn more, you can find full RDM cmdlet documentation available via the PowerShell
Scripting topic or directly in PowerShell using the Get-Help cmdlet.

SETTINGS

You will find on the Forum multiple PowerShell script to import edit or interact with the Remote
Desktop Manager data.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

778 | Remote Desktop Manager

PowerShell

7.8.2.4 Wayk Now

DESCRIPTION

Wayk Now helps you provide remote assistance to others by allowing one user to connect to
another person's computer. It is a Devolutions product that is integrated with Remote Desktop
Manager.

Clicking on this tool opens Wayk Now application externally.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 779

Wayk Now

For more information about using Wayk Now consult the Wayk Now Online Help.
7.8.2.5 More Tools
7.8.2.5.1 Chocolatey Console

DESCRIPTION

Chocolatey need to be installed on your computer to use the Chocolatey

Console.

The Chocolatey Console is available in the Tools – More Tools - Chocolatey Console menu.
It allows you to install all the supported applications from Chocolatey directly from Remote
Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

780 | Remote Desktop Manager

Chocolatey Console

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Install the selected application.

Update the selected application.

Uninstall the selected application.

Refresh the Chocolatey details list.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 781

USAGE

During the installation, you will see the following window.

Installation window

When the installation is completed you will see a check mark in the Installed column.

Installation Complete

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

782 | Remote Desktop Manager

7.8.2.5.2 Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager

DESCRIPTION

The local RDP settings and the RemoteApp settings are available from Tools – More Tools -
Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager.

If you run Remote Desktop Manager on a Windows Server 2008 machine the TS RemoteApp
MMC console will be launched.

If you are running on Windows Vista, the RemoteApp console built into Remote Desktop
Manager will be launched because RemoteApp functionality is available in Windows 7 but not
the MMC console. Therefore instead of having to modify the required registry entries you can
use the Remote Desktop Manager RemoteApp Manager.

SETTINGS

More Tools - Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager

REMOTE DESKTOP SETTINGS

Allow or disallow the remote connections to your computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 783

Remote Desk top Settings

REMOTE DESKTOP

Allows you to modify the local RDP port.

Remote Desktop Manager must be run as an administrator to modify the Remote

Desktop settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

784 | Remote Desktop Manager

Remote Desk top Connection Settings

REMOTEAPP SETTINGS

You must Enable RemoteApp to be able to create a New RemoteApp Setting.

Remote Desktop Manager must be run as an administrator to modify the

RemoteApp settings.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 785

RemoteApp Settings

UDP SETTINGS

Enable or disable UDP (User Datagram Protocol) locally on your computer. UDP is a
communication protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged
between computers in a network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP).

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

786 | Remote Desktop Manager

Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager - UDP is Enabled

USAGE

1. Click on New RemoteApp Settings.

New RemoteApp Settings

2. Configure the RemoteApp

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 787

3. Create a new RDP session and select the Programs tab. Enable the Use RemoteApp
option and then enter the name of the RemoteApp program and save the session. When the
session is launched you will have the RemoteApp running locally.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

788 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP session - Programs Tab

7.8.2.5.3 Playback (Ansi)

DESCRIPTION

The Playback (Ansi) is available in Tools – More Tools – Playback (Ansi).

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 789

More Tools - Playback (Ansi)

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Select the ansi file you wish to open in the Terminal Playback.

Font Select the font for the Terminal Playback.

Options See Options section.

Clear the screen to play another ansi file.

OPTIONS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

790 | Remote Desktop Manager

Playback (Ansi) - Ansi Player Options

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Terminal name Indicate the terminal name.

Encoding Indicate the encoding you wish to use.

Auto wrap Indicate what happen when text reaches the right-hand edge of
the window. Select between:

· On

· Off

· Dos

Backspace wrap This option allows you to choose what you want to do when you
press backspace. Some terminals believe that the backspace
key should send the same thing to the server as Control-H
(ASCII code 8). Other terminals believe that the backspace key
should send ASCII code 127 (usually known as Control-?) so
that it can be distinguished from Control-H. Select between:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 791

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· On

· Off

· Dos

Force Non-destructive Allow to perform a normal backspace without deleting a

backspace character.

Ignore Substitute Ignore the substitute character that can be use in Putty.
character

Implicit Carriage Most servers send two control characters, CR and LF, to start a
return in Linefeed new line on the screen. The CR character makes the cursor
return to the left-hand side of the screen. The LF character
makes the cursor move one line down (and might make the
screen scroll).

Some servers only send LF, and expect the terminal to move
the cursor over to the left automatically. If you come across a
server that does this, you will see a stepped effect on the
screen. If this happens to you, try enabling the option and things
might go back to normal.
7.8.2.5.4 RDM Agent

DESCRIPTION

The Remote Desktop Manager Agent is a very powerful tool that allows commands to be run
on multiple machines.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

792 | Remote Desktop Manager

More Tools - RDM Agent

SETTINGS

To launch a script through the RDM Agent, you first need to open an RDP connection to all the
machines you wish to execute the script on. Once opened, select all the opened sessions in the
Navigation Pane, right-click them and select Execute Script via Agent.

Execute script via Agent only needs the RDM Agent when the script is executed
from the Quick Script tab. RDM needs to be fully installed on the remote
computer when the script is executed from the Scripts/Tools tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 793

Execute Script Via Agent

QUICK SCRIPT - MESSAGE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

794 | Remote Desktop Manager

Quick Script - Message

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Message Send a message to all targets.

QUICK SCRIPT - COMMAND LINE (CMD.EXE)

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 795

Quick Script - Command Line

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Run Indicate the command line that you want to execute.

Use Default Use the default working directory when connect to the session.
Working directory

Run as Elevates the process to run as an administrator.

Administrator

Keep open Keep the window open after the execution of the command line.

QUICK SCRIPT - POWERSHELL

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

796 | Remote Desktop Manager

Quick Script - PowerShell

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Command Indicate the PowerShell command that you want to execute.

Filename Select a PowerShell file on the network or on the computer.

Arguments Arguments that are appended to the Command.

Run as Elevates the process to run as an administrator.

Administrator

No Profile Does not load the Windows PowerShell profile.

No exit Does not exit after running startup commands.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 797

QUICK SCRIPT - RUN

Quick Script - Run

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Run Select the program or file that you want to execute.

Arguments Arguments that are appended to the Command.

Use Default Use the default working directory when connect to the session.
Working directory

Run as Elevates the process to run as an administrator.

Administrator

QUICK SCRIPT - SCRIPTS/TOOLS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

798 | Remote Desktop Manager

Quick Script - Scripts/Tools

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Scripts/Tool Select a script or a tool session that you have already created in Remote
s Desktop Manager.

SCRIPT/TOOLS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 799

Scripts/Tools

Search for a script or a tool you wish to execute through the RDM Agent.

SETTINGS

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

800 | Remote Desktop Manager

Advanced

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Open all When multiple sessions are selected to Execute Script Via Agent, it
connections will open all the selected connections.

Delay Enter the time delay between opening each selected session.

AGENT STATUS

Open a RDP session, right-click on this single session and select Agent Status. The Agent
Status will show you that Remote Desktop Manager is installed on the remote computer or not,
that the Remote Desktop Manager Agent is active or not and how many Remote Desktop
Manager Jump sessions are opened.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 801

Agent Status

7.9 Help

DESCRIPTION

The Help tab contain links to the Devolutions forum and Online Help, and many support related
features, such as the Application Logs, the Profiler, and the Recorder.

Ribbon - Help

HELP

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Online Help Launches the Online Help you are currently browsing!

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

802 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Register Product Register the Remote Desktop Manager with a Trial or Enterprise
license serial. For more information, please consult the Register
Enterprise Edition topic.

Blog Visit our Blog. Learn about the Devolutions Team, as well as our
Goals, Products and more.

SUPPORT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Applications Opens the Application Logs. This is useful for understanding

Logs encountered errors.

Diagnostic Launches the Diagnostic feature.

Profiler Use the Profiler to acquire specific information. Used to diagnose

connectivity issues with a data source.

Record Use the Recorder. Used to help our Devolutions Support team
troubleshoot the problem

Submit a Support Submit a Support Ticket. Help us make your experience better by
Ticket reporting experience issues or by asking for new features.

Visit our Forum Visit our Forum. You can create an account and experience the
bleeding edge of our customer support.

Change History Send you directly to our Remote Desktop Manager web page to view
the new features and enhancements when a new version is release.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 803

ABOUT

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Check for Launch the Update Manager.

Updates

About Learn about Remote Desktop Manager.

7.9.1 Support
7.9.1.1 Application Log

DESCRIPTION

When encountering errors, you can verify the local application log, which is available in Help –
Application Logs.

These logs are saved in %LocalAppData%

\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager\RemoteDesktopManager.log.db. Logs are
displayed as a list which can be filtered by date, message, version,or type of log.

View Application Log dialog

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

804 | Remote Desktop Manager

REPORT

A report of the logs can be saved in a text file as well. Simply navigate to the Report tab of the
application log, then click on the Save button to select a location to save the file.

CLEAN UP

For security reason, it is a best practice is to clean up the application log once every month. To
do so, in the application log, use the Clean Up feature.

We strongly recommend to do a Delete all, but this can be customized to delete specific logs by
type, date or selection.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 805

INCREASING THE DEBUG LEVEL

When experiencing issues with Remote Desktop Manager our support team might ask you to
increase the debug level of the application during the support process. We strongly suggest to
only increase the debug level when requested by our support team.

Increase the debug level in File - Options - Advanced.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

806 | Remote Desktop Manager

File – Options – Advanced – Debug level

7.9.1.2 Diagnostic

DESCRIPTION

If you encounter a problem with Remote Desktop Manager, you can run a system diagnostic,
which is available in Help – Diagnostic. This could help diagnose or give a pointer to what kind
of issues you might be experiencing.

SYSTEM

The administrator item could be the possible source for security problem. This happen often
when a user has the SYSDBA or is DB_OWNER of the SQL Server database.

Some other issues could be related to the fact that the application is running in Remote Desktop
Services. However Remote Desktop Manager is fully compatible with Remote Desktop
Services.

FIPS related issues and solutions can be found in the specific FIPS (Encryption) troubleshooting
section.

If you have a Remote Desktop Manager Jump configured you can run a test of your Jump host by
clicking on Jump Test.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 807

System Diagnostic – System

Please read the Troubleshooting topic if experiencing issues with Remote

Desktop Manager, it lists error messages and could contain the fix/workaround
for your problem.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

808 | Remote Desktop Manager

DATA SOURCE

The Data Source tab contains information regarding the current data source, such as the
number of entries it contains, the size of your data source, the number of custom images and the
offline state.

Too many custom images could dramatically increase the size of the data source
and cause load time issue.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 809

System Diagnostic - Data Source

POLICY

The Policy tab display the list of Group Policy Templates to see if any of them has been applied.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

810 | Remote Desktop Manager

System Diagnostic - Policy

7.9.1.3 Profiler

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager has a built-in profiler to diagnose connectivity issues with a data
source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 811

Displaying the Profiler window might slow down the operations on the data
source. Proceed with care.

To diagnose startup issues, you can enable the profiler from the command line as
described in Command Line Arguments

PROCEDURE

1. Once the Profiler is opened, refresh the data source.

Holding the Ctrl key while performing the refresh should force a full reload of the
data source, recreating the offline cache.

Refresh Data Source

2. The Profiler data will appear in the Performance Profiling window.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

812 | Remote Desktop Manager

Performance Profiling

3. Click on Send Trace to Support in order to send the Profiler data logs to our Devolutions
support team. You can add a Marker when running multiple tests to separate them.

DEBUG ONLY

To learn more about the Debug only tab please see the Debugging topic.

Debug only

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 813

7.9.1.4 Record

DESCRIPTION

If you are experiencing issues with Remote Desktop Manager, you can help our Devolutions
Support team troubleshoot the problem by sending them a short video of your issue. Launch this
by using the Record feature located in the menu Help – Record.

The Record is an easy-to-use built-in screen recorder that could even be a useful for your in-
house training as it is not limited to Remote Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

The Video Recording Options uses the MP4 format, which on Vanilla installs of Windows is not
supported. If you encounter any difficulty viewing the video we strongly suggest the use of a VLC
player.

Video Recording Options

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Devolutions Web Login
Part VIII
Contents | 815

8 Dev olutions Web Login

8.1 Overview

Devolutions Web Login is a web browser password

plugin used in conjunction with Remote Desktop
Manager, Devolutions Password Server and
Devolutions Password Hub, which allows users to
securely inject passwords into websites using
credentials stored in their vaults.

It gives system administrators full control over the

management of passwords, without affecting the user's
productivity.

Remote Desktop Devolutions Password Devolutions Password

Manager Server Hub

Centralize, Manage and Secure, Manage and Vault and Manage

Monitor
Secure Remote Business-User Passwords
Connections Access to Privileged
Accounts

Remote Desktop Manager Devolutions Password Devolutions Password Hub

centralizes all remote Server lets you control is a secure and cloud-
connections on a single access to privileged based password manager
platform that is securely accounts and manage for teams
shared between users and remote sessions through a
across the entire team. secure solution that can be
deployed on-premises.

Advanced users, other browser extensions, or even JavaScript injection can all
result in the password being read from the password edit control, even if it
displays dots instead of the password. Any use of an external browser must be
carefully weighed against your security requirements.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

816 | Remote Desktop Manager

Warning for all Remote Desktop Manager users:

Devolutions Web Login was created for a normal desktop environment. It

uses inter process communication (IPC) with the client application. Using it on
a terminal server introduces a level of risk that may be unacceptable for
corporate users.

To use it in a safe manner, it is critical that each user is assigned a distinct port
and that port be kept secret. An application passcode must be set as well to
secure the port. The first client application that starts will be able to use the port
exclusively. All Devolutions Web Login calling on that port will get the
responses, unless an application passcode is required.

8.2 Installation

Devolutions Web Login is a free browser extension companion tools. It does require one of
our products to function at this time.

Click on the browser link below to start the installation of Devolutions Web Login plugin:
· Chrome

· Firefox

· Microsoft Edge

· Opera
8.2.1 Chrome

Follow the steps below to complete the installation of Devolutions Web Login in the Google
Chrome web browser.

1. Open Google Chrome.

2. Navigate to Devolutions Web Login extension or use the link from our Website

3. Click the Add To Chrome button.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 817

Devolutions Web Login Chrome Web Store

4. Click Add extension in the confirmation dialog.

Extension Installation Confirmation

Once installed, access the extension by clicking in the top-right corner of the Google Chrome
web browser.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

818 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login Extension Button

8.2.2 Firefox

Follow the steps below to complete the installation of Devolutions Web Login in the Firefox web
browser.

1. Open a Firefox window.

2. Download the extension from our Devolutions Web Login website page.

3. Click Continue to Installation in the confirmation dialog.

Continue to Installation

4. Click Add, when prompted to add Devolutions Web Login to the extension.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 819

Add the Extension

5. Once installed, access the extension by clicking in the top-right corner of Firefox.

Devolutions Web Login Extension Button

8.2.3 Microsoft Edge Beta

Here are the steps to install Devolutions Web Login on Microsoft Edge Beta.

1. Open Microsoft Edge Beta.

2. Click on Extensions in the menu of the browser.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

820 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Edge Beta Menu

3. Allow extensions from other stores.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 821

Allow Extensions

4. Allow Non Microsoft Store Extensions.

Allow Non Microsoft Store Extensions

5. Follow the extension from Devolutions Web Login website page to the Chrome Web Store.

6. Click Add to Chrome.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

822 | Remote Desktop Manager

Chrome Web Store

7. Add the extension to Microsoft Edge Beta.

Add Devolutions Web Login to Microsoft Edge Beta

The extension is installed. Access it by clicking in the top-right corner of the Microsoft Edge
Beta web browser.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 823

8.2.4 Opera

Follow the steps below to complete the installation of Devolutions Web Login in the Opera web
browser.

1. Open Opera.

2. Download the extension of Devolutions Web Login from our website page.

3. Go to Browser Settings in the easy setup of Opera.

4. Drag and drop the .nex file from step 2 from the downloads in the web browser.

5. Click on Go to Extension from the information panel at the top.

Opera Extensions Enabling

6. Click Install and the Yes, install pop up.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

824 | Remote Desktop Manager

Opera Install Window

7. Access the extension by clicking in the top-right corner of Opera.

8.3 First Login

8.3.1 Password Hub

FIRST LOGIN WITH DEVOLUTIONS WEB LOGIN

Follow these steps to connect Devolutions Password Hub to Devolutions Web Login extension:

1. Click on Devolutions Web Login extension at the top right corner of your browser.

A Devolutions Password Hub access is required to continue.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 825

2. Choose Devolutions Password Hub in the list and Save. You could at this point import
settings; the option will also be available in the Settings menu after the log in.

First Login

3. Log in to your account.

4. Enter the credentials from your Devolutions Account to continue.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

826 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Account Login

5. Unlock the vault with your master key.

Devolutions Web Login will recognize automatically the Password Hub linked to
your Devolutions account. Click Change to modify the URL.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 827

Password Hub Master k ey

Devolutions Web Login is now connected to your vaults.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

828 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login Connected to Devolutions Password Hub

8.3.1.1 Multiple Passw ord Hub

DESCRIPTION

MANAGING MULTIPLE PASSWORD HUB WITH DEVOLUTIONS WEB LOGIN

Devolutions Web Login will automatically acknowledge all Password Hub linked to your
Devolutions account.

· View active Password Hub

· Switch Password Hub in Devolutions Web Login

Devolutions Web Login will only recognize and apply credentials from the
active Password Hub.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 829

VIEW ACTIVE PASSWORD HUB

To view/validate the active Password Hub, click on the Devolutions Web Login extension at
the top right corner of your browser.

1. Click on your avatar at the bottom of the window.

Devolutions Web Login

2. Click About.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

830 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login About

3. Validate the Password Hub URL.

Password Hub URL

SWITCH PASSWORD HUB IN DEVOLUTIONS WEB LOGIN

To switch Password Hub in Devolutions Web Login, click on the Devolutions Web Login
extension at the top right corner of your browser.

1. Click on your avatar at the bottom of the window.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 831

Devolutions Web Login

2. Click Settings.

Devolutions Web Login Settings

3. Click HUB.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

832 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login Settings Menu

4. In the General section, click List.

Devolutions Web Login General Settings

5. All the available Password Hub linked to your Devolutions account will show in the list. Switch
by clicking once on the desired Password Hub.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 833

Password Hub List

6. Click on the Devolutions Web Login extension at the top right corner of your browser and
enter the Master key associated with this Password Hub.

Password Hub Switch Master k ey

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

834 | Remote Desktop Manager

8.3.2 Password Server

FIRST LOGIN WITH DEVOLUTIONS WEB LOGIN

Follow these steps to connect Devolutions Password Server to Devolutions Web Login
extension:

1. Click on Devolutions Web Login extension at the top right corner of your browser.

A Devolutions Password Server access is required to continue.

2. Choose Devolutions Password Server in the list and Save. You could at this point import
settings; the option will also be available in the Settings menu after the log in.

First Login

3. Enter the server address. Test the connection to validate it, then Save.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 835

Server Address

4. Press the Log In after you saved the address.

Devolutions Web Login Login

5. Enter your Devolutions Password Server credentials and log in.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

836 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Password Server Login

Devolutions Web Login is now connected to your vaults.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 837

Devolutions Web Login Connected

8.3.3 Remote Desktop Manager

FIRST LOGIN WITH DEVOLUTIONS WEB LOGIN

Follow these steps to connect your Remote Desktop Manager to Devolutions Web Login
extension:

1. Click on Devolutions Web Login extension at the top right corner of your browser.

Remote Desktop Manager must be installed and running to continue.

2. Choose Remote Desktop Manager in the list and Save. You could at this point import
settings; the option will also be available in the Settings menu after the log in.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

838 | Remote Desktop Manager

First Login

You will be automatically connected to your vaults.

Devolutions Web Login Connected

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 839

8.4 Exploring Devolutions Web Login

8.4.1 Menu

The user interface Devolutions Web Login is slightly different in appearance when connected
to Remote Desktop Manager, Devolutions Password Server or Devolutions Password Hub.

See below a list of the menu and information available from the Devolutions Web Login
extension:

· Refine the credential list available with the search.

· Add a website from Devolutions Web Login in a specific folder located in a vault or your
private vault.

· Visualize the credential stored in the vaults if you are connected with Devolutions Password
Server or Devolutions Password Hub.

· Browse recently used entry or favorites.

· Use the password generator to create custom and more secure credentials.

· Set Devolutions Web Login settings.

8.4.1.1 Settings

Devolutions Web Login settings are separated in two categories, Configuration and Data
sources.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

840 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login Settings

CONFIGURATION

The General settings are about the user interface and interaction.

· Show Devolutions Web Login extension icon in the credentials fields.

· Show the prompt when saving credentials on new login.

· Color the fields that are filled with Devolutions Web Login

· Disable the analytics in the advanced setting.

The Never list displays the list of websites, added locally, to which the user will never be
prompted to save credentials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 841

· Type can range from: Never add site, Never autofill, Never do anything too Never show icons in
field.

· Matching options are: Base domains, Host, Starts with, RegEx and Exact.

To remove a website from the never list click the trash can icon next to it. To edit an entry,
delete it and create another.

The Import / Export setting allows to save and transfer your currently set preferred settings.

· Import setting from other browsers or users.

· Choose to export Devolutions Web Login settings, password generator template and the
never list.

DATA SOURCES

The data sources settings are used to customize Devolutions Web Login interactions with
Remote Desktop Manager, Devolutions Password Server and Devolutions Password Hub.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

GENERAL OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Enable Remote Desktop Retrieve entries from Remote Desktop Manager when
Manager app the application is open.

Use default port (19443) Communicate with the default port 19443 between the
application.

Add entry in private vault by Save new entries in the private vault.
default

Destination folder Choose the folder where the credentials are stored in
the vault.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

842 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION

Automatically retrieve Devolutions Web Login automatically search for

credentials on page load credentials in the data source when connecting to a
website.

If disabled, click on the Devolutions Web Login

extension icon to manually retrieve credentials.

Automatically fill in Fill automatically the credentials when loading a web

credentials on load page.

Automatically submit the form Submit the credentials automatically when the fields are
after filling filled.

ADVANCED OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Application key Secure the port with an application key by using the
same code in Remote Desktop Manager and
Devolutions Web Login.

Navigate to File – Options – Browser Extensions in

Remote Desktop Manager to set the application key.

Enable native messaging Exchange messages with a native application installed

on the user's computer.

Use legacy API Use the old browser extension API for compatibility with
older versions of Remote Desktop Manager.

DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD SERVER

GENERAL OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Enable Devolutions Retrieve entries from Devolutions Password Server.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 843

GENERAL OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Password Server

Destination folder Choose the folder where the credentials are stored in
the vault.

Server URL Enter the URL of the Devolutions Password Server

instance to connect to.

ACTION OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Automatically retrieve Devolutions Web Login automatically search for

credentials on page load credentials in the data source when connecting to a
website.

If disabled, click on the Devolutions Web Login

extension icon to manually retrieve credentials.

Automatically fill in Fill automatically the credentials when loading a web

credentials on load page.

Automatically submit the form Submit the credentials automatically when the fields are
after filling filled.

DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD HUB

GENERAL OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Enable Devolutions Retrieve entries from Devolutions Password Hub.

Password Hub

Server URL Enter the URL of the Devolutions Password Hub

instance to connect to.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

844 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Automatically fill in Fill automatically the credentials when loading a web

credentials on load page.

Automatically submit the form Submit the credentials automatically when the fields are
after filling filled

ADVANCED OPTIONS DESCRIPTION

Devolutions Account login Set your Devolutions Account login URL.

Show favicon Display the Devolutions Web Login favicon.

8.4.2 Retrieve Credentials

Once configured in your Devolutions product, credentials are automatically detected by

Devolutions Web Login when connected to their respective applications.

Select an entry from the list in Devolutions Web Login or click on the icon in the credential field to
fill in the login information and connect to the website.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 845

Automatic Log In

8.4.2.1 Remote Desktop Manager

Checkmark Enable web browser extension link in Remote Desktop Manager entries to allow
Devolutions Web Login extension to retrieve the credentials when connecting to its respective
website.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

846 | Remote Desktop Manager

Enable web browser extension link

8.4.3 Secure Devolutions Web Login

As mentioned in the Devolutions Web Login Overview topic, installing the extension in a
Terminal Services environment can introduce security risks. In such environments, each user
must have a distinct port assigned, as well as an application key to prevent any other
Devolutions Web Login from listening in.

The application key is displayed in clear text, it must be kept secret by the user.

To enable the security layer in Remote Desktop Manager, follow these steps:

1. Navigate to File – Options – Browser Extensions.

2. Uncheck Use default port.

3. Enter a custom port.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 847

4. Type an Application key then click OK

Remote Desk top Manager Browser Extensions Options

5. In your browser, click the Devolutions Web Login icon and go to Remote Desktop
Manager Settings.

6. Disable Use default port.

7. Enter the custom port created earlier in Remote Desktop Manager.

8. Enter the same Application key as Remote Desktop Manager .

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

848 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Web Login Settings for Remote Desk top Manager

8.4.4 Keyboard Shortcuts

Here is the list of keyboard shortcuts available for Devolutions Web Login:

CTRL+SHIFT+Z

Use this key shortcut to open Devolutions Web Login window in your active browser.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 849

Devolutions Web Login in Chrome

CTRL+SHIFT+Y

Use it to auto-fill your credential when only one is available for an entry.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

850 | Remote Desktop Manager

One Credential Login with Devolutions Web Login

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Role Based Access Control
Part IX
852 | Remote Desktop Manager

9 Role Based Access Control

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager role-based access control allows to create a granular protection
system that is quite flexible. However, flexibility comes at a price and sometimes making the
wrong choices could increase the time involved in managing the system.

The following recommendations are based on our experience with the system and the ideas
shared by our community. Follow these guidelines, as they will help you to use the role-based
access control efficiently.

Here are the main key points of the role based access system:
· Security is inherited: child items and folders are covered by a parent folder’s security.

· Permissions can be overridden: a permission set on a sub folder will override the parent
item’s permission.

· Permissions are granular: Multiple permissions can be set on entries at once.

ENHANCE THE SECURITY

While the role based access control is a great feature to secure access to entries, many other
features can be used to add more security layers. For more information, please consult the
following topics:
· Security Provider

· Credential repository

· Password Templates

· Two-factor authentication

· One-time password

SCENARIOS

Because of the great flexibility of our system, it becomes difficult to describe how to achieve the
exact security system that matches your needs. For this reason, we have elected to describe the
most popular systems that we have seen in use in our current community of users. We hope that
one of them will closely match your needs. You can obviously mix and match the various
strategies used in our scenarios to achieve your requirements.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 853

Please consult the following:

· Simplified security

· Advanced security

ROLE CONFIGURATION

When using the role-based access control, roles are mostly used to control user access for
multiple users at once.

Common roles can be:

· Service Desk: a single point of contact to handle incidents, problems and questions from staff and customers.
Provide an interface for activities such as change requests, software licences, configuration management, and
more.

· Help Desk: manage, co-ordinate and resolve support requests.

· Consultants: employed externally on a temporary basis, they usually are read-only users and
can use only a subset of entries.

To be more specific, we will use these team names in our scenarios.

CREATE THE ROLE

To create roles, navigate to Administration – Roles, then click Add Role.

Create a Role

All settings can be left to default unless the role contains only administrators. In this case, check
the Administrator box when configuring the role. Enter a Name for the role, then click Ok.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

854 | Remote Desktop Manager

Configure a Role

To assign users to the role, click , then check the Is Member box of the respective user.

Assign a user to the Role

USER CONFIGURATION

USER TEMPLATE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 855

It is possible to change the default user template. To do so, navigate to File – Options –
Security – User Template. These settings control the default settings of a new user. The best
practice is to disable all privileges.

CREATE THE USER

To create users, navigate to Administration – Users, then click Add User. Enter a Login
and Password for the user and select the User type.

Create a user

A user can be assigned to multiple roles at once by checking the Is Member box of the
respective roles in the Roles section of the User Management.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

856 | Remote Desktop Manager

Assign a user to a Role

ADMINISTRATORS

Administrators can do everything, regardless of the security. These users are usually the chief
officers and senior management.

RESTRICTED USERS

Restricted users have limited access to resources. They usually have the Add and Edit rights
only. These users can be mid or first level executives, such as service desk and help desk.

USERS

Users also have limited access to resources much like Restricted users. However, Users have
by default the Add, Edit and Delete rights and can perform these actions on all unsecured
entries.

READ ONLY USERS

Read only users can only view and use resources, but cannot edit them. These users are
usually external consultants.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 857

SELECT THE APPROPRIATE USER TYPE

When creating users, some key points must be taken into consideration. Ask yourself the
following questions while configuring a new user:

· Should they be able to access any resource without restriction? These are your
Administrators.

· Should they be able to add, edit, or delete entries? A User would have all of these.
Alternatively, you can select specific rights with Restricted User.

· Should they be able to see sensitive information, or import and export entries? Read-Only
users are best used for those who should very limited access. You can also use the privilege
tab for additional control over users.

User Management - Privileges

ENTRY CONFIGURATION

Access is granted or denied to users by setting permission on entries. Permissions can be set
to users or roles. The best practice is to grant permissions to roles to control access for multiple
users at once.

To set permissions on an entry, edit any entry, then navigate to the Permissions section.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

858 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry's permissions

Permissions are usually set on folders, and apply to all child entries. A best practice is to set all
the permissions of the vault root folder to Never. As a result, all permissions of all entries are
denied by default.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 859

Vault Root permissions

Access is denied to users by expressly granting the access to other users. In other words, all
users that are not on the list of a permission have the access denied.

For a user to have access to a sub folder, the user must have at least the view permission on all
parent folders.

Consider the following structure:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

860 | Remote Desktop Manager

There are three levels of folders: the vault root, Telemark, and child items of Telemark.

Suppose that a user, such as a consultant, must have access to the Montreal folder only. The
consultant must be granted the view permission on the Telemark folder as well. However,
granting the view access to the Telemark folder gives to the consultant the permissions to view
all child items of Telemark. To deny the view permissions for the consultant on specific child
items, the view permissions of these items must be expressly set for other users.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 861

9.1 Permissions

DESCRIPTION

The Permissions window which is only available in an Advanced Data Source, can be found in
every entry properties in the Permissions section.

The Role Based Access Control feature is not available using an Devolutions
Online Database.

The role-based permissions system can give a very accurate control of the security. Here is an
overview of the permissions window:

Permissions panel

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Permission Sets the permission mode. Select between:

· Inherited (Default): will inherit the permissions from the parent
groups.
· Custom: lets you specify a custom value for each of the
permission.
· Everyone: everyone will be granted all the permissions below.
· Never: no one but the administrators will be granted the
permission.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

862 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Grant Access Allows batch granting access to a specific entry or entries.

Inherited values Indicates what is inherited from parent groups.

Select roles or users Lets you select Users / Roles to be granted the permission.
Available only if the permission is set to Custom.

Batch Grant Access

For more details on each permission, please consult our Common Settings - Permission topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 863

9.2 Scenarios
9.2.1 Simplified Security

DESCRIPTION

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

While the following scenario is relevant for small to medium enterprises, it is not
recommended for a larger business. For a scenario more suited for large
enterprises, please consult the Advanced Security scenario.

Our fictional company, Windjammer, has four roles: HelpDesk, ServiceDesk, Administrations,
and Consultants. There are two client companies: Downhill Pro and Telemark.

The following tree structure represents entries which users have access to once all permissions
are set:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

864 | Remote Desktop Manager

USER CONFIGURATION

Here is an example for user configuration. To create users, navigate to Administration – Users
– Add User.

The following rights selection is available when setting a user to Restricted user.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 865

User Management - Permissions Section

Administrators: administrators have a lot more access than regular users. When creating these
users, set the User type to Administrator to give them access to everything. The administrator
can access all entries, regardless of permissions.

User Management - Administrator

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

866 | Remote Desktop Manager

Regular users (User): these users have fewer rights than administrators. They essentially have
all the basic rights (except for View Password) but are susceptible to all denied permissions.
Later, we will deny these rights by specifying which users can actually perform these actions.

Consultants: consultants can only view a subset of entries, we will set those as Read-Only.
They cannot add, edit or otherwise affect the information in any way.

ROLES CONFIGURATION

Now that the users are created, we will add the roles which we will later grant the permissions to.
We need to create the roles to assign users to them. There is no need to grant any privileges to
these roles.
· ServiceDesk

· HelpDesk

· Consultants

User and Security Management - Roles

ENTRIES CONFIGURATION

Now, everything is ready to grant or deny access to the roles.

· The ServiceDesk will have the permission to view and open all entries but will be able to edit only the entries in
the customer groups/folders.

· The HelpDesk will have the permission to view and open entries in the customer
groups/folders only and will not be able to edit them.

· The Consultants will have the permission to view and open entries in the Montreal folder only
but will not be able to edit it nor its child items.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 867

We will begin with the vault root level folders: Downhill Pro, Telemark and Windjammer.

The permission to view the Windjammer folder will be set for the ServiceDesk only since we
want them to be able to use its child entries. We don’t want the ServiceDesk to add or edit
anything. We will set the Add, Edit and Delete permissions to Never. Only the administrator will
be able to add or edit entries in the Windjammer folder.

Windjammer - Permissions

· View: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Add: Never; Only the administrator can add entries.

· Edit: Never; Only the administrator can edit entries.

· Delete: Never; Only the administrator can delete entries.

For Downhill Pro, we will grant permissions to the ServiceDesk and the HelpDesk.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

868 | Remote Desktop Manager

Downhill Pro - Permissions

· View: Custom; HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Edit: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Delete: Never; Only the administrator can delete entries.

We already have a good example of the flexibility of Remote Desktop Manager’s Security. A
ServiceDesk user can view and use all the entries in the Downhill Pro folder, even the credential
entries, but it will never be able to see any password since View Password is Disallowed (from
the vault root folder).

Next, for the Telemark folder, we will grant permissions to the ServiceDesk, the HelpDesk and
the Consultants. This is where things get complex. If we want the Consultants to be able to view
only the Montreal folder which is a child item of Telemark, we must grant to consultants the
permission to view the entire Telemark content. Then we will grant permissions on child items
only to the role that should have access to these items. This last step will deny the view
permission for the consultants on the child items.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 869

Telemark - Permissions

· View: Custom; Consultants, HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Edit: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Delete: Never; Only the administrator can delete entries.

Since we want the users to be able to use the credential entries, we will grant the ServiceDesk
and the HelpDesk the permission to view the Credentials folder. This way, the ServiceDesk and
HelpDesk will be able to use the entries in the folder without revealing the passwords. Therefore,
by specifying that only the HelpDesk and ServiceDesk have the View permission, we deny the
view access to any role or user that is not in the list of the permission.

The Add, Edit and Delete permissions can be left to Inherited since they inherit the settings
from the Telemark parent folder. The ServiceDesk is the only role that has been granted the Add
and Edit permission in the parent folder and the Delete permission inherits the Never setting.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

870 | Remote Desktop Manager

Telemark \Credentials - Permissions

· View: Custom; HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Inherited; ServiceDesk inherited from Telemark folder.

· Edit: Inherited; ServiceDesk inherited from Telemark folder.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Telemark folder.

We want the ServiceDesk to be able to use the Domain Admin credential entry as well but not
the HelpDesk. For this we must grant the View permission to the ServiceDesk. The
ServiceDesk will still be able to edit the credential entry but will never see the password. The
delete permission is set to Never.

The last step for the Telemark child items is to set the View permission to the ServiceDesk and
the HelpDesk on the Boston folder and leave every other permission of this folder to Default.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 871

This denies the Consultants to view the Boston folder. Now, the Consultants will be able to view
and open entries only in the Montreal folder.

Telemark \Boston - Permissions

Every time a new folder is added, the View permission must be set for
ServiceDesk and HelpDesk to hide the new folder and its content from the
Consultants.

No need to set any permissions on the Montreal folder, since they are inherited from the parent
folders.

Telemark \Montreal - Permissions

IN CONCLUSION

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

872 | Remote Desktop Manager

The permissions are now correctly set. Note that every entry added at vault root level will have no
security by default. This means they would be available for anyone, even the consultants. This
can be confirmed by looking at the screenshot below in which the entry Daily routine is
available for everyone. Here is what each user should see in the tree view:

Side by Side Tree View

You can further customize your permissions by using the Security Settings tab when editing
entries, or the Logs tab to add more traces of coming and goings. As always, great care must
be taken when granting permissions.

If you need more details on each permission, please consult our Common Settings –
Permissions topic.
9.2.2 Advanced Security

DESCRIPTION

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 873

The following scenario is designed for large enterprises. For a scenario more
suited for small enterprises, please consult our Simplified Security scenario.

While this example fits for large enterprises, please keep in mind that any privilege should be
granted only as necessary. Be careful when granting permissions to a user or a role.

Our fictional company, Windjammer, has three roles: HelpDesk, ServiceDesk, and Consultants.
There are two client companies: Downhill Pro and Telemark.

The following tree view structure represents entries which users have access to once all
permissions are set:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

874 | Remote Desktop Manager

USER CONFIGURATION

Here is an example of user configuration. To create users, navigate to Administration – Users

– Add User.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 875

In this scenario, all the options in the Privileges section of the User
Management are set to None.

Here we select the user type to give them the most basic rights (Add, Edit, and Delete).

ServiceDesk users are Restricted users. They have the Add and Edit rights. However, they
cannot add entries into the root folder.

User Management - ServiceDesk - Restricted User

HelpDesk users are Restricted Users as well. They only have the Add right. However, they
cannot add entries into the root folder.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

876 | Remote Desktop Manager

User Management - HelpDesk - Restricted User

Consultants are Read Only Users and can only view a subset of entries. They cannot add or
edit anything.

ROLE CONFIGURATION

Now that the users are created, we will add the roles which we will later grant the permissions to.
We need to create the roles and assign the respective user to each role. There is no need to
grant any privilege to these roles since they are mainly empty shells used to group multiple
users. This allows for controlling multiple users at once instead of granting permissions to each
users, one at a time.
· ServiceDesk

· HelpDesk

· Consultants

To add a role, click the Add Role button, enter a name for the role, and click Ok.

To assign users to a role, select a role and click the Assign roles button. Use the Is Member
check boxes to add users to the role.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 877

User and Security Management - Roles

ENTRY CONFIGURATION

Now, everything is ready to grant or deny access to the roles.

· All root folder permissions are set to Never. By inheritance, this denies the child items default access to
everyone.

· The ServiceDesk has the permission to view and open all entries but is able to edit only the
entries in the client's groups/folders.

· The HelpDesk has the permission to view and open entries in the client's groups/folders only
and is not able to edit them.

· The Consultants have the permission to view and open entries in the Montreal folder only but is
not able to edit it or its child items.

Root

As mentioned above, ALL root folder permissions are set to Never. This denies the default
access to other users.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

878 | Remote Desktop Manager

Root - Permissions

Windjammer Downhill Pro, and Telemark, the root level groups/folders

The permission to view the Windjammer folder is set for the ServiceDesk only since we want
them to be able to use the child entries. We don’t want the ServiceDesk to add, edit or delete
anything. We leave the Add, Edit and Delete permissions to Inherited so only the
administrators can perform these action on the Windjammer folder and its child items.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 879

Windjammer - Permissions
· View: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Add: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only the administrator can add entries.

· Edit: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only the administrator can edit entries.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only the administrator can delete entries.

For Downhill Pro, we grant permissions to the ServiceDesk and the HelpDesk.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

880 | Remote Desktop Manager

Downhill Pro - Permissions

· View: Custom; HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Edit: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only the administrator can delete entries.

We already have a good example of the flexibility of Remote Desktop Manager Security.
ServiceDesk and HelpDesk users can view and use all the entries in the Downhill Pro folder,
even the credential entries, but they will never see any passwords since the ServiceDesk and
HelpDesk users do not have the privilege to reveal passwords.

Next, for the Telemark folder, we grant permissions to the ServiceDesk, the HelpDesk and the
Consultants. This is where things get complex. If we want the Consultants to be able to view only
the Montreal folder, which is a child item of Telemark, we must grant Consultants the permission
to view the parent folder, thereby the entire Telemark content. Then we will grant permissions on
child items only to the role that should have access to these items. This last step will deny the
view permission for the Consultants on the child items.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 881

Telemark - Permissions
· View: Custom; Consultants, HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Edit: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only the administrator can delete entries.

Telemark Child Items

Since we want the users to be able to use the credential entries, we grant the ServiceDesk and
the HelpDesk the permission to view the Credentials folder. Therefore, the ServiceDesk and
HelpDesk are able to use the entries in the folder without revealing the passwords. By specifying
that only the HelpDesk and ServiceDesk have the View permission, we deny the view access to
any role or user that is not on the list of the permission.

The Add and Edit permissions are set to Never and the Delete permission can be left to
Inherited since it inherits the Never settings from the Root. Only the administrators can perform
these actions in groups/folders containing credentials.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

882 | Remote Desktop Manager

Telemark /Credentials - Permissions

· View: Custom; HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Never; Only administrators can add credential entries.

· Edit: Never; Only administrators can edit entries.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only administrators can delete entries.

We want the ServiceDesk to be able to use the Domain ladmin credential entry, but not the
HelpDesk. For this, we must grant the View permission to the ServiceDesk. The ServiceDesk is
still be able to use the credential entry but will never see the password.

Telemark \Credentials\Admin - Permissions

· View: Custom; ServiceDesk.

· Add: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only administrators can add credential entries.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 883

· Edit: Inherited; Never inherited from Root. Only administrators can edit credential entries.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Telemark\Credentials. Only administrators can

delete credential entries.

The last step for the Telemark child items is to set the View permission to the ServiceDesk and
the HelpDesk on the Boston folder and leave every other permissions of this folder to Inherited.
This denies the Consultants to view the Boston folder. Now, the Consultants are able to view and
open entries only in the Montreal folder.

Telemark \Boston - Permissions

· View: Custom; HelpDesk, ServiceDesk.

· Add: Inherited; ServiceDesk inherited from Telemark.

· Edit: Inherited; ServiceDesk inherited from Telemark.

· Delete: Inherited; Never inherited from Root.

Every time a new folder is added as a child of the Telemark folder, the View
permission must be set for ServiceDesk and/or HelpDesk to hide the new
folder and its content from the Consultants.

There is no need to set any permissions on the Montreal folder, since they all inherit values from
parent folders.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

884 | Remote Desktop Manager

Telemark \Montreal - Permissions

IN CONCLUSION

The permissions are now correctly set. Note that every entry added at root level are inheriting
from the Root as well. This means they would be available to admins only, unless their
permissions were modified. This can be confirmed by looking at the screenshot below, in which
the entry Daily routine is available for everyone (It's permissions have been changed to
Everyone. Here is what each user should see in the tree view:

Side by Side Tree View

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 885

You can further customize permissions by using the Security Settings tab when editing entries.
As always, great care must be taken when granting permissions.

If you need more details on each permission, please consult our Common Settings –
Permissions topic.
9.3 Legacy Information

DESCRIPTION

Describing such a flexible security system takes a lot of effort. This chapter contains valuable
information, but that may have been optimized by a newer topic.
9.3.1 Small to Medium Enterprise

DESCRIPTION

Here we will give you a security structure example that should be relevant for small to medium
business.

In this scenario, all the options in the Privileges section of the user properties will be left
disabled.

While this example might fit for many enterprises, please keep in mind that any privilege should
be granted only if needed. Be extremely careful when granting permissions to a user or a role.

This feature is only available when using an Advanced Data Source.

STEPS

Our fictional company Windjammer has a HelpDesk and a ServiceDesk department, an

administrator and a MontrealConsultant. We can also see two customers: Downhill Pro and
Telemark.

Here is a view of the data source tree view structure:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

886 | Remote Desktop Manager

Windjammer tree view structure

USER CONFIGURATIONS

Here is an example for user configurations.

The administrator:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 887

· When creating the user, select the Administrator in the dropdown menu to give it access to
everything.

Administrator Permission

The ServiceDesk:

· Add

· Edit

· Deny add entry in root folder

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

888 | Remote Desktop Manager

ServiceDesk Rights

The HelpDesk:

· Add

· Deny add entry in root folder

HelpDesk Rights

The MontrealConsultant has read-only access. He cannot see any password or entry detail.

· Leave everything disable for this user

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 889

MontrealConsultant Rights

ROLES CONFIGURATION

Now that the users are created we will add the roles to which we will later grant the permissions.
We just need the roles to assign users to them. No need to grant them any privileges.
· ServiceDesk
· HelpDesk
· MontrealConsultant

Roles

ENTRIES CONFIGURATION

Now everything is ready to grant or deny access to the roles.

· The ServiceDesk will have the permission to view and open all entries but will be able to edit only the entries in
the customer groups/folders.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

890 | Remote Desktop Manager

· The HelpDesk will have the permission to view and open entries on the customer groups/folders only and will not
be able to edit them.
· The MontrealConsultant will have the permission to view and open entries on the Montreal goup/folder only and
will not be able to edit it nor its child items.

We will begin with the root level groups/folders: Downhill Pro, Telemark and Windjammer.

For Downhill Pro, we will grant permissions to the ServiceDesk and the HelpDesk.

Downhill Pro - Permissions

· View: HelpDesk, ServiceDesk

· Add: ServiceDesk

· Edit: ServiceDesk

· Delete: Since no user have the delete right we can leave this permission to Default.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 891

We already have a good example of the flexibility of Remote Desktop Manager’s Security. A
ServiceDesk user can view and open all the entries in the Downhill Pro folder, even the
credential entry, but it will never be able to see any password.

Next for the Telemark folder, we will grant permissions to the ServiceDesk, the HelpDesk and
the MontrealConsultant. This is where things get complex. If we want the MontrealConsultant to
be able to view only the Montreal folder which is a child item of Telemark, we must grant to the
consultant the permission to view the entire Telemark content. Then we will grant permissions on
child items only to the role that should have access to these items. This last step will deny the
view permission for the consultant on the child items.

Telemark - Permissions

· View: HelpDesk, MontrealConsultant, ServiceDesk

· Add: ServiceDesk

· Edit: ServiceDesk

· Delete: Default

Since we want the users to be able to use the credential entries, we will grant the ServiceDesk
and the HelpDesk the permission to View the Credentials folder. This way they will be able to
use the entries without being able to view the passwords.

The Add and Edit permissions can be left to Default since the ServiceDesk is the only role that
has been granted these permissions in the parent folder.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

892 | Remote Desktop Manager

Telemark \Credentials - Permissions

· View: HelpDesk, ServiceDesk

· Add: Default

· Edit: Default

· Delete: Default

We want the ServiceDesk to be able to use the Domain Admin credential entry as well but not
the HelpDesk. For this we must grant the View permission to the ServiceDesk only and change
the Add and Edit permission to Never. The ServiceDesk will still be able to edit the credential
entry but will never see the password. If you prefer you can set the Edit permission to an
Administrator user or role to deny it to the ServiceDesk.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 893

Telemark \Credentials\Admin - Permissions

· View: ServiceDesk

· Add: Default (ServiceDesk)

· Edit: Default or Administrator user/role

· Delete: Default

The last step for the Telemark child items would be to set the View permission to the
ServiceDesk and the HelpDesk on the Boston folder and leave every other permission to
Default.

Now the MontrealConsultant will be able to view and open entries only in the Montreal folder.
Every time a new folder is added the View permission must be set for ServiceDesk and
HelpDesk to hide the new folder and its content from the consultant.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

894 | Remote Desktop Manager

Telemark \Boston - Permissions

· View: HelpDesk, ServiceDesk

· Add: Default (ServiceDesk)

· Edit: Default (ServiceDesk)

· Delete: Default

No need to set any permissions on the Montreal folder, since they are inherited from the parent
folders.

Telemark \Montreal - Permissions

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 895

Finally, the permission to view the Windjammer folder will be set for the ServiceDesk only since
we want them to be able to use its child entries. We don’t want them to add or edit anything so
we will set the Add and Edit permissions to the Administrator user/role.

Windjammer - Permissions

IN CONCLUSION

The permissions are now correctly set. Note that every entry added higher than the root level
groups/folders will have no security by default. This means they would be available for anyone,
even the consultant. This can be confirmed by looking at the screenshot below in which the entry
Daily routine is available for everyone. Here is what each user should see in the tree view:

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

896 | Remote Desktop Manager

Side by side tree views

You can go further with granting permissions by using the Security and Attachments tabs of
the permissions section. As always, a great care must be taken when granting permissions and
users should have very strict privileges.

If you need more details on each permission, please consult our Common Settings –
Permissions topic.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

PowerShell Scripting
Part X
898 | Remote Desktop Manager

10 PowerShell Scripting

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager supports Windows PowerShell. PowerShell is a powerful scripting

shell that lets administrators automate Remote Desktop Manager. They are provided in a
PowerShell module.

MANUALLY IMPORT THE POWERSHELL MODULE

The Remote Desktop Manager PowerShell Module, which is called

RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShellModule.dll, is located in the Remote Desktop Manager
installation directory. If you want to manually import the module in another application, for
instance PowerShell ISE, you can use the Import-Module CmdLet to load the module. Simply
use the following command:
Import-Module "${env:ProgramFiles(x86)}\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager\RemoteDesktopM

If the sample above does not work due to a different Remote Desktop Manager
installation directory, simply change ${env:ProgramFiles(x86)}
\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager for the correct application path.

COMMANDS

To list all cmdlet commands, please enter this command:

Get-Command -Module RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShellModule

For more information on those commands, use the following command:

get-help [command name]

Here's how to generate a text file with all the commands:

Get-Command -Module RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShellModule -Type Cmdlet `

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 899

| Sort-Object -Property Name `

| Format-Table -Property Name `
| out-file $env:temp\pshelp.txt

Get-Command -Module RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShellModule `

| ForEach-Object { get-help -name $_.Name -full } `
| out-file -append $env:temp\pshelp.txt

For further information on the subject, or if you have questions, join us on the forum and our team
will be glad to assist you.

10.1 Tips and tricks

DESCRIPTION

We are always asked for a full list of property names and sadly it is extremely hard to provide for
multiple reasons. The best way is still to look at the xml structure of an entry of the proper type to
identify the field names.

REVERSE ENGINEERING AN ENTRY'S STRUCTURE

1. Create an entry of the needed type, add only mandatory data at this time. Save the entry.
2. Right-click on the entry, then use Clipboard – Copy.
3. In the dialog that appears, switch to the Preview tab, copy the xml structure to a text file. This is the
BEFORE.
4. Manually perform the modification to the entry that you would like to automate using PowerShell, save the
entry.
5. Using Clipboard – Copy, save the modified xml to another file. This is the AFTER.
6. Compare the two files with your favorite difference tool, you will see the fields that have changed, and the values
that have been assigned. This indicates what your script should do.

ESSENTIAL INFORMATION ABOUT REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER'S

XML FORMAT

· To save space, most fields have a default value and when the field contains that default value, it simply does
NOT appear in the content. That is why you must watch out for new fields that appear in the AFTER content.

· Credentials are handled in a special way. They contain a GUID when they refer to other
entries, but they hold Well-Known static GUIDs when they use other mechanisms.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

900 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTING WELL KNOWN GUID

Default ""

Credential repository --- Prompt on "45479560-173E-435D-8848-C22F863FDC96"

connection ---

Embedded should be used for backwards compatibility only,

we prefer not to list it here.

Parent (only for sub-connections) "E2CC9029-CA3A-4308-BA54-

16D5029BC8ED"

Inherited "1310CF82-6FAB-4B7A-9EEA-
3E2E451CA2CF"

My personal credentials "9F3C3BCF-068A-4927-B996-

CA52154CAE3B"

None "B87B29D9-9239-4D7B-86D8-
9B53DCD3BA9F"

Private Vault, paired with "245A4245-48E7-4DF5-9C4C-11861D8E1F81"

PersonalConnectionID

Private Vault Search, paired with "88E4BE76-4C5B-4694-AA9C-

CredentialPrivateVaultsearchString D53B7E0FE0DC"

TIPS AND TRICKS

· Use the Set-RDMProperty cmdlet to set almost any value within the session object. To find
properties and paths, reverse engineer the session XML file format. Create a sample
session in RDM and export it using the right click menu Import/Export - Export Session
(.rdm).... Once exported, open the .rdm file with your favorite editor. Browse the XML
structure to find the property path and name.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 901

· Use the AddDataEntryKind method to set the data entry kind to Web (11 in this case). This
is not actually documented – it’s just a bonus tip that we use here at Devolutions all the
time!
10.2 PowerShell Samples

DESCRIPTION

These are the recipes to perform various tasks using our PowerShell cmdlets.
10.2.1 Creating an entry

DESCRIPTION

This sample creates an entry.

SAMPLE

$computerName = "wind10";
$theusername = "david";
$thedomain = "windjammer";
$thepassword = "123456";
$session = New-RDMSession -Host $computerName -Type "RDPConfigured" -Name $computerName;
Set-RDMSession -Session $session -Refresh;
Update-RDMUI;
Set-RDMSessionUsername -ID $session.ID $theusername;
Set-RDMSessionDomain -ID $session.ID $thedomain;
$pass = ConvertTo-SecureString $thepassword -asplaintext -force;
Set-RDMSessionPassword -ID $session.ID -Password $pass;

NOTES

The Update-RMUI call is to allow the entry to be physically saved and available for the rest of the
script. It may not be necessary for a types of data sources and our objective is to make it
unnecessary for this scenario.

CMDLETS REFERENCE

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

902 | Remote Desktop Manager

10.2.2 Creating Group Folder Structure from CSV file

DESCRIPTION

Please note that the CSV file must be encoded in UTF-8 to support special
characters.

This sample creates a Group Folder structure from a CSV file.

SAMPLE

$csv = Import-Csv "c:\YourFolder\GroupFolder.csv"

foreach ($csvEntry in $csv) {

$groupName = $csvEntry.Name

# Extract the group folder name

if ($groupName.Contains("\")) {
$groupName = $groupName.Substring($groupName.LastIndexOf("\"), $groupName.Length -
$groupName = $groupName.TrimStart("\")
}

# Create the group folder if it is not null, empty or fill in with space characters
if (![string]::IsNullOrWhiteSpace($groupName)) {
$session = New-RDMSession -Type "Group" -Name $groupName
$session.Group = $csvEntry.Name
Set-RDMSession $session
Write-Host "Group Folder $groupName created" -f Yellow
}
}

Update-RDMUI

NOTES

The CSV file must have only one column with the title set as Name.

The full path must be specified for each sub folder.

Here is an example of this CSV file :

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 903

CSV File example

CMDLETS REFERENCE

10.3 Batch Actions Samples

DESCRIPTION

The Batch Actions allow for a quick way to modify multiple sessions at once, but within Remote
Desktop Manager itself.

To be able to create your PowerShell script, you would need the name of the field(s) that you
would like to update. To retrieve the exact name of the field, right-click on your session and
select Clipboard – Copy. You can then paste the information in a text editor to retrieve the
name of the field(s) that you would like to modify via the Custom PowerShell Command.

Since they use the Powershell technology, we provides samples in this section because the
fields are the same when accessed through our Batch Actions or through Powershell.

SAMPLES

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

904 | Remote Desktop Manager

DISABLE ONLY SEND PASSWORD IN HTML PASSWORD FIELD OPTION IN WEB

BROWSER SESSIONS

$connection.Web.OnlySendPasswordInPasswordField = $false;
$RDM.Save ( ) ;

ENABLE VIEW URL EMBEDDED (INFORMATION ENTRIES)

$connection.DataEntry.ViewUrlDisplayMode = "Default";
$RDM.Save();

ViewUrlDisplayMode: "Default" = embedded, "External" = external.

OPEN URL (EXTERNAL) FOR WEB LOGIN (INFORMATION ENTRIES)

$connection.DataEntry.DefaultAction = "OpenUrlExternal";
$RDM.Save();

SSH SHELL BATCH EDIT (SESSION TYPE SETTINGS)

$connection.Terminal.MaxScrollbackLines = 2000;

$connection.Terminal.AlwaysAcceptFingerprint = $true;

$connection.Terminal.EnableLogging = $true;
$connection.Terminal.LogPath = '$LOGPATH$\$NAME$_$DATE_TEXT_ISO$_$TIME_TEXT_ISO$.log'
$connection.Terminal.LogMode = 1;
$connection.Terminal.LogOverwriteMode = 0;
$RDM.Save();

Here are some values that you can change for this command;

LogPath: your path between ' ' (single quotes). You can also use variables. i.e. %USERPROFILE%, $NAME$, etc.
In this example $LOGPATH$ is a custom variable defined in the Data Source Settings (System Settings) - Custom
Variables
LogMode: 1 = Printable Output, 0 = Event
TerminalLogOverwriteMode: 0 = default, 1 = prompt, 2 = append, 3 = overwrite
Here's also other options that you can modify;

$connection.Terminal.BellMode = 'Visual'
$connection.Terminal.CloseOnDisconnect = $false

CONVERT WEB BROWSER SESSIONS INTO LOGMEIN SESSIONS

$connection.ConnectionType = 'LogMeIn';
$connection.ConnectionSubType = '' ;
$connection.LogMeIn.Url = $connection.WebBrowserUrl;
$RDM.Save();

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 905

Enable the "Hide script errors in all your LogMeIn sessions."

$connection.LogMeIn.ScriptErrorsSuppressed = $true;
$RDM.Save();

Hide navigation bar.

$connection.LogMeIn.ShowUrl = $false;
$RDM.Save();

Change the Web Browser Application.

$connection.LogMeIn.WebBrowserApplication = "GoogleChrome";
$RDM.Save();

Enable the Sandbox Process.

$connection.LogMeIn.SandboxProcess = $true;
$RDM.Save();

Change the URL.

$connection.LogMeIn.Url = " ";
$RDM.Save();

Change the Portal Login field.

$connection.LogMeIn.DashboardHostUrl = " ";

$RDM.Save();

Change Username & Password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

906 | Remote Desktop Manager

Please run these two one at a time

Host;

$connection.LogMeIn.UserName = " ";

$RDM.Save();
$connection.LogMeIn.SafePassword = " ";
$RDM.Save();

Portal;

$connection.LogMeIn. DashboardEmail = " ";

$RDM.Save();
$connection.LogMeIn. SafePasswordDashboard = " ";
$RDM.Save();

CHANGE A CUSTOM FIELD VALUE WITHOUT CHANGING THE DATA

$connection.MetaInformation.CustomField3Title = "MyField"
$RDM.Save();

Please note that you would need to change "MyField" for the value that you want to replace Custom field #3 with.

BULK UPDATE FQDN INFO TO SESSIONS.

$connection.host = $Connection.name + ".mydomain.com"

$RDM.Save();

BULK CHANGE RECORDING FIELD FOR PUTTY SESSIONS

$connection.Putty.RecordingMode = 1;
$connection.Putty.RecordingFileName = "C:\path\to\your\file.log"
$RDM.Save();

CHANGE THE COMPUTER FIELD OF AN RDP SESSION

$connection.Url = " ";

$RDM.Save();

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 907

ENCODING

$connection.Putty.TelnetEncoding = "UTF-8";
$RDM.Save();

CHANGE THE EXPIRATION DATE OF AN RDP SESSION

The date must be specified using the ISO8601 format.

$connection.MetaInformation.Expiration = "2018-12-25T00:00:00-05:00";
$RDM.Save();

CHANGE THE EXPIRATION DATE OF AN RDP SESSION WITH A RELATIVE DATE

Use any date time operator supported by PowerShell.

$connection.MetaInformation.Expiration = (Get-Date).AddMonths(6);
$RDM.Save();

MODIFY PAGE TAB TITLE IN UI

$connection.TabTitle = '$COMPANY_NAME$ - $NAME$';

$RDM.Save();

CLEAR KEYWORDS IN SESSION

$connection.MetaInformation.Keywords = "";
$RDM.Save();

CHANGE HISTORY MAX LINES FOR SSH SHELL (REBEX)

$connection.Putty.HistoryMaxLength = 2000;
$RDM.Save();

CONVERT COMMAND LINE TOOL TO A COMMAND LINE SESSION

$connection.ConnectionType = 3;
$RDM.Save();

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

908 | Remote Desktop Manager

CHANGE KEYBOARD HOOK FOR AN RDP SESSION

$connection.KeyboardHook = "OnTheRemoteComputer";
$RDM.Save();

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Knowledge Base
Part XI
910 | Remote Desktop Manager

11 Knowledge Base

11.1 Protocols and application

11.1.1 Remote Desktop Manager
11.1.1.1 Add a w eb link in Macros/Scripts/Tools Session

DESCRIPTION

Macros/Scripts/Tools sessions can be used to open web links in Remote Desktop Manager.

CREATE THE EMBEDDED WEB LINK

1. Create a shared web session Template.

2. Once the template is created, add a new entry Macros/Scripts/Tools – Template.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 911

3. Assign the new template to your newly created Macros/Scripts/Tools session using the ellipsis button.

Make sure to check the Keep template host option.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

912 | Remote Desktop Manager

11.1.1.2 Configure VPN for multiple sessions

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager automates opening a VPN when launching a remote session. This
configuration is well suited to situations where you need one VPN for a group of servers at a
remote location. This procedure sets the VPN configurations on the folder and the entries inherit
the settings.

STEPS

Before following the steps below, create a VPN entry and remote session entries, then place
these entries in a folder. For more information about VPN entries, consult the VPN topic.

CONFIGURE THE VPN SETTINGS ON THE FOLDER ENTRY

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 913

1. Select the folder and open its Properties then select VPN/SSH/Gateway from the menu on
the left.

Folder properties - VPN/SSH/Gateway

2. In the Open list, select how the VPN opens when you launch a remote session. We
recommend choosing Connect if unable to ping/scan on the folder, later we'll set
Inherited for each session entry.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None VPN does not open when the session is opened.

Always connect VPN opens when the session is opened.

Manual VPN requires user to manually activate the VPN before opening
the session.

Connect if unable to Remote Desktop Manager tests if the host responds, if not the
ping/scan VPN opens.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

914 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Inherited VPN inherits the settings.

Ask for confirmation VPN prompts for confirmation before opening.

Connect if network Remote Desktop Manager tests if network adapter is installed

adapter not found and active, if not the VPN opens.

Prompt if unable to Tests if the host responds, if not VPN prompts for confirmation
ping/scan before opening.

3. In the Close list, select how the VPN closes at the end of a remote session. We recommend
On session close.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

On session close VPN closes automatically when the session is closed.

Manually Later VPN requires user to manually close the VPN entry when
finished.

Confirm disconnect VPN prompts to close the VPN when session is closed.

4. Create a VPN group so the VPN only closes when the last session in the VPN group is
closed.

4.1 Click the plus sign to add a new VPN group, then enter a group name.

5. In the Type list, click Session.

6. Click the Settings tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 915

Folder Properties - VPN/SSH/Gateway - Settings

7. In the Session list, select the VPN entry you created.

PERFORM A BATCH EDIT TO CONFIGURE THE SESSION ENTRIES

1. Select the session entries in the folder.

2. On the Edit tab, click Batch Edit, then select Edit Entries (General Settings). Batch Edit
is also available in the right-click context menu.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

916 | Remote Desktop Manager

Batch Edit - Edit Entries (General Settings)

3. On VPN/SSH/Gateway, select Override VPN box.

Batch Edit - VPN/SSH/Gateway

4. Select Inherited in the Open list. It will set all the General options to Inherited.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 917

SETTINGS FOR SPECIFIC SITUATIONS

There are many options to accommodate a range of VPN types. Below are two common
situations and options to make using the VPN more efficient.

VPN/SSH/Gateway - Advanced

1. You lose connection to the data source when the VPN is active.

Automate going offline when the VPN opens.

Select Go Offline on connection and Go Online on disconnect check boxes.

2. The VPN is slow to connect.

You can adjust the time Remote Desktop Manager waits for the VPN to open.

In the sec box, enter the a time in seconds.

-1 sec is the default time (5 seconds). Change the default time for all VPN entries in File –
Options – Types – VPN – VPN default pause.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

918 | Remote Desktop Manager

11.1.1.3 Import Credentials From Keepass

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager imports credentials from Keepass. It is a simple way to build your
data. The imported information can be converted into three types of entry:
Username/Password and Website. The entries include credentials, url addresses and notes.

HOW TO IMPORT VARIOUS ENTRIES

Step-by-step instructions to import credentials and websites from Keepass

PROCEDURE

EXPORT ENTRIES FROM KEEPASS

1. In the File menu, click Export.

Keepass - File - Export

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 919

2. Export Data to an external file. RDM supports two file types for KeePass: XML and CSV. An
XML file will retain the folder structure from KeePass.

a) Choose desired file type: KeePass CSV (1.x) or KeePass XML (2.x)

b) Select path to save the exported file.

KeePass - Export Data

IMPORT DATA INTO REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

1. The data is imported into the currently selected folder.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

920 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Choose the file type to import in File – Import.

2.1 To import an xml file, choose Import from Session.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 921

File – Import from Session (XML)

2.2 To import a csv file, choose Import from Login.

File - Import from Login (CSV)

3. Choose an entry type. All imported entries are converted to this type.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

922 | Remote Desktop Manager

Entry Type - Imported Data

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Credentials Includes username, password and domain.

Website Includes username, password, and website address.

Good choice for website information and can be used
with Devolutions Web Login. Has more settings for
default web browser, display, credentials and security
questions.

4. Select the KeePass exported file in the file explorer and click Open.

5. Choose the entries you want to import.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 923

Import entries from KeePass

6. The imported entries are ready to use.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

924 | Remote Desktop Manager

Imported KeePass entries in Remote Desk top Manager

11.1.1.4 Import and Ex port

DESCRIPTION

To simplify deployment for multiple users, it is possible to import and export data sources,
entries, and even the application's configuration. Configure the application once, with data
sources, entries, and options. Export any of these configurations, then import them in another
Remote Desktop Manager instance.

Instead of exporting/importing data sources and options separately, it is

possible to create a custom installer. Our Custom Installer Service replicates
the configuration of a Remote Desktop Manager instance.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 925

HOW TO EXPORT ENTRIES FROM RDM

Export entries from RDM and into My Private Vault DPS

DATA SOURCES

Only the data source configuration is exported. The resulting .rdd file does not contain the
database content. It contains only the configuration used to connect to the database. From File –
Data Sources, click on the Export Data Source Configuration... button, then save the
*.rdd file on your computer.

Data Sources - Import and Export

To import the data source in another Remote Desktop Manager instance, use File – Data
Sources, and click on the Import Data Source Configuration button.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

926 | Remote Desktop Manager

A locked data source can be exported and imported, but the content will be
locked unless a password is entered when the data source is selected. See Lock
Data Source for more information.

ENTRIES

Entries configuration can be exported to save the time of creating the same set of entries for
multiple users. There are many ways of exporting entries. The only formats allowed to import
entries previously exported from Remote Desktop Manager are .rdm, and .xml.

Export a set of entries:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Export Select one entry or more, then right-click the selection. In the context menu, under
Selection Export, select Export Selection (.rdm)...

Export Select one entry or more, then right-click the selection. In the context menu,
Special under Export – Export Special, select the desired export format.

Export as Select one RDP entry, then right-click the selection. In the context menu,
RDP under Export, select Export Entry as Remote Desktop File (.rdp)...

Export all entries:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Export All Right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane. In the context menu, under Export, select
Entries Export All Entries (.rdm)...

Export Right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane. In the context menu, under
Special Export – Export Special, select the desired export format.

Export All Right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane. In the context menu, under
Host Export, select Export All Hosts List (.csv)...

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 927

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Export All Right-click an entry in the Navigation Pane. In the context menu, under
Documents Export – Export Special, select Export All Documents...

The functionalities for exporting all entries are also available in the File – Export Menu.

File - Export

APPLICATION CONFIGURATION

The application's configuration can be exported to replicate the configuration in other Remote
Desktop Manager instances.

Use File – Options – Export Options, and save the RemoteDesktopManager.cfg file on your
computer.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

928 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Options - Export Options

To import the configuration, use File - Options - Import Options, and select the exported
RemoteDesktopManager.cfg. You can also copy the file to the installation directory of another
Remote Desktop Manager instance.
11.1.1.5 Multiple Types of Connections to a single computer

DESCRIPTION

You have hosts for which you need to use many different remote access technologies (ex: RDP,
SSH, Web, etc).

There are three solutions to this scenario:

1. Ad-hoc Launch with a Template
2. Folders and Dynamic Variables
3. Host with Templates
11.1.1.5.1 Ad-hoc Launch w ith a Template

DESCRIPTION

This method uses a dashboard command that is available on all sessions. It's a good fit for a
scenario where you usually connect with a specific technology, but occasionally need to use
another.

SETTINGS

1. Create a local or database template in File – Templates – Templates.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 929

Templates

Create Template

2. In the computer field, use the $HOST$ variable and click on OK.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

930 | Remote Desktop Manager

Default Template

3. In the case that you need to launch a session using a template, click on Open with a
Template in the Dashboard and select the appropriate template

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 931

Open with a Template

11.1.1.5.2 Folders and Dynamic Variables

DESCRIPTION

In Remote Desktop Manager, you can use Folder entries to organize your sessions in the
application. It is possible to store information at the top level folder and use Variables in the child
entries to resolve information that you have saved in the parent folder.

SETTINGS

1. Create a Company, Database, Device, Domain, Identity, Printer, Server, Site, Software or
Workstation folder in the Navigation Pane.

2. Enter information in Folder properties. Only include a password if you want to put password
protection on the folder.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

932 | Remote Desktop Manager

Folder Properties

3. In the child sessions, use the appropriate Variables to retrieve the information that is saved at
the folder level

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 933

Variables
11.1.1.5.3 Host w ith Templates

DESCRIPTION

A Host entry will let you use templates in order to connect to the host. It will prompt you to choose
which template to use to launch the host.

SETTINGS

1. Create one or multiple Templates via the File – Templates – Templates menu. You may
need to use Variables like $HOST$ for the host name as well as $USERNAME$ or
$PASSWORD$ for the username and password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

934 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Create a host entry and click on the Action tab

Host Entry

3. Press the Select Templates button and select the templates that you would like to add to
your Host session

4. The templates will now be added to your host session

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 935

Select Templates

5. Launch your Host session. You will be prompt to select the appropriate template to launch the
session

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

936 | Remote Desktop Manager

Open Host Session

11.1.1.6 Pw ned Passw ord Check

DESCRIPTION

In the InfoSec world, a pwned password is a password that has been exposed in data breaches
(i.e. they are owned/pwned by hackers).

Using a pwned password significantly increases the chances of being the victim of a data
breach. Pwned Check leverages Troy Hunt’s Pnwed Passwords API and automatically checks
to see if a password that you’re using (or are thinking of using) has been pwned by hackers. If it
has, you will be notifiied and can be proactive and choose something else to stay out of harm’s
way. There are over half a billion passwords in the Pwned Passwords database.

PWNED PASSWORD CHECK EXPLAINER VIDEO

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 937

HOW TO SET UP THE PWNED PASSWORD CHECK

In existing databases, Pwned check is not turned on automatically.

1. On the Administration tab, open Data Source Settings (System Settings) – Password
Validation.

2. Choose Enabled from the list.

Administration - System Settings - Password Validation

Remote Desktop Manager analyzes a password when you save an entry. A message is
displayed when a password is found in the Pwned Passwords database. If you see this window
you should change your password immediately. Remember to change it in Remote Desktop
Manager and the actual account.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

938 | Remote Desktop Manager

Warning to change a password that was included in a data breach

THE BACK END

Rest assured Remote Desktop Manager does NOT send your passwords to Pwned Passwords.

Here is how it works:

Pwned Password Check uses k-Anonymity.

Remote Desktop Manager only sends the first five characters of the SHA-1 password hast to the
API.

The API sends back a list of every password hash that matches the first five characters of the
hash. The API only sends back the second part of the hash.

Remote Desktop Manager compares the hashes on the list to the password hash for the
password you want to use.

If there is a match you receive a warning.

CHOOSE STRONGER PASSWORDS

Remote Desktop Manager makes it easy to make strong passwords. The built-in Password
Generator creates secure passwords, following your specifications for password length and
complexity. The password generator is available on every entry beside the field where you enter
a password.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 939

Password Generator is found on most entry where you include a password

Remote Desktop Manager also has a Password Analyzer that provides feedback on all your
passwords. A rating is included on the entry. It uses Zxcvbn to evaluate passwords.

You can also create a report of all your passwords by using the Password Analyzer in the
Tools tab.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

940 | Remote Desktop Manager

Tools - Password Analyzer

11.1.1.7 Vaults Overview

Vaults are containers that divide the data source into multiple compartments.

We recommend using Vaults for improved organization and security.Vaults also help
performance as they limit the amount of entries that load at once.

Vaults are available with Advanced Data Sources: Devolutions Password Server, SQL Azure,
Maria DB, MySQL and SQL server.

This feature underwent a change of name, as Vaults were called Repositories

before Remote Desktop Manager 2019.

This article covers:

· Create Vaults
· Move entries to different Vaults
· Navigate between Vaults
· Role-based security with Vaults
· Vaults shortcuts

SETUP AND USE VAULTS IN REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 941

Get started with Vaults: create, manage, mak e shortcuts

CREATE A VAULT

We recommend creating a different Vault for each customer or department.

1. On the Administration tab, click Vaults.

Administration –Vaults

2. Click Add Vault.

Vaults – Add Vault

3. Enter a Name and Description (optional). The ID is generated automatically.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

942 | Remote Desktop Manager

Vault Management

Navigate between Vaults

MOVE BETWEEN VAULTS

1. In the Navigation Pane, use the Vault list to move between Vaults. Change the location of
the Vault list in File – Options – User Interface – Vault Location.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 943

Navigation Pane – Vault selector

MOVE ENTRIES TO A DIFFERENT VAULT

1. Start in the Vaults you want to transfer repositories out of.

2. On the Edit tab, click Move to Vault.

Edit - Move to Vaults

3. Select the repository you want to move the entries to, and click Next.

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

944 | Remote Desktop Manager

Move to Vaults

4. Choose the entries you want to transfer to the new repository, and click Transfer.

Select the entries you want to transfer

© 2020 Devolutions inc.

Contents | 945

MANAGE ROLE-BASED SECURITY BY VAULT

Vaults simplify user management because Active Directory groups define who has access to a
Vaults. These Active Directory groups are known as Roles in Remote Desktop Manager. In
general, most roles have access to a couple Vaults, while some groups will only have access to
one Vaults. Limiting access to Vaults minimizes the need to set permissions on lower-level
folders.

How to assign roles to a Vault and the permissions you need to k eep in mind

GIVING ROLES ACCESS TO A VAULT

1. On the Administration tab, then click Vaults.

Administration –Vaults

2. On the User and Security Management window, choose the Vaults, then click Assign
Roles.

User and Security Management - Vaults - Assign Roles

3. Choose which roles have access to the Vaults: select the Is Member box.

946 | Remote Desktop Manager

Repository Assignment

VAULTS SHORTCUTS

Navigate between vaults with the Vault List or vaults shortcuts.

We recommend administrators and users who have access to multiple vaults create vaults
shortcuts to navigate between vaults.

If you use vaults shortcuts, the vault root should only contain folders. Do not save entries at the
vault root.

The main (default) vault contains shortcuts to other vaults.

Contents | 947

Main (Default) Vaults with Vaults Shortcuts

Each Vault contains a shortcut that returns the user to the main Vault.

Downhill Pro Vault with Shortcut Back to Main Vault

CREATE A VAULT SHORTCUT

1. On the Edit tab, click New Entry.

948 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Click Miscellaneous and then select Vault (Shortcut).

Add New Entry - Miscellaneous - Vault (Shortcut)

3. In the Name box, enter the name of the Vault you are creating a shortcut to. Save the shortcut
in a folder.

4. To find the Vaults ID, click the ellipses button. Enter a folder name (case sensitive) to create
a shortcut to a specific folder.

Vault (Shortcut) - Properties

Contents | 949

5. Select the destination Vault.

Select Vault

We recommend removing the data source drop-down list when using Vault shortcuts. Then the
Vaults list can be moved above the Navigation Pane.

Remove Data Source Box and Options

Both options are configured in File – Options – User Interface.

950 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Options - User Interface

11.1.1.8 Quick Connect

Via the quick connect toolbar, you can open an ad-hoc session by specifying the host and
session type. It's also possible to create a template and establish the connection with your
template. Configure the settings in the template, Remote Desktop Manager will apply them when
connecting to the specified host.

SETTINGS

The control is composed of multiple sub controls.

Quick Connect Toolbar

Listing network discoverable devices is a lengthy operation.

Contents | 951

The ellipsis button will list network discoverable computer to allow you to select computer from
the list.

USING TEMPLATES

Quick Connect Type Selection

Remote Desktop Manager offers default templates to connect with the Quick Connect feature,
but it is possible to use custom templates. In that case, the host field in the template must be set
to the $QUICK_CONNECT$ variable. When they are created, custom templates are
automatically added at the bottom of the type list.
11.1.1.8.1 Allow Range Open

This feature allows to open multiple machine with the quick connect in Remote Desktop
Manager

Check the option Allow range open in File-Options-User Interface-Quick Connect

952 | Remote Desktop Manager

Allow Range Open

This range function requires that a sequenced number is at the end of the same
name for all the machine like this list: devolutions08, devolutions09,
devolutions10.

Use this syntax in Quick Connect: MachineNameX~Y

For example: to open the machines devolutions3, devolutions4 and devolutions5 you would write
devolutions3~5.
11.1.1.9 Send application logs

DESCRIPTION

The Devolutions team will need your application logs in some cases to help recreate a specific
issue.

Contents | 953

SENDING YOUR APPLICATION LOGS

1. Before sending them, please set the Debug Level to 1 by clicking on the Profiler in the
Help tab.

Profiler

Profiler- Debug Only

2. After, click on Application Logs.

954 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. Go to the Report tab, and click on Send to Support.

4. Fill your contact information along with a complete explanation on the issue and press OK.

Contents | 955

11.1.1.10 Send error report

DESCRIPTION

An error report is created when an application error occurs in Remote Desktop Manager. You
can send that error report to the Devolutions support team to help reproduce the issue more
easily.

When sending your error report please make sure to include as many details as
possible in the message section to ensure that our support team reproduces
the issue with ease.

956 | Remote Desktop Manager

SEND AN ERROR REPORT

When an error dialog appear in Remote Desktop Manager follow these steps to send it to the
support team.

1. Press the Send Error Report button.

2. Fill in your contact information along with a detailed explanation on the issue and press OK.

Contents | 957

11.1.1.10.1 Send configuration file

DESCRIPTION

In some cases, the Devolutions team will need your configuration file to help reproduce a
particular issue.

SEND YOUR CONFIGURATION FILE

1. Press the Windows key + R.

2. Type "% localappdata% " in the Run window and press OK.

958 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. In the folder, locate the RemoteDesk topManager.cfg file.

4. Please send us the file securely via ShareFile.

11.1.1.11 Upgrade from Free Edition to Enterprise Edition

DESCRIPTION

These steps will help you get through the process of upgrading from the Free Edition of Remote
Desktop Manager to the Enterprise Edition.

Contents | 959

STEPS

The Enterprise edition allows for a 30-day trial. Since both editions are totally
independent from each other and can be operated side-by-side, this means
that you can perform this procedure and still benefit of a trial for the Enterprise
Edition features prior to making your decision.

File based data sources (XML, SQLite, etc) are by default stored in the
configuration folder. As a precaution, go through each data source in File -
Data sources and have a look at the local path (if any). Any file that is in the
configuration folder must be copied manually.

The paths mentioned in this topic are for those that have installed using the
default settings. The best way to locate your configuration folder is to use File -
Options - Advanced, in this form you will find an hyperlink near the bottom.
This opens your configuration folder. Please ensure you close the application
before going further.

1. Install Remote Desktop Manager Enterprise edition. The download location is

http://remotedesktopmanager.com/Home/Download.

2. Launch the Enterprise Edition once to have its own configuration folder initialized, then close
it.

3. Open %localappdata%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManagerFree. You will copy files to

%localappdata%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager so you may wish to open another
explorer window to that location.

4. Copy the following files to the RemoteDesktopManager folder:

RemoteDesktopManagerFree.cfg
RemoteDesktopManagerFree.ext
Connections.db. (default name of the Local Data Source)
Any and ALL other data source files identified in the Data sources list

5. Rename the copied file to remove the Free suffix.:

RemoteDesktopManagerFree.cfg to RemoteDesktopManager.cfg
RemoteDesktopManagerFree.ext to RemoteDesktopManager.ext

960 | Remote Desktop Manager

AppData Folder

Run the Enterprise edition and ensure all of your data sources are available.

Uninstall the Free edition when you are sure that everything is working as expected.
11.1.1.12 Understand Remote Desktop Manager licensing

DESCRIPTION

In the context of licensing, a user is an individual that uses Remote Desktop

Manager. Credentials that are stored within Remote Desktop Manager have no
impact on licensing.

Licenses are calculated per user, not per installation. There is no limitation on
installing Remote Desktop Manager (laptop, desktop, home computer, etc), as
long as you hold the proper number of licenses for each individual that connect to
your system.

Contents | 961

The licenses are for use by the customer that appears on the invoice. You
cannot share your license with a sub-contractor or, in the case of a service
provider, to one's customers. This applies even if you grant them access to a
shared data source.

Four types of licenses are available to purchase, depending on the number of users:
· User license

· Site license

· Country license

· Global license

USER LICENSE

These licenses are purchased individually. There must be a separate license for each individual
who will have access to the software. This is akin to a named user license.

SITE LICENSE

This license offers unlimited users on the same site (location). Remote workers who are based
in another office are NOT included. A location is a workplace. If a user must work from another
address, they need another another license. Please contact [email protected] to describe
your scenario and get help on which license to purchase.

COUNTRY LICENSE

This license offers unlimited uses within a specified country. One license serial is delivered,
which allows unlimited users at unlimited locations within the same country. Please contact
[email protected] to get a quote.

GLOBAL LICENSE

This license offers unlimited uses, worldwide. One license is delivered, which can be used for an
unlimited amount of users at unlimited location around the world. Please contact
[email protected] to get a quote.

962 | Remote Desktop Manager

11.1.1.13 Web protocol handler

DESCRIPTION

A Web Protocol Handler (also called URL Protocol Handler) has been implemented in
Remote Desktop Manager to be able to launch a session directly from HTML content. This can
be very useful to call Remote Desktop Manager from a Configuration Management Database
(CMDB) or even a Document Management System (DMS).

Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox execute the URL by clicking on it or by

pressing Enter. However, with some other web browser such as Google Chrome,
executing the URL normally results in a web search. These browsers may require
to do Ctrl + Click or Ctrl + Enter to execute the URL.

SCENARIOS

There are two ways of using the handler:

1. Generate a URL for a session (basically every entry type that connects to a remote device using a protocol).

2. Generate a URL for a template, this will allow you to specify the host name of the device you
wish to connect to, but it will take the settings of the template.

PARAMETERS

Here are the parameters used to build a protocol handler URL. These are for advanced
scenarios. Only the DataSource and Session IDs are enough to open a connection.

Please note that the DataSource parameter overrides the data source which
the application connects to at start-up. This applies even if the user is prompted
for a data source to connect to when the application starts.

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

DataSource Indicate the data source or the database ID.

Find them in the IDs section of the Advanced properties of an entry.

Contents | 963

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

A data source ID is unique per installation, which makes the URL

usable only by the workstation where the data source has been created.
By default Remote Desktop Manager generates the URL with the
database ID.

Session Indicate the ID of a session. Find it in the Session ID field in the

Advanced properties of a session.

Template Indicate the ID of the template of an entry. The template parameter

retrieves some properties of a template and uses them against the
session parameter. The host parameter is required when using the
template parameter.

Host Indicate the hostname or IP address of the remote device. Used along
with the template parameter, or to override the host property of the
session parameter.

Port Indicate the port to use. Used to override the port property of the
session or template parameter.

Username Indicate the username to use. Used to override the username property
of the session or template parameter.

Password Indicate the password to use. Used to override the password property
of the session or template parameter.

Domain Indicate the domain to use. Used to override the domain property of
the session or template parameter.

Title Indicate the title of the tab when a session is launched using the
Embedded (tabbed) display mode. This can be very useful when
several sessions are launched at the same time.

Filter Populate the Search field.

964 | Remote Desktop Manager

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Tabpage Give the focus to a tab in the dashboard after the application has
completed the startup procedure. Available only with the Select action.
The possible tabs are:
· Overview

· Documentation

· Macros/Scripts/Tools

· Management Tools

· Information

· Attachments

· Logs

· Recordings

ACTIONS

· Open: open the specified connection.

· Find: find sessions by host.

· Edit: edit the specified connection.

· View: view the password of the specified entry.

· OpenWithMacro: open the specified with a macro.

· Select: select a connection in the Navigation Pane (allows to select a tab in the dashboard as
well).

SYNTAX

Syntax:
rdm://<action>?<parameter1>=<value>[&<parameter2>=<value>]

The base syntax of the protocol handler requires the application protocol, an action and at
least one parameter to work with.

There are three rules to follow when constructing an URL for the protocol handler:

Contents | 965

· The action is separated from the parameters with a question mark (?).

· Each parameter is assigned a value by using an equal sign (=).

· Parameter/Value pairs are separated with an ampersand (&).

EXAMPLES

OPEN REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER WITH THE SEARCH/FILTER FIELD

POPULATED AND THE FOCUS ON THE DASHBOARD

rdm://open?Filter=RDP&Tabpage=Dashboard

OPEN AN RDP SESSION

1. In the Advanced section of an entry properties, click on the Create Web Url button.

Create Web Url

966 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. The Url is stored in the clipboard.

Url copied to clipboard

3. Paste (Ctrl+V) this Url in any application able to handle application protocols. It can be in a
web page, a web browser address bar, or even a supported chat application. The protocol
handler launches Remote Desktop Manager if it is closed, then perform the requested
action with the provided parameters.
11.1.1.14 Create a saved search w ith Smart Folders

DESCRIPTION

Smart folders are saved searches. You can search by entry name and/or tag. The smart folder
lists search results in the dashboard. You can open and edit entries directly from the smart
folder. The folder updates dynamically; each time you open the folder it searches.

ADD A SMART FOLDER

1. Click New Entry.

2. Click Miscellaneous, then select Smart Folder.

3. Enter the name for the smart folder. This is how the smart folder name will appear in the
Navigation Pane. It is not for the search terms.

4. Choose the location.

5. Enter a search term and/or a tag.

To search for multiple terms, use:
"&&" for "and"
"||" for "or"

To select tags, click more options and a tag.

Contents | 967

USE A SMART FOLDER

1. Select the folder in the Navigation Pane.

2. You can work with an entry directly from the search results.
Double-click to open an entry.
Right-click to access actions in the context menu (e.g. View password or Select in dashboard).

The smart folder can be edited. It has the same settings as other entries.
11.1.1.15 Add an RDP entry

DESCRIPTION

RDP (Microsoft Remote Desktop) and other tools that open remote connections are saved as
Session entries Remote Desktop Manager. The entries store information about the host,
credentials, local resources, and VPN, so users can open a session with one click. You can also
set permissions, configure security settings and customize logs.

Here are the basics to get you started.

1. On the Edit tab, click New Entry.
2. Choose RDP (Microsoft Remote Desktop).

3. Enter a Name for the session.

4. Choose a Display mode, the most common are:
· Embedded (tabbed) opens a new tab in Remote Desktop Manager.
· External opens in the external application.
5. Choose the credentials to use.
To use credentials you have saved as a separate entry, choose Credential repository and select the
entry from the list.
Select Default if you want to enter the credentials directly in the entry.
6. Enter the Host address.

OPEN A RDP SESSION

Click Open Session on the Home tab or Dashboard

You can open more than one session at once. With embedded sessions you can switch
between the tabs or monitor connections simultaneously: use thumbnail view or rearrange open
sessions with split screen.

968 | Remote Desktop Manager

11.1.1.16 Quick Start

DESCRIPTION

Welcome to Remote Desktop Manager! Here are three steps to quickly set up Remote Desktop
Manager and start testing the features.

· About the data source

· Import credentials from Keepass (or other sources)

· Save a RDP session

If you want to learn more, see our online help.

11.1.1.16.1 About the data source

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager comes with a local SQL Lite data source. It is enough to quickly test
out remote connections (e.g. SSH or Microsoft Remote Desktop) and other types of entries.

To try role-based access control, you need to add an advanced source.

To add a new data source, click File – Data Sources.

LEARN MORE

Choose a data source

11.1.1.16.2 Import credentials

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager imports credentials from 16 third-party applications. It is an efficient

way to build your data. The imported information can be converted into different types of entry
(e.g. username/password, Login (account), and Website).

You can use credential entries to open remote connections, saved as sessions in Remote
Desktop Manager. Credential repositories link one credential or a list of credentials with a
session.

Contents | 969

To see the types of information you can import, go to File – Import.

LEARN MORE

Watch this video for step-by-step instructions: Import credentials from KeePass.

Read how to import credentials in the online help.

11.1.1.16.3 Create a RDP session

DESCRIPTION

When it comes to entries, there are a lot of different options. Here's a quick way to set up an
RDP (Microsoft Remote Desktop) entry:

1. Name the entry

2. Enter the Host address

3. Choose Credential repository and link a credential entry with this session. You can also
enter the username and password directly in the entry by choosing Default.

970 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP (Microsoft Remote Desk top) Entry Properties

Then, you can open the session with one click.

Click Open Session on the Home tab.

LEARN MORE

More information about RDP entries

How to set up a VPN with a session

11.1.2 Remote Desktop Manager Jump
11.1.2.1 Configure Remote Desktop Manager Jump

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 971

Please note that if your windows profile is corrupted Remote Desktop Manager
Agent and Remote Desktop Manager Jump might not work.

Remote Desktop Manager Jump is built in Remote Desktop Manager desktop application
(Windows only). This feature relies on the Remote Desktop Manager Agent and a full
installation of Remote Desktop Manager on the local machine and the jump host.

For an introduction on Remote Desktop Manager Jump, please consult the Remote Desktop
Manager Jump topic.

GETTING STARTED WITH REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER JUMP

PROCEDURE

SET UP THE JUMP HOST

1. Add an RDP entry for the jump host. Enter a name for the session, host name and include
credentials.

972 | Remote Desktop Manager

Jump Host RDP entry properties

2. Click Jump Host and check Is Jump Host.

Contents | 973

Check Is Jump Host – Jump Host properties

3. Open the Jump Host session.

· Install Remote Desktop Manager on the jump host. You can use the same license as your local instance.
· The application is installed with a local data source (SQL Lite). There is no need to add a data source because
the jump host is only an intermediary between the local and remote hosts.

4. Confirm Remote Desktop Manager Agent is set to auto-start. Go to Tools – More Tools
and select Remote Desktop Manager Agent. Click Yes to start the agent.

5. Right-click the Remote Desktop Manager Agent in the taskbar. Check Auto Start.

974 | Remote Desktop Manager

Confirm Auto Start for Remote Desk top Manager Agent

6. Adjust the user interface on the jump host to maximize the area to display remote sessions.
· Make the application full screen.
· Remove the Navigation Pane. Go to View and click Navigation.
· Hide the ribbon. On the View tab, click Top Pane.
To show the ribbon again, click the blue bar at the top of the jump host instance of Remote Desktop
Manager. To reset the layout, on the Window tab, click Reset Layout.

The jump host is ready to use.

THREE THINGS TO REMEMBER:

Hide the Ribbon and Navigation Pane; it will make it easier to work. The
menus are not needed. Hiding them provides more space in the dashboard.

Contents | 975

Use the same Remote Desktop Manager license on the local and remote
instances.

The jump host acts as a relay between the local and the remote systems, it is
possible to use the Remote Desktop Manager license serial that has been
used on the local workstation to register the application on the jump host.

There is no need to add a data source on the jump host. Remote Desktop
Manager opens for first time with a default Local Data Source. This is
sufficient because the application on the jump host only acts as an intermediate
between the local and the remote hosts.

CONFIGURE A SESSION TO USE THE JUMP HOST

1. On the local Remote Desktop Manager instance, create a session entry as usual. Set the
jump host by clicking on the RDM Jump settings button. The jump host can be Inherited if the
jump host is defined in the parent folder, or choose a specific Session.

976 | Remote Desktop Manager

Jump host selection

2. Click Open Session. The Remote Desktop Manager Jump opens automatically. It looks like
a session in a session.

Contents | 977

RDP Session open with Jump Host

11.1.3 RDP
11.1.3.1 Restoring the rdp file association w ith mstsc.ex e

DESCRIPTION

If you have elected to do so during the installation, the *.rdp file extension has been associated
with Remote Desktop Manager, this means that is does not use the mstsc.exe client from
Microsoft anymore.

SOLUTION

From an elevated command prompt (run as administrator), run the following command:
ftype RDP.File="%systemroot%\system32\mstsc.exe" "%1"

TIP

Add the command above to the domain logon script to fix all of your users at once.

978 | Remote Desktop Manager

11.1.4 SSH
11.1.4.1 Configure an SSH Tunnel

DESCRIPTION

SSH tunneling is used to establish an encrypted connection over an untrusted network. It

consists of an encrypted tunnel created through the SSH protocol, between an SSH client and an
SSH server, providing a secure connection for data transfer. The SSH Tunnel can also be used
to establish sort of a virtual private network (VPN) to access services across firewalls.
11.1.5 VMware
11.1.5.1 Configuring VMw are's Pow erCLI for use by Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

The VMware PowerCLI is used by Remote Desktop Manager to interact with vSphere/vCenter
in three distinct cases:
1. Getting the list of virtual machines from a vSphere/vCenter;
2. Performing operations on these virtual machines (start, stop, etc); and
3. Launching a VMware Remote Console.

Some operations are not allowed on the Free edition of VMware Esxi. All
operations acting on the state of the virtual machine need the vSphere API
license.

As a service to our community, we will provide the procedure to get the PowerCLI up and
running. Please remember that this is not a product of Devolutions and that we have no control
over breaking changes that may occur between versions of the PowerCLI. You should always
refer to the manufacturer's documentation.

PROCEDURE

This procedure is valid for version 6.5 of VMware's PowerCLI.

Contents | 979

The bitness of both Remote Desktop Manager and the PowerCLI must be
taken into account for this procedure. Since these steps are performed only
once, we would recommend that you follow the procedure for BOTH the 32 bit
and 64 bit editions of the PowerCLI.

1. Ensure that PowerShell's script execution policy is configured. Please refer to Script
Execution Policy.

2. Launch VMware vSphere PowerCLI using the shortcut on your system, this is the 64 bit
version (using Run As Administrator).

3. Launch VMware vSphere PowerCLI (32-Bit), adjust both windows side by side (using Run As
Administrator).

4. In both windows, set the SSL certificate setting of your choice. Obviously deploying a valid
certificate on the vSphere server and trusting the Certification Authority is the most secure
route. In secure environments or in a low-risk setting, we simply set to ignore.

set-PowerCLIConfiguration -invalidCertificateAction "ignore" -confirm:$false

5. Connect to a vSphere/vCenter server. If there are prompts by the PowerCLI, respond

accordingly.

Connect-VIServer {your server}

6. Run the following command to see if there are error messages:

Get-View -ViewType VirtualMachine | select -Property Name, {$_.Moref.Value};

If you see no error messages, you can close both PowerCLIs and you are now ready to test it using Remote
Desktop Manager.

11.1.6 Tips and tricks

11.1.6.1 Use Multiple Versions of a Third Party Application

DESCRIPTION

You have 2 different versions of an application installed on your workstation and you want to be
able to use both versions within Remote Desktop Manager.

980 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

When you configure your Application Installation Path in File – Options – Path, separate the
2 paths by a semi-colon (;).

Remote Desktop Manager will prompt you with the selection list and you will be able to pick the
one that you want to use.

EXAMPLE

C:\Program Files\Appsv1;D:\Program Files\Appsv2

11.1.6.2 Sending Window s Credentials inside TeamView er

DESCRIPTION

Many users have requested the ability to automate the login process on a Windows system
through TeamViewer.

Since we are not able to send the password automatically inside the TeamViewer session, you
would need to accomplish this with a typing macro.

First, the typing macro session should look like the following;

Contents | 981

Macro Entry Details

Please note that the initial wait has been configured to 5 seconds, this varies depending on
each user system.

Now, in the properties of your Credential entry, you will enable the Allow password in variable
in the Advanced section.

982 | Remote Desktop Manager

If you have an Advanced Data Source, in Administration – Data Sources Settings (System
Settings) – Password Management, you will need to enable the Allow password in macro
(send keys) option.

Contents | 983

The next step happens when the TeamViewer session is opened and credentials are ready to
be entered. Right-click on your credential entry and select Macros/Scripts/Tools -> Send
Credentials (or whatever name you gave your entry).

984 | Remote Desktop Manager

In conclusion, put the mouse cursor in the appropriate login field and the typing macro will do the
rest.

Contents | 985

11.2 Performance
11.2.1 Memory Tuning Of RDP Sessions

DESCRIPTION

RDP sessions using version 8 of the protocol, namely Windows 8 and Windows 2012, consume
more memory than previous versions of the protocol. For those of you that open many sessions
concurrently, this sometimes forced you into using the 64 bit version of Remote Desktop
Manager.

By default, the RDP protocol will reserve a sizable chunk of memory right from the start of a
session for caching purposes, but we have some level of control over that. In the Experience tab
of the RDP session, there is a Cache setting that you can use to control the behavior. It's values
are as follows:

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Default Uses the value set in File – Options – Types – RDP – Cache.

Full Mode The protocol is full Windows 8 Remote Desktop Protocol cache.

Thin client The protocol is limited to using the Windows 7 with SP1 RemoteFX codec
and a smaller cache. All other codecs are disabled. This protocol has
the smallest memory footprint.

Small cache The protocol is the same as Full mode, except it uses a smaller cache.

Choosing Thin client is therefore the choice that limits memory consumption the most, but will
downgrade to the previous version of the protocol. The Small Cache mode may be sufficient for
your needs if you need the newer features of the RDP protocol.

986 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Type cache settings

You might wish to set this for all sessions. In this case, go to File – Options – Types – RDP to
assign the default value, then in all of your sessions use Default.

Details of the RDP global options

Contents | 987

11.3 Security
11.3.1 Blocking MS RDP to Only Use Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Some organizations want to centralize their Remote Desktop connections to be established

from Remote Desktop Manager only. A few things need to be considered to implement this in
your organization.

SOLUTION

Just blocking Microsoft RDP (mstsc.exe) is still leaving other “surfaces” open for getting
access. One could imagine installing Microsoft RDC Manager or even another copy of Remote
Desktop Manager which would connect with settings that you do not approve.

Indeed, you can force your users to use Remote Desktop Manager by hiding the session
credentials in the application. This will results in the users able to establish the remote
connection without knowing the credentials.

If you feel that disabling Microsoft RDP (mstsc.exe) is sufficient for your needs, it is documented
on

https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/4980.how-to-enable-or-disable-
remote-desktop-via-group-policy-windows-2008.aspx

Our best solution involves going through a gateway that is protected by a password unknown
from the end user. One can achieve this by using a SSH Tunnel or our own Jump feature. The
second step is to adjust the firewalls on the remote hosts to disable connections from IP
addresses other than those use by your approved gateways.

988 | Remote Desktop Manager

Gateways

SSH tunnels are a very good approaches since they can run on a VM using any *nix distribution
and require limited ram and hdd space.

This will also force your user to use Remote Desktop Manager because the credentials to use a
SSH Tunnel cannot be a domain credential and the information to authenticate will be saved in
Remote Desktop Manager.

For more information, please consult How to Setup a SSH Tunnel

11.3.2 Certificate validation

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager can validate certificates against the certificate store. However,
ensure to only validate certificates from a trusted certification authority.

Contents | 989

This topic covers:

· Verifying the Certification Authority (CA).

· Remember a certificate.

· Certificate options.

· Troubleshooting steps for certificate errors.

VERIFY THE CERTIFICATION AUTHORITY (CA)

1. Open the certificate, then verify by which Certification Authority the certificate has been
issued by, in the General tab.

2. Verify that the Certification Authority is properly installed in the certificate store.

990 | Remote Desktop Manager

REMEMBER A CERTIFICATE

It is possible for Remote Desktop Manager to remember a certificate when prompted to verify it.

Contents | 991

· For the current session only: click Continue.

· Until the cache is cleared: click Continue and Remember.

Always make sure that the certificate is valid before clicking on any of those choices. Verify the
certificate by clicking View Certificate.

CERTIFICATE OPTIONS

Navigate to File – Options – Security – Certificate security to manage options related to

certificates.

992 | Remote Desktop Manager

IGNORE APPLICATION CERTIFICATE ERRORS

Enable this option to disable the application certificate validation. This is not recommended, as
it would compromise confidentiality and integrity of communications between the client and the
server and could expose the application to potential threats.

RESET KNOWN CERTIFICATES

Use this option to clear the cached certificates. All certificates would need to be validated again.

TROUBLESHOOTING

To find out more about why the certificate validation failed, you can use some tools, but you need
to export the certificate first.

To export the certificate, follow these steps:

1. Click View certificate in the Remote Desktop Manager prompt.
2. Click on the Details tab of the Windows certificate prompt.
3. Click Copy to File... and proceed to export the certificate as a *.cer file.

Contents | 993

Certificate Window

TOOLS

Here are some tools that can be used to verify the newly exported certificate:
1. Using PowerShell (requires PowerShell v4):

1.1 In a PowerShell console, replace the path below with the path of your certificate, then run:
$cert=New-Object System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates.X509Certificate2("C:\U
1.2 Then, run the following command:
Test-Certificate -Cert $cert
2. Using CMD:

Run the following command (replace the path below with the path of your certificate):
certutil -verify "C:\Users\mmorrissette\Desktop\cert.cer"

The resulting output from those tools can be used to obtain more information about the
encountered issue.

994 | Remote Desktop Manager

COMMON ISSUES

· Root and Intermediate certificate authority are not properly installed in the Windows certificate store.
· Ensure that the proxy server blocks do not block the CRL (Certificate Revocation List) server as it is required to
validate a certificate.

Certificate - CRL server

11.3.3 Windows Credential Manager

DESCRIPTION

The Windows Credential Manager allows you to store credentials, such as usernames and
passwords, which you can use to log on to websites or other computers on a network. By storing
your credentials, Windows can automatically log you on to websites or other computers.
Credentials are saved in special folders on your computer called Vaults. Windows and other

Contents | 995

programs (such as web browsers) can securely give the credentials in these Vaults to other
computers and websites.

Windows Credentials

For information about saving credentials in Windows, see Credentials Overview. You can also
learn more in the Windows Credential Manager section.

Technical Support
Part XII
Contents | 997

12 Technical Support

Hours: Monday to Friday 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. EST

Langua English-Français-Deutsch
ge:

Email: [email protected]

Forum: https://forum.devolutions.net/

Phone: +1 844 463.0419

EXTENDED AND PREMIUM SUPPORT PLANS

Subscribers of a paid support plan receive an email address and a plan ID. You should send
your support requests to the appropriate email address and provide your plan ID in the subject
line.

Please consult our Support Policy for more information.

Support/Resources
Part XIII
Contents | 999

13 Support/Resources

13.1 Keyboard Shortcuts

DESCRIPTION

Here are the default keyboard shortcuts for various commands. These can be modified in File –
Options – User Interface – Keyboard.

GENERAL

ACTION SHORTCUT

Filter Ctrl+F

Force Refresh Ctrl+F5

Online Help F1

Quick Connect Ctrl+Alt+Q

Refresh F5

EDIT

ACTION SHORTCUT

Add Credential Entry Alt+Shift+N

Add Folder Ctrl+Shift+N

Add Information Ctrl+Alt+N

1000 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION SHORTCUT

Add Session Ctrl+N

Delete Ctrl+Del

Duplicate Ctrl+D

Edit Entry Ctrl+E

Local Specific Settings Ctrl+Alt+E

New Entry Ins

Rename Entry F2

User Specific Settings Ctrl+Shift+E

ACTIONS

ACTION SHORTCUT

Clipboard - Copy Ctrl+Alt+H

Connection String

Clipboard - Copy Domain Ctrl+Alt+B

Clipboard - Copy Host Ctrl+H

Name

Clipboard - Copy Ctrl+Shift+B

Password

Contents | 1001

ACTION SHORTCUT

Clipboard - Copy Url Ctrl+Shift+H

Clipboard - Copy Ctrl+B

Username

Execute Typing Macro Ctrl+Shift+A

Navigate URL Enter

Open Ctrl+Enter
(Embedded/Tabbed)

Open (External) Shift+Enter

Open (Full screen) Alt+Enter

View Password Ctrl+P

VIEW

ACTION SHORTCUT

Dashboard Alt+F6

Details F12

Favorites F10

Grouped Tab Pane Ctrl+Alt+F9

Header Pane Alt+Shift+F6

1002 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION SHORTCUT

Large Icons F6

Navigation Pane Alt+F8

Opened Sessions F8

Play List Management Ctrl+G

RDP Toggle View Only Shift+F3

Recent (Recent Used F9

Entries)

Status Bar Alt+F7

Tabbed Entries Pane Alt+F9

Tiles F3

Top Pane Alt+F11

Tree View F7

NAVIGATION

ACTION SHORTCUT

Change Data Source Ctrl+Shift+D

File Ctrl+Shift+F

Contents | 1003

ACTION SHORTCUT

Focus Dashboard Ctrl+Shift+L

Focus Tab Ctrl+Shift+Up

Focus Tree/List Ctrl+L

Goto Bookmark 1 Ctrl+1

Goto Bookmark 2 Ctrl+2

Goto Bookmark 3 Ctrl+3

Goto Bookmark 4 Ctrl+4

Goto Bookmark 5 Ctrl+5

Goto Bookmark 6 Ctrl+6

Goto Bookmark 7 Ctrl+7

Goto Bookmark 8 Ctrl+8

Goto Bookmark 9 Ctrl+9

Select Next Tab Ctrl+Shift+Right

Select Previous Tab Ctrl+Shift+Left

Set Bookmark 1 Ctrl+Shift+1

Set Bookmark 2 Ctrl+Shift+2

1004 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACTION SHORTCUT

Set Bookmark 3 Ctrl+Shift+3

Set Bookmark 4 Ctrl+Shift+4

Set Bookmark 5 Ctrl+Shift+5

Set Bookmark 6 Ctrl+Shift+6

Set Bookmark 7 Ctrl+Shift+7

Set Bookmark 8 Ctrl+Shift+8

Set Bookmark 9 Ctrl+Shift+9

Switch Vault Ctrl+Shift+R

IMPORT/EXPORT

ACTION SHORTCUT

Import Entries Ctrl+Shift+I

(.rdm, .pvm, .vnc, .rdp)

13.2 Command Line Arguments

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager can be launched using a command line.

Contents | 1005

Some features are only available in the Enterprise edition.

Remote Desktop Manager also offers a Web Protocol Handler.

Usage: RemoteDesktopManager.exe [parameters]

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

{filename [*.rdm]} Open in embedded or external mode the connection from

file name.

/Silent Execute the application minimized in a system tray icon.

This option cannot be combined with other parameters.

/Datasource:{datasource Specify the data source ID (available in the Advanced Tab

id} of the session).

/Session:{session ID}; Specify one or more session IDs (available in the Advanced
{session ID}... Tab of the session).

/UserName:{username}

/Domain:{domain}

/Password:{password}

/ChangePassword:{new Change the session password. Only available for Remote

password} Desktop sessions and embedded passwords. The data
source ID and the session ID are required.

/RegisterUser:"{registrati Change the Remote Desktop Manager registration name.

on user}" The value must be in double quotes.

1006 | Remote Desktop Manager

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

/RegisterSerial:"{serial Change the Remote Desktop Manager serial number. The

number}" value must be in double quotes.

/Template:{template ID} Open the template ID with the specified host name and an
optional username/password.
/Host:{host name}
The template ID is the Session ID of the template (available
/UserName:{username} in the Advanced Tab of the template).

/Domain:{domain}

/Password:{password}

/Profiler Starts the profiler at start of application. Good for profiling

the start process.

/Title:"{title}" Specify a tab title when using an embedded session.

/Filter:{filter} Execute the application with the filter filled with a parameter.

/TabPage: Dashboard The Dashboard is selected at startup of the application.

USAGE

EXAMPLE #1 - OPEN A TEMPLATE AND CONNECT TO A HOST

RemoteDesktopManager.exe /DataSource:178c2fda-dab4-4f41-98df-6e3205c0a011 /Template:a666b

EXAMPLE #2 - OPEN A SESSION

RemoteDesktopManager.exe /DataSource:178c2fda-dab4-4f41-98df-6e3205c0a011 /Session:474bcb

EXAMPLE #3 - REGISTER THE APPLICATION

RemoteDesktopManager.exe /RegisterUser:"First name, Last name" /RegisterSerial:"xxxxx-xxx

Contents | 1007

13.3 Lexicon

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager is a feature-rich software that has an extensive set of functionality.
Here are the major concepts that are important to understand in order to use the program to its
full potential.

DATA SOURCE

A container for entries. It can be a local file or a database (either local or shared). You can use
multiple distinct data sources in the application, although only one is considered active at one
point in time. See data source Overview for more information.

ENTRY

All items in your data source are entries. There are multiple types. The entry is an abstract
concept that serves as a container for all specific types.

CREDENTIAL ENTRY

A credential is used to control access to a resource by identifying the user. It can be a classic
username/password pair held by the application or even by an external source.

INFORMATION ENTRY

An information entry can contain various information like account information, emails, serial
numbers. Unlike credential entries, information entries are meant to be shared. Therefore, the
data in the information entries is not encrypted. It's principal use in Remote Desktop Manager is
to hold Web site information, from the URL to the credentials. This allows auto log in on the
specified web site.

CONNECTION

Any type of entry that allows you to connect to a remote host, service or device is a connection.
An IP address or host name is normally used, as well as credentials.

1008 | Remote Desktop Manager

SESSION

In Remote Desktop Manager infancy, it was mainly aimed at managing Microsoft Remote
Desktop. A Session was a term that was in use back then to describe a connection to Microsoft
Remote Desktop Services. It appears widely in our documentation. Any technology that
connects to something and that needs to use authentication is a Session.

13.4 Follow Us

OVERVIEW

Get the hottest information about our products - tips and tricks, case studies and new release
announcements!

This is not a marketing newsletter. We focus on the issues that matter to you, whether you're
looking for up-to-the-minute software tutorials, additional outside resources or a peek at how
others are using our products.

Links

Facebook

RSS feeds

Twitter

YouTube

Blog

Contents | 1009

Forum

Spiceworks

Instagram

13.5 Add-on Documentation

DESCRIPTION

This section contains the documentation of the Add-ons for Remote Desktop Manager. Not all
Add-ons are provided by Devolutions but we'll do our best to cover what we host in our add-on
repository.

See Add-on Manager for more details on how to install or manage Add-ons.

See topics below for more information about more complex Add-ons:
· Bomgar Representative Console Add-on
· DbVisualizer Add-on
· NoMachine Add-on
· PenguiNet SSH Client Add-on
· SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI) Add-On
· Shutdown Application Tool Add-on
· SQL Server Management Studio Add-On

See VPN Add-ons for all the VPN Add-on.

13.5.1 Bomgar Representative Console Add-on

DESCRIPTION

1010 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure a "Bomgar Representative Console"

session.

With this Add-on you will be able to define a session that will can automatically:

· Login

· Start a session with a search string (host/description)

· Start a script from disk

· Save a script within the session data to be able to start it on another

workstation.

The Bomgar Representative Console entry type is available when the Bomgar
Representative Console Add-on is installed.

Make sure that you have a bomgar-rep.exe file in the installation folder of
Bomgar. You need the same file to be present in each site that you will create.
Then, go in File – Options – Path – Bomgar Representative and configure
Remote Desktop Manager to point on the appropriate installation folder.

SETTINGS

Contents | 1011

Bomgar Representative Console

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Bomgar site Select the Bomgar site to login. To create the Bomgar site
properly, you need to create a folder for each of your sites. In
each folder, make sure that bomgar-rep.exe is also present.

Example:

· C:\Program Files\Bomgar\Representative\Site1

· C:\Program Files\Bomgar\Representative\Site2

Username Enter the username to access the Bomgar site.

Password Enter the password to access the Bomgar site.

Starting method Start a pinned client session with a search string: Start a
client session with a search string. Indicate the
Host/Description in the appropriate field.

Start a script file name on local disk: Start a script from disk.
Indicate the script in the Script Filename field.

1012 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Start a stored script in session: Save a script within the

session data to be able to start it on another workstation.
Indicate the script in the Script Filename field.

Host/Description or See Starting method option.

Script Filename

13.5.2 DbVisualizer Add-on

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a "DbVisualizer" session. DbVisualizer is

a universal database tool used by developers, DBAs and analysts. It can be used
on all major operating systems to access a wide range of databases.

The DbVisualizer entry type is available when the DbVisualizer Add-on is

installed.

SETTINGS

Contents | 1013

Db Visualizer

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Connection Enter the name of the connection.

name

Username Enter the username to connect on the database.

Password Enter the password to connect on the database.

SQL script file Select the SQL script file (*.sql).

Preferences Select the preferences directory on the computer.

Database Select the prefer database encoding.

encoding

1014 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Custom Indicate the window title that you want to be display.

window title

13.5.3 NoMachine Add-on

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a "NoMachine" session. This allows you
to store in Remote Desktop Manager each NoMachine profile as a distinct
session, so that you can connect automatically to different computers (exactly like
RDP sessions).

The NoMachine entry type is available when the NoMachine Add-on is installed.

SETTINGS

NoMachine entry

Contents | 1015

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Starting Using profile file name on local disk: The session will be linked to
method an existing profile (file) on a computer and it will be dependent on it.

Using stored profile in session: The data of an existing profile (file)

will be stored directly in the session and it will be usable on any other
computer that shares the data source.

Profile Select the NoMachine profile to use for the connection.

13.5.4 PenguiNet SSH Client Add-on

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure a "PenguiNet SSH Client" session.
PenguiNet is a simple all-in-one SSH client for Windows. It also includes an SCP
browser so that you can easily transfer files with just a few mouse clicks.

The PenguiNet SSH Client entry type is available when the PenguiNet SSH Client
Add-on is installed.

SETTINGS

1016 | Remote Desktop Manager

PeguiNet SSH Client - Profile name

START METHOD - PROFILE NAME

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Profile name Enter the profile name to connect on PenguiNet.

Start a Secure CoPy Allow to start a Secure CoPy session (SCP). Secure CoPy or
session (SCP) SCP is a means of securely transferring computer files
between a local host and a remote host or between two
remote hosts.

Contents | 1017

PeguiNet SSH Client - Parameters

START METHOD - PARAMETERS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Indicate the name of the host to connect.

Port Indicate the port that you may use to connect.

Username Enter the username to connect with PenguiNet.

Password Enter the password to connect with PenguiNet.

Protocol Determinate the protocol that you want to use. Select

between:

· Telnet

· SSH

1018 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

· SCP

Terminal type Determinate the terminal type that you want to use. Select
between:

· Linux

· VT100

· Xterm

UTF-8 Allow you to use the UTF-8. The UTF-8 is a variable-width

encoding that can represent every character in the Unicode
character set.

Don't use SOCKS Disallow the use of a SOCKS Server to connect with
Server PenguiNet.

13.5.5 SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI) Add-on

DESCRIPTION

This entry is used to define and configure an "SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI)"
session. This allows you to start sessions selected from your saplogon.ini files
located anywhere on your computer.

The SAP GUI entry type is available when the SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI)
Add-on is installed.

SETTINGS

Contents | 1019

SAP GUI

The SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI) add-on does not allow you to insert
connection information manually without selecting a saplogon.ini file first.

FEATURES

· Possibility to copy/create saplogon.ini independent sessions. If you're working in a not

editable saplogon.ini environment (or daily refreshed due GroupPolicies from your Client-
Team).

· Automatic logon and execute Transaction/Reports.

· Support for Secure Network Connect (SNC).

· Connections over saprouter(s), handles Loadbalancing (Logongroups), etc.

REQUIREMENTS

Installation of SAP Frontend Server (SAP GUI) on Client required.

LIMITATIONS

Only external Sessions are possible.

1020 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.5.6 Shutdown Application Tool Add-on

DESCRIPTION

The Shutdown Application Tool allows you to shutdown or restart one or many
computers at the same time.

The Shutdown Application Tool is available when the Shutdown Application Tool
Add-on is installed.

SETTINGS
The Shutdown Application Tool is accessible from the Dashboard under the
Macros/Scripts/Tools section.

Shutdown/Restart Computer in Dashboard

Contents | 1021

USAGE

Select one or several computers that you want to restart or shutdown in the Navigation Pane and
click on Shutdown/Restart Computer in the Dashboard.

Select the option that want those computer(s) to do, enter a comment and click on Execute.

Shutdown / Restart Computer

13.5.7 SQL Server Management Studio Add-On

DESCRIPTION

1022 | Remote Desktop Manager

This entry is used to define and configure an "SQL Server Management Studio"
session. This allows you to launch and perform authentication to an instance.
Optionally you can select a database, as well as open a script in the editor. SQL
Server Management Studio is primarily a GUI tool, if you need to run commands
and exit automatically, you should look at the SQLCMD tool that comes with the Sql
Server utilities.

The SQL Server Management Studio entry type is available when the SQL Server
Management Studio Add-on is installed.

SETTINGS

SQL Server Management Studio

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Indicate the full instance name. When a default instance as

been used, normally you can put only the server name here

Database Used to indicate to select a database upon login.

Contents | 1023

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Integrated Security Indicates to use your windows credentials to authenticate on

(Active Directory) the server.

Run as different user Use a different user to authenticate on the server.

(Integrated security
only)

Net Only (Integrated Use to make connections that are made from computers that
security only) are not on the customer's domain.

Username When using Sql Server authentication, username to use.

Password When using Sql Server authentication, password to use.

Default query file Specifies a file that will be opened in the editor. Please see
(Optional) note below

Show splash screen Indicates to let Sql Server Management Studio display its
splash screen.

NOTE

On some systems, specifying a file to open in the editor has the side effect of preventing the
Object Explorer from being connected. This renders the add-on useful only for when you want to
run the script and exit soon after. If you need to use the Object Explorer do not specify a script
file.

1024 | Remote Desktop Manager

SQL Server Management Studio

13.5.8 VPN Add-ons

DESCRIPTION

Multiple VPN Add-ons can be installed using Remote Desktop Manager Add-on Manager.

We support a very wide variety of VPN Add-ons, explore them to your heart's content.

Consult the three topics below for examples on what our VPN Add-ons look like:
· Cisco AnyConnect
· Generic VPN
· OpenVPN

13.5.8.1 Cisco AnyConnect

DESCRIPTION

Cisco AnyConnect VPN Client Add-on can be used to connect to your Cisco
AnyConnect VPN session.

This Add-on can be installed using the Add-on Manager.

The Cisco AnyConnect will not be able to see if the VPN is already open on its
own.

Contents | 1025

Cisco AnyConnect VPN Client

13.5.8.2 Generic VPN

DESCRIPTION

Generic VPN Add-on can be used to connect to your Generic VPN session.

This Add-on can be installed using the Add-on Manager.

1026 | Remote Desktop Manager

Generic VPN

13.5.8.3 OpenVPN

DESCRIPTION

OpenVPN Add-on can be used to connect to your OpenVPN VPN session.

This add-on requires Remote Desktop Manager to be runned with elevated

privileges (run as administrator).

This Add-on can be installed using the Add-on Manager.

Contents | 1027

OpenVPN

INFORMATION

For the Certificate and Key fields it's important that your files are into the same folder as the
*.ovpn files.

You cannot use a configuration as below.

13.6 Best Practices

DESCRIPTION

1028 | Remote Desktop Manager

The following recommendations are provided for new and experienced users alike. Remote
Desktop Manager has a lot of flexibility and sometimes we are faced with so many choices that
we aren't sure of the proper decision to make or its impacts. Read below to find out what our
own AND the community's experience has shown is the preferred way of operating Remote
Desktop Manager in various scenarios.

Most of these recommendations apply to the Enterprise Edition because the range of options is
so much greater then the Free Edition.
13.6.1 Data Backups

DESCRIPTION

It is recommended to always have a current backup of your data source. Since we support a
wide range of data stores, you should use the best solution for you chosen data source.

AMAZON S3

Please consult Amazon website for their backup policy.

DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD SERVER

Devolutions Password Server use a SQL Server database to store the data. We
recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups regularly.
This topic is a good start on the subject: Setting up a Maintenance Plan to Backup
Databases.

DROPBOX

Please consult Dropbox website for their backup policy.

Contents | 1029

FTP

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly.

MARIADB

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly.

MICROSOFT ACCESS

Our recommended backup solution is to use our free Online Backup Service.

MICROSOFT SQL AZURE

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly.

MICROSOFT SQL SERVER

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly. This topic is a good start on the subject: Setting up a Maintenance Plan to
Backup Databases.

1030 | Remote Desktop Manager

MYSQL

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly. The following link is a good start on the subject:
http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.7/en/backup-methods.html.

ONLINE DATABASE

The protection offered by Online Database is for Disaster recovery only, for
instance a hardware failure. Note that we cannot restore a backup of a single
database. Using our Entry History and our View Deleted features, you can revert
any change on specific sessions.

ONLINE DRIVE

Our recommended backup solution is to use our free Online Backup Service.

SFTP

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly.

SQLITE

Our recommended backup solution is to use our free Online Backup Service.

Contents | 1031

WEB

We recommend creating a maintenance plan to perform automatic backups

regularly.

XML

Our recommended backup solution is to use our free Online Backup Service.

13.6.2 Credential Management For Teams

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows to handle credentials in multiple ways for a team environment.
This brings flexibility, but at the cost of creating difficulty when you need to choose an
implementation for a particular requirement.

Below are multiple methods to handle credentials. You may choose one or many depending on
your requirements. We often see scenarios where our clients manage their own infrastructure, as
well as their customers. Group entries in folders depending on the kind of credential
management that you must use. Each of these folders could use a different scheme.

PREAMBLE

Here are a few notions to know prior to getting to the scenarios, as they are at the core of the
usage of Remote Desktop Manager:

INHERITED CREDENTIALS

Credentials can be set at different levels, such on the entries themselves or on their parent
folders. The latter enables entries to inherit credentials from a parent folder. Whenever using
inherited credentials, the credential resolver will go up a level and use the credentials set on the

1032 | Remote Desktop Manager

parent folder. If the inheritance is set on a folder, the resolver simply continues up to the next
parent.

PRIVATE VAULT

The Private Vault, available for Advanced Data Sources, allows to create entries available only
to their owner. In the cases where a user must use a credential that is exclusive to them, using
the Private Vault is the logical choice.

SPECIFIC SETTINGS

Specific Settings allow you to override some settings of the entries in the data source. One of
the most typical use for this is to override the credentials of the entry for a specific user. Specific
settings can override credentials, session types, folders, etc.

SCENARIOS

ALL USERS SHARE THE SAME SET OF CREDENTIALS

The credential entries are referenced directly in the properties of sessions. Select Credential
repository, then select the existing credential entry from the data source.

If the credentials are the same for more than one device, store the sessions in a folder which the
credential entry is assigned to, and set the sessions to use the inherited credential mode.

Contents | 1033

EVERY USER HAVE THEIR OWN SET OF CREDENTIALS

Use the User Specific Settings. Type the credentials directly or refer a credential entry in the
Private Vault (recommended).

1034 | Remote Desktop Manager

USERS SHARE A SET OF CREDENTIALS WHILE ADMINS USE DIFFERENT

CREDENTIALS

The shared credential entries are referenced directly in the properties of sessions. Admins use
User Specific Settings to override the credentials, usually to refer a credential entry in the
Private Vault.

REFACTOR MULTIPLE ENTRIES AT ONCE

To change the credentials of multiple entries at once, the following features might help you out:

BATCH EDIT

The Batch Edit feature allows to modify multiple entries at once. This feature can be used to
apply a set of credentials on multiple entries.

POWERSHELL

The PowerShell CmdLet of Remote Desktop Manager allows to massively update entries. The
script below will set all folders to use the inherited credential mode.

Always have a backup of the data source before running a PowerShell script.

cls
Write-Host "Fixing Groups...`n"
$entries = Get-RDMSession | where {$_.Kind -eq "Group"}

foreach ($entry in $entries)

{
Write-Host (" Processing : " + $entry.Name)
$entry.CredentialConnectionId = "<Credential entry ID>"
Set-RDMSession $entry
}

Write-Host "`nDONE!"

Contents | 1035

13.6.3 Use Credential Entries

DESCRIPTION

Credentials management is one of the main strengths of Remote Desktop Manager. Although
you can specify the credentials directly in the properties of entries, we recommend linking
credentials to entries. This has the following advantages:

· Credential entries can be linked to multiple entries.

· The linked credential entry is the only one requiring modifications if necessary, rather than
change every entry affected by it.

· When necessary, Permissions can be customized for an entry to better suit your needs
(when an Advanced Data Source is used).
13.6.4 Use VPN Entries

DESCRIPTION

Although you can specify VPN details directly in the entry's settings, using a VPN entry should
provide better results. This has the following advantages.

· VPN entries can be used in multiple sessions.

· Only that specific VPN entry requires maintenance when modifications are necessary.

· When necessary, Permissions can be customized for an entry to better suit your needs
(when an Advanced Data Source is used).

For more information, please consult VPN Overview.

13.7 How-To
13.7.1 How to Add a Web Link in Macros/Scripts/Tools Session

DESCRIPTION

It's possible to create a Macros/Scripts/Tools session that contain a web link. This
Macros/Scripts/Tools can be launched from the dashboard.

1036 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

1. Create a database Template by clicking on File – Templates – Templates – Add template.

Add a Tem plate

2. Select Create a database template

Contents | 1037

Create a shared template

3. Select the Web Browser (http/https) session type.

Web Browser session

1038 | Remote Desktop Manager

4. Indicate the proper information in the template and click on OK.

Template Creation

5. After the creation of the template, create a new entry Macros/Scripts/Tools - Template. This
isn't done through the Template menu from step 1 - 4, use the Add Entry feature to locate a
Template in the Macros/Scripts/Tools.

Contents | 1039

Macro/Script Tool - Template

6. Click on the ellipsis to select your newly created template and check the box Keep template
host. You can also opt to keep whichever part of the credentials you would want.

1040 | Remote Desktop Manager

Macros/Scripts/Tools template creation

7. You can now launch the web link (website) from the Tree View.
13.7.2 How to apply policies

DESCRIPTION

Administrative Templates facilitates the management of registry-based policy settings that can
be applied on the computer and/or the user configuration. Group policy (GPO) is a tool for
organizations to enforce settings on their computers and allows to harden Remote Desktop
Manager security.

The Administrative Templates are simply registry settings that are enforced by
domains. They contain registry keys that can also be set on computers that are
not joined to domains. Proper Access Control Lists (ACL) must be put in place to
prevent users from modifying registry settings in this case. Refer to the tables
below to find the registry key for each policy setting.

Contents | 1041

To learn more on how to deploy the Remote Desktop Manager Administrative Templates on
your domain please refer to the Microsoft Online Help.

The admx file is distributed with Remote Desktop Manager, you will find it in a Policies sub-
folder. By default the path is C:\Program Files (x86)\Devolutions\Remote Desktop
Manager\Policies.

SETTINGS

RemoteDesktopManager includes an Administrative templates file (.admx), which describes the

policies that are offered.

Group Policy Management Folder

In the console tree, click the folder under Administrative Templates that contains the policy
settings you want to configure.

1042 | Remote Desktop Manager

GENERAL

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the telemetry data collection %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAnalytics

Disable the application automatic %Root%

update check \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAutoUpdate

Disable the Help - Check Version %Root%

button \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableUpdate

Disable the x64 edition of the %Root%

application \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableX64

Contents | 1043

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the x86 of the application %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableX86

Force the loading of the default.cfg %Root%

file \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\ForceDefaultConfigurationLoadin
g

SECURITY

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Force the user to always be %Root%

prompted for the passphrase while \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
connecting to a data source that is ktopManager\AlwaysPromptForPassphrase
protected by a Passphrase Security
Provider

Disable the caching mode %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableCaching

Disable the offline mode %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableOffline

Disable the tools of the password %Root%

generator \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisablePasswordGenerator

Disable the override hard drive %Root%

specific settings for the RDP entries \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableRDPHardDrivesSpecific
Settings

1044 | Remote Desktop Manager

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the read/write in offline mode %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableReadWriteOffline

Force the user to always be %Root%

prompted for his credentials when \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
opening the application ktopManager\ForceLogin

SESSIONS

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the add-on creation and the %Root%

Add-on Manager \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAddOn

Disable the Add-on creation of %Root%

entries \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAddOnEntries

Disable the Add-on Manager %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAddOnManager

Disable the custom image edition in %Root%

the session configuration \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableCustomImage

Disable import in private vault %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManagerDisableImportInPrivateVault

Disable the reveal password %Root%

command \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableRevealPassword

Contents | 1045

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Allow the user to connect even after %Root%

the entry has expired \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\EnableConnectionAfterExpiration

Inside the private vault, allows only %Root%

credentials entries \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\OnlyAllowCredentialsInPrivateVa
ult

USER INTERFACE

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the menu Help - About %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableAbout

Disable all the local application tools %Root%

like the Event Viewer or IIS \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableApplicationTools

Disable the possibility to drag and %Root%

drop sessions \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableDragAndDrop

Disable the menu File - Data Sources %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableFileDataSources

Disable the menu File - Options %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableFileOptions

Disable the import and the export of %Root%

the Configuration File in File - \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes

1046 | Remote Desktop Manager

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Options ktopManager\DisableImportExportOptions

Disable the My Personal Credential %Root%

feature \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableMyPersonalCredentials

Disable the Devolutions Account %Root%

usage \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableOnlineAccount

Disable the option to open with %Root%

parameter \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableOpenWithParameters

Disable the error report prompt %Root%

\SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableSendErrorReportDialog

Disable the Add-On Manager in the %Root%

Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsAddOnManager

Disable the Chocolatey Console in %Root%

the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsChocolateyConsole

Disable the Devolutions Password %Root%

Server Console in the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
(Deprecated 12.6.8) ktopManager\DisableToolsDevolutionsServerC
onsole

Disable the Extension Manager in %Root%

the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsExtensionManager

Contents | 1047

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

Disable the Local RDP/RemoteApp %Root%

Manager in the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsLocalRDPRemoteA
ppManager

Disable the Macro/Script/Tool %Root%

Manager in the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsMacroScriptToolMa
nager

Disable the Tools ribbon tab and %Root%

menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsMenu

Disable the Open New Remote %Root%

Desktop option in the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsOpenNewRemoteD
esktop

Disable the Powershell RDM Cmdlet %Root%

in the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsPowershellRDMCm
dlet

Disable the RDM Agent in the Tools %Root%

menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsRDMAgent

Disable the Translation Manager in %Root%

the Tools menu \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableToolsTranslationManager

Disable the Top Pane %Root%

(Ribbon/Menubar) \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\DisableTopPane

Force the Merge credential list with %Root%

sessions option \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes

1048 | Remote Desktop Manager

POLICY NAME REGISTRY KEY (PLEASE SEE NOTE 1)

ktopManager\EnableMergeCredentialListWithS
essions

Force the merging of the session toll %Root%

list with sessions \SOFTWARE\Policies\Devolutions\RemoteDes
ktopManager\EnableMergeSessionToolListWit
hSessions

NOTES

%Root% can either be HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE or HKEY_CURRENT_USER depending on

how you want to enforce the policy. Please refer to Microsoft's documentation to make the best
choice for your situation.
13.7.3 How to Backup Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Backups are important in case of hardware failure.

A proper backup will cover both your data and your settings.

BACKUP

DATA

Your data is stored in your data source. Please consult Data Source Backups for more details.

SETTINGS

You can export your settings via the Export Options wizard of Remote Desktop Manager.

Contents | 1049

13.7.4 How to Configure Password Manager Pro in Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

You can create Password Manager Pro credential entries in Remote Desktop Manager,
however a Password Manager Pro account needs to be created and configured in the
application prior to the utilization.

SETTINGS

1. Connect to your Password Manager Pro server (https://localhost:7272) using your admin
account.

Password Manager Pro

2. Inside Password Manager Pro, click on Admin and select Users.

1050 | Remote Desktop Manager

Users

3. Create a new API user.

Create API User

4. In the Host Name field, enter the name of the computer where the API user will be use.

Contents | 1051

Add API User

5. Enable the REST API to have a API Auth Token key generated

Auth Tok en

Copy the Auth token key in your clipboard. You will need it to configure Password
Manager Pro in Remote Desktop Manager.

6. Now, go inside Remote Desktop Manager and click on File – My Account Settings –
Password Manager Pro.

1052 | Remote Desktop Manager

Password Manager Pro Account Settings

7. Click on New to create a Password Manager Pro account

Contents | 1053

New User

8. Enter the username of the API User that you have created in Password Manager Pro in the
Username field, enter the appropriate computer name in the Workstation field and paste
the Auth Token key that you have copied on step 5 in the Token field and click on OK.

1054 | Remote Desktop Manager

New User

9. You can now create a Password Manager Pro credential entry in Remote Desktop Manager

Credential Entry

13.7.5 How to Configure ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) 5 in Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 1055

It's possible to use ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) in Remote Desktop Manager, however a

ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) extension needs to be installed prior to the utilization. After the
extension installation, you can configure ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) 5 in Remote Desktop
Manager.

The Remote Desktop Manager extension needs to be installed on your

ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) server.

SETTINGS

1. Connect on ConnectWise (ScreenConnect) server and click on Admin.

Admin Tab

2. Click on Extensions in the Administration section and select Browse Online Extensions.

1056 | Remote Desktop Manager

Extensions

3. Install Remote Desktop Manager Extension.

Contents | 1057

Remote Desk top Manager Extension

4. Now that the extension is installed, you can create your ScreenConnect session. In the Advanced tab,
change the version for Extension (Version 5 or higher).

1058 | Remote Desktop Manager

ConnectWise Control (ScreenConnect) - Advanced

5. You can also select Default in the drop down list instead of Extension (Version 5 or higher). If
you select Default, you'll need to configure the ScreenConnect version that you wish to use in File –
Options – Types – ConnectWise Control.

Contents | 1059

File - Options - Types - ConnectWise (ScreenConnect)

13.7.6 How to Configure the Google Authenticator 2-Factor Authentication

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager has the option to use Google Authenticator to provide an additional
security layer when the application starts.

SETTINGS

Before you start the configuration, make sure you have installed the Google
Authenticator application on your Android device, Blackberry or on your Apple
product.

1. Click on File – Options – Security and select Require Google Authenticator in the 2-
Factor Authentication section. Then click on Configure to set up your Google Authentication.

1060 | Remote Desktop Manager

Google Authenticator

2. Scan the QR code on your screen with the Google Authenticator application to setup Remote
Desktop Manager in Google Authenticator.
When Remote Desktop Manager is configured in Google Authenticator, enter the Validation
code provided by Google Authenticator in Remote Desktop Manager.

Contents | 1061

Google Authenticator Setup

3. When the Validation code is entered, click on Validate, then OK.

4. Relaunch Remote Desktop Manager to be prompted for the Google Authenticator code.

Google Authenticator generates a new validation code every 30 seconds. There

will be a color indicating the end of the time window is approaching, please
consult the application documentation of your device for complete information.

13.7.7 How to Configure the Yubikey 2-Factor Authentication

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to configure a Yubikey to provide an additional security
layer when the application starts.

1062 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

Before starting the configuration, make sure you have a Yubikey in your
possession.

1. Insert the Yubikey into a USB port of your computer.

2. Click on File – Options – Security and select Require Yubikey authentication in the 2-
Factor authentication section. Press and hold the gold button on the Yubikey to have the code
in Remote Desktop Manager and click OK.

Yubik ey Authentication

3. Relaunch Remote Desktop Manager to be prompted for a Yubikey code.

Contents | 1063

Yubik ey Authentication request

4. Press and hold the gold button on the Yubikey and access will be granted.
13.7.8 How to Disable Remote Desktop Manager Auto Update

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager frequently offers new updates to release new features, improvements
as well as fixes. If you don't want to receive the update notifications, you can disable it in the
options.

SETTINGS

In Remote Desktop Manager, uncheck both options “Check for update at startup” and
“Includes Beta versions” in File – Options – General – Application Start.

1064 | Remote Desktop Manager

Application Start - Auto Update

13.7.9 How to Download the Keepass Plugin

DESCRIPTION

You need the KeePass plug-in to send the credential to Remote Desktop Manager (RDM).

Contents | 1065

KeePass 1.X is not supported.

1. Due to the changes made in RDM with add-on, you will need to download the Keepass plugin
manually using this link :
https://remotedesktopmanager.com/download/Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.KeePa
ssPlugin.2.1.2.0.zip.

2. When the download is finished, copy the .dll files in the Keepass installation folder (you can
locate your KeePass installation folder with the help of the Keepass Help Center).

The KeePass application must be running and the database must be opened

3. In RDM create a KeePass entry. You can validate that the KeePass plug-in is now installed.

Remote Desktop Manager will by default select the database; this option can be overridden by
manually entering the path. RDM also can support linking to multiple KeePass databases
simultaneously. Add all the paths separated by semicolons.

1066 | Remote Desktop Manager

4. In the Advanced tab choose your preferred method. It is where you can enter your Universal
Unique Identifier (Uuid) and the name of the entry in the database, or to always be prompt
with a list.

13.7.10 How to Register Licenses in Older Version

DESCRIPTION

To register the license serial of Remote Desktop Manager in the data source in a version prior
to 2019.2.24, go to Administration - System Settings.

Administration - System Settings

In the System Settings window, go in the Serial Number section. Enter the license serial and
click OK.

Contents | 1067

System Settings - Serial Number

13.7.11 How to Reinstall Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Before reinstalling Remote Desktop Manager, a backup will be required. Please

consult How-to Backup topic.

Refer to the Installation Overview topic for details on the installation of Remote Desktop
Manager.

SETTINGS

After Remote Desktop Manager has been reinstalled on your computer, you need to copy your
RemoteDesktopManager.cfg (that you had backed up) to the %LocalAppData%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager folder. This is the default path. If you have not
installed with the default settings, please consult Configuration File Location for instructions on
locating your configuration folder.

DATA

If you have moved the file based data source to another relative path, you will have to edit the
data source definitions to fix the paths.

1068 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.7.12 How to Send an Error Report

DESCRIPTION

When an application error occurs in Remote Desktop Manager, you can send the error report to
the Devolutions' support team.

The strength of Remote Desktop Manager comes in great part from its
community of users and we depend on you to not only send in those reports, but
to do it with as much information as possible. We often already have the solution,
so please use your real email address.

WORKFLOW

1. An error dialog appears in Remote Desktop Manager.

Error Message dialog

2. To see more information regarding the error click on Details.

Contents | 1069

Details

3. To send in the report, press Send Error Report

1070 | Remote Desktop Manager

Send Error Report

4. Fill in your information and add as many details as you can before pressing Send such as:

It's really important that you enter your email address, name and company name
before you send the report, so that the Devolutions support team can contact you.
· The feature that you were using;
· The steps that you performed to get the error;
· Has this error occurred more than once;
· Are you the only one in your team to have the error; etc.

13.7.13 How to Send a File Securely

DESCRIPTION

The Support team, QA department or engineering department may request some file(s) for
investigation on a specific scenario or to troubleshoot a certain issue.

Contents | 1071

SOLUTION

Devolutions has a secure way to transfer file(s) between a customer and us. We use ShareFile
to transfer the data securely.

The file(s) can be sent to us securely via this link https://devolutions.sharefile.com/filedrop.

13.7.14 How to Send the Application Logs Report

DESCRIPTION

The Devolutions support team may ask for the application logs to help you in certain situation.
Here is how to send it to the support team.

WORKFLOW

1. Click on Help – Application Logs.

View Application Log

2. Select the Report tab. Then click on the Send to Support button.

1072 | Remote Desktop Manager

Report Tab

3. Fill the Email, Company and Name field with your information (your email address, your
Company name and your name) and click on OK to send the report.

Send message to Support

Contents | 1073

13.7.15 How to Send your Configuration File

The Devolutions support team may ask for your configuration file to help you in certain situations.
Here's how to send a clean configuration file to the support team.

1. Go in File – Options and press the Export Options button.

2. Remove any sensitive information's and save the file on your computer. The file name will be
RemoteDesktopManager.cfg.

3. In order for us to provide you a secure link to share your file, send an email to
[email protected].

13.7.16 How to Setup a SSH Tunnel

DESCRIPTION

SSH tunneling is used to create an encrypted connection over an untrusted network. It consists
of an encrypted tunnel created through an SSH protocol, providing secure connections for data
transfer. The SSH Tunnel can be used to establish sort of a virtual private network (VPN) to
access services across firewalls.

This is the procedure to establish a basic SSH Tunnel to reach a remote machine.

1074 | Remote Desktop Manager

SSH Tunnel Diagram

CREATE AN SSH TUNNEL

To create an SSH tunnel, local connections through a specified port must be forwarded to an
SSH server.

To create an SSH tunnel a given port of one machine needs to be forwarded to a port on the
other machine which will be the other end of the tunnel. Once the SSH tunnel has been
established, the user can connect to earlier specified port at first machine to access the network
service.

1. Create an SSH Tunnel entry.

Contents | 1075

SSH Tunnel entry

Set up the properties as follows:

SSH SERVER SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Set the IP address of the SSH Server. (please refer to 1 in the Tunnel
diagram)

Port Set the port of the SSH Server. The default port is 22. (please refer to in the
Tunnel diagram)

Set public Setup the public key

key

Username Enter the SSH server username to connect.

Password Enter the SSH server password to connect.

1076 | Remote Desktop Manager

OUTGOING TUNNEL SETTINGS

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Mode Select between: Local, Remote or Dynamic.

Local The local address must be left to 127.0.0.1. (please refer to in the Tunnel
address diagram)

Local port In most cases leave the local port to its default value 3390. (please refer to
‚ in the Tunnel diagram)

Remote Enter the host or IP address of your remote client. (please refer to … in the
host Tunnel diagram)

Remote Set the final port that you must reach, in most cases leave it to it's default
port value 3389. (please refer to † in the Tunnel diagram)

At this time, you can launch your entry to see if indeed the tunnel has been opened successfully.
Close the session.

CREATE YOUR REMOTE SESSION

Create an RDP session.

Contents | 1077

RDP entry

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Host Enter your Local address which is 127.0.0.1. (please refer to in the
Tunnel diagram)

Port Enter your Local port which is 3390. (please refer to ‚ in the Tunnel
diagram)

RDP type Leave the RDP type to Normal.

Username Enter the username of your Remote Host.

Domain Enter the domain of your Remote Host.

Password Enter the password of your Remote Host.

1078 | Remote Desktop Manager

In the VPN/SSH/Gateway side menu of your RDP session select Always connect in the Open
field and Session in the Type field.

RDP session - VPN side menu

In the VPN – Settings tab, click on the drop down list next to Session and select your SSH
Tunnel entry previously created.

Contents | 1079

RDP session - VPN - Settings

You now have configured your session with the following rule: for each connection that comes on
interface 127.0.0.1 and port 3390, forward that connection to the SSH server and request the
server to forward that connection to your Remote host.

You can now launch your RDP session, your SSH Tunnel will open, establish the connection and
then launch and open your RDP session.

RDP session open through an SSH Tunnel

1080 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.7.16.1 How to Broadcast Action in SSH

DESCRIPTION

In Remote Desktop Manager you can manage two or more active SSH session with Broadcast
actions.

An upgraded database, by an administrator, might be required.

1. Open at least two SSH sessions.

2. Right-click on an SSH tab, click Broadcast Input, then Manage Broadcast.

Broadcast Input Menu

3. Select all the required session in the list and close the window.

Contents | 1081

Manage Broadcast List

You can now broadcast commands on all the sessions at the same time.

To remove a session from the broadcast, you can either bring the Manage Broadcast window
to uncheck the session, or on the specific SSH tab, right-click to bring the menu, click
Broadcast Input, then Remove from Broadcast.
13.7.17 How to Setup Remote Desktop Manager to Receive New Update

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager frequently offers new updates to release new features,
improvements, as well as fixes. If you always want to use the latest version of Remote Desktop
Manager, follow the steps below.

SETTINGS

1082 | Remote Desktop Manager

1. In the application, check both options “Check for update at startup” and “All updates
including beta” in File – Options – General – Application Start.

General - Application Start - Auto Update

2. Subscribe to the Announcements Forums to be aware of all the latest announcements on our
products.
13.7.18 How to Setup the Usage of the Session Credentials to Launch a Tool

DESCRIPTION

To run some tools, specific credentials needs to be sent through the remote session. By default,
the credential used by a tool are the one from the Windows session. Sometime with those
credentials you will not have enough privileges to run the tool. This is why you need to use the
credential of the session instead.

SETTINGS

You can specify the usage of the session credentials for a session in Management Tools –
Credentials – Use session credentials.

Contents | 1083

Use session credentials

We also recommend that you configure your Default Settings of the entry type that need this
setting by default.
13.7.19 How to Subscribe to the Announcements Forums

DESCRIPTION

You can be notified when new product updates are available by subscribing to announcements
on our forum at https://forum.devolutions.net/

If you wish to subscribe to the announcements for Remote Desktop Manager, click on the
following link : https://forum.devolutions.net/forum20-remote-desktop-manager--
announcements.aspx

After, click on Watch this forum for new topics.

1084 | Remote Desktop Manager

Devolutions Forum

The procedure is the same for all forums, below are the Announcement forums that exist at this
time for our various products.

· Remote Desktop Manager MAC:

https://forum.devolutions.net/forum43-remote-desktop-manager-mac--announcements.aspx

· Devolutions Account:

https://forum.devolutions.net/forum31-remote-desktop-manager-online--announcements.aspx

· Devolutions Password Server:

https://forum.devolutions.net/forum32-remote-desktop-manager-server--announcements.aspx

· Wayk Now:

https://forum.devolutions.net/forum68-wayk-now--announcement.aspx

Contents | 1085

13.7.20 How to Use a Typing Macro to Perform Authentication

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes it can be difficult to perform authentication on certain websites. With Remote

Desktop Manager, it's possible to send the credential through a typing macro using variables.

This feature simply uses a basic mechanism offered by the .net framework of
sending keystrokes, much like if a person was using the keyboard. It sends the
keystrokes to the operating system itself, they will be handled by WHATEVER
application has the focus at the time that the message is received. If the focus
is switched to another window, the credentials will most likely be revealed by
being typed in a text area.

DO NOT USE THIS FEATURE in an environment where passwords MUST be

hidden from the user.

SETTINGS

1. Edit your Web Browser (http/https) entry, click on the Login tab, and unchecked the Auto submit and Auto
fill login option.

1086 | Remote Desktop Manager

Autofill

2. In the Security Settings section, check the Allow password in variable option. This option
need to be checked so that the typing macro can send the password to the remote session.

Contents | 1087

Allow password in variable

Using an Advanced Data Sources, the option Allow password in macro (send
keys) in Administration - Data Source Settings (System Settings) - Password
Management also needs to be enabled.

3. In the Events section, click on the After Connect tab and add the following macro in the
Typing Macro section: $USERNAME${TAB}$PASSWORD${ENTER}. You may have to
adjust the Initial wait to leave time for the page to load.

1088 | Remote Desktop Manager

Typing macro

Make sure that the cursor is in the appropriate field prior to the macro execution
so that the username and password can be sent properly to the website.

13.7.21 How to use the Theme system

DESCRIPTION

The "Theme system" of Remote Desktop Manager is still in its infancy and will evolve in future
releases. You can override most images used by Remote Desktop Manager simply by providing
an image in the Theme folder, the only requirement is that the file uses a specific name. Most
images come in pair, a small one and a large one. You must override both in order to be
consistent.

FOLDER LOCATION

The Theme folder can be found in your local configuration folder, under the Images folder.

Contents | 1089

IMAGE FILE SPECIFICATIONS

TRAY ICON

It must be a standard *.ico file containing at least a 16*16 image. The name must be
Trayicon.ico.

SMALL IMAGES

Png file, 16*16 pixels.

LARGE IMAGES

Png file, 32*32 pixels.

IMAGE FILE NAMES

The file name is standardized as: {EntryType}{Size}.png

For instance for the Folder type, the image names are: GroupFolderLarge.png and
GroupFolderSmall.png. Another example is for RDP sessions, their name is RDPConfigured,
resulting in SessionRDPConfiguredLarge.png and SessionRDPConfiguredSmall.png.

Please consult Image List to see a list of most images.

13.7.21.1 Image List

DESCRIPTION

Here is a partial list of images that are possible to override using the theme folder.

IMAGES

Trayicon.ico

1090 | Remote Desktop Manager

2XClientLarge.png

2XClientSmall.png

AmmyyAdminLarge.png

AmmyyAdminSmall.png

AnydeskLarge.png

AnydeskSmall.png

AnyplaceControlLarge.png

AnyplaceControlSmall.png

AwrcProLarge.png

AwrcProSmall.png

AxelViewerLarge.png

AxelViewerSmall.png

AzureStorageExplorerLarge.png

AzureStorageExplorerSmall.png

BarracudaNgFirewallLarge.png

BarracudaNgFirewallSmall.png

BitviseSshClientLarge.png

BitviseSshClientSmall.png

BomgarRepresentativeConsoleLarge.png

BomgarRepresentativeConsoleSmall.png

CiscoAsdmLarge.png

CiscoAsdmSmall.png

CitrixNetscalerLarge.png

CitrixNetscalerSmall.png

ContactCompanyLarge.png

Contents | 1091

ContactCompanySmall.png

ContactCustomerLarge.png

ContactCustomerSmall.png

ContactDefaultLarge.png

ContactDefaultSmall.png

ContactEmployeeLarge.png

ContactEmployeeSmall.png

ContactFamillyLarge.png

ContactFamillySmall.png

ContactSupplierLarge.png

ContactSupplierSmall.png

ContactSupportLarge.png

ContactSupportSmall.png

CredentialAppleKeychainLarge.png

CredentialAppleKeychainSmall.png

CredentialAuthAnvilPasswordServerLarge.png

CredentialAuthAnvilPasswordServerSmall.png

CredentialChromePasswordManagerLarge.png

CredentialChromePasswordManagerSmall.png

CredentialConnectionStringLarge.png

CredentialConnectionStringSmall.png

CredentialDefaultLarge.png

CredentialDefaultSmall.png

CredentialFirefoxPasswordManagerLarge.png

CredentialFirefoxPasswordManagerSmall.png

1092 | Remote Desktop Manager

CredentialKeePassLarge.png

CredentialKeePassSmall.png

CredentialLastPassLarge.png

CredentialLastPassSmall.png

CredentialOnePasswordLarge.png

CredentialOnePasswordSmall.png

CredentialPMProLarge.png

CredentialPMProSmall.png

CredentialPasswordBoxLarge.png

CredentialPasswordBoxSmall.png

CredentialPasswordSafeLarge.png

CredentialPasswordSafeSmall.png

CredentialPasswordVaultManagerLarge.png

CredentialPasswordVaultManagerSmall.png

CredentialPasswordstateLarge.png

CredentialPasswordstateSmall.png

CredentialPleasantPasswordServerLarge.png

CredentialPleasantPasswordServerSmall.png

CredentialPrivateKeyLarge.png

CredentialPrivateKeySmall.png

CredentialSecretServerLarge.png

CredentialSecretServerSmall.png

CredentialWindowsVaultLarge.png

CredentialWindowsVaultsmall.png

DataEntryAlarmLarge.png

Contents | 1093

DataEntryAlarmSmall.png

DataEntryBankInfoLarge.png

DataEntryBankInfoSmall.png

DataEntryCredentialLarge.png

DataEntryCredentialSmall.png

DataEntryCreditCardLarge.png

DataEntryCreditCardSmall.png

DataEntryCustomLarge.png

DataEntryCustomSmall.png

DataEntryEmailAccountLarge.png

DataEntryEmailAccountSmall.png

DataEntryPassportLarge.png

DataEntryPassportSmall.png

DataEntrySafetyDepositLarge.png

DataEntrySafetyDepositSmall.png

DataEntrySecureNoteLarge.png

DataEntrySecureNoteSmall.png

DataEntrySerialLarge.png

DataEntrySerialSmall.png

DataEntryWalletLarge.png

DataEntryWalletSmall.png

DataEntryWebLarge.png

DataEntryWebSmall.png

Database.NetLarge.png

Database.NetSmall.png

1094 | Remote Desktop Manager

DbVisualizerLarge.png

DbVisualizerSmall.png

DocumentCertificateLarge.png

DocumentCertificateSmall.png

DocumentDefaultLarge.png

DocumentDefaultSmall.png

DocumentExcelLarge.png

DocumentExcelSmall.png

DocumentImageLarge.png

DocumentImageSmall.png

DocumentOneNoteLarge.png

DocumentOneNoteSmall.png

DocumentPDFLarge.png

DocumentPDFSmall.png

DocumentPhoneBookLarge.png

DocumentPhoneBookSmall.png

DocumentPowerPointLarge.png

DocumentPowerPointSmall.png

DocumentTextLarge.png

DocumentTextSmall.png

DocumentVisioLarge.png

DocumentVisioSmall.png

DocumentWordLarge.png

DocumentWordSmall.png

EricomBlazeClientLarge.png

Contents | 1095

EricomBlazeClientSmall.png

FileExplorerLarge.png

FileExplorerSmall.png

FlashfxpLarge.png

FlashfxpSmall.png

GateprotectFirewallAdministrationClientLarge.png

GateprotectFirewallAdministrationClientSmall.png

GroupCompanyLarge.png

GroupCompanySmall.png

GroupCustomerLarge.png

GroupCustomerSmall.png

GroupDatabaseLarge.png

GroupDatabaseSmall.png

GroupDeviceLarge.png

GroupDeviceSmall.png

GroupDomainLarge.png

GroupDomainSmall.png

GroupFolderLarge.png

GroupFolderSmall.png

GroupIdentityLarge.png

GroupIdentitySmall.png

GroupPrinterLarge.png

GroupPrinterSmall.png

GroupRootLarge.png

GroupRootSmall.png

1096 | Remote Desktop Manager

GroupServerLarge.png

GroupServerSmall.png

GroupSiteLarge.png

GroupSiteSmall.png

GroupSoftwareLarge.png

GroupSoftwareSmall.png

GroupWorkstationLarge.png

GroupWorkstationSmall.png

HeidisqlLarge.png

HeidisqlSmall.png

HpIntegratedLightsOutLarge.png

HpIntegratedLightsOutSmall.png

IbmPersonalCommunicationsLarge.png

IbmPersonalCommunicationsSmall.png

IslLightDeskLarge.png

IslLightDeskSmall.png

JavaWebStartLarge.png

JavaWebStartSmall.png

MacroScriptAppleScriptLarge.png

MacroScriptAppleScriptSmall.png

MacroScriptAutoHotKeyLarge.png

MacroScriptAutoHotKeySmall.png

MacroScriptAutoITLarge.png

MacroScriptAutoITSmall.png

MacroScriptCommandLineLarge.png

Contents | 1097

MacroScriptCommandLineSmall.png

MacroScriptDatabaseQueryLarge.png

MacroScriptDatabaseQuerySmall.png

MacroScriptJitBitLarge.png

MacroScriptJitBitSmall.png

MacroScriptMacroLarge.png

MacroScriptMacroSmall.png

MacroScriptPSExecLarge.png

MacroScriptPSExecSmall.png

MacroScriptPowerShellLarge.png

MacroScriptPowerShellLocalLarge.png

MacroScriptPowerShellLocalSmall.png

MacroScriptPowerShellSmall.png

MacroScriptTemplateLarge.png

MacroScriptTemplateSmall.png

MacroScriptVBScriptLarge.png

MacroScriptVBScriptSmall.png

MacroScriptWASPPowerShellLarge.png

MacroScriptWASPPowerShellSmall.png

MacroScriptWMILarge.png

MacroScriptWMISmall.png

MobaxtermLarge.png

MobaxtermSmall.png

MysqlGuiToolsLarge.png

MysqlGuiToolsSmall.png

1098 | Remote Desktop Manager

MysqlworkbenchLarge.png

MysqlworkbenchSmall.png

NavicatPremiumLarge.png

NavicatPremiumSmall.png

NetopGuestLarge.png

NetopGuestSmall.png

NetsupportManagerLarge.png

NetsupportManagerSmall.png

NomachineLarge.png

NomachineSmall.png

NxClientLarge.png

NxClientSmall.png

OfficeWord,ExcelAndPowerPointLarge.png

OfficeWord,ExcelAndPowerPointSmall.png

PdfLarge.png

PdfSmall.png

PenguinetSshClientLarge.png

PenguinetSshClientSmall.png

PgadminIiiLarge.png

PgadminIiiSmall.png

PowertermProLarge.png

PowertermProSmall.png

ProxyNetworks-ProxyMasterLarge.png

ProxyNetworks-ProxyMasterSmall.png

RemoteUtilities-ViewerLarge.png

Contents | 1099

RemoteUtilities-ViewerSmall.png

Remoteassistant365Large.png

Remoteassistant365Small.png

RoyalTsLarge.png

RoyalTsSmall.png

RvtoolsLarge.png

RvtoolsSmall.png

SapGuiLarge.png

SapGuiSmall.png

SapNetweaverLarge.png

SapNetweaverSmall.png

Sccm2012RemoteControlLarge.png

Sccm2012RemoteControlSmall.png

SecurecrtLarge.png

SecurecrtSmall.png

SecurefxLarge.png

SecurefxSmall.png

SessionADConsoleLarge.png

SessionADConsoleSmall.png

SessionAddOnLarge.png

SessionAddOnSmall.png

SessionAppleRemoteDesktopLarge.png

SessionAppleRemoteDesktopSmall.png

SessionAwsLarge.png

SessionAwsSmall.png

1100 | Remote Desktop Manager

SessionAzureLarge.png

SessionAzureSmall.png

SessionAzureTableStorageLarge.png

SessionAzureTableStorageSmall.png

SessionCitrixWebLarge.png

SessionCitrixWebSmall.png

SessionCommandLineLarge.png

SessionCommandLineSmall.png

SessionComputerLarge.png

SessionComputerSmall.png

SessionContactLarge.png

SessionContactSmall.png

SessionCredentialLarge.png

SessionCredentialSmall.png

SessionDamewareLarge.png

SessionDamewareSmall.png

SessionDataEntryLarge.png

SessionDataEntrySmall.png

SessionDataReportLarge.png

SessionDataReportSmall.png

SessionDatabaseLarge.png

SessionDatabaseSmall.png

SessionDeskRollLarge.png

SessionDeskRollSmall.png

SessionDocumentLarge.png

Contents | 1101

SessionDocumentSmall.png

SessionDropBoxLarge.png

SessionDropBoxSmall.png

SessionFtpLarge.png

SessionFtpSmall.png

SessionGatewayLarge.png

SessionGatewaySmall.png

SessionGroupLarge.png

SessionGroupSmall.png

SessionHostLarge.png

SessionHostSmall.png

SessionHpRgsLarge.png

SessionHpRgsSmall.png

SessionHyperVLarge.png

SessionHyperVSmall.png

SessionICALarge.png

SessionICASmall.png

SessionIntelAMTLarge.png

SessionIntelAMTSmall.png

SessionInventoryReportLarge.png

SessionInventoryReportSmall.png

SessionItermLarge.png

SessionItermSmall.png

SessionLogMeInLarge.png

SessionLogMeInSmall.png

1102 | Remote Desktop Manager

SessionPCAnywhereLarge.png

SessionPCAnywhereSmall.png

SessionPlayListLarge.png

SessionPlayListSmall.png

SessionPowerShellLarge.png

SessionPowerShellSmall.png

SessionPuttyLarge.png

SessionPuttySmall.png

SessionRDPConfiguredLarge.png

SessionRDPConfiguredSmall.png

SessionRadminLarge.png

SessionRadminSmall.png

SessionRemoteAssistanceLarge.png

SessionRemoteAssistanceSmall.png

SessionS3Large.png

SessionS3Small.png

SessionSNMPReportLarge.png

SessionSNMPReportSmall.png

SessionScreenConnectLarge.png

SessionScreenConnectSmall.png

SessionSessionToolLarge.png

SessionSessionToolSmall.png

SessionSkyDriveLarge.png

SessionSkyDriveSmall.png

SessionSpiceworksLarge.png

Contents | 1103

SessionSpiceworksSmall.png

SessionSyncLarge.png

SessionSyncSmall.png

SessionTeamViewerLarge.png

SessionTeamViewerSmall.png

SessionTerminalConsoleLarge.png

SessionTerminalConsoleSmall.png

SessionVMRCLarge.png

SessionVMRCSmall.png

SessionVMWareConsoleLarge.png

SessionVMWareConsoleSmall.png

SessionVMWareLarge.png

SessionVMWareSmall.png

SessionVNCLarge.png

SessionVNCSmall.png

SessionVPNLarge.png

SessionVPNSmall.png

SessionVirtualBoxLarge.png

SessionVirtualBoxSmall.png

SessionVirtualPCLarge.png

SessionVirtualPCSmall.png

SessionWebBrowserLarge.png

SessionWebBrowserSmall.png

SessionWindowsVirtualPCLarge.png

SessionWindowsVirtualPCSmall.png

1104 | Remote Desktop Manager

SessionXWindowLarge.png

SessionXWindowSmall.png

SessionXenServerLarge.png

SessionXenServerSmall.png

SmartftpLarge.png

SmartftpSmall.png

SqlServerManagementStudioLarge.png

SqlServerManagementStudioSmall.png

StatusAddOnMissingLarge.png

StatusAddOnMissingSmall.png

StatusConnectedLarge.png

StatusConnectedSmall.png

SupermicroIpmiUtilitiesLarge.png

SupermicroIpmiUtilitiesSmall.png

SyncActiveDirectoryLarge.png

SyncActiveDirectorySmall.png

SyncCSVLarge.png

SyncCSVSmall.png

TeraTermProLarge.png

TeraTermProSmall.png

TextLarge.png

TextSmall.png

ToadLarge.png

ToadSmall.png

VisioLarge.png

Contents | 1105

VisioSmall.png

VmwareHorizonViewClientLarge.png

VmwareHorizonViewClientSmall.png

VmwareRemoteConsoleLarge.png

VmwareRemoteConsoleSmall.png

WinboxLarge.png

WinboxSmall.png

XmailManagerLarge.png

XmailManagerSmall.png

XmanagerLarge.png

XmanagerSmall.png

XshellLarge.png

XshellSmall.png

ZocLarge.png

ZocSmall.png

SPLASHSCREEN

It is possible to personalize the splashscreen by adding a splashscreen.png file in

Images\Themes. The recommended size is 520 by 320 but the window will automatically adapt
to the image.
13.7.22 PowerShell

DESCRIPTION

Remote PowerShell allows you to run scripts on remote computers. This is an extremely
powerful tool that can be used to extract a ton of information as well as modify the remote
computer's settings.

1106 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

Please consult the following topics for some PowerShell How-to:

· Extract TeamViewer ID
· Custom Export to CSV
· Remote Management
· Script Execution Policy
· Change your Synchronize source

REFERENCES

http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee176949.aspx

http://www.howtogeek.com/117192/how-to-run-powershell-commands-on-remote-computers/
13.7.22.1 Ex tract TeamView er ID

DESCRIPTION

You can use Powershell to extract the TeamViewer ID from a session.

SETTINGS

Here a script to extract the TeamViewer ID from a session:

$sessions = Get-RDM-Session | where {$_.Session.Kind -eq "TeamViewer"}

$sessions[0].Session.GetProperty("TeamViewer", "ID")
13.7.22.2 Custom Ex port to CSV

DESCRIPTION

Many customers ask for a special export that would contain specific fields.

SETTINGS

Contents | 1107

Here is a small script that can be used to generate URLs for our new web protocol handler. We
generate a csv file that contains the name and the URL.
## get the data source ID, note that the "Create Web Url" button generates a different ID
$dsid = Get-RDM-DataSource | where {$_.IsCurrent -eq "X"} | select -expand "ID"
## get the RDP sessions, create a new object with the desired fields.
## Simply append "add-member" commands to include a new field
$s = Get-RDM-Session |
where {$_.Session.Kind -eq "RDPConfigured"} |
foreach {
new-Object Object |
Add-Member NoteProperty Name $_.Name –PassThru |
Add-Member NoteProperty URL "rdm://open?DataSource=$dsid&Session=$($_.ID)" –PassThr
};
## save to csv, the field names are used as column headers.
$s | export-csv c:\temp\sessions.csv -notypeinformation;

13.7.22.3 Remote Management

DESCRIPTION

Default settings disallow remote management calls, there is also the firewall that is blocking
requests on the associated ports. Luckily a single PowerShell command will perform all the
necessary adjustments without prompting you for each step.

SETTINGS

In an elevated privileges PowerShell session, run the command below:

Enable-PSRemoting -Force

13.7.22.4 Script Ex ecution Policy

DESCRIPTION

By default, no scripts can be run on a new installations. Not only must you enable script
execution, but you must choose if you require scripts to have a digital signature.

SETTINGS

In a PowerShell command window, type Get-Help About_Signing to see what is best for your
scenario.

1108 | Remote Desktop Manager

If you are satisfied by RemoteSigned, simply type in Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned in an PowerShell se

13.7.22.5 Change your Synchronizer source

DESCRIPTION

If you have been using the Remote Desktop Manager version with the Synchronizer Action on
Entry Mismatch feature, the following steps will allow you to easily change your source with a
Powershell Command without having to recreate all your sessions, thus marking all selected
entries as created by the synchronizer.

SETTINGS

1. Select your Synchronizer entry in your Tree view, right click and select Properties.

2. In the Advanced side menu of the Properties, copy the Session ID (you will then need that
ID number to insert in your Powershell Command).

Advanced - Session ID

3. In your Tree view select the entries (ctrl+click) you wish to mark as created by the
synchronizer. Then, right-click and go in Edit – Edit (Special Actions).

Contents | 1109

Selected entries - Edit (Special Actions)

4. Select the Custom Powershell Command.

1110 | Remote Desktop Manager

Edit (Special Actions)

5. Write the following line for your Powershell Command:

$connection.CreationSource = "enter synchronizer ID number"
$RDM.Save();

Contents | 1111

Custom Powershell Command

13.8 Tips And Tricks

DESCRIPTION

Our favorite tips and tricks are in this section.

If you have a suggestion for improving an existing tip or even to suggest a new one, please send
a note to [email protected].
13.8.1 Allow Open Multiple Connections

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager allows you to open multiple connections on the same host.

SOLUTION

1112 | Remote Desktop Manager

You can enable the "Allow open multiple connections" option in the Advanced Tab of an entry.

Advanced Tab

OPTIO DESCRIPTION
N

True Allow open multiple connections will be active for this entry only.

False Allow open multiple connections will be disabled for this entry only.

13.8.2 Automating Remote Microsoft Management Console (MMC)

DESCRIPTION

You can configure a MMC Snap-In console to run on any of your servers. The Snap-In need to
support remote access.

SETTINGS

1. Create the session tool via New Entry – Add Macros/Scripts/Tools.

2. Select Command Line.

Contents | 1113

3. Name the session DHCP.

4. Type the following in the Run field: dhcpmgmt.msc /ComputerName $HOST$ ($HOST$ is
the variable that will be replaced by the server name or IP address).

DHCP Macros/Scripts/Tools

5. Select Run as Administrator in the Execution Mode tab.

If you are running a Windows 64bit edition, you would need to enable the Run in
64-bit mode option in the Execution Mode tab.

6. Click OK to save your entry.

7. Now, you would need to verify that your sessions use the appropriate credential to run the
tool. In the Management Tools section of each sessions, make sure you’ve selected the
proper credentials to be supplied:

1114 | Remote Desktop Manager

Tools section

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use default credentials Use the credentials from the Windows session

Use session credentials Use the same credentials as the session

Prompt for credentials Prompts for the credentials on use.

Custom credentials Use the Username, Password and Domain specify

Credential repository Specify a set of credentials from the repository

Use my personal Use My Personal Credentials

credentials

To run the Snap-In, select your session and execute the tool from the dashboard.

Contents | 1115

Dashboard

13.8.3 Create a list of credentials

DESCRIPTION

If you wish to create a report containing a full list of all your credentials here are the steps to
follow:

1. In the menu File – Export – Export Special, select the option Export All (.csv).

1116 | Remote Desktop Manager

File - Export

2. Enter a password to create a password protected zip file.

Contents | 1117

Connection Export

3. When you try to open your Zip file, it will prompt you for your password.

Password

4. Once your password entered and your file unzipped, you will have your full list of credentials
with all your information in a *.csv file format.

1118 | Remote Desktop Manager

Excel Sheet

13.8.4 Creating Shortcuts

OVERVIEW

There are a many scenarios where it makes sense for an entry to appear more than once in the
UI. For example, you might want to:

· Assign different access rights to the folder.

· Create a favorite folder with everything centralized.

· Reuse a document for different scenarios.

However, doing this manually is time consuming, tedious and prone to error. But no longer!

SOLUTION

Fortunately, Remote Desktop Manager makes creating shortcuts simple and quick! It works by
saving the entry once in the database, while linking it to more than one group. So when Remote
Desktop Manager loads the data, it automatically creates a link to the original entry. You don’t
have to lift a finger – everything is done for you, to save your time and simplify your life.

Same Entry in Two Groups

Contents | 1119

CREATING A SHORTCUT: OPTION 1

One way to create a shortcut is by using the menu Edit -> Create Shortcut...

Create Shortcut Command

Simply choose the destination folder for the shortcut. Remote Desktop Manager will
automatically refresh and display the new shortcut in the list.

1120 | Remote Desktop Manager

There is no visual difference between the shortcut and the original entry.
Therefore, you’ll need to delete all entries to completely remove them.

CREATING A SHORTCUT: OPTION 2

A second way to create a shortcut is via the session properties. Since the shortcut is based on a
group list, simply add a session in multiple groups by setting two or more destinations, which are
separated by semicolons “;”. You can also use the browse button (…) and select more than one
group by holding the Ctrl key while clicking on the tree node.

Folder Example

13.8.5 Data Migration

DESCRIPTION

Here are the steps to follow when copying data from one data source to another.

If you have used the Document entries in the Stored in database mode or
used attachments, the binary content of the documents is NOT exported in any
of our export formats. These documents/attachments MUST be handled
manually.

Contents | 1121

If you are using a self-managed RDBMS (SQL Server, MySQL, MariaDB), you
can use their management tools to move the database to another server.
Please follow their respective documentation on how to successfully transfer not
only that data, but also the user accounts.

SQL Server: MSDN Article on how to move databases

MySQL: MySQL Copying databases

MariaDB: MySQLDump

The migration is simply an export of your original data source followed by an import in the new
destination data source.

EXPORT

1. Select your data source in the data source selection drop down list.

1122 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Source drop down menu

2. Select File – Export – Export All (.rdm).

Contents | 1123

Export menu

3. Select your export entries options. You can choose to export your credentials and may also
choose to use a Master Key as an added security layer. For a typical migration you would check
those options.

Ensure that you do not forget the Master Key as you will not be able to decrypt the
data without it.

1124 | Remote Desktop Manager

Export Entries Option

4. Save the file with the name and location of your choice.

IMPORT

1. Select the destination data source in the data source selection drop down list.

2. Select File – Import – Import (.rdm, .pvm, *xml).

Contents | 1125

Import menu

3. In the Import Entries dialog use the ellipsis button to browse for the data file exported in the
previous section.

1126 | Remote Desktop Manager

Import Entries

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Import in root Import your entries in the root of your data source, meaning it will
keep the exact same structure (group, folder, credentials) as the one
you've exported. It is the suggested method of import.

Import in current Import all your entries under the selected folder of the data source.
folder

4. In the next dialog you'll be presented with a list of all entries that are in the data file. You can
select which entry you wish to import or you can Select All to import all of your entries. Simply
press OK to complete the process

Contents | 1127

Import Entries - Session selection

13.8.6 Data Report

DESCRIPTION

The Data Report session type can be use to empower any/all users to generate reports, without
having to grant them access to the actual server.

SETTINGS

GENERAL

1128 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Report Session

Create a Data Report entry and define the connection string by either:

· Specify the connection in the entry itself.

· Use a credential entry.

· Inherited from a parent.

· Prompt for credentials.

PARAMETERS

Contents | 1129

Data Report Session - Parameters Tab

Specify the parameters by setting the name, type and default value of all parameters.

QUERY

Data Report Session - Query Tab

1130 | Remote Desktop Manager

Enter the query in the Query tab, which features a SQL syntax-highlighted text box with line
numbers.

Ensure that your DBA sets the proper security groups, and that each specific
user(s) has access to it.

13.8.7 Edit Hosts File

DESCRIPTION

IT technicians, as well as web developers, often need to edit the Windows hosts file. This
requires starting your favorite editor using elevated privileges (obviously only if UAC is active),
browsing for the hosts file which is deep in the windows folder and enclosed in a hidden folder
on top of that.

For your own machine you can create a shortcut to achieve this goal, but experience tells us that
most people don't bother with it, ending up losing precious time when they must modify the hosts
file.

What better tool then one that you use every day, which is already running in the notification area,
to implement a solution with. If the machines you work on have the same setup, this will work for
all of them.

Simply create a session with the proper settings.

STEPS

1. Create a new Command Line (External Application) session and enter a session name. In
the General tab,click on the ellipsis button and select your editor of choice in the Run text box.
Then, paste the following after the name of the program: "c:
\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts". Ensure a blank space separates the two and include the
double quotes.

Contents | 1131

Command Line (External Application) - General Tab

2. In the Advanced tab, check the Run as Administrator option.

Command Line (External Application) - Advanced Tab

1132 | Remote Desktop Manager

Close your editor before proceeding with those steps. If your editor is already
running, it will not elevate the privileges. We have implemented an AutoHotKey
script that closes the editor of choice, but being that it shuts off without saving
pending changes, it is not a risk-free solution. It will all depend on your chosen
editor's reaction to the WM_QUIT message.

It is a simple and efficient solution. You can use this for any tool you use regularly. Paired with
shared data source it makes for a powerful library of tools for your team.

ALTERNATIVE IF YOU WANT TO USE THE PARAMETERS TAB

Some people wish to use the parameters tab because, upon launching, it will display a dialog
where you can confirm the value of the parameters and even allows you to change them for
whole new values.

1. Create a new Command Line session and in the Advanced tab, check the Run as
Administrator and disable the Use Shell Execute option.

Command Line (External Application) - Advanced Tab

2. In the General tab,click on the ellipsis button and select your editor of choice in the Run text
box. Then enter "{1}" after the name of the executable, keeping a space between the two values
and including the quotes.

Contents | 1133

Command Line (External Application) - General Tab

3. In the Parameters tab, set Parameter # 1 type to Text and then enter the following in the
Default Value: c:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts

Command Line (External Application) - Parameters Tab

This is helpful when mostly using the tool with a certain file, but occasionally need to edit another
file. You could have separate entry for each file you commonly edit, but this shows how flexible
Remote Desktop Manager can be.

1134 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.8.8 Handling RDP Connections

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager can manage *.rdp file to open and connect sessions immediately.
Even if your application is closed, you can open a *.rdp file. The application will open and start
your connection.

SETTINGS

Remote Desk top Manager installation wizard

When deploying an installation of Remote Desktop Manager, you will be able to associate your
*.rdp file to the application, allowing you to start an *.rdp file from your computer to be opened
inside Remote Desktop Manager.

.rdp File

If an *.rdp file is launched, the session will start in Remote Desktop Manager. You can then
create a new entry with this session by simply clicking on save session as from the edit section
of the Actions tab.

Contents | 1135

13.8.9 HTML Export Using Symmetric Encryption

OVERVIEW

As we all know, email isn't secure. But it’s convenient, fast and free – and so many of us ignore
the security risks.

Yet when you step back and think about it, ask yourself: Would you ever think of sending cash
through the regular mail? Even sending it through a courier is risky! But if you send sensitive
information via email, that’s pretty much what you’re doing.

Fortunately, there’s a solution!

We've developed a feature that allows for symmetric encryption of sensitive information, so that
it can then be securely sent via email (or any other protocol) while keeping the data safe.

This feature can also be used to save/export/backup sensitive information to disk.

HOW IT WORKS

The feature is simple and easy to use:

· Select one or multiple data entries.

· Right-click Import/Export – Export Data Entry – Export Data Entry (.html).

· When prompted, enter a password.

· Save the file to disk.

And that’s it! Your document is ready to be securely sent via email or any other protocol.

EXPORT MULTIPLE ENTRIES

And what if you’re exporting multiple data entries? To prevent prying eyes from seeing more than
they should, each secured string must be individually decrypted. Someone is walking by your
desk, simply hit F5 or close the file, and the information is secure again.

A WORD ABOUT AES-256

1136 | Remote Desktop Manager

We use AES-256 to encrypt/decrypt your sensitive data. Since the decryption is done entirely in
the browser, there’s no need for external tools, downloads or installs. Here’s a snapshot of the
encrypted values:

Html File Content

SAFE & SMART VIRTUAL BACKUP

In addition, HTML Export using symmetric encryption is a great way to securely – and virtually –
backup your passwords and other sensitive information. It allows you to share information via
email, or simply send the file to your personal email account as a backup. The possibilities are
endless, and it’s just another way that we’re working hard to help you centralize it, secure it and
simplify IT!

PRINTING

Sorry, decryption of the printed document isn’t supported. We have yet to figure out a way to do
this. If someone ever does please let us know.
13.8.10 Keep Tabs Opened

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager offers you the possibility of keeping a tab open even when
disconnected, thus allowing you to restart a remote device or simply keep your work area set up
to quickly resume after a work interruption.

WORKFLOW

Your session must be running in embedded mode. Once your session is open, you'll notice the
Keep tab on disconnect option in your Action ribbon.

Contents | 1137

Actions Ribbon

Enable the Keep tab on disconnect to be able to perform a logoff or restart while keeping the
tab present. A panel will replace the content of the session.

Connection panel

This panel offers three actions:

· Close: You changed your mind and want to close the tab
· Connect: Connect the session
· Connect When Available: Pings the host until it becomes available, then connects the session.

If you wish to have the option enabled by default, edit your session and in the User Interface tab
enabled the Keep tab page opened on disconnect option.

1138 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP session - User Interface

13.8.11 Open RD Gateway Only when Unable to Ping Host

DESCRIPTION

Use your RD Gateway only when your host is unreachable.

SETTINGS

In your Microsoft Remote Desktop (RDP) entry, under Connection, you can enable Open
gateway only when unable to ping host, connectivity with the remote host will be tested to
see if its reachable, if not, the RD Gateway will be used.

Contents | 1139

Connection Tab

13.8.12 Passcode Prompt When Opening an Entry

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes you want to ensure that your users are really opening the right session.

WORKFLOW

In the Events tab, in the Before Connection section, when you select Message Prompt, you will
notice a Passcode field.

1140 | Remote Desktop Manager

Events Tab

There is a field to enter a Message and another one for a Passcode. The idea is not to add
another password to launch the session, but rather to act as a safeguard. For example, you
could set the message to “Warning! This is a production server. Type YES to continue.” and set
the Passcode to YES.

This allows you to give just a little jolt when you attempt to launch the session!

Passcode In Action

Contents | 1141

13.8.13 RDP Session Time Limits

DESCRIPTION

When you close you RDP sessions, you may inadvertently (or willfully) leave your session running
on the remote host. Depending on the programs you have left running, this can consume
excessive resources and can be even interpreted as a security risk.

Windows allows you to control how Remote Desktop Services handle sessions through Group
Policies. This can be administered on the host computer itself, or be pushed at the domain level
for multiple hosts.

What follows is the procedure to perform on a single host computer.

PROCEDURE

1. Launch Edit group policy. (Press the windows key, and type "edit group policy", for
Windows 8 it is in the Settings category).

2. Browse to:

Computer Configuration
Administrative Templates
Windows Components
Remote Desktop Services
Remote Desktop Session Host

Session Time limits

The settings are described as follows (when you alter the setting using the Group Policy Editor,
you will see a detailed description).

Set time limit for This policy setting allows you to configure a time limit for
disconnected sessions disconnected Remote Desktop Services sessions. By
default, Remote Desktop Services allows users to
disconnect from a Remote Desktop Services session
without logging off and ending the session.

Set time limit for active but This policy setting allows you to specify the maximum
idle Remote Desktop amount of time that an active Remote Desktop Services
Services sessions

1142 | Remote Desktop Manager

session can be idle (without user input) before it is

automatically disconnected.

Set time limit for active This policy setting allows you to specify the maximum
Remote Desktop Services amount of time that a Remote Desktop Services session
sessions can be active before it is automatically disconnected.

End session when time This policy setting specifies whether to end a Remote
limits are reached Desktop Services session that has timed out instead of
disconnecting it.

3. Double click on the setting (or right-click, Edit), an edition form will appear.

Contents | 1143

4. Select Enabled, this will enable the control in the lower section.

1144 | Remote Desktop Manager

5. Choose your desired value from the list.

6. Press Apply.

7. Repeat for other settings as desired. Note that for true/false settings there is no control in the
Options area. Just enabling the policy will activate the setting.

Contents | 1145

From then on, all future sessions established on that host will follow these policy settings.

You may want to explore all the policies below Remote Desktop Services, you may find hidden
gems that would help your organization.
13.8.14 Remote Install with PSExec

DESCRIPTION

When you need to perform a remote installation, you have multiple options. Such as a domain
policy, a logon script or PSExec.

Depending on the way the security is configured on the remote computer, you may run into
issues where even an administrator cannot install an application properly. For these cases, you
need to run PSExec in the context of the system account.

First of all, you will need to install the Sysinternals tools from Microsoft, because you will need the
help of PSExec.exe in the execution of this script. (https://technet.microsoft.com/en-
us/sysinternals/bb842062)

Then, download the *.msi or the *.exe of the application you wish to install and save the file on a
shared drive that is accessible from the remote computer.

Options exist to copy files remotely, please refer to PSExec documentation for
further details.

SETTINGS

1. Create a Macros/Scripts/Tools entry, use the PSExec type. In the Command line section,
add the following (long) line:
C:\Tools\Sysinternals\psexec.exe \\$HOST$ -i -u $TOOL_DOMAIN$\$TOOL_USERNAME$ -p $TOOL_PA
k "msiexec /i \\SRV-DEPLOY\msi\Setup.RemoteDesktopManager.10.9.0.0.msi /quiet /passive /n

The full path to the *.msi must be entered. A shared network is recommended in
this case.

A few notes on that command line:

1. Replace the path to launch PSExec.

1146 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Add the appropriate credentials in the Tools section of your session, if left blank it will use
your current Windows session credentials.

3. Indicate the appropriate server shared to get the .msi or .exe.

4. When you are ready to deploy your application on the remote computer, you just need to
select the appropriate session in the Navigation Pane and launch the Macros/Scripts/Tools
from the Dashboard. The Macros/Scripts/Tools entry can also be launch via the RDM Agent.

USAGE

The Macros/Scripts/Tools type are always run in the context of a session. In fact they use the
information in the session to identify what host to run the tool against, that is why we used the
$HOST$ variable.

For this reason, the first step is to select a session, any type of session will do (RDP, SSH, etc).
After selecting the session, the dashboard will display the Macros/Scripts/Tools. Simply
clicking on the tool will therefore launch it against the host linked to the currently selected
session. You can select hosts and install in sequence.
13.8.15 Run as Another User

DESCRIPTION

There are many different type of credentials and they are used by a multitude of users. Be it a
mobile warrior, a sysadmin that follows best practices and doesn't log on to his computer using
his domain admin account or even a safety conscious parent that creates limited accounts for
the kids on the family computer. This requires the capability to start an application under a
different set of credentials while we are already logged on using our main credentials.

The problem is solved by using the Windows Run As command.

The Run As command requires that the Secondary Logon service be running.

SETTINGS

In Windows you can manually start any process as a different user using SHIFT + right-click to
get the context menu.

Contents | 1147

SHIFT + right-click popup menu

The Run As command has many parameters to change its behaviour, we wont cover them all
here, but if you have an advanced scenario we suggest you consult the Windows help.

OPTIONS
You have two options when it comes to Run As:

BUILT-IN RUN AS

In Remote Desktop Manager, some sessions/tools types support the Run As functionality.
For a complete list and configuration information see the Built-In Run As help topic.

MANUAL RUN AS

Your session type is not supported and need help to manually configure Run As? See the
Manual Run As help topic.
13.8.15.1 Built-in RunAs

DESCRIPTION

This article describes the built in method of using Run As. For sessions types
that don't yet support the built in method you can follow the manual steps outlined
here.

SETTINGS

1148 | Remote Desktop Manager

SUPPORTED TYPES

The following types currently support Run As.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Session · Command Line

· PowerShell

Macros/Scr · Command Line

ipts/Tools
· PowerShell Local

· PowerShell Remote

· PSExec

Session · SQL Server Management Studio

Add-on

SESSION

Contents | 1149

Command Line (External Application) - Run As Tab

Sessions that support Run As will have a Run As tab where you specify which credentials to use
when starting with Run As.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

None No Run As is performed.

Current session Use the same credentials as defined in the session.

Custom Use specified custom credentials.

credentials

Credential Use a link credential entry.

repository

1150 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Use my personal Use a link private credential entry.

credentials

MACROS/SCRIPTS/TOOLS

With tools session types you only need to specify Run as different user in Advanced tab. At
execution time the credentials will be resolved and used to start the Windows Credentials unless
you select Use session credentials, in which case it will use those active for the session.

Powershell (Remote) - Advanced Tab

With tools session types you only need to specify Run as different user. At execution time the
credentials will be resolved and used to start the Run As process.

Contents | 1151

SESSION ADD-ON

SQL Server Management Studio supports Run As. Configure it like you would configure a
normal session.

SQL Server Management Studio - General

Click on Run as different user to modify the Run As settings.

1152 | Remote Desktop Manager

Run As Different User

NOTES

Run as Different User and Run As Administrator are mutually exclusive.

Run as Different User doesn't allow for Shell Execute.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND LINE SESSION WITH RUN AS DIFFERENT USER ON THE

SAME WORKGROUP/DOMAIN

1. Create a new Command Line session.

2. Set the command to CMD.

Contents | 1153

Command Line (External Application) - General Tab

3. Specify the Run As credentials.

Command Line (External Application) - Run As Tab

4. Save your session.

5. Run your Command Line session.

1154 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.8.15.2 Manual RunAs

DESCRIPTION

This article describes the manual method of using RunAs. Some types support
built-in RunAs details are available here.

SETTINGS

SCENARIOS

There are two major scenarios when using RunAs: the authentication server is accessible
directly from you machine or you need delayed authentication.

· AUTHENTICATION SERVER IS LOCALLY ACCESSIBLE

This scenario is for when you are already authenticated on a domain/workgroup and you
need to switch to another account of the same domain/workgroup.

· DELAYED AUTHENTICATION

This scenario is for when it is impossible to log on your machine using the other set of
credentials. For example you need to connect to a client's domain using your laptop that is on
your company's domain. This will require using the /NETONLY parameter of RunAs.

EXAMPLES

Contents | 1155

The RunAs command is invoked from an entry of the "Command line" type. Create the entry
either by pressing the Insert key or by using the menus. Select the "Command line" type and
enter a name for it.

EXAMPLE 1: RUNNING A COMMAND PROMPT AS ANOTHER USER OF THE SAME

WORKGROUP/DOMAIN

1. You can use the ellipsis button to browse for the runas.exe command, but if you are in a
shared data source and the session is used on various operating systems, it's better to
type in "%systemroot%\system32\runas.exe" because it will work on all of them.

2. Append /user:$DOMAIN$\$USERNAME$, keeping it outside of the quotes. Note the

use of two variables that will pull the appropriate value from other fields of the same
session. For more information please consult the Variables topic.

3. Append the name of the executable you want to run. Enclose it in quotes if the full path
contains spaces. In our case we can simply add CMD,

Command Line (External Application) - General Tab

4. Specify your credentials in the Host and Credential tab. Note that when you are not part
of a domain, you should enter the computer name in the domain field.

1156 | Remote Desktop Manager

5. In the Events tab you must define a typing macro

5.1. Set the Initial Delay to the lowest value that will allow the initial prompt to appear. On
most systems 1 second is sufficient

5.2. In the Typing macro field, enter the following: $PASSWORD${ENTER}. For more
information please consult Auto Typing Macro.

Events - After Connect Tab

Contents | 1157

6. In the Security Settings tab, you must check "Allow password in variable".

When you run your session, a command prompt window appears requesting the password for
the user. The Typing Macro will fill it in after the 1 second delay. After this, the command window
that is running under the different credentials appears. Note that the title indicates the other
identity.

EXAMPLE 2: RUNNING SQL SERVER MANAGEMENT STUDIO AS A USER OF A

DIFFERENT DOMAIN/WORKGROUP FOR USING WINDOWS AUTHENTICATION

The are minor differences with Example 1, but here is the full procedure to make it easy to read

1158 | Remote Desktop Manager

Note that most of our entries now support NetOnly as a built in feature.

1. You can use the ellipsis button to browse for the runas.exe command, but if you are in a
shared data source and the session will be used on various operating systems, it's better
to type in "%systemroot%\system32\runas.exe" because it will work on all of them.

2. Append /netonly /user:$DOMAIN$\$USERNAME$, keeping it outside of the quotes.

Note the use of two variables that will pull the appropriate value from other fields of the
same session. For more information please consult the Variables topic. Also note the use
of the NetOnly parameter, it signals that the credentials will be used for network access
only.

3. Append the name of the Management Studio executable and its parameters. All this
needs to be within the same double quotes

3.1.SQL Server Management studio is located at "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft SQL

Server\110\Tools\Binn\ManagementStudio\Ssms.exe" on most machines, adapt to
your situation if it's not the same.

3.2.My parameters look like this: -S sql.windjammer.loc -E. -S is for the server name, -E
is to use windows authentication, you can even specify the database using -d
__DB_NAME__ (i.e. -d rdm)

The result is: "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft SQL

Server\110\Tools\Binn\ManagementStudio\Ssms.exe -S sql.windjammer.loc -E"

4. Uncheck "Use Shell Execute" (this must be done for most Windows Applications)

Contents | 1159

7. Specify your credentials in the Host and Credential tab. Note that when you are not part
of a domain, you should enter the computer name in the domain field.

8. In the Events tab you must define a typing macro

1160 | Remote Desktop Manager

8.1.Set the Initial Delay to the lowest value that will allow the initial prompt to appear. On
most systems 1 second is sufficient

8.2.In the Typing macro field, enter the following: $PASSWORD${ENTER}. For more
information please consult Auto Typing Macro.

9. In the advanced tab, you must check "Enable password in variable".

Run the session and wait for Management studio to appear, attentive users will notice that it
looks like you are running under your local credentials because of these...

Contents | 1161

A simple query will prove that it worked, perform a SELECT SUSER_NAME() query.

1162 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.8.16 Running Remote Desktop Manager as Another User

DESCRIPTION

There are many different type of credentials and they are used by a multitude of users. On
Windows systems, having multiple user accounts enables the ability to launch Remote Desktop
Manager under a different set of credentials while we are already logged on using main
credentials. This allows for using Integrated security to connect to an Advanced Data Source.

These solutions require the "Secondary Log-on" service to be running.

If the other account belongs to a domain different than the one from your
workstation, solution A must be used.

SOLUTION A - RUNAS COMMAND

This solution is ideal if you do this often, you can create a batch file with the command and
simply type in your password when prompted.

The RunAs command has many parameters to change its behaviour, we wont cover them all
here, but if you have an advanced scenario we suggest you consult the Windows help.

1. Open a command prompt.

2. Type runas /netonly /user:{your username here}. Usage of the NetOnly parameter
signals that the credentials will be used for network access only. Ensure you username is
entered as your infrastructure requires. Typically its {domain}\{user}, i.e.
windjammer\david

3. Append the full path to Remote Desktop Manager, typically %ProgramFiles(x86)%

\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager\RemoteDesktopManager.exe, but you must
ensure this is correct for your machine.

4. When you press enter, you are prompted for the password, then the application will
launch.

Contents | 1163

RunAs command example

SOLUTION B - SHIFT+RIGHT CLICK ON THE SHORTCUT OR

EXECUTABLE TO REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

When you press Shift + Right Click on an executable, you'll notice an additional menu item for
Run as different user.

Shift + Right lick contextual menu

You are presented with a logon form in which you must specify the username and password.

13.8.17 SQL Server Data Source with Integrated Security

OVERVIEW

1164 | Remote Desktop Manager

We will take you through a step by step guide to configure and test a Remote Desktop Manager
deployment against an SQL Server data source using Integrated Security.

Any user (domain, local machine or SQL user) that has a server role of sysadmin is
automatically an administrator of Remote Desktop Manager.

CREATE THE DATABASE

The first step is to create the database that will store all your entries.

Click on the ellipsis button in the Navigation Pane, then click on Add a new data source.

Navigation Pane - Data Sources

Select the Microsoft SQL Server data source and click OK.

Contents | 1165

Microsoft SQL Server Data Source

· Specify the Name, Server and Database

· Authenticate with a user that is part of the sysadmin role.

1166 | Remote Desktop Manager

Create the SQL Server Data Source

If the logged-on Windows User is not part of the SQL Server sysadmin role and
you've configured the server to use SQL Server and Windows Authentication
Mode, then use a SQL Server user (SA for example) that has the appropriate role
assigned. You can then add yourself as a Remote Desktop Manager user later
and change the data source to use Integrated security.

· From the upgrade tab, click Test Server then Create Database to create the SQL Server
database.

Contents | 1167

Test the server and create the database

Press OK to close the dialogs. In the Navigation Pane, select the newly created data source
from the data source drop down list.

Select the Data Source

CREATE USERS

1168 | Remote Desktop Manager

To create users, navigate to Administration – Users.

Administration - Users

Click Add Users.

User and security management

Check the Integrated security (Active Directory) box and click the ellipsis button to select the
domain user to add.

Contents | 1169

User Management – Integrated Security

Select the User type. Grant the Add, Edit, and Delete rights (optional, restricted user only). For
more information on user types and rights, please consult the Administration – Users topic.

Keep the Create SQL Server Login and User box checked. This will in effect
cause Remote Desktop Manager to map a new login to the domain account and
link it to a user.

You can uncheck this in the case where your DBA has created your login already
on the SQL Server.

Repeat these steps for each user that needs access to this data source in Remote Desktop
Manager.

CONFIGURE REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FOR OTHER

WORKSTATIONS

To configure the data source on other workstations, three methods are available:

1170 | Remote Desktop Manager

· Create the data source as done previously, making sure to check the Integrated Security
(Active Directory) box.

· Export the data source from the initial workstation and import it into Remote Desktop
Manager on all client workstations.

· Use our Custom Installer Manager service to help distribute the application and
personalize the installation process.

TEST THE CONFIGURATION

If you have a second set of domain credentials, you could use this trick to test locally. Running
Remote Desktop Manager as Another User

Now in your Remote Desktop Manager with admin rights, create a few roles (Admin, Production,
Staging) and assign them users.
13.8.18 SQL Server Maintenance Plans

DESCRIPTION

Sadly, a SQL Server Instance is not something you can simply install and run without proper
care. Keeping the default values for new databases will almost certainly cause issues in the long
run.

If maintenance is not performed regularly, the database files will grow and grow until the mere
size of the files will decrease performance and finally reach a point where the client application
appears unusable.

We are NOT a DBA shop. Asking the question "What is the best maintenance plan I can
implement?" to seasoned DBAs will invariably result in an answer similar to "It depends".

These "pointers" are provided as is and we cannot be held responsible if they don’t meet your
requirements. You must consult a qualified database administrator to confirm your needs and
how to meet them.

The backup strategy really depends on the amount of data you are comfortable with losing in
the event of failure, yes... expect to lose data, the cost of a system that does NOT lose any data
is quite high and is not in the scope of this topic.

If you are comfortable with only being able to revert to last night’s backup, you can set the DB to
simple recovery model, and take a nightly full backup.

If you want something a little more robust we have seen the following:

Contents | 1171

· A daily full backup of the DB.

· More frequent backup of the transaction log, lets say every 4 hours starting at 06:00 and
ending at 18:01 or 22:01

· A cleanup task to remove older backups.

If you need to be able to recover data that is minutes in the past, then you really need a qualified
DBA to help you.

Again, these are examples of how we've seen backups planned for non-critical systems. If it
does not meet your specific requirements. You must monitor: the time the backups take to
complete; the free space left on the backup device; and so on and so on!

Also, a backup strategy involves actually going through the recovery process regularly to prove
that it works. Backups usually work fine, it is the restoring process that is difficult, imagine having
a boss breathing down your neck while you are searching for the proper sequence of actions
because you've never done this before...

If you look at our first ever sysadminotaur, (at

http://blog.devolutions.net/2012/08/sysadminotaur.html) you can guess that we've heard of bad
backup plans before...

Backup plans must be monitored and Recovery plans must be enacted to confirm they actually
work!

13.8.19 Tab Groups

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager is great for running many sessions at once by using its
Embedded/Tabbed display mode. It's especially true when using multiple remote control
technologies at the same time. No longer will you have to dig in your task bar to locate the
session of interest, you have them all running in tabs within the same tool used to launch them.

But when you reach a certain number of running sessions, it may become difficult to identify them
using only their name. To improve user experience for those of us that love embedded sessions,
we created a feature to filter the tab pages, it is called the Tab group.

1172 | Remote Desktop Manager

SETTINGS

The tab settings are found in the User Interface side menu of your session properties.

RDP session - User Interface

Simply type a name in the Tab group to create a tab group when launching an instance. You
can see it in action in the image below

Tab groups displayed - All selected

When the All group is selected, it performs no filtering. When you select another group, it hides
all the sessions that do not match with the filter. In the example below, I've adjusted two sessions
to have the same category.

Contents | 1173

Specific Tab group selected

13.8.20 Team Tips

OVERVIEW

Here are five RDM team tips.

SECURITY, USERS & ROLES

Sharing session information is great -- but controlling access is bliss.

Through Remote Desktop Manager's Role system, you can control access and user rights for
specific sessions and actions.

Start by creating roles and naming them accordingly to what you expect them to be able to view
and use. Then assign users to them. Now all you have to do is assign roles to entries and folders
according to your wishes.

STREAMLINED DEPLOYMENT WITH CUSTOM INSTALLER

Okay: you’re ready to deploy Remote Desktop Manager and make everyone see you as the
company hero. You’ve manually configured your data sources, specified your site license, and
defined system options. You can feel the excitement coursing through your veins. You are on a
mission!

But wait – before you go live, why not have us create a Custom Installer for you? Once we do
that, your grateful team will only need to install the resulting MSI file to access their ready-to-use
pre-configured Remote Desktop Manager installation. You will be loved by one and all, perhaps
with a parade, a state, or an award named after you.

1174 | Remote Desktop Manager

VERSION MANAGEMENT

Here’s a familiar scenario: your team has been using Remote Desktop Manager for months or
even years, and all is well. Then along comes a new version full of cool new features, and you
think that everyone in your company should upgrade. This window below depicts the different
options at your disposal to control client versions.

Version Management

We’ve made this extremely easy. Simply open Administration – Data Source Settings
(System Settings) – Version Management. Below, a description of some of the settings;

· Disable auto update notification – This will disable the "New version is available"
message. (You’re welcome!)

· Minimal version – This specifies the minimal acceptable version. If a member of your
team runs an RDM version below this level, they’ll be prompted to upgrade.

Contents | 1175

· Download URL – This improves install speed by downloading the MSI onto your local
network, and lets all of your team members easily upgrade from this path. In short, this
saves time and avoids installing the wrong version.

The Administration – Data Source Settings (System Settings) – Serial Number section is
useful if you have a Site or Global License, and keeps you from having to manually set the key on
every client.

DATA SOURCE SETTINGS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)

The general tab of the Administration – Data Source Settings (System Settings) form allows
you to easily control security aspects.

A great team feature here is the System Message, which allows an administrator to inform
users of upcoming system downtime, policy change or anything else. Each user will get the
message when they perform the next action (open, edit, refresh…) of the data source. Use it to
display company confidentially clauses or, if you wish, create chaos with a message like the one
below. A little bit of chaos is good for the soul.

System Message

1176 | Remote Desktop Manager

DEVOLUTIONS PASSWORD SERVER

Do you need Active Directory integration? Or perhaps you have off site users who need to
access the shared data source, but don’t want to use a VPN connection? Maybe you want more
security and caching? Devolutions Password Server delivers all that and much more!

You deploy Devolutions Password Server on-premises and can decide to publish the
instance only on your intranet; or go all the way and offer it online. This allows you to create an
enterprise wide high-end data store. Find out more about Devolutions Password Server at
http://server.devolutions.net/
13.8.21 Testing variables

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager's Auto Typing Macro is really helpful to simulate user interaction. It's
mostly used to perform automatic logon on web pages, but you can run advanced shell
commands on various operating systems.

Sometimes you need to confirm exactly what will be sent when using our Variables.

A simple trick is to create a batch file that just types out whatever is sent on the command line.

Just copy the following in your favorite editor and save it as a command file, I named mine
parrot.bat
@echo off
echo.
echo.
echo %*
echo.
echo.
pause

Now its a simple matter of creating a Command Line (External Application) session and set
the command line to the path of the parrot.bat file and add the variables right after.
"C:\tools\parrot.bat" $DOMAIN$ $IP$ $USERNAME$

Now when you run the entry, you will see exactly what values are sent.

A reminder that for the password to be available as a variable, you must go in the Security
Settings of the entry and check Allow password in variable.

Contents | 1177

13.8.22 Use Differents Version of Same Application

DESCRIPTION

You have 2 differents version of an application installed on your workstation and you want to be
able to use both versions inside Remote Desktop Manager.

SETTINGS

When you configure your application installation path in File – Options – Path, separate the
paths by a ;

Remote Desktop Manager will prompt you with the selection list and you will be able to pick the
one that you want to use.

EXAMPLE

C:\Program Files\Appsv1;D:\Program Files\Appsv2

13.8.23 VPN
13.8.23.1 VPN Group

OVERVIEW

VPN groups are defined inside each individual entries in the VPN/SSH/Gateway
section.

When multiple entries are configured to use the same VPN group, the VPN connection will stay
active until the last session disconnects.

1178 | Remote Desktop Manager

VPN Group

The VPN close mode need to be set to On sessions close to use this feature.

The VPN group name needs to be exactly the same to ensure that Remote Desktop Manager
increments the usage counter.
13.8.23.2 VPN Routing

OVERVIEW

Establishing a VPN connection using Remote Desktop Manager is easy. Unfortunately, adding
routes has to be done manually. Wait for the adapter to connect, find the IP and add the desired
routes. Even if you use a script (such as a Power Shell script), it’s still a redundant time
consuming task – and one you can certainly live without.

SOLUTION

Contents | 1179

This feature is part of a larger concept called VPN Commands, and allows you to run any type of
script or executable post-VPN-connect and pre-VPN-disconnect.

WORKFLOW

1. Configure the VPN to wait until the adapter connects and gets assigned an IP (we'll be using
the adapter’s IP to define the routes).

2. Click on Add to display the Commands dialog.

3. Create a route definition by selecting “Route (Add/Remove)” radio item. Finally, set the IP
and any other required information.

1180 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.9 Tools
13.9.1 Devolutions Localizer

WHAT IS DEVOLUTIONS LOCALIZER?

Devolutions Localizer is our custom translation tool for our client applications.

So far, with the help of several generous and talented members of our community, Remote
Desktop Manager has been translated from English to the following languages:
· Chinese (Simplified) Legacy
· Chinese (Traditional, Taiwan)
· Dutch
· French
· German
· Italian
· Polish
· Russian
· Swedish
· Ukrainian

GETTING STARTED

Contents | 1181

An account is required to use the Devolutions Localizer. You can join our team
and get started by signing up here: https://devolutions.net/Home/Contribute.

If you’re interested in helping your fellow IT pros around the world, please sign up to be one of
our wonderful contributors. Our Localizer app makes the process very efficient, and you can
work at your own pace, and whenever you have time!

OVERVIEW

From the dashboard view you get a quick progress overview, simply click the “Translate”
button and start translating.

Devolutions Localizer

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

Devolutions Localizer also features several keyboard shortcuts to speed up the translation
process:

· CTRL+D: Mark current resource as “Translated”.

· CTRL+E: Mark current resource as “Use original”, this ignores any translation text and will
display the original value as is.

1182 | Remote Desktop Manager

· CTRL+DOWN: Next resource.

· CTRL+UP: Previous resource.

· CTRL+B: Request Bing translation for the current string.

· CTRL+S: Save all pending changes.

· CTRL+F: Enable/disable filtering.

13.10 Troubleshooting
13.10.1 1Password

ERROR

WHEN YOU CREATE A NEW 1PASSWORD CREDENTIAL ENTRY, ONLY THE

LATEST ENTRIES ADDED TO 1PASSWORD ARE DISPLAYED.

In 1Password, click on File – Repair 1Password Vault. This should fix the issue.

13.10.2 2-Factor Authentication

ERRORS

WITH GOOGLE AUTHENTICATOR, YOU ARE GETTING AN INVALID PASSWORD

ERROR EVEN THOUGH YOU ARE SURE OF ENTERING THE PROPER ONE.

The computer clock must be within a small error margin in order to generate the proper
authenticator code. We recommend using a NNTP server in order to keep your computer
clock synchronized.

Contents | 1183

YOU HAVE LOST THE DEVICE

Your Remote Desktop Manager is set to authenticate with Yubikey or Google Authenticator.
You no longer have the Yubikey key or the Google Authenticator and you want to turn off this
option to connect on Remote Desktop Manager.

If you had installed using the default settings, the configuration file is %localappdata%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager\RemoteDesktopManager.cfg

You can choose to simply delete it, obviously all of your settings will be lost, alternatively you
can open it and remove everything between the EncryptedDataSources tags. You will have
to re-register all of your data sources and point to either the file or database that you were
using.

Encrypted DataSources

Empty Encrypted DataSources

1184 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.3 Apple Remote Desktop

ERRORS

NOT ABLE TO ESTABLISH A REMOTE CONNECTION TO A MAC COMPUTER USING

APPLE REMOTE DESKTOP (ARD) ENTRY TYPE

Try to restart the Remote Management service on the mac computer. On the mac, go in System Preferences –
Sharing and uncheck/check the Remote Management service.

BLACK SCREEN APPEARS AFTER CONNECTING WITH APPLE REMOTE DESKTOP

Activating the logging on the mac may help the Devolutions support team resolving the issue. In order to activate
the logging server side, execute the following command in Terminal:
sudo defaults write /Library/Preferences/com.apple.RemoteManagement ARDCollectLogs -bool YES

Once this is done, you can try to connect normally using Remote Desktop Manager. The log will then be located
in the /tmp folder of the Mac computer.

To turn off logging, execute this command:

sudo defaults write /Library/Preferences/com.apple.RemoteManagement ARDCollectLogs -bool NO

13.10.4 BeyondTrust

ERRORS

SYSTEM.URIFORMATEXCEPTION: INVALID URI: THE FORMAT OF THE URI COULD

NOT BE DETERMINED

In the Host field of the BeyondTrust Password Safe Console entry, make sure to enter the server name like
https://beyondtserver.
Do not enter the IP address of the server. Entering the IP address instead of the server name will return this error.

SYSTEM.NET.WEBEXCEPTION: THE REMOTE SERVER RETURNED AN ERROR:

(404)

In the Host field of the BeyondTrust Password Safe Console entry, make sure to enter the server name like
https://beyondtserver.
Do not enter the web URL to access the console from a web browser, example
https://beyondtserver/eEye.RetinaCS.Server/PasswordSafe.

Contents | 1185

NOT FOUND SYSTEM.NET.WEBEXCEPTION: THE REMOTE SERVER RETURNED

AN ERROR: (500) INTERNAL SERVER ERROR
In the Host field of the BeyondTrust Password Safe Console entry, make sure to enter the server name like
https://beyondtserver.
Do not enter the web URL to access the console from a web browser, example
https://beyondtserver/eEye.RetinaCS.Server/PasswordSafe.

SYSTEM.NET.WEBEXCEPTION: THE REMOTE SERVER RETURNED AN ERROR:

(401) UNAUTHORIZED

In the Application API key field of the BeyondTrust Password Safe Console entry, make sure that you have
entered the appropriate key. Please refer to the BeyondTrust Password Safe Console entry to learn how to obtain
the application API key.

BEYOND TRUST PASSWORD SAFE OR BEYOND TRUST PASSWORD SAFE

CONSOLE IS EMPTY AND NO ERROR IS RETURNED

Make sure that the Enable for API access option is checked for your privileged account in
BeyondTrust.
13.10.5 Clipboard

DESCRIPTION

THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS INTERFERE WITH THE DATA IN THE CLIPBOARD,

PREVENTING YOU FROM COPY/PASTING INFORMATION.

Some applications can affect the clipboard. Below is a list of applications that are known to
interfere with the clipboard. Please keep in mind that other applications might affect the
clipboard.
· Citrix GoToAssist

· Microsoft Garage Mouse without Borders

· TeamViewer 12
An option allows to revert to the legacy copy/paste method.

Navigate to File
– Options – General, in the Clipboard section and set the Clipboard copy
method option to Legacy. This should resolve the issue.

1186 | Remote Desktop Manager

Clipboard Options

13.10.6 Corrupted System File

DESCRIPTION

The components of the .Net Framework are considered a core Windows feature, therefore there
are no facilities to reinstall them. However, there are tools to verify and repair system files.

Running those tools may take a long time.

1. Run SFC Scannow - https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/929833

2. Run .Net Framework repair tool - https://www.microsoft.com/en-ca/download/details.aspx?id=30135

13.10.7 Data Recovery

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 1187

In the event of data loss due to hardware failure, it is still possible to recover data from your
storage device if it is still useable.
1. On the storage device that failed, navigate to C:\Users\%USERNAME%\AppData\Local\Devolutions and copy
the entire RemoteDesktopManager or RemoteDesktopManagerFree folder.

2. This folder will contain the local data source (SQLite or XML) as well as your configuration file.

3. Copy/Paste this folder at the same place on your new computer and you should retrieve your data.

The path mentioned in this topic are for those that have installed using the
default settings. The best way to locate your configuration folder is to use File –
Options – Advanced, in this form you will find an hyperlink near the bottom.
This opens your configuration folder.

File based data sources (XML, SQLite, etc) are by default stored in that
configuration folder. As a precaution, go through each data source in File –
Data sources and have a look at the local path (if any). Any file that is in the
configuration folder should be copied to ensure full data recovery.

13.10.8 Data Sources

DESCRIPTION

This chapter contains data source related troubleshooting. Since Remote Desktop Manager
supports such a wide array of data sources, there can be multiple causes for connectivity issues.

INITIAL TROUBLESHOOTING

THE NAME OF THE DATA SOURCE IS ENTERED INCORRECTLY

For those data source types that need a host name, please ensure it is typed correctly.

THE MACHINE IS UNABLE TO RESOLVE THE NAME OF THE DATA SOURCE HOST
USING DNS

For data source types that need a host name, please ensure that the name you have provided
does resolve by the DNS server which it is linked to, not only your current network connection,
but all connections that you will use Remote Desktop Manager over.

In general, PING is a poor testing tool because the server may have been configured to ignore
PING requests. Use NSLOOKUP to help identify the issue.

1188 | Remote Desktop Manager

A common issue in a multi-domain environment is that you must use the Fully Qualified Domain
Name (FQDN) of a server in order to reach it. (e.g. srvname.domain.loc instead of srvname)

Another common issue is that your DNS cache is corrupted, in that case you can open an
elevated command prompt and use the following commands.
ipconfig /flushdns
ipconfig /registerdns

OPENING A VPN HAS DISCONNECTED THE LOCAL LAN OR RENDERED THE DATA
SOURCE UNREACHABLE

If the network administrator has deemed necessary to tunnel ALL traffic through the connection
when a VPN is active, you will have to resort to using our Offline capabilities, ideally paired with
our options to automatically Go offline on connection as can be seen in the Advanced section of
the VPN entry type.

For a Web based VPN, ensure the routes are all valid, i.e. the path followed to reach the remote
host is indeed going through the proper interface.

AN ANTI-VIRUS OR FIREWALL IS BLOCKING THE APPLICATION

This may be hard to diagnose but sadly the support department can attest that it occurs quite
often. Here are some items to monitor.

If you are in a position to do so, it may help to TEMPORARILY disable the AV

and the Firewall. You must make an informed decision as to the risk that is
involved in your situation. Always enable all security features as soon as you
have ascertained if that component was causing the issue.

ISSUE RESOLUTION

Anti-Virus Set the AV to ignore Remote Desktop Manager, you could

also exclude our local configuration folder.

Firewall blocks RDM - all Create a rule to allow RDM to communicate with at the very
the time least your data source host. Keep in mind that, if you use
embedded browser sessions, Remote Desktop Manager
must have access to the remote hosts on which you open
pages.

Firewall blocks RDM - The firewall rules are tied to the category of the network
specific network profile (Public/Private/DomainAuthenticated), ensure
that all your network profiles allow for connectivity. Use

Contents | 1189

ISSUE RESOLUTION

netsh interface ip show interfaces and Set-

NetConnectionProfile for resolution.

13.10.8.1 Database Schema

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes the support staff will ask that the database schema.

This feature is only available for data sources that are backed by a database
management system: MariaDB, SQL Azure, SQL Server and MySQL.

When requested by the Devolutions Support team during a support process, you may be asked
to send us your database schema for thorough analysis of your issue.
1. Go in File – Data Sources – Edit Data Source.

1190 | Remote Desktop Manager

Data Sources
2. In the tab Upgrade click on Email Schema to Support.

Contents | 1191

Email Schema To Support

3. Fill in all the requested information and click on OK.

Database Schema

1192 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Email Enter your email address so that the support team can contact you

Company Enter your Company name

Name Use the same title as the one first used to report the issue

Message If you haven't described your issue before, enter a short description of it

13.10.8.2 Devolutions Online Database

DESCRIPTION

THE USER IS DISABLED!

When attempting to connect to the data source, you receive the error message below;

DODB User Disabled

On Devolutions Customer Portal in the User section, please ensure that the User is indeed
Enabled.

Contents | 1193

Devolutions Customer Portal - Users

13.10.8.3 MySQL

ERRORS

CONNECTING TO MYSQL USING A PRIVATE CERTIFICATE

1. Create SSL keys as described in Creating SSL Certs.

2. Create a client certificate.

2.1. openssl pkcs12 -export -in client-cert.pem -inkey client-key.pem -certfile cacert.pem -out
client.pfx

3. Grant privileges to the user as described in Grant Syntax.

3.1. GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON test.* TO 'root'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'goodsecret' REQUIRE SSL;

4. Run certmgr.msc and import the client certificate in the user store.

1194 | Remote Desktop Manager

5. In the Advanced settings of your MySQL data source set the following values:

5.1. Certificate Store Location: CurrentUser

5.2. SSL Mode: Required

ERROR WHEN EDITING ENTRY "MYSQL.DATA.MYSQLCLIENT.MYSQLEXCEPTION

(0X80004005): PACKETS LARGER THAN MAX_ALLOWED_PACKET ARE NOT
ALLOWED."

When you have that type of error while attempting to edit or add a new entry on a MySQL
database the problem is because your Advanced settings have been modified.

The resolution is to Edit your database, Select the Advanced tab and go to More Settings.

Contents | 1195

CacherServerProperties Default Value

Erase the Value of the CacheServerProperties field.

13.10.8.4 SQL Azure

ISSUES

"UNABLE TO LOAD ADALSQL.DLL

(AUTHENTICATION=ACTIVEDIRECTORYPASSWORD). ERROR CODE: 0X2. FOR
MORE INFORMATION, SEE HTTP://GO.MICROSOFT.COM/FWLINK/?LINKID=513072"

When attempting to use a SQL Azure data source, you receive the error message below;

1196 | Remote Desktop Manager

SQL Azure Error

To resolve this issue, please have a look at the topic on SQL Azure.

"PRINCIPAL ' ' COULD NOT BE CREATED. ONLY CONNECTIONS ESTABLISHED

WITH ACTIVE DIRECTORY ACCOUNTS CAN CREATE OTHER ACTIVE DIRECTORY
USERS."

When creating a user with azure active directory account authentication, you see the error
below;

Azure AD Error

You must first define your SQL Server Azure AD Admin via the Azure Portal, then login into
Remote Desktop Manager using that Azure AD account, from there you will be able to create
new Azure AD accounts (admin and non-admin). Those new admins will also be able to do the
same.

For more information, please have a look at the topic Configure SQL Azure AD Authentication.
13.10.8.4.1 SQL Azure: One or More Errors Occurred

DESCRIPTION

PROBLEM

Contents | 1197

After following the steps in Configure Azure Active Directory App Registration, you receive the
error message below:

System.AggregateException: One or more errors occurred. --->

System.AggregateException: One or more errors occurred.

SOLUTION

If you get this error, please send us your Azure Active Directory app manifest at
[email protected] so that we can validate your configuration.

13.10.8.5 SQL Server

DESCRIPTION

SQL Server is surely the most used repository within our community. Even though it is extremely
easy to put in place, some decisions have a huge impact on its operation.

We have separated the concerns in two categories:

SQL Server Connectivity

SQL Server Performance

13.10.8.5.1 SQL Server Connectivity

CONTENT

· New SQL Server installation

· Unable to connect to SQL Server

· A network-related or instance-specific error occurred...

· Universal Data Link (.udl) file

· Login failed for user Reason: Token-based server access validation failed

· Login failed. The login is from an untrusted domain and cannot be used with windows
authentication

1198 | Remote Desktop Manager

ISSUES

NEW SQL SERVER INSTALLATION

SQL Server installs with limited network connectivity. Therefore, when initially installed, the
Database Engine cannot be accessed from another device.
Allow Remote Access
On older versions of SQL Server, remote connections must be allowed manually. Follow these instructions to
enable connectivity.

Enable protocols
To connect to the Database Engine from another device, a protocol, such as TCP/IP, must be enabled.

1. In the SQLServer Configuration Manager, expand SQL Server Network

Configuration.

2. Select an instance.

3. Right-click the desired protocol, then select Enable.

Open a communication port in the firewall

To connect to an SQL Server from another device, a communication port must be opened in the firewall.

1. In the Start menu, type WF.msc and press Enter to open the Windows Firewall with
Advanced Security.

2. Select Inbound Rules in the left pane.

3. Right-click Inbound Rules, then select New Rule....

4. In the Rule Type page, select Port, then click Next.

5. In the Protocol and Ports page, select TCP. Select Specific local ports, then type the
port number of the instance of the Database Engine. The SQL Server default instance listens on port
1433. Click Next.

6. In the Action page, select Allow the connection, then click Next.

7. In the Profile page, select the profiles that describe the computer connection environment, then
click Next.

8. In the Name page, enter a Name and Description for the rule, then click Finish.

Contents | 1199

UNABLE TO CONNECT TO SQL SERVER

1. Go in Help – Application Logs to see if relevant error messages are present. There's a
good chance that you will see A network-related or instance-specific error occurred...

2. Create a Universal Data Link (*.udl) file to test your SQL Connection (see Universal Data Link (.udl) file).

3. Anti-virus or Firewall is blocking the application.

TEST THE CONNECTION WITH A UNIVERSAL DATA LINK (*.UDL) FILE

This will test that the instance is allowing your workstation to connect. Firewalls and anti-virus
software may still prevent Remote Desktop Manager from accessing the network even though
the Universal Data Link test is conclusive.
1. Open the Windows File Explorer.

2. Navigate to the folder in which the *.udl file will be stored.

3. Select the Home tab. Using the New item menu, create a Text Document.

4. Rename this file and change its file extension to *.udl.

File name extensions might be hidden by the Windows File Explorer.
To show the file name extensions, in the View tab of the File Explorer, enable
the File name extensions option.

Do not include the space characters in the name of the file.

A warning that changing file extensions can cause files to become unusable might
be displayed. Disregard it.
5. Double-click the *.udl file to open the Data Link Properties dialog box.

6. In the Provider tab, select the Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers provider.

7. In the Connection tab, select Use connection string, and enter a custom connection string.
Example of valid connection string:
Driver={SQL Server};Server=myServerAddress;Database=myDataBase;Uid=myUsername;

8. Use the Advanced tab to view and set other initialization properties for your data.

1200 | Remote Desktop Manager

9. Use the All tab to review and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for your OLE
DB provider.

10. In the Connection tab, use the Test connection button to test the SQL Server connectivity.

11. Click OK to save the connection string to the Universal Data Link (.udl) file.

LOGIN FAILED FOR USER – REASON: TOKEN-BASED SERVER ACCESS

VALIDATION FAILED

Finding the true reason for this is quite a process. A web search reveals so many solutions to
attempt, and it is easy to get lost is all those steps. The thing to keep in mind is that the error
message is misleading and the cause is often a simple thing.

The first step is to ensure that the issue is not unique to Remote Desktop Manager. Testing with
a Universal Data Link file as shown above will prove that the workstation configuration is not the
issue.

When granting rights to the DB using AD group membership and one of your user has that error
message, you must check privileges for ALL the AD groups that he belongs too. Anything with
an explicit DENY must be evaluated carefully. The query below will help identify these
occurrences.

select princ., perm. from sys.server_principals princ, sys.server_permissions perm

where perm.grantee_principal_id = princ.principal_id

AND state_desc = 'DENY'

LOGIN FAILED. THE LOGIN IS FROM AN UNTRUSTED DOMAIN AND CANNOT BE

USED WITH WINDOWS AUTHENTICATION.

Contents | 1201

Error Message

The following error message appear when you can't access Remote Desktop Manager
data source with Integrated Authentication when connected to a Dialup VPN.

SOLUTION

1. Locate your VPN connections (*.pbk) file.

2. You can find it here: %APPDATA%\Microsoft\Network\Connections\Pbk or if you

have it set to allow all users to use the connection, you can find it here: C:
\ProgramData\Microsoft\Network\Connections\Pbk

3. Edit the *.pkb file with a text editor and find the line UseRasCredentials=1

4. Disable this setting by changing the 1 to 0: UseRasCredentials=0

A NETWORK-RELATED OR INSTANCE-SPECIFIC ERROR OCCURRED...

This error message means that the server could not be reached, the possible causes are numerous.

These steps are for Client side troubleshooting exclusively. For full guidance on this
issue please consult this article on Technet

1202 | Remote Desktop Manager

If the error message indicates that the Named Pipes are in use and you are
accessing a remote server, ensure that the TCP IP protocol is used simply by
adding tcp: in front of the instance name, i.e. tcp:vmtxg.database.windows.net

CAUSE DIAGNOSTIC

Server name mistyped (Known as the Universal Data Link (.udl) file
Instance name).

Only server name is specified when Universal Data Link (.udl) file
there is no Default instance on that
server.

Is the SQL Server up and running. Universal Data Link (.udl) file

SQL Server is listening on a non- Universal Data Link (.udl) file

standard port.

Anti-Virus blocking Remote Desktop Check in the Anti-Virus logs to see blocked
Manager. threats.

Firewall is preventing Remote Desktop Adjust your firewall to allow

Manager to connect. RemoteDesktopManager.exe and
RemoteDesktopManager64.exe to
communicate with external services.

13.10.8.5.2 SQL Server Performance

DESCRIPTION

Whenever the performance of queries against SQL Server decreases, check on the following:

SIZE OF DATABASE FILES

If you transaction log file is enormous, it may be that the recovery model of the database is set to
FULL, which means that it requires regular backups in order to clean up past transactions.

Contents | 1203

You can confirm this is in the properties of the DB itself.

The most urgent step is to perform a full Backup of the DB.

Run the following statement against the database.

exec sp_spaceused

13.10.9 DB Upgrades

ERROR

SQLEXCEPTION - TIMEOUT EXPIRED. THE TIMEOUT PERIOD ELAPSED PRIOR TO

COMPLETION OF THE OPERATION OR THE SERVER IS NOT RESPONDING.

Presence of sizable historical or log data in the DB can cause this error to be triggered. Please consult Clean up
and prune data as you see fit.

13.10.10FIPS (Encryption)

ERROR

“SYSTEM.INVALIDOPERATIONEXCEPTION: THIS IMPLEMENTATION IS NOT PART

OF THE WINDOWS PLATFORM FIPS VALIDATED CRYPTOGRAPHIC
ALGORITHMS”:

The problem could be related to the FIPS mode enabled.

Remote Desktop Manager uses the AES/Rijndael encryption and SHA-256 hashing
algorithms, which are implemented by the Microsoft .NET Framework. If the local security
policy on your system enforces FIPS compliant implementations, Remote Desktop Manager
cannot run. As a result, you will receive this error message.

SOLUTION 1

To fix this error, configure the Local Security Policy on your system to allow FIPS non-
compliant algorithm implementations. Here are the steps:

1204 | Remote Desktop Manager

1. Go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy > Open
Local Policies > Security Options

2. Disable the option “System cryptography: Use FIPS compliant algorithms for
encryption, hashing, and signing.”

Some software (i.e. Cisco VPN Anyconnect) requires the use of FIPS. If this is
your case, you must implement the alternative solution described below.

SOLUTION 2

Inside Remote Desktop Manager's installation folder, create a text file named
RemoteDesktopManager.exe.config containing the following:

13.10.11KeePass

ERRORS

YOU ARE PROMPTED TWICE TO OPEN KEEPASS WHEN CONNECTING TO A

SESSION

In KeePass, click on Tools -> Options, go in the Advanced tab and uncheck Remember and
automatically open last used database on startup.

Contents | 1205

THE FOLLOWING PLUGIN IS INCOMPATIBLE WITH THE CURRENT KEEPASS

VERSION
· Make sure that the installation of KeePass was successful.
· Delete all the RemoteDesktopManager.Connector.dll and
RemoteDesktopManagerPlugin.dll files that you may have in the installation folder of
KeePass. (We have since then modified how Plug In functions, and these files should no
longer exist).
13.10.12LogMeIn

ERRORS

A LOGMEIN PLUGIN MAY BE REQUIRED WHEN LAUNCHING LOGMEIN IN

EMBEDDED MODE.

1. Copy the LogMeIn portal URL from your LogMeIn session.

2. Close Remote Desktop Manager.
3. Open Internet Explorer as an administrator.
4. Paste the LogMeIn portal URL in Internet Explorer and launch it.
5. Internet Explorer should prompt to install the LogMeIn ActiveX.
6. Install the LogMeIn ActiveX.
7. Access the LogMeIn portal URL from your Internet Explorer window to be sure that the ActiveX as been
installed properly.
8. Close Internet Explorer.
9. Open Remote Desktop Manager and launch your LogMeIn session.

You should not be prompted for the LogMeIn ActiveX anymore.

COMEXCEPTION - REQUESTED RESOURCE IN USE. (EXCEPTION FROM

HRESULT: 0X800700AA)

Change the IE emulation mode in File – Options – Types – Web to use Internet Explorer
10.

1206 | Remote Desktop Manager

IE Mode

13.10.13Microsoft Office

ERROR

WHEN THE EMBEDDED MODE IS USED, AN ERROR IS DISPLAYED THAT OFFICE

HAS TO BE INSTALLED, YET IT ALREADY IS.

Under certain conditions which we cannot identify, an Office 2013 32 bit Edition installation on a 64 bit system
may miss registry keys to allow for hosting Office Documents in ActiveX controls. This can be confirmed by going
in Help – Application Logs to view the full error message. It should be something like
System.Runtime.InteropServices.COMException: The associated COM server does not
support ActiveX Document embedding.

To resolve this, you have to create a reg file with the content below and merge it in your registry. A restart may be
required. As a preliminary step you could open the registry to confirm that the DocObject keys are indeed
missing. The keys below are respectively for : Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Visio, and Project.

Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00

[HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\CLSID\{F4754C9B-64F5-4B40-8AF4-679732AC0607}\DocObje

Contents | 1207

[HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\CLSID\{00020830-0000-0000-C000-000000000046}\DocObje

[HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\CLSID\{CF4F55F4-8F87-4D47-80BB-5808164BB3F8}\DocObje

[HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\CLSID\{00021A15-0000-0000-C000-000000000046}\DocObje

[HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\CLSID\{74B78F3A-C8C8-11D1-BE11-00C04FB6FAF1}\DocObje

13.10.14Microsoft RDP

THE MICROSOFT RDP CLIENT IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY

Please consult our Corrupted System File topic.

AUTOMATIC LOGON

Automatic logon troubleshooting is in the Automatic Logon topic.

SESSIONS WORK USING MSTSC.EXE BUT NOT IN REMOTE DESKTOP

MANAGER

Please consult Sessions work using mstsc.exe but not in RDM.

ERRORS

“CANNOT COPY <FILENAME>: WINDOWS CANNOT FIND ‘%1!|S!’. CHECK THE

SPELLING AND TRY AGAIN, OR TRY SEARCHING FOR THE ITEM BY CLICKING THE
START BUTTON AND CLICKING SEARCH”

This is a bug in the Microsoft Remote Desktop Client. The workaround is to enable the Smart
Card even if it's not required for the connection.

I RECEIVE AN ERROR WHEN I TRY AND GET SESSION DETAILS, OR WHEN I

EXECUTE A LOGOFF WITH AN RDP SESSION. HOW DO I FIX THIS?

1208 | Remote Desktop Manager

Please read the information Logoff Access Denied.

SCREEN AREAS UNRESPONSIVE IN EMBEDDED SESSIONS.

This most often occurs on systems that use a DPI setting of more than 100%. To disable
scaling in RDM you must adjust the compatibility settings on the Windows shortcut for RDM.

1. Right-click on the shortcut to RDM.

2. Select Properties.

3. Go to the "Compatibility" tab.

4. Check "Disable display scaling on high DPI settings".

Contents | 1209

Compatibility Tab

I HAVE MULTIPLE SESSIONS TO THE SAME COMPUTER WITH DIFFERENT

CREDENTIALS, BUT IT ALWAYS USES THE LAST ONE I ENTERED.

This issue stems from the fact that the Windows Credential repository holds only one entry
per Windows user for a remote computer. If you use the Embedded (tabbed) display mode
and store the password in the database, you'll be able to work around that limitation.

THE WINDOWS SHORTCUTS ARE BEING PERFORMED IN THE SESSION BUT

ALWAYS ON MY COMPUTER.

1210 | Remote Desktop Manager

You must configure the Keyboard setting in the Local Resources tab of the session
settings. You can select "On the remote computer" or "In full screen only" according to your
personal preferences.

Local Resources Tab

COPY/PASTE BETWEEN A REMOTE SESSION AND MY LOCAL COMPUTER

STOPPED WORKING

This issue arises when a program called RDPClip becomes unstable. You can kill its process
and launch a new instance.
1. On the affected system, load up task manager (right click in taskbar and select Task Manager).
2. Go to the Processes Tab.
3. Select rdpclip.exe.
4. Click End Process.
5. Go to the Application Tab.
6. Click New Process.
7. Type rdpclip.
8. Click Ok.

COPY/PASTE OPERATION WITHIN THE REMOTE HOST ARE EXTREMELY SLOW

As strange as it may seem, we've isolated the issue to "Serial Ports" being enabled. Turn off
Serial port sharing and see if the performance is improved.

LOG ON USERNAME ON WINDOWS SERVER 2012 IS SENT INCORRECTLY

Contents | 1211

When you try to connect to a Windows Server 2012, you see the following result below. There
are several spaces that shouldn't be there.

Windows Server 2012 Log In

To fix this issue, go in Properties – General – Advanced and change the option Enable
CredSSP support to True.

1212 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Session Advanced Tab

13.10.14.1Automatic Logon

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes the automatic logon does not function and your credentials are requested by the
remote system. Here are some steps to help identify the issue. Support for automatic logon was
introduced on Windows 2003/XP, so ensure you are trying to connect to these or later versions.
Windows 2000 does not support the automatic login.

RDP SESSIONS CONNECT SUCCESSFULLY WHEN IN EXTERNAL

MODE, BUT NOT IN EMBEDDED MODE

This issue may be caused by a bad authentication negotiation because in some cases Single
Sign On (SSO) requires Network Level Authentication (NLA). It can happen when prompting
for credentials and when using automatic logon. Please activate Network Level

Contents | 1213

Authentication in the Connection tab of your session. You might also have to check the
Public Mode option in the Advanced tab to make it work.

Network Level Authentication

See also : Network Level Authentication, Configure NLA for Remote Desktop Services
Connections.

THE CONNECTION WAS DENIED BECAUSE THE USER ACCOUNT IS NOT

AUTHORIZED FOR REMOTE LOGIN

We have discovered that enabling the Public Mode option in the Advanced tab resolves the
issue.

1214 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Session - Advanced Tab

ENSURE CREDENTIALS ARE ENTERED PROPERLY.

RDM allows for advanced credential management. Depending on your choice of: Default,
Credential repository, Embedded or Inherited ensure the credentials are properly entered.

Contents | 1215

Storing your Password

ENSURE THAT "ALWAYS ASK PASSWORD" IS NOT CHECKED.

1216 | Remote Desktop Manager

Microsoft Remote Desk top - General Tab

ENSURE A SYSTEM POLICY DEFINED ON THE HOST IS NOT

REQUIRING EXPLICIT CREDENTIAL ENTRY

The host server can be configured to always require the credentials to be entered in an
interactive manner by the user. Ask your system administrator to confirm if this is the case.

Choose the instructions depending on the server operating system. Note that there are often
multiple ways to configure the host (WMI, Scripting, etc), but the group policies are the preferred
method. Therefore the links are for the articles describing group policy solutions when they are
available.

Contents | 1217

APPLIES TO LINK

Windows Server 2003, Microsoft ended support for Windows Server 2003 on
Windows Server 2003 R2, July 14, 2015. This change has affected your software
Windows Server 2003 with SP1, updates and security options.
Windows Server 2003 with SP2

Windows Server 2008 Group Policy Settings for Remote Desktop Services
in Windows Server 2008

Windows Server 2008 R2 Group Policy Settings for Remote Desktop Services
in Windows Server 2008 R2

Windows 2012 The settings are on the Session Collection

Properties.

More info on the new Remote Desktop Services:

Guide to configure the Quick Deployment:

Test Lab Guide: Remote Desktop Services Session

Virtualization Quick Start

SINGLE SIGN ON WORKS FOR TS WEB ACCESS, HOWEVER, THEY

CANNOT BE SHARED ACROSS TS WEB ACCESS AND TS OR TS
GATEWAY.

You must adjust a group policy to allow that. Please follow the directions in
http://blogs.msdn.com/b/rds/archive/2007/04/19/how-to-enable-single-sign-on-for-my-terminal-
server-connections.aspx

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER HANGS WHEN PROMPTED TO ENTER

CREDENTIALS.

When you are prompted with this credential box, Remote Desktop Manager hangs.

1218 | Remote Desktop Manager

Windows Security

PROBABLE CAUSE

The issue seems to occur with users using a Wacom Bamboo Fun Pen & Touch tablet. Latest
drivers are installed.

When users with a Wacom tablet click on a session with an expired password in the Private
Vault or a non domain joint server, forcing Remote Desktop Manager (or in fact RDP) displaying
a credential popup, Remote Desktop Manager freezes.

When the user does the very same action with a regular mouse, everything goes fine.

The problem appears to be in the Wacom settings along with some windows settings to use
Windows Ink as handwriting.

When Use Windows Ink was disabled, Remote Desktop Manager didn’t freeze anymore when
displaying a credential box.

It did also solve problems with the focus of other applications.

13.10.14.2Cannot Store Passw ord on Local Computer

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 1219

IN A MICROSOFT RDP SESSION, YOU WANT TO STORE THE PASSWORD ON THE

LOCAL COMPUTER, HOWEVER THE "SAVE PASSWORD" BUTTON IS GRAYED
OUT.

Please note that this setting may have been set by a group policy. If you find the
value but do not know the reason why it is set, a Domain Administrator may
have set it. We do not condone bypassing corporate policies.
Click on Start \ Run and type regedit to open the registry editor. Navigate to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows NT\Terminal Services\DisablePasswordSaving
key and change the value to 0.

Make sure you've checked the Store password locally feature and that you have text in the Host field.

13.10.14.3Display Issues

DESCRIPTION

THE REMOTE SESSION'S CONTENT IS BLURRY

Uncheck Persistent bitmap caching under the Experience tab in the properties of your RDP
session.

1220 | Remote Desktop Manager

Bitmap Caching

SESSIONS ARE FLICKERING, TURNING BLACK OR RANDOMLY SHUFFLES WHILE

WORKING

We have identified the CA DSM Agent Suite for desktop management as being the culprit for
those who use this product. The remote control agent from this product seems to interfere with
the modern GUI of Remote Desktop Manager. If you stop the agent, the problem should go
away.

REMOTE TASKBAR IS HIDDEN BY THE ONE OF YOUR LOCAL MACHINE

The taskbar on your remote system is hidden by the one from your local machine as shown
below;

Windows Task bar

Contents | 1221

Simply set this option as shown below in the properties of your RDP session under the Display
tab.

RDP Properties

13.10.14.4Keyboard not w orking

DESCRIPTION

KEYBOARD NOT WORKING ON A WINDOWS 7 COMPUTER

Some users have experienced issues where their keyboard would not work on the Windows 7
system.

The solution is to update the RDP client on Windows 7.

KB’s must be installed in the following order: KB2574819, KB2830477, KB2857650,

KB2913751, KB2923545

Here's a link to get you there quickly;

https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/2923545/update-for-rdp-8-1-is-available-for-windows-
7-sp1
13.10.14.5Licensing Protocol Error

DESCRIPTION

When you connect to a remote workstation, you receive one of the errors below.

1222 | Remote Desktop Manager

Licensing Protocol Error

License Store Creation

SOLUTION

1. Close Remote Desktop Manager.

2. Depending on your Windows architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) delete the specified registry
key(s);

WINDOWS REGISTRY KEY(S)

32-bit HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\MSLicensing

64-bit HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\MSLicensing

HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\MSLicen
sing

Contents | 1223

3. Run Microsoft RDP (mstsc.exe) as an administrator to recreate the registry key (just once).

4. Restart Remote Desktop Manager.

13.10.14.6Logoff Access Denied

LOGOFF ACCESS DENIED ERROR OR "UNABLE TO ENUM ERATE

REM OTE SESSIONS"

This section describes the solution for the “access denied” error which occurs when using
qwinsta.exe/rwinsta.exe or WTSOpenServer Windows API function to access to a Windows
XP SP2 PC.

The same thing happens when trying to connect to a Windows XP SP2 using Remote Desktop
Services Manager from a Windows 2003 Server. This is because qwinsta.exe command calls
WTS functions (WTSOpenServer, WTSEnumerateSessions, …), you will encounter the same
error when using either the command or the API.

VERIFY THE FOLLOWING:

1. Ensure you have the correct credential.

Although you do not need to provide a username and a password when executing qwinsta.exe or
WTSOpenServer, Windows uses its stored credentials automatically, just like accessing a shared folder.

The easiest way to confirm the credential is to use Explorer to access remote server’s C$ share. Also, you can
use “net use” command.

For those who want to connect to a remote server programmatically using WTSOpenServer API,
WNetAddConnection2 function should be enough to make sure you got a piece of credential before calling
WTSOpenServer function.

It goes without saying that the user in the credentials needs to have enough privilege on the remote server to carry
out the operation.

2. Open RPC ports on firewall.

1224 | Remote Desktop Manager

An API call involves connecting to a remote machine using RPC. In most cases, the RPC service is running and
you can confirm that from the service management interface. To open RPC ports, simply enable “File and Printer
Sharing” in the Windows Firewall setting.

(Generally, if the RPC is blocked by the firewall on the remote machine, the error should be "1722 RPC server is
unavailable" rather then "5 Access denied")

3. Disable "Force Guest" log on.

You can change this option from either local security policy or registry.

Local security policy: run secpol.msc > Secuirty Settings > Local Policies > Security Options > Network
access: Sharing and security model for local accounts, and set to "Classic".

Registry: find "forceguest" item in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa,

and set it to 0.

Both methods are equivalent. If this option is set to 1, remote logging in user will be impersonated as Guest
account (and if Guest account is disabled, login fails). Set it to 0 enables user logging in as themselves.

4. If you still receive “access denied” and it only happens when the remote OS is Windows
XP SP2, it is very likely akin to the following case:

To confirm, you need a packet sniffer such as Wireshark (a great freeware).

When you use a sniffer to capture the SMB packets, you can see the authentication is OK (NTLM if workstation,
Kerberos if Windows 2003 domain), but the RPC gets nca_s_fault_access_denied (0×00000005) as error code.

This means the remote RPC component failed to execute the requested operation. It is because in Windows XP
SP2, it is not allowed to operate on remote desktop service (RDS) through RPC by default. To modify this setting
to enable Remote Desktop API through RPC, you need to find the following registry key:

HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Terminal Server

Then add a DWORD value named “AllowRemoteRPC” and change its value to 1.

13.10.14.7Logoff Issue

DESCRIPTION

After creating and connecting to an RDP session, if you hit the 'LogOff' button in the Remote Desktop Manager
ribbon, it appears to be sending the wrong command to the RDP session. It's sending 'ashutdown /l' instead of
'shutdown /l'. It does this in both the Free and Enterprise version.

Contents | 1225

SOLUTION

Simply check this option in File -> Options -> Types -> RDP.

Disable run dialog check

13.10.14.8Memory and Performance issues

DESCRIPTION

YOU CAN ONLY RUN A FEW RDP SESSIONS AT THE SAME TIME IN REMOTE
DESKTOP MANAGER AND YOU WANT TO KNOW HOW TO BE ABLE TO OPEN
MORE SESSIONS.

The amount of consumed memory is dictated by the remote technology, and in the case of
RDP, by the Operating System of the remote host. Windows 8 / 2012 sessions do take
upwards of 150Mb, whereas the previous versions would consume around half of that.

1226 | Remote Desktop Manager

This is something that we have no control over. You can look at Large Memory Aware
Application or use the 64bit edition of Remote Desktop Manager.

RDP SESSION INITIATION IS SLOW, WHEN USING REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT

This situation is something that we also experience under those conditions (our testing
environment is virtualized and has minimal memory for each guests).

In the Experience tab of your RDP session, you need to disable everything that is not used.
A good method is to select the Modem connection speed, this will disable all settings that
are related to appearance. You can then turn on a single setting to see if it affects the
performance negatively. Repeat until you find the combination that works best for you.

YOU USE RDP IN EMBEDDED MODE AND THE REMOTE SESSION IS EXTREMELY
SLOW TO RESPOND. THE SESSION LOADS FINE, BUT WHEN YOU GET LOGGED-
IN THE REMOTE COMPUTER, IT BECOMES UNRESPONSIVE. MOUSE CLICKS,
KEYBOARD PRESSES AND APPLICATION LOADING ARE EXTREMELY SLOW. IN
EXTERNAL MODE, EVERYTHING IS RUNNING FINE.

1. Disable your Anti-virus and test the connection to see of this make a difference. If you use
Trend Micro Business Security, add RemoteDesktopManager.exe,
RemoteDesktopManager64.exe, and Embedded32.exe to the Process Exception List
under Preferences – Global Settings and update the Trend client. If you use Symantec
Norton Internet Security, ensure you allow Remote Desktop Manager to access the internet in
the Program Rules.

2. Uncheck all settings in the Local Resources tab.

3. Check Disable display scaling on high DPI settings in the options. Consult topic
Microsoft RDP for more information.

4. Download and install Microsoft RDCMan to see if it's related to the RDP ActiveX. Remote
Desktop Manager uses the same technology and this will ensure that your workstation doesn't
have configuration issues.

Contents | 1227

CONNECTIONS FAIL FOR SOME HOSTS

There are known security updates that have broken connectivity to a host, but they have been
fixed in ulterior patches. If you keep the hosts updated then it should be something else.

Sometimes the mapping of local devices will cause issues. Uncheck all settings in the Local
Resources tab.

Microsoft Remote Desk top (RDP) - Local Resources

13.10.14.9Missing mapped drives

ERROR

Mapped network drives are not available in RDP sessions even though you have selected All
drives; or are not displayed in the dialog when attempting to add Specific Drives using the
More button.

1228 | Remote Desktop Manager

RDP Local Devices and Resources details

CAUSE

This problem happens when you start Remote Desktop Manager with elevated privileges (Run
as administrator). Mapped drives are not available from an elevated prompt when UAC is configured to "Prompt
for credentials" in Windows.

This issue is not caused by Remote Desktop Manager, you will need to apply a fix on all
workstations from which you must launch Remote Desktop Manager with elevated privileges.

Please follow the steps in one of the following methods:

METHOD 1

Using the Local Group Policy Editor, locate the following Group Policy path:
Local Computer Policy\Windows Settings\Security Settings\Local Policies\Security Options

Configure the following policy to Prompt for consent:

User Account Control: Behaviour of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode

Contents | 1229

METHOD 2

Map the required drives again in the elevated session. A good solution would be to create a batch/command file
that starts by mapping the drives again, then launches Remote Desktop Manager.

13.10.14.10
Printer Redirection

DESCRIPTION

You are attempting to use printers inside your remote sessions but they seem to be missing.

SOLUTIONS

1. Ensure that the option for Printers in the Local Resources tab is enabled.

Printers

1230 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. If you have a 64-bit Windows, you must start the Remote Desktop Manager 64-bit launcher.
By default, this launcher is located in C:\Program Files (x86)\Devolutions\Remote Desktop
Manager under the name remotedesktopmanager64.exe.
13.10.14.11
Protocol Error

ERRORS

BECAUSE OF A PROTOCOL ERROR, THIS SESSION WILL BE DISCONNECTED.

PLEASE TRY CONNECTING TO THE REMOTE COMPUTER AGAIN.

Error message

SOLUTION 1

Try to use Remote Desktop Manager 64bit. To do so, launch Remote Desktop Manager64.exe
from the installation folder instead of Remote Desktop Manager.exe.

SOLUTION 2

Uncheck Persistent bitmap caching and Visual styles under the Experience tab in the
properties of the RDP session.

Contents | 1231

Uncheck Visual styles and Persistent bitmap caching

SOLUTION 3

Close Remote Desktop Manager, rename default.rdp file in My Documents to default.old,

restart Remote Desktop Manager and try to connect with RDP.

SOLUTIONS 4

Login in to the target machine by directly going to the console of that server or by any tool like
VNC so that we can get access to that machine.

After connecting:
1. Right Click on the Desktop.
2. Select the Properties.
3. There DropDown the Themes and select the theme other than the current one.
4. Click on Apply, OK.

Now try to connect that machine remotely.

13.10.14.12
RDP Session Credentials

ISSUES

1232 | Remote Desktop Manager

UNABLE TO PASS CREDENTIALS TO A WINDOWS SERVER 2003

The issue resides on the server itself. You simply have to disable the option Always ask
password and enable the option Use client-provided logon information as shown below;

Windows Server 2003

Contents | 1233

Windows Server 2003

13.10.14.13
Remote Computer Requires Authentication to be Enabled Error

ERROR

The connection cannot proceed because authentication is not enabled and the remote computer
requires that authentication be enabled to connect.

SOLUTION

This error occurs when you try to establish a remote connection from a Windows Server 2008R1
to a Windows Server 2016. In modern versions of Windows, like Windows 10 or Windows
Server 2016, the RDP defaults have changed. The default for the Security Layer has changed
from 0 to 2.

OPTION 1

In the RDP session check mark Activate network level authentication than OK.

1234 | Remote Desktop Manager

Remote Desk top Manager Activate network level authentication

OPTION 2

To resolve this issue, on the Windows Server 2016, open the registry (regedit.exe) and navigate
to:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\TerminalServer\WinStations\RD
P-Tcp. Then, change the SecurityLayer to 0.
13.10.14.14
Reconnect

DESCRIPTION

When a remote connection is locked and asks for the username and password to reconnect, instead of closing
and relaunching the connection you would typically use the Reconnect feature.
However, the session doesn't reconnect properly, because the credentials are not sent to the remote session.

Contents | 1235

This is an old issue and shouldn't happen unless your selection is currently legacy or your RDM requires updating,
however if it happens nonetheless the fix remains the same.

SOLUTION

In File -> Options -> Types -> RDP in the Reconnect Mode dropdown menu, adjust the setting
and try again, we recommend trying to set it to Full.

Reconnect Mode

13.10.14.15
RD Gatew ay Credentials Prompt When Trying To Reconnect

DESCRIPTION

This problem happen when you have RD Gateway configured with some credentials and you use
the reconnect action. You get prompted for the RD Gateway credentials and the application
does not reuse the existing settings.

SOLUTION

To fix this issue, set the Reconnect mode to Full in the RDP session Advanced settings. This
will force the complete disconnect/reconnect and it will resolve the issue.

1236 | Remote Desktop Manager

Full Reconnect In Advanced Tab

13.10.14.16
RDM Hangs w hen logging off RDP sessions

CAUSES

The two causes are RDP plug-ins and UDP usage under certain conditions.

RDP PLUG-INS

This one is quite easy to test out. You simply go in the Experience tab of your RDP sessions and set Load
plug-ins in embedded mode to False. Do this first as it has a really low impact.

Contents | 1237

RDP Experience Tab

UDP USAGE

There's an option in RDM to disable UDP usage. To do so, open Remote Desktop Manager as an
administrator and click on Tools -> Local RDP/RemoteApp Manager and click on Disable to disable the UDP
settings.

UDP Settings

1238 | Remote Desktop Manager

This one is a bit trickier, some search results hint that this is caused only when going through a VPN, others
mention that it occurs only on Windows 8 paired with a Gateway server, but this solution has worked for many of
our users, so we suggest you try it.

It requires a registry change, so all the usual warnings and caveats apply here, back it up first! Consult this
Microsoft support article for more information

The fix is to disable UDP on the client workstation using these simple steps:
1. Navigate to HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows NT\Terminal
Services\Client.
2. Create a DWORD named fClientDisableUDP and assign it a value of 1.

13.10.14.17
Sessions w ork using mstsc.ex e but not in RDM

DESCRIPTION

This topic describes the troubleshooting steps for when establishing a session to a remote host
reacts differently in Remote Desktop Manager than when you are using mstsc.exe.

EMBEDDED MODE ISSUES

Our Embedded (tabbed) display mode uses the Microsoft ActiveX and offers the most
customization options, but is inherently different than using mstsc.exe. When wanting to ensure
the issue is really in Remote Desktop Manager vs being an issue with the ActiveX, the
procedure is to try to replicate the scenario with Microsoft's RDCMan. You can obtain that tool
from http://www.microsoft.com/en-ca/download/details.aspx?id=44989. Simply install it, create
sessions like you have in Remote Desktop Manager, then open them concurrently or in
repetition to replicate the issue you think lies in Remote Desktop Manager.

COMPARING OUR SETTINGS TO A NATIVE RDP FILE

When you choose to use the External display mode, Remote Desktop Manager will in fact
create a temporary RDP file and call mstsc.exe with the file as a parameter. It can be beneficial
to grab that file while it exists and to compare it with one created using mstsc.exe.
1. Create or duplicate a session that you want to diagnose, set the display mode to External.
2. Launch that session.
3. The file will be deleted when you close Remote Desktop Manager, you need to copy it before then.
4. Open %TMP%\RDM, copy your file in another folder.
5. Open the file in your editor of choice and compare it to a file created using mstsc.exe

STARTING RDP SESSIONS IS SLOW COMPARED TO THE NATIVE RDP

Contents | 1239

We have isolated the issue and we fixed it by changing your RDP engine version to RDP 6.0 or 7.0 in File ->
Options -> Types -> RDP

RDP Engine

13.10.15Network Devices

DESCRIPTION

It's possible to manage different devices via a web interface. However, you may have some
issues to connect to the web interface using our Web Browser in the Embedded (tabbed)
display mode.

For example, you may encounter issues with the following devices:
· Nagios
· Cisco
· Dell SonicWall

SOLUTION

We use third party libraries for the integration of Firefox and Google Chrome in the Embedded
(tabbed) display Mode. For Internet Explorer, we use the Microsoft ActiveX that is installed at
the same time as the browser.

1240 | Remote Desktop Manager

If none of the web browsers work in Embedded (tabbed) display Mode, you would need to
launch the website using the External display mode and use our Devolutions Web Login to
handle the credentials.
13.10.16Non-Admin Users Cannot View Passwords

DESCRIPTION

Normal users are no longer able to view or copy password after updating to Remote Desktop
Manager 2019+

SOLUTION

If you want to allow Users or specific Roles to be able to view the password from all your
sessions, you must configure the View Password setting found in Administration - Vault
Settings - Permissions - View Password.

Contents | 1241

Vault Settings - Permission

This setting was changed because of security purposes.

Here the associated line from the Release Notes : https://remotedesktopmanager.com/release-

notes#_gac=1.51723355.1554296008.Cj0KCQjws5HlBRDIARIsAOomqA3ywMIfEkq4pM_uVs
DLut1r_Ow7RRZKo1D9MrqBBjzyShNd4AoQGBQaAhSiEALw_wcB

"Changed the View Password to not allowed by default for non administrator"

13.10.17Password Manager Pro

ERRORS

SYSTEM.NET.WEBEXCEPTION: THE SERVER COMMITTED A PROTOCOL

VIOLATION. SECTION=RESPONSESTATUSLINE

1242 | Remote Desktop Manager

During the configuration of your Password Manager Pro credential entry, make sure that the URL of your server
contain https:// and not http://. You absolutely need an https:// at the beginning of the address to communicate
properly with the server.

Service URL

WHEN YOU TRY TO CONNECT ON A REMOTE COMPUTER OR GET THE

CREDENTIAL LIST, A WINDOW APPEAR WITH AN EMPTY TOKEN FIELD AND THE
USERNAME AND WORKSTATION FIELD GREYED OUT.

PMP Account Editor

The Host Name configured in your API user in Password Manager Pro is not the same that you have configured
in Remote Desktop Manager in File – My Account Settings – Password Manager Pro. Please consult the How
to Configure Password Manager Pro in Remote Desktop Manager topic for more information on the configuration.

Contents | 1243

SYSTEM.NET.WEBEXCEPTION: THE REQUEST WAS ABORTED: COULD NOT

CREATE SSL/TLS SECURE CHANNEL.

Password Manager Pro can be configured to use SSLv3, TLSv1.0, TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2. If you have configured
your Password Manager Pro server to use TLSv1.2 only, you will encounter this error message. You need to
configure your Password Manager Pro to accept TLSv1.0, TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2.

API KEY RECEIVED IS NOT ASSOCIATED TO ANY USER. AUTHENTICATION

FAILED.

Edit your API user in Password Manager Pro and generate a new Authentication Token, save your API user
and save this new token in Remote Desktop Manager in File – My Account Settings – Password Manager Pro.

USER IS NOT ALLOWED TO ACCESS FROM THIS HOST

During the creation of an API User in Password Manager Pro, a Host (Computer name) is necessary to create
the user. In Password Manager Pro it may be registered using the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of
the computer. In Remote Desktop Manager on the other hand, you must set it exactly the same as the %
COMPUTERNAME% environment variable.

Another reason for this error we have seen is that the DNS name of the server was specified, but it would work
perfectly fine if you were using the IP address instead. Please test it with the procedure described below.

TESTING PROCEDURE WITH POWERSHELL

Here is a script that you can use to test your access from a client workstation. Save the following code in a file
called PMPTest.ps1. The technology used in the script is the same as is used from within Remote Desktop
Manager, therefore its the most conclusive test. If you contact Password Manager Pro support, they can provide
a Java based test fixture. It is not as useful except to prove that the server basically responds to your queries.

[CmdletBinding()]
Param(
[Parameter(Mandatory=$True,Position=1)]
[string]$PMPServer,

[Parameter(Mandatory=$True,Position=2)]
[string]$AuthToken
)

add-type @"
using System.Net;
using System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates;
public class TrustAllCertsPolicy : ICertificatePolicy {
public bool CheckValidationResult(
ServicePoint srvPoint, X509Certificate certificate,
WebRequest request, int certificateProblem) {
return true;

1244 | Remote Desktop Manager

}
}
"@

[System.Net.ServicePointManager]::CertificatePolicy = New-Object TrustAllCertsPolicy

cls
$connect = "https://" + $PMPServer + ":7272/restapi/json/v1/resources?AUTHTOKEN=$Aut
$result = Invoke-WebRequest -Uri $connect
$form = $result.Content
$content = ConvertFrom-Json $form

$status = $content.operation.result.status

if ($status -eq "Success") {

$content.operation.Details
}

if ($status -eq "Failed") {

$status
$content.operation.result.Message
}

Pause

Please note that the port is hard-coded in the script to 7272, which is the default value for Password Manager
Pro. Adapt to your environment.

From within Powershell, type the following.

.\PMPTest.ps1 {YOUR_PMP_SERVER} {YOUR_PMP_TOKEN}

Test with both the DNS name of the server and the IP address and observe the results.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER IS RETURNING THE IP ADDRESS OF THE SERVER

INSTEAD OF THE FQDN

In some organization, IP addresses are blocked and the host name of the Password Manager
Pro server needs to be returned. In that case, the Configuration File of the application would
need to be modified.

1. Close Remote Desktop Manager.

2. Find the Remote Desktop Manager Configuration File.

3. Edit the configuration file and add the line

<ResolvePMProURLIntoIPAddress>false</ResolvePMProURLIntoIPAddress>.

4. Save the modification and restart the application.

Contents | 1245

13.10.18Performance
13.10.18.1Data sources

REFRESH

This category affects all data source refreshes, therefore:

1. Initial load at program startup.

2. Prior to an Edit operation: by default, we reload the entry to ensure that we are working on the current
version.
3. Prior to establishing a connection: we need to insert in the activity in our Logs.
4. Whenever you use Refresh: Depending on your cache settings, we typically just get the changes that
occurred since your last refresh
5. Whenever you use the Tree View.

SQL Server has certain particularities that, if the default configuration is used, will cause
performance degradation as time goes by. Please consult SQL Server Performance.

HEAVY USAGE OF CUSTOM IMAGES

Custom images need to be stored in the data source, this results in the size of the configuration becoming
problematic if there are too many entries using them. If that becomes the case it would be better to revert to built-
in images.

HEAVY USAGE OF RTF DESCRIPTION

RTF in itself is not a real issue until you decide to embed images in the description. This results in the same
problem as using custom images, namely the size of the configuration becoming too large. If that becomes the
case, reduce the size of your descriptions.

OFFLINE MODE ACTIVATED FOR DATA SOURCE

When you enable the Offline Mode, a local file is created and is kept in sync with the data source. This file is
encrypted using the Windows built-in NTFS encryption which can cause delays in refreshing the local data file.
This is rarely the case but seems to happen on computers within a domain which has been hardened by the
network administrator. You can turn off this option by unchecking Use NTFS Encryption for offline mode in File
– Options – Advanced.

1246 | Remote Desktop Manager

NTFS Encryption

CLASSIC UI

The new Ribbon UI is modern and allows for infinite variations of panel organization, but it does take more
calculations by the UI layer. On most system this is not a cause for noticeable performance slowdown, but on
others setting the User Interface to Classic UI (v7.x) in the general options tab will definitely help.

13.10.18.2Diagnostic

DESCRIPTION

Sometimes when a performance issue occurs while using Remote Desktop Manager, the
support personnel may ask you to send information. Here are three sources or information that
the support team requires to help diagnose your issue.

PROCEDURES

MY DATA SOURCE INFORMATION

Contents | 1247

My Data Source Information

1. Open File – My Data Source Information.

1248 | Remote Desktop Manager

2. Click on the envelope button to send the information to our support team. In the following
dialog, ensure you specify enough information to link the report to the appropriate ticket, if the
process was started from the forum include your forum username.

DIAGNOSTIC

Diagnostic Window
1. Open Help – Diagnostic.

Contents | 1249

In the following dialog, ensure you specify enough information to link

2. Click on the Send button.
the report to the appropriate ticket, if the process was started from the forum, please include
your forum username.

PROFILER

Profiler
1. Open Help – Profiler, move the window aside to clear the main window of Remote Desktop
Manager.
2. Select the Performance tab.
3. In Remote Desktop Manager, hold the CTRL key and press the refresh button.
4. Information will be added in the Performance tab.
5. Click on the Send Trace to Support button. In the following dialog, ensure you specify enough
information to link the report to the appropriate ticket, if the process was started from the
forum, please include your forum username.
13.10.18.3Startup

DESCRIPTION

The start-up performance of the application can be affected by two main events:
1. Launching the "Shell".
2. Obtaining the content of the data source.

Since getting the data involves an additional layer that may be the cause of a perceived
slowness for the application to be ready, we require that you create a new empty XML data

1250 | Remote Desktop Manager

source to measure the application start-up time. This will in help determine if the issue lies with
the shell or with the data source.

Please consult Remote Desktop Manager Startup performance for the first step. You can then
consult Performance - Data sources if you feel that there is an issue in that area.
13.10.19Powershell

ERROR

When running PowerShell (RDM CmdLet) after deploying Remote Desktop Manager from the
*.zip file, you might see an error message like the following:

Exception occurred while initializing the installation:

System.IO.FileLoadException: Could not load file or assembly 'file:///C:

\Tools\Devolutions\RDM\RDM For Phone Support\RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShell.dll' or
one of its dependencies. Operation is not supported. (Exception from HRESULT: 0x80131515).

Error Message

SOLUTION

You must unblock RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShell.dll &

RemoteDesktopManager.Core.XmlSerializers.dll. The 2 files are located in the installation
folder of Remote Desktop Manager. Right-click on RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShell.dll
& RemoteDesktopManager.Core.XmlSerializers.dll and select Properties. In the Properties
windows, click on Unblock.

Contents | 1251

Properties Of RemoteDesk topManager.PowerShell.dll

ERROR

Cannot load Windows PowerShell snap-in Remote.Desktop.Manager.10.0.4 because of the

following error: Could not load file or assembly 'file:///C:\Program Files (x86)
\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager\RemoteDesktopManager.PowerShell.dll' or one of its
dependencies. This assembly is built by a runtime newer than the currently loaded runtime and
cannot be loaded.

SOLUTION

PowerShell v.4.0 need to be installed.

1252 | Remote Desktop Manager

To get your PowerShell version, execute the following command:

$PSVersionTable.

ERROR

None of the Powershell cmdlets in Remote Desktop Manager work after an update, even if they
were running correctly prior to the update.

SOLUTION

The first step is to check how many versions of the RDM snap-in are currently installed on the
computer. Just type this command in Powershell (RDM CmdLet) :
Get-PSSnapin -name Remote.Desktop.Manager.*

Get-PSSnapin commandlet

If there are more than one version of the snap-in installed, the result of the command will list them
like this :

List of all versions of the RDM snap-in

To remove snap-ins that do not match with the actual version of Remote Desktop Manager
installed on the computer, use the Remove-PSSnapin cmdlet, ensure you specify the specific
version to remove.

Contents | 1253

Removing the undesired RDM snap-in

Finally, verify if only the snap-in of the current version of RDM is installed with the Get-PSSnapin
command.

List of all versions of the RDM snap-in

"CANNOT BE LOADED BECAUSE RUNNING SCRIPTS IS DISABLED ON THIS

SYSTEM."

There are 2 probable causes.

1. This is a Windows Security Policy.

You must run the command below (Run as Administrator first);

Set-ExecutionPolicy

More Information can be found here;

https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee176961.aspx

2. Open Remote Desktop Manager as Administrator and open the Powershell module and run;
Set-ExecutionPolicy

13.10.20Putty

ERROR

PUTTY IN EMBEDDED MODE DOES NOT WORK IN THE APPLICATION

Remote Desktop Manager is not able to execute Putty in embedded mode when Team Viewer's QuickConnect
button is present in the title bar.

1254 | Remote Desktop Manager

To resolve this issue, you need to disable the QuickConnect button in Team Viewer by unchecking the option
Extra – Options – Advanced – Show advanced options – QuickConnect button – Configure – Show
QuickConnect button.

This solution can also be applied to other applications such as Filezilla or Firefox.

13.10.21Remote Desktop Manager

ERRORS

MY MAPPED NETWORK DRIVE(S) ARE NOT AVAILABLE WHEN USING RUN AS ADMINISTRATOR TO
LAUNCH REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

This is because of User Access Control (UAC), a built-in security layer of Windows.
Effectively you are considered a different user with different preferences, the Mapped
network drives being one such preference. In order to have the same mapped drives you
have a few options:

1. Using an elevated command prompt, recreate the same mapped drive(s) using the NET
USE {DRIVENAME} {SHARENAME} /PERSISTENT:YES command

2. Modifying the registry to link connections between the accounts, see

https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/937624.

“COULD NOT LOAD FILE OR ASSEMBLY

"SYSTEM.ENTERPRISESERVICES.WRAPPER.DLL OR ONE OF ITS
DEPENDENCIES. THE SYSTEM CANNOT FIND THE PATH SPECIFIED.”

This error is due to a corrupted Microsoft's .NET Framework installation. Please consult the Corrupted System File
topic for more information on how to resolve this issue.

"MIXED MODE ASSEMBLY IS BUILD AGAINST VERSION 2.0.50727 OF THE

RUNTIME"

This should occur only on machines with development environments or when the .net framework
have undergone multiple installs/uninstalls.

In RemoteDesktopManager.exe.cfg, which is located in the installation folder, locate the

startup element and add the useLegacyV2RuntimeActivationPolicy attribute. The end
result should look like:

Contents | 1255

CAN'T PASTE IN ANY FIELDS OF REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER

Webroot SecureAnywhere AntiVirus may cause the issue because of the Identity Protection module. Set
remotedesktopmanager.exe to Allow and it will let you paste again in the application.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER HANGS

Please consult topic Hung Remote Desktop Manager troubleshooting for more information.

ALL OF MY SESSIONS OPEN IN EMBEDDED AND/OR EXTERNAL MODE

All your sessions open in a display mode that is undesirable and you can't seem to set it the way you want by
default. This can be changed by going in File -> Options -> User Interface -> Navigation Pane

Default Display Mode Action

13.10.21.1Caching

DESCRIPTION

1256 | Remote Desktop Manager

You are not seeing the content that you're expecting to see in the Navigation Pane.

SOLUTION

This issue can be caused by a corruption of the local cache. There's several methods to refresh
the local cache in Remote Desktop Manager.

METHOD 1

Press CTRL + F5 on your keyboard.

METHOD 2

Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and click on the refresh button in the Quick Access
Toolbar.

Quick Access Toolbar

METHOD 3

You can manage the local cache by doing a Vaccum, a Repair or a Delete. Please consult
Manage Cache topic for more information.
13.10.21.2Debugging

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 1257

Sometimes when an issue occurs while using Remote Desktop Manager, the support personnel
may ask you to turn on debugging and send the information back. Here are two procedures that
you can follow.

Any debug level other then zero will slow down the application and write a lot of
information in the application logs. As soon as you have completed the
diagnostics you should revert back the debug level to zero.

PROCEDURES

Use the in-depth debugging method whenever you need to diagnose the startup or initial
connection.The Ad-hoc debugging method is much easier to follow and is sufficient in most
cases.

AD-HOC DEBUGGING

Debug only tab of the profiler window

1. Open Help – Profiler, move the window aside to clear the main window of Remote
Desktop Manager.

2. In the Debug only tab, click on the ellipsis button and activate the proper debug
categories.

1258 | Remote Desktop Manager

3. In Remote Desktop Manager, perform the action that is under investigation. For timing
session load times, please press CTRL-F5 to invalidate the cache and perform a full
refresh. You should see debug information appear in the profiler window.

4. Click on Send trace to support. In the following dialog, ensure you specify enough
information to link the report to the appropriate ticket, if the process was started from the
forum include your forum username.

IN-DEPTH DEBUGGING

1. Open File – Options – Advanced, click on the Debug level ellipsis button and activate
the proper debug categories.

2. In the Information section below, you will see a hyperlink to your configuration folder, press
on it to have an explorer window opened in that folder.

3. Close Remote Desktop Manager.

4. As a preparatory phase, it would be best to clear existing logs to limit the scope of what
will need to be analyzed. Delete or rename files named RemoteDesktopManager.log,
RemoteDesktopManager.log.db and RemoteDesktopManager.debug from your
configuration folder.

5. Start Remote Desktop Manager.

6. Perform the action that is under investigation.

7. Open File – Options – Advanced, set the Debug level to zero.

8. Close Remote Desktop Manager.

9. Package the *.log, *.log.db and *.debug files from your configuration folder and send
them to us.

13.10.21.3High CPU Usage

DESCRIPTION

Since the release of Remote Desktop Manager 13, some users have experienced high CPU
usage on their systems, especially in Remote Desktop Services (RDS) environment. This is
caused by the entry state verification feature.

Contents | 1259

SOLUTION

This option is available with version 13.0.13.0 and above.

Disable the option Allow entry states (Lock, Running, Checkout) in Administration – Data
Source Settings (System Settings) – General to improve performance on your servers and
your workstations.

System Settings

13.10.21.4HDPI Scaling Issues

4K SCREENS MAKE REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER UNUSABLE

To resolve these issues, we will elaborate on two methods. One in Remote Desktop Manager and another using a
built-in Windows functionality.

METHOD 1

1260 | Remote Desktop Manager

First, in Remote Desktop Manager, go in File – Options – User Interface and please uncheck “Disable display
scaling on high DPI settings.”

HDPI Scaling

If you cannot see the setting because of display issues, you can add the line in your config files directly. To locate
your config file please refer to Configuration File Location. Once you have found the right folder, please open
RemoteDesktopManager.cfg with your preferred text editor. Under the line “<CreationDate>2016-11-
14T00:00:00-05:00</CreationDate> please add, “

<DisableHDPIAutoScaling>false</DisableHDPIAutoScaling>

Restart Remote Desktop Manager and the problem should be resolved.

METHOD 2

The second is directly with windows options.

Contents | 1261

Right-click on your Remote Desktop Manager icon. Go to Properties and in the Compatibility tab check Disable
display scaling on high DPI settings.

When applying this change, you must log off and log back in with your user for
changes to take effect.

Windows 10 Anniversary Update (Build 14393)

DPI Settings

Windows 10 Creators Update (Build 15063 and above)

1262 | Remote Desktop Manager

DPI Settings

13.10.21.5Hung Remote Desktop Manager

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager integrates with many different technologies and we do our best to
isolate our main process from others, but it is not always possible.

SYMPTOMS

Contents | 1263

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER HANGS WHEN LOGGING OFF A RDP SESSION

Please refer to RDM Hangs when logging off RDP sessions.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER HANGS FOR NO APPARENT REASON

Remote Desktop Manager hangs while you were not even using it or you were not using any other technology from
within it. This makes it hard to identify the culprit. Advanced users can follow Hung Remote Desktop Manager
Dump file creation.

13.10.21.5.1 Hung Remote Desktop Manager Dump file creation

DESCRIPTION

Follow this procedure ONLY when guided by a Devolutions support specialist.

There are no guarantees the we can identify the issue, but following this procedure may guide
Devolutions towards identifying the root cause.

Please refrain from sending more than two dump files. We will simply not be
able to analyze all of them.

PROCEDURES

AD-HOC METHOD

Perform this only when the application becomes unresponsive, meaning that it stops refreshing
its screen and that the operating system adds the Unresponsive label in its title bar.
1. Launch the Task Manager.
2. Identify Remote Desktop Manager in the Apps list.
3. Right-click and choose Create dump file.
4. This will generate a file that cannot be transferred by email. There are multiple free online services to send large
files, please contact us if you need a suggestion for such a service.

1264 | Remote Desktop Manager

USING THE PROCDUMP UTILITY

The following procedure makes use of a tool offered by Microsoft's Technet, namely the
Sysinternals suite. The tool that we need is procdump. It is easier because the tool will monitor
the application and create a dump file automatically.

Create a batch file containing a command such as:

{TOOLS_PATH\procdump.exe -e -h -ma -g -x {DUMP_PATH} "{INSTALL_PATH}\RemoteDesktopManager

If the application becomes unresponsive, the tool will handle everything. Simply locate the dump
file and send it to us.
13.10.21.6Large Memory Aw are Application

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager 32 bit version is limited in the amount of memory it can use. This is
limited to 2 GB. This didn't cause issues until the release of Window 8 and Windows Server
2012, RDP connections to these OS's consume a large amount of memory, typically 140-160
Mb per connection.

Remote Desktop Manager 64 bit version allow the application to use as much memory as is
available, in the mean time, we've modified Remote Desktop Manager to allow it to access
more memory, but this must be paired with a modification to your operating system.

You can perform this only if you have more then 2 GB of RAM.

INSTRUCTIONS

WINDOWS XP/SERVER 2003

1. Right-click My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties dialog box will
appear.

2. Click the Advanced tab.

Contents | 1265

3. In the Startup and Recovery area, click Settings. The Startup and Recovery dialog
box will appear.

4. In the System startup area, click Edit. This will open the Windows boot.ini file in
Notepad.

5. In the [Operating Systems] section, add the following switches to the end of the startup
line that includes the /fastdetect switch: /3GB

6. Save the changes and close Notepad.

7. Click OK two times to close the open dialog boxes, and then restart the computer for the
change to take effect.

WINDOWS VISTA, WINDOWS 7, SERVER 2008

The memory parameter can be any value between 2048 (2 GB) and 3072 (3 GB).
If you have 3GB of RAM you must reserve some for your system. If you have 3 GB
of ram, allocate 2560 Mb, for 4 GB systems use 3072.

1. Open command prompt with Administrator rights. To do this, go to Programs,

Accessories, right-click on Command Prompt and select "Run as Administrator".

2. Enter the following at the prompt and press enter:

bcdedit /set IncreaseUserVA 2560

3. Close the prompt and restart the computer.

1266 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.21.7Missing Navigation Pane

DESCRIPTION

Several panes are missing in Remote Desktop Manager and you seem unable to bring them
back.

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER ENTERPRISE

Execute the following steps below:

· Close Remote Desktop Manager.

· Navigate to %localappdata%\Devolutions

· Copy the RemoteDesktopManager folder on your desktop.

· Delete the RemoteDesktopManager folder in %localappdata%\Devolutions

· Restart Remote Desktop Manager.

This will create a new RemoteDesktopManager folder in %localappdata%\Devolutions. If

everything is back to normal, close Remote Desktop Manager again and copy the 3 files below
from the folder RemoteDesktopManager on your desktop in %localappdata%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager to restore your configuration and your local data
source.
· RemoteDesktopManager.cfg

· RemoteDesktopManager.ext

· Connections.db

REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FREE

Execute the following steps below:

· Close Remote Desktop Manager.

· Navigate to %localappdata%\Devolutions

· Copy the RemoteDesktopManagerFree folder on your desktop

Contents | 1267

· Delete the RemoteDesktopManagerFree folder in %localappdata%\Devolutions

· Restart Remote Desktop Manager.

This will recreate a new RemoteDesktopManagerFree folder in %localappdata%

\Devolutions. If everything is back to normal, close Remote Desktop Manager again and copy
the 3 files below from the folder RemoteDesktopManagerFree on your desktop in %
localappdata%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManagerFree to restore your configuration and
your local data source.

· RemoteDesktopManagerFree.cfg

· RemoteDesktopManagerFree.ext

· Connections.db
13.10.21.8Missing Sessions

DESCRIPTION

All entries are missing from the Navigation Pane.

SOLUTION 1

Refresh the local cache. Please consult the Caching topic for more information.

SOLUTION 2

The Name column may be missing.

1268 | Remote Desktop Manager

Name Column Missing

Click on Window -> Reset Layout to bring back the Name column.

Reset Layout

13.10.21.9Offline Mode

ERRORS

MISSING ENTRIES OR DELETED ENTRIES STILL SHOWING

Your offline cache may be out of sync with the content of the data source. Press CTRL + F5
to refresh the local cache.

Contents | 1269

SYSTEM.DATA.SQLITE.SQLITEEXCEPTION (0X80004005): FILE IS ENCRYPTED OR

IS NOT A DATABASE

The offline file (offline.db) needs to be deleted manually.

Click on File – My Data Source Information and now hover over the file size. This will give you the full file path,
something like %LocalAppData%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager\GUID-DatasourceID\offline.db.

My Data Source Information

Close Remote Desktop Manager, delete the offline.db file and restart Remote Desktop Manager. This will force
the application to recreate the offline file.

13.10.21.10
Profiler

DESCRIPTION

Please consult the Profiler topic for more information.

13.10.21.11
Red X in Navigation Pane or Credential List

DESCRIPTION

There is a huge Red "X" in the Navigation Pane or in the Credential List

SOLUTION

There are a few things you can try to get rid of the red X.

First, try going to the Window tab and click Reset Layout

Sometimes that can fix some Red X issues.

1270 | Remote Desktop Manager

If that doesn’t work, you can try to close RDM, then navigate to %localappdata% -> Devolutions -
> RemoteDesktopManager and delete every file with the .lyt extension.

If neither of those methods does the trick, you will have to move the RemoteDesktopManager
folder from localappdata to your desktop, then uninstall RDM, reboot your computer and reinstall
RDM. Once you reopen RDM, the red X should be gone.

13.10.21.12
Root Is Empty Error

DESCRIPTION

After upgrading to Remote Desktop Manager 13.5.x, you may receive the error below;

RootException - Root is empty!

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Managers.RootConnectionManager.get_RootConnection
()

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Frames.ConnectionViews.FreConnectionTreeListView.c
e5f4c5875531b613e87da05d31efd852(ConnectionViewMode
cfa8984eaceb595fb57911c4e0ee96824)

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Frames.ConnectionViews.FreConnectionTreeListView.L
oadConnectionList(Connection[] connections, ConnectionViewMode viewMode)

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Forms.FrmMainRibbonBase.LoadAllConnectionView(Bo
olean saveState)

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Forms.FrmMainRibbonBase.RefreshAllConnectionView(
Boolean saveState, Boolean checkOnline)

at Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Managers.MainFormManager.DoFirstLoad(IMainForm
mainform)

at
Devolutions.RemoteDesktopManager.Forms.FrmMainDocumentManager.cae3b4c7c167cf0d9

Contents | 1271

747ac4fee11ac00a(Object c19f185fd70cefc696ba148af1c4faf54, EventArgs

cf1018bb83ec7debd818319fd3cb4844e)

at System.Windows.Forms.Timer.OnTick(EventArgs e)

at System.Windows.Forms.Timer.TimerNativeWindow.WndProc(Message& m)

at System.Windows.Forms.NativeWindow.Callback(IntPtr hWnd, Int32 msg, IntPtr wparam, IntPtr

lparam)

SOLUTION 1

Many issues related to it have been addressed in the latest version which you can download
here;

https://remotedesktopmanager.com/home/download

SOLUTION 2

The other solution is to simply switch between data sources or delete and recreate the data
source in File -> Data Sources.
13.10.21.13
Session Focus Issue

DESCRIPTION

AFTER CLOSING A SESSION, THE FOCUS IS SET TO THE LAST OPENED

CONNECTION.

There are two settings in File -> Options -> User Interface -> Tree View that you can
enable/disable to resolve this issue. Those are Auto focus tab on item select and Auto
select item on tab focus.

1272 | Remote Desktop Manager

Tree View Options

13.10.21.14
SQL Server Data Source Connection Refused

DESCRIPTION

UNABLE TO CONNECT FROM RDM OR PVM. CONNECTION REFUSED.

When you try to connect from either Remote Desktop Manager and/or Password Vault Manager,
you receive the following message;

Contents | 1273

Data Source Connection Error

You will need to access the database via SQL Server Management Studio and execute the
following statement on the database;

Please do a backup of the database before running that script.

UPDATE dbo.DatabaseInfo

SET Settings = REPLACE(Settings,

'<AllowAccessWindowsPVM>false</AllowAccessWindowsPVM>', '')

UPDATE dbo.DatabaseInfo

SET Settings = REPLACE(Settings,

'<AllowAccessWindowsRDM>false</AllowAccessWindowsRDM>', '')
13.10.21.15
Startup performance

DESCRIPTION

As described in the Performance chapter, the application performance must be

validated with an empty data source. Please create a new empty XML data
source and select it as being the current data source.

If you experience slow startup times, there are a few things to try in order to reduce the time
before the application is available for use.

1274 | Remote Desktop Manager

SLOW STARTUP ON MACHINES THAT ARE NOT CONNECTED TO THE INTERNET.

For your security, we "sign" our program with a code signature. This results in the validity of
the signature being checked at application startup. If the machine is not connected to the
internet the application will wait for a response until a timeout occurs. For detailed
explanations please read the following:

· Improving Application Start Up Time

· https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/markrussinovich/2009/05/23/the-case-of-the-slow-
keynote-demo/

The workaround is to create a text file in Remote Desktop Manager installation folder,
named RemoteDesktopManager.exe.config that must contain the following:

PREVENT INTERNET ACCESS

Every time you start Remote Desktop Manager, the application will try to connect on
https://remotedesktopmanager.com/clientinternal/enterprisenews. You should prevent all internet
access from the application.

Add the line <DisableAnalytics>true</DisableAnalytics> to your

RemoteDesktopManager.cfg file. You can place it above the last line, which should contain
</Option>. You can find the configuration file using File – Options – Advanced and click on the
blue hyperlink at the bottom.

Contents | 1275

RemoteDesk topManager.cfg

NATIVE IMAGE GENERATION

Remote Desktop Manager is a .NET application. This means that the code is delivered in an
intermediate format. It is then processed on your local machine in order to generate what is
called a Native Image. Sometimes, this process can be slow. It can also reoccur after certain
conditions are met. For these reasons, we deliver a batch file to process all of our files at once.
You will find this file in the installation folder of Remote Desktop Manager. It is called
OptimizeRDM.bat. Please open a Command Window using Run As Administrator and launch
that script.

ANTIVIRUS

It is possible that an antivirus application is causing slowdowns.

We do not recommend turning off the antivirus protection in risky conditions.

You should close all browsers and ensure that only essential applications are
running. We also suggest this step only for a short duration in order to see the
startup time of the application change significantly.

If your antivirus application allows it, simply turn off monitoring of Remote Desktop Manager's
installation folder. If you are comfortable with turning of the whole antivirus protection, do this to
test the startup time.

There is sadly nothing we can do in this case. It is only a step that helps in isolating the cause.

1276 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.21.16
Unable to install or upgrade

DESCRIPTION

When you install or upgrade Remote Desktop Manager, you receive this error message below;

Installation Error Message

You simply have to deploy the *.zip file of Remote Desktop Manager in Remote Desktop
Manager's installation folder.

By default, Remote Desktop Manager is installed in C:\Program Files (x86)

\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager.

When the *.zip file is downloaded, extract or copy/paste the content of the *.zip file in the C:
\Program Files (x86)\Devolutions\Remote Desktop Manager folder. When you restart
Remote Desktop Manager, the latest version will be installed.

You can download the zip here; https://remotedesktopmanager.com/Home/Download.

13.10.21.17
Unable to Uninstall

ERROR

UNABLE TO UNINSTALL REMOTE DESKTOP MANAGER FROM YOUR COMPUTER

BECAUSE OF A MISSING MSI FILE

To fix issues that you may encounter with the installation, removal of the application or missing MSI file, please
run the Microsoft Troubleshooting tool on your computer.
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/mats/program_install_and_uninstall

Contents | 1277

If the installer still reports an error, please run the installer from the command line using these
parameters:
msiexec /i "{Name of msi package" /L*V "Name of log file"

Please adapt to your environment and the folders that you use. Here is an example:
msiexec /i "Setup.RemoteDesktopManager.11.7.6.0.msi" /L*V "C:\log\RdmInstall.log"

Send the resulting log file to [email protected].

13.10.21.18
Upgrade

DESCRIPTION

You seem unable to uninstall Remote Desktop Manager from Programs and Features in
Windows. In the Event log; you see the following error message;

Event Log Message

STEP1

Please try the suggested fix by Microsoft here; https://support.microsoft.com/en-

us/help/17588/fix-problems-that-block-programs-from-being-installed-or-removed.

Your settings and local data for RDM are by default under %LOCALAPPDATA%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager, our installer doesn’t touch this at all. You must
preserve this folder in its current state.

STEP 2

Once this is done, please contact [email protected] for further assistance.

13.10.21.19
User Interface

THE RIBBON HAS BEEN HIDDEN AND I DON'T KNOW HOW TO MAKE IT
VISIBLE

1278 | Remote Desktop Manager

You have two options: Use the Alt + F11 shortcut or using the system menu of the application
you can check the "Top Pane" command. Please see Top Pane for more information.

THE TREE VIEW HAS DISAPPEARED FROM THE NAVIGATION PANE

The Navigation Pane can be displayed in many modes. You can select the tree view with View – Vault – Tree
View or use the default shortcut F7.

View - Vault Menu

THE MAIN FORM LAYOUT IS BROKEN

Use the Reset Layout option to revert back to the default UI layout in the Window tab.

Reset Layout Button

Contents | 1279

The reset layout might not resolve all the issues. Close the application and delete
the layout files (*.lyt) in %LocalAppData%
\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager to completely restore the layout.

THE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR NEEDS TO BE RESET

Quick Access Toolbar

To reset the quick access toolbar, close the application and delete the file remotedesktopmanager.qtb in %
LocalAppData%\Devolutions\RemoteDesktopManager

THE NAVIGATION PANE DISPLAYS ONLY MY FAVORITES

Only your favorites are displayed, the root node is also entitled "Favorites".

You may have inadvertently enabled a filter. Click on the ellipsis button of the search filter box and deselect the
Show Only Favorites menu item. Simply Vault or whichever view you expected at the bottom of the pane.

13.10.21.20
Unable to communicate w ith Passw ord Vault Manager

ERROR

1280 | Remote Desktop Manager

UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH PASSWORD VAULT MANAGER, PLEASE VERIFY

IT'S STARTED AND THAT THE DATABASE IS OPENED!:

When trying to retrieve a credential using your Password Vault Manager credential entry in
Remote Desktop Manager, the loading times out and you receive the following error message;

Error Dialog

SOLUTION

Please follow the steps bellow to resolve this.

1. Close Remote Desktop Manager.

2. Navigate to %LOCALAPPDATA%/Devolutions/RemoteDesktopManager

3. Edit the file RemoteDesktopManager.cfg with a file editor.

3. Add the following line in the Configuration File:

<EnsurePasswordVaultManagerPresent>false</EnsurePasswordVaultManagerPresent>

4. Save the file & restart Remote Desktop Manager. You should now be able to successfully
communicate with Password Vault Manager.
13.10.21.21
Prox y Authentication Required Error

DESCRIPTION

When opening Remote Desktop Manager, you receive the following error message;

Contents | 1281

The remote server returned an error. (407) Proxy Authentication Required.

SOLUTION 1

Please configure your proxy in File -> Options -> Proxy.

SOLUTION 2

Please add the devolutions.net in your Proxy's exception list.

For those using our cloud solutions, please also add https://cloud.devolutions.net.
13.10.22RPC

ERRORS

THE RPC SERVER IS UNAVAILABLE (EXCEPTION FROM HRESULT: 0X800706BA)

This error may occur in the normal operation of RDM. The root causes are network connectivity or stopped
Windows services.

1) Ensure the host is properly identified (Name or IP address) and it is indeed running and accepting network
traffic.
2) Ensure the host firewall allows inbound traffic for Windows Management Instrumentation.
3) Ensure the following services are started and are set to automatic startup type.

o TCP/IP NetBIOS Helper

o Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
o Windows Management Instrumentation

13.10.23Secret Server

DESCRIPTION

TESTING PROCEDURE WITH POWERSHELL

Here is a script that you can use to test your access from a client workstation.

1282 | Remote Desktop Manager

Save the following code in a file called searchsecret.ps1.

Change the script as needed to match your Secret Server and username/password/domain.

Change the $searchterm to match your search.

This will allow you to test the connectivity between your workstation and your Secret Server
server.
$url = 'http://mysecretserver/webservices/sswebservice.asmx'
$username = 'myusername'
$password = 'mypassword'
$domain = 'mydomain' # leave blank for local users

$searchterm = 'VPN'
$proxy = New-WebServiceProxy -uri $url -UseDefaultCredential

# get a token for further use by authenticating using username/password

$result1 = $proxy.Authenticate($username, $password, '', $domain)
if ($result1.Errors.length -gt 0){
$result1.Errors[0]
exit
}
else
{
$token = $result1.Token
}

# search secrets with our searchterm (authenticate by passing in our token)

Write-Host 'Searching for: ' $searchterm
$result2 = $proxy.SearchSecrets($token, $searchterm,$null,$null)
if ($result2.Errors.length -gt 0){
$result2.Errors[0]
}
else
{
Write-Host 'Got search results: ' $result2.SecretSummaries.length

# If you want the data as XML

# $xml = convertto-xml $result2.SecretSummaries -As string -Depth 20
# $xml

$result2.SecretSummaries | ForEach-Object { Write-Host 'SecretId:' $_.SecretId ' Name:'

# if ($result2.SecretSummaries.length -gt 0) {
# $result2.SecretSummaries[0]
# }

Contents | 1283

13.10.24Secure Note

ERROR

THE TEXT IN A SECURENOTE IS NOT DISPLAYED PROPERLY.

SecureNote

Change the IE emulation mode in File – Options – Types – Web, set the IE Mode to use
Internet Explorer 10.

IE Mode

1284 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.25Session Tools

COMPUTER MANAGEMENT GENERATES AN "ACCESS IS DENIED(5)"

ERROR MESSAGE

When you attempt to use Computer Management, you receive the error below.

To get this working, you need to check this option in the Tools tab of the RDP session.

RDP Session Properties

If this doesn't solve your issue, it is likely that your session has User Specific Settings enabled.
Please check your session for these settings.
This can be useful when you are using tools such as:
· Hyper-V
· Event Viewer
· Computer Management
· Windows Services

If this is often needed, we recommend you to change the Default Settings of the entry type. With this modification,
all your new sessions will use the specified credentials when a tool is launched!

Contents | 1285

13.10.26SSH

REBEX.NET.SSHEXCEPTION: UNSUPPORTED PROTOCOL VERSION.

Only SSH v2 is supported. SSH v1 has inherent design flaws which make it vulnerable and it
has been generally considered obsolete. Putty can be used for situations where SSH v1 is
required.

APPLICATION KEYPAD NOT WORKING CORRECTLY.

When trying to use the keypad in SSH, it does not send the correct characters when you type.

In the Terminal tab, please set the Disable application keypad mode to True so that the option
works globally on all your sessions;

SSH Keypad mode

1286 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.27Synchronizers
13.10.27.1Active Directory Synchronizer

GENERAL

ENTRIES ARE CREATED WITH A *CNF:{GUID} SUFFIX

This is a problem caused by Multimaster replication of directory objects. When there are
name collisions, the system automatically renames one of the accounts by appending CNF
to indicate conflict resolution and a GUID which is guaranteed to be unique.

There is a command to run to remove these objects, namely

repadmin /removelingeringobject, please consult these references for the recipe to follow.

REF : http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb727059.aspx and

https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/windowsserver/en-US/e9327be6-922c-4b9f-
8357-417c3ab6a1af/cnf-remove-from-ad?forum=winserverDS

DUPLICATE ENTRIES CREATED

HOST NAME IS APPENDED WITH CNF, AND THE ENTRY NAME ALSO CONTAINS A
GUID SUFFIX

Please refer to Entries created with a CNF:{GUID} suffix above.

13.10.28VMWare

ERRORS

Contents | 1287

VMware tools make assumptions that their scripts are run in an interactive
session and also present warnings the first time that they are run. As it stands
today, you have to run commands interactively after you've installed or
upgraded their tools.

The PowerCLI configuration has multiple scopes: Session, User, and

AllUsers. Please refer to their documentation for details and on how to
properly configure as per your requirements.

CONNECTION TO THE SERVER FAILED!

This error message is displayed for various reasons. For a quick diagnostic, launch the VMware
vSphere PowerCLI shortcut of the same bitness (32/64 bit) as your Remote Desktop Manager.
Some commands will be listed in the table below to diagnose issues in sequence

STEP COMMAND

Have you specified the Execution Policy of Get-ExecutionPolicy

scripts?

Have you configured the PowerCLI's Get-PowerCLIConfiguration

InvalidCertificateAction?

Have you configured the PowerCLI's Get-PowerCLIConfiguration

DefaultVIServerMode?

IN THE POWERSHELL WINDOW : ERROR MESSAGE APPEAR BUT IT IS

IMPOSSIBLE TO READ THEM BEFORE THE WINDOW CLOSES

Remote Desktop Manager ultimately sends a few commands in an encoded script, you can
open a PowerShell window and type the following commands sequentially. This way you will
have time to see the error messages.

The first command connects with the server, a password prompt will appear:

Connect-VIServer {server ip or name};

1288 | Remote Desktop Manager

The second command lists the virtual machines present on the server. It displays the Name
and the ID.

Get-View -ViewType VirtualMachine | select -Property Name, {$_.Moref.Value};

IN THE POWERSHELL WINDOW : THERE WERE ONE OR MANY PROBLEM WITH

THE SERVER CERTIFICATES

You also see a message related to Set-PowerCLIConfiguration. Please consult

https://www.vmware.com/support/developer/PowerCLI/PowerCLI51/html/Set-
PowerCLIConfiguration.html and make an informed decision as what is the best course of
action when you take your security concerns into account. For users that are comfortable in
leaving the default certificate on the VMware server, you can launch a PowerShell command
window and run the following:
set-PowerCLIConfiguration -invalidCertificateAction "ignore" -confirm:$false

IN THE POWERSHELL WINDOW : THERE IS A QUESTION ABOUT MULTIPLE

SERVER SUPPORT

As described in their message, it will be the default value in a coming release. Please
consult their documentation and make an informed decision, but most users should accept
the Multiple option.

ISSUES WITH VMWARE POWERCLI

THE TERM 'CONNECT-VISERVER' IS NOT RECOGNIZED AS THE NAME OF A

CMDLET, FUNCTION, SCRIPT FILE, OR OPERABLE PROGRAM. CHECK THE
SPELLING OF THE NAME, OR IF A PATH WAS INCLUDED, VERIFY THAT THE PATH
IS CORRECT AND TRY AGAIN

CAUSE

This error occurs because the PowerCLI modules are not linked with PowerShell or the
PowerCLI Module for the Connect-ViServer command is missing.

Contents | 1289

SOLUTION

Check is VMware PowerCLI is installed.

Running 'Get-Module VM* -ListAvailable' in PowerShell shows the list of VMware modules
installed.

VMware PowerCLI

You should see 4 VMware modules listed in PowerShell as shown in the image above.

You can test to see if PowerShell recognizes the 'Connect-ViServer' command.

VMware PowerCLI

By typing the command, we see that PowerShell doesn't have the proper module installed.

In the PowerShell Window, install the PowerCLI modules by using the 'Install-Module'
command. Many step by step instructions can be found on Google.

Then type the 'Get-Module VM* -ListAvailable' command again, we can see that the PowerCLI
modules are now listed.

1290 | Remote Desktop Manager

VMware PowerCLI

A Final test with the 'Connect-ViServer' command, by typing it in PowerShell, the connection is
established and the issue should be resolved.

VMware PowerCLI

ADDITIONAL TROUBLESHOOTING

If try on a new computer and have an issue with VimAutomation.Core, you can install it with the
command:
Install-Module -Name VMware.VimAutomation.Core -AllowClobber -Scope CurrentUser

After the installation, if you run the command:

Get-Module VM* -ListAvailable

You should get the output below:

Contents | 1291

VMware PowerCLI

If you restart RDM with the current user (not running as admin) and open the VMware Dashboard
entry, after 30 seconds, you should see all your servers.

If this does not work, create a PowerShell entry, the blue one ,
select Embedded Script and type the script below:
Import-Module VMware.PowerCLI;
Connect-ViServer "SERVER_IP";
Get-View -ViewType VirtualMachine | select -Property Name, {$_.Moref.Value};

Click OK twice and try to start the Powershell entry.

If you get an error about execution policies, please refer to https://docs.microsoft.com/en-

us/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_execution_policies?
view=powershell-5.1

But you can resolve the issue with the following command;
Set-ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted -Scope CurrentUser

Please refer to your administrator to ensure this command is allowed to be used within your
infrastructure.
13.10.28.1Advanced Troubleshooting of the Pow erCLI

DESCRIPTION

Remote Desktop Manager calls PowerCLI's cmdlets and presents the results in its user
interface. Here are steps to help isolate issues when the integration is not working as expected.

1292 | Remote Desktop Manager

SCRIPT A GET THE LIST OF VIRTUAL MACHINES

GETVMS.PS1

Param(
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$viServer,
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$userName,
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$password
) #end param

$VMHost = Connect-VIServer $($viServer) -User $userName -Password $password

if ($VMHost -eq $null ) { throw "Connection to server failed!";}
try
{
Get-View -ViewType VirtualMachine | select -Property Name, {$_.Moref.Value};
}
catch
{
write-host $ErrorMessage
}
Disconnect-VIServer $VMHost -Force -Confirm:$false

EXAMPLE USE

.\GetVMs.ps1 [SERVER_NAME] [USER_NAME] [PASSWORD]

Name $_.Moref.Value
---- --------------
MACHINE1 18
MACHINE2 19

SCRIPT B - :LAUNCHING THE VMRC

CONNECTVMRCFROMPOWERCLI.PS1

Contents | 1293

Param(
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$viServer,
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$userName,
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$password,
[Parameter(Mandatory=$true)]
[string]$morefId = ""
) #end param

$VMHost = Connect-VIServer $($viServer) -User $userName -Password $password

if ($VMHost -eq $null ) { throw "Connection to server failed!";}

$si = Get-View ServiceInstance
$sm = Get-View $si.Content.SessionManager
$ticket = $sm.AcquireCloneTicket()
try
{
Start-Process -FilePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\VMware\VMware Remote Console\vmrc
}
catch
{
write-host $ErrorMessage
}
#must wait to allow for the process to be started BEFORE we disconnect from the serve
Start-Sleep -s 10
Disconnect-VIServer $VMHost -Force -Confirm:$false

EXAMPLE USE

You must send the MoRef.Value which was obtained using Script A, in our example, let's start
MACHINE2 which has 19 for ID.
.\ConnectVMRCFromPowerCLI.ps1 [SERVER_NAME] [USER_NAME] [PASSWORD] 19

The VMRC should appear and allow you to interact with it.
13.10.29VPN
13.10.29.1Missing Opened VPN from List

MISSING OPENED VPN FROM LIST:

The opened VPN is not listed in Remote Desktop Manager. Unfortunately, there is no way for
us to detect an already opened VPN session.

1294 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.29.2FortiClient

DESCRIPTION

Fortinet removed the feature to inject credentials in FortiClient 5.4 and above.
However, they still left the feature with FortiSSL

Company terminology:

· Fortinet is the name of the company

· Fortigate is the router of Fortinet

· Forticlient and FortiSSL are VPN of Fortinet

SOLUTION

The CLI for FortiSSL is not included anymore with the download of FortiClient. You need to
download the tools related to the current version of FortiClient here.

You need to have a support plan with Fortinet to download the tools. If you don't
have a support plan, try to contact Fortinet directly and ask them to send you the
file.

The file FortiSSLVPNClient.exe needs to be saved in the installation folder of FortiClient.

13.10.29.3Sonicw all Global VPN Client

ERRORS

THE CONNECTION IS NOT ESTABLISHED

Remote Desktop Manager simply calls the command line interface (CLI) with supported
parameters. At this time (v4.9), the executable can be found in:

Contents | 1295

C:\Program Files\Dell SonicWALL\Global VPN Client\SWGVC.exe

Simply call it as follows:

SWGVC.exe /E connection_name /U username /P password

The CLI must be able to connect, Remote Desktop Manager doesn't perform anything
additional to make it work.
13.10.29.4Microsoft VPN

DESCRIPTION

These types of VPNs can use either the RASDIAL or RASPHONE applications
for establishing the connection. Please consult Microsoft's article on their
differences and usage.

You can refer to this Microsoft TechNet article for more information on RASDIAL:
https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb490979.aspx.

For specific errors, consult the ISSUES section below.

GENERAL

Sometimes you need to accept a message or make a choice upon first use, but that typically
occurs only the first time. Sadly this makes running the command manually once mandatory on
all machines.

If you have elected to store the PBK in Remote Desktop Manager, we simply extract it to %TMP
%\RDM upon usage. After trying to establish a connection once, you should see your
phonebook in that folder, is it present?

By default, it uses RASDIAL, what happens if you run the following at the command prompt?
rasdial <connectionname> <username> <password> /phonebook:<phonebookpath>

1296 | Remote Desktop Manager

or if the Use rasphone (ConnectionManager Administrator Kit) option is checked, it will use
RASPHONE. What happens if you run the following at the command prompt?
rasphone -d <connectionname> -f <phonebookpath>

ISSUES

REMOTE ACCESS ERROR 623

Remote Access Error 623

Ensure that within the phonebook, the vpn definition name does contain a space character.

PASSWORD WITH QUOTATION MARKS

Quotation mark (") is not a valid character and should not be used in the password of a Microsoft
VPN entry.
13.10.29.5Cisco AnyConnect

DESCRIPTION

The Cisco AnyConnect add-on doesn't send the proper information like the password or the
group number to the vpncli.exe DOS window to establish the VPN connection.

For example, only the half of the password is sent to the Cisco AnyConnect window.

SOLUTION

Contents | 1297

The Cisco AnyConnect add-on use sendkeys to send information to the vpncli.exe window. The
issue that we encounter is caused by the Windows UAC feature. Enabling/Disabling UAC on
your computer should resolved the issue.

On your computer, go in Control Panel – User Account – User Account Control Settings:
· Select Never Notify to turn off the option.
· Select Notify me or Always notify to turn on the option.

13.10.30Web Browsers
13.10.30.1Internet Ex plorer

SCRIPT ERROR WITH IE EMBEDDED

AN ERROR HAS OCCURRED IN THE SCRIPT ON THIS PAGE

When you launch a Web Browser (http/https) in Internet Explorer directly (external mode), the script errors are
handled by the browser, so they are not displayed. In embedded mode, you need to enable the Hide script error
in the properties of your session.

1298 | Remote Desktop Manager

IE Embedded

BROWSER EXTENSION DOESN'T APPEAR IN THE TOOLBAR BUT IT IS

INSTALLED

This issue occurs when a specific option is unchecked for IE in Tools -> Internet Options ->
Advanced

The option is called Enable third-party browser extensions. After enabling this option, IE must be restarted.

Contents | 1299

IE Advanced Options

RENDERING

EMBEDDED HTML CONTENT IS NOT RENDERED WITH THE LATEST INTERNET

EXPLORER VERSION

By default Remote Desktop Manager does not use the latest IE version (emulation mode).
This can be changed in File – Options – Type – Web, IE Mode.

1300 | Remote Desktop Manager

ACCESSVIOLATIONEXCEPTION - ATTEMPTED TO READ OR WRITE PROTECTED

MEMORY

When a crash occurs in Remote Desktop Manager while using some ActiveX in IE, it's
often caused by Data Execution Prevention (DEP). DEP is a security feature included in
Windows. It is used to prevent an application or service from executing code from a non-
executable memory region.

To fix this, simply change the DEP settings for the application as follows:

1. Right Click My Computer – Properties.

2. Choose Advanced System Settings.

3. Click the Advanced Tab.

4. Click Settings under Performance.

5. Select the tab Data Execution Prevention.

6. Add RDM to the list.

LAUNCHED EXTERNAL WINDOWS (SUCH AS IE) POPUP IN THE BACKGROUND

You may have noticed that when you launch items such as IE windows from within RDM,
they pop-up in the background.

The ForegroundLockTimeout registry value for the User’s Profile has to be modified
from the default of 200000 down to 0:

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Desktop]
"ForegroundLockTimeout"=dword:00000000

Contents | 1301

Please note that some programs that have an extensive library of add-ons (Like MS Word)
may take the focus every time the add-on performs an action. You have to observe the
reaction of your most used programs and judge what is the setup that works best for you.

13.10.30.2Google Chrome

ISSUES

ADOBE FLASH PLAYER NEEDS YOUR PERMISSION TO RUN

You need to install Adobe Flash Player with PPAPI.

To do so, please follow the steps below:

1- Visit https://get.adobe.com/flashplayer/ with Google Chrome browser;

2- Download Adobe Flash Player.

3- Launch the installer from your download folder.

4- After the installation, close and restart Remote Desktop Manager.

5- Create an embedded Chrome web session and use the following link https://get.adobe.com/flashplayer/about/ to
verify that it works.

CERTIFICATE ERRORS IN EMBEDDED MODE

Remote Desktop Manager starts Google Chrome in a separate application (Embedded32.exe) and then re-
parents the application inside Remote Desktop Manager.
To resolve this issue, you need to check the option Ignore certificate errors in the properties of the Web
Browser (http/https) session.

1302 | Remote Desktop Manager

Google Chrome Session Properties

13.10.30.3Firefox

ISSUES

FIREFOX IN EMBEDDED MODE DOESN'T WORK IN THE APPLICATION

Remote Desktop Manager starts Firefox in a separate application (Embedded32.exe) and then re-parents the
application inside Remote Desktop Manager.

Firefox does not work when the Team Viewer QuickConnect button is present in the title bar.

To resolve this issue, you need to disable the QuickConnect button in Team Viewer by unchecking the option in
Extra – Options – Advanced – Show advanced options – QuickConnect button – Configure – Show
QuickConnect button.

Contents | 1303

13.10.30.4Web Authentication

DESCRIPTION

For some websites, the auto fill function does not work out of the box.

It requires some steps in order to properly send the username and password. Depending on the
website, the process can be simple or may require additional tweaks.

METHOD 1

AUTOMATICALLY LOG IN TO A WEBSITE

1. In the Login tab of the Web Browser entry, select the Form Authentication mode, and enter
the credentials. Then, verify that the Autofill login and Auto submit options are enabled.

Login - Form Authentication and Credentials

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Username Enter the username to connect on the website.

1304 | Remote Desktop Manager

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Domain Enter the domain to connect on the website.

Password Enter the password to connect on the website.

Autofill login Automatically fills in the credential fields when opening the
web page.

Autofill delay Set a delay between opening the web page and attempting
the auto fill feature.

Auto submit Automatically submit the credentials and try connecting to the
website.

2. In the Html Control ID tab, click the Discover button to define the appropriate fields.

The Discover command searches the web page to find the fields that correspond to those in the
entry. This allows the application to find the appropriate fields to fill when connecting to the
website.

Contents | 1305

Login - Html Control ID - Discover Form Fields

3. Once all the necessary steps have been completed, upon launching the session, the
credentials will automatically be entered and logged into the site.

METHOD 2

The second method requires to manually identify the IDs corresponding to the logon fields on the
login web page.

For this example, we will be using Google Chrome to inspect the logon fields.

For both the Username & Password fields, do a right-click inside the field and click on Inspect;

1306 | Remote Desktop Manager

Login fields – Inspect

You will see the corresponding IDs to be used in the HTML Control ID tab of the Web session in
Remote Desktop Manager;

Below, an example of the inspection for the Username field;

Contents | 1307

Logon Fields Inspect

13.10.31WebDav

ERRORS

UNABLE TO CONNECT TO WEBDAV

Make sure that the appropriate domain is configured in the Host field (ex: domain.com) and that you have
“/remote.php/dav/files/USERNAME/“ in Start location.

If you have a HTTPS website, check the Use SSL checkbox and configure the port to be 443.

You can always refer you to the ownCloud documentation for more details on
WebDav.

1308 | Remote Desktop Manager

13.10.32Web traffic

DESCRIPTION

Do not use this without a specific request from Devolution's support personnel.

The trace file must NOT have a path specified, this requires that RDM be installed
in a folder other than Program Files. (Running with elevated privileges doesn't
circumvent the UAC.)

PROCEDURE

<system.diagnostics>
<trace autoflush="true" />
<sources>
<source name="System.Net" tracemode="protocolonly" maxdatasize="1024">
<listeners>
<add name="MyTraceFile"/>
</listeners>
</source>
</sources>

ADVANCED MODE

Contents | 1309

To use with SvcTraceViewer.exe

13.10.33Welcome Page

DESCRIPTION

We added a new Getting Started page at the opening of Remote Desktop Manager but you
don't want to see it every time you open our application.

There are 2 ways of removing that page:

1. If you haven't closed it yet, simply click on Don't show again in the upper left corner.

1310 | Remote Desktop Manager

Hide Welcome Page

2. Go in File -> Options -> User Interface and uncheck Show Welcome page at start-up.

Contents | 1311

Hide Welcome Page

CUSTOM WELCOME PAGE

It is possible to display your own welcome page at startup. Under Administration in the ribbon,
choose Data Source Settings (System Settings). Then, in Applications, under the Welcome
Page section, enter the URL that points to your custom welcome page.

1312 | Remote Desktop Manager

Welcome Page URL

13.10.34WMI

DESCRIPTION

Here's a primer on remote WMI:

https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa389290.aspx

we basically run winrm quickconfig on all our machines, for those not joined to a
In our environment,
domain we also add them to the TrustedHosts list. For machines not joined to a domain, there's
an added difficulty if you are using the IP address instead of the Host name, it definitely offers a
few challenges.

A good strategy is to get remoteWMI to work, then we integrate it in RDM. We like to use WMIC.

https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa394531(v=vs.85).aspx

This is a lot of information to go over, please contact us at [email protected] if you hit a

hurdle.

Contents | 1313

ACCESS DENIED ERRORS

Ensure the user account has the necessary permissions to access a computer remotely
Securing a Remote WMI Connection (Windows).

You can also find troubleshoot tips in WMI Troubleshooting (Windows).

ERROR GETTING PRODUCTS INFORMATIONS

Invalid Class WMI or WMI class not found on Windows Server 2003. On Windows Server 2003,
Win32_Product is not enabled by default. You can enable it by following the steps provided in
the link below:

https://social.msdn.microsoft.com/Forums/vstudio/en-US/6fb0d3ea-1ccf-4554-bdf1-
79c9e24388af/invalid-class-wmi-windows-2003-server

TESTING FROM A REMOTE COMPUTER

The WMIC command is used to test if you have access to the machine through WMI. You need
to enter the following command below;

wmic /NODE:"ComputerName" bios get serialnumber

Below, an example with other credentials;

wmic /NODE:"ComputerName" /user:"username" /password:"password" bios get

serialnumber

13.11 Tutorials

DESCRIPTION

Our tutorials are published on Devolutions YouTube channel. We have three main categories of
tutorials:
· Overview: Brief presentation of a product.
· Getting Started: Procedure to get up and running in a quick fashion.
· Spotlight On...: Detailed presentation of a specific aspect of our products.

Obviously some tutorials will not fit in one of these categories, but our focus is to deliver quality
information as soon as possible after the release of a new or modified feature.

1314 | Remote Desktop Manager

Please use our forums if documentation is missing or plain wrong, we will do our best to correct
the situation.
13.11.1 Overview

DESCRIPTION

Overview videos present a brief presentation of a product, there is no step-by-step but only explanation of a
certain part of our product.

OVERVIEW DESCRIPTION LINK

Register your Remote A quick look at how to register your license in

Desktop Manager license Remote Desktop Manager.

The data sources are the heart of Remote

Desktop Manager. Here is a quick overview
of the most popular data sources that we
support.

Register Remote Desktop A quick look at how to download Remote

Manager Desktop Manager and register your license
key.

Remote Desktop Manager A quick overview of Remote Desktop

Manager. See how you can easily and
securely centralize and consolidate all your
remote connections, credentials and
passwords.

Create Templates and A quick overview at how to execute and export

Default Settings multiple reports with the option of exporting
reports through a command line.

Create Users and Assign Take a quick look at how to create users for
Permission your data base and how to assign specific
permission to each user.

Create a folder structure An overview at how to create a folder structure

that reflects your that will reflect your organizations.

Contents | 1315

OVERVIEW DESCRIPTION LINK

organization

Simplified Security Learn how to create roles and permissions for

a granular protection system using our Role
Based Security System.

Choose your data source An overview at our multiple data sources and
how to select the proper one for you and your
enterprise.

13.11.2 Getting Started

DESCRIPTION

Getting Started videos present a step-by-step sequence to start using a product. They differ
from our "Spotlight On..." series in that they are targeted on significant feature of the product,
rather than on a piece of a whole.

GETTING STARTED DESCRIPTION LINK

KeePass Learn how to perform the setup for the

integration of KeePass with Remote Desktop
Manager

LastPass Learn how to use your own LastPass account

to manage passwords in Remote Desktop
Manager.

Remote Desktop Manager Learn how to perform the initial setup for
Jump allowing usage of Remote Desktop Manager
Jump to connect to remote devices through a
jump host.

Simplified Security Learn how to create roles and permissions for

a granular protection system using our Role

1316 | Remote Desktop Manager

GETTING STARTED DESCRIPTION LINK

Based Security System.

Remote Desktop Manager Upon first launch learn how to create your first
Step 1: Register your data source and your first database.
Data Source

Remote Desktop Manager Learn how to set up your options to make your
Step 2 Options for Team environment more fitting for teams.
Environment

Remote Desktop Manager Taking a quick look at our options and what
Step 3: Default Settings are the best default settings for your team
environment before creating your entries.

Remote Desktop Manager Learn how to create a folder structure that

Step 4: Getting Set Up reflects your organization using Remote
Desktop Manager best practices.

Remote Desktop Manager Learn how to create and manage your entries
Step 5: and also taking a quick look at Security Group
Management.
How to create your
entries

Devolutions Password Learn how to create and set up your

Server Devolutions Password Server.

Devolutions Online Learn how to can create your Devolutions

Database Account and get started setting up your Online
Database.

13.11.3 Spotlight On...

DESCRIPTION

Contents | 1317

This video category is destined to contain a number of short tutorials that provide information on
more specific aspects or features of Remote Desktop Manager.

Ultimately, all longer videos will be replaced by a series of Spotlight on... tutorials.

Our Getting Started topic contains a sequence of steps to follow to go through the initial setup
under various conditions. Please refer to it for the best sequence for your environment.

SPOTLIGHT DESCRIPTION LINK

ON...

Batch Edit Change the settings of multiple sessions in one

operation. For example, it can be used to remove or
update all of the credentials of a group of sessions.

Host and A host is used to define and configure a generic host

Templates session that could be used as the parent for others. You
can define a subset of templates to apply at the
execution.

Offline Mode The offline mode allows you to connect to a read/write

copy of the data source when the live database is
unavailable. It can be used when a user is working from a
disconnected network or when there is any kind of
connectivity issue to the data source.

Simplified Learn how to create roles and permissions for a granular

Security protection system using our Role Based Security System.

User Interface Learn how to manipulate the user interface elements of

Remote Desktop Manager and adapt it according to your
preferences.

Execute Report Learn how to execute and export same reports multiple
through times by exporting reports through a command line.
Command Line

1318 | Remote Desktop Manager

Index -S-
Service host 21
-2- Silent install 45

2FA 127, 130, 133, 134, 139, 1182

-T-
-A- Terminal service
1223, 1258
17, 40, 43, 78, 624, 806, 1212,

Active Directory admin 186 TS 78

two-factor 1182

-B- -U-
Bastion server 21
Unattended 45
update 82
-C-
Citrix 78

-J-
Jump box 21
Jump server 21

-M-
MFA 1182
MSSQL 195

-P-
parameters 1004
Password analyzer 768
Password strength 768

-R-
RASDIAL 510
RASPHONE 510
RDS 78
Remote Desktop Services 78
RemoteApp 78

Remote DEsktop Manager PDF
No ratings yet
Remote DEsktop Manager PDF
1,110 pages
RDM2022 2
No ratings yet
RDM2022 2
675 pages
RDM14 0
No ratings yet
RDM14 0
1,706 pages
DataFlux Data Management Studio 2.9 - Instalation and Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
DataFlux Data Management Studio 2.9 - Instalation and Configuration Guide
52 pages
Accountability Roadmap For Demonstrable GDPR Compliance
100% (2)
Accountability Roadmap For Demonstrable GDPR Compliance
70 pages
Tibco LogLogic Version 5.3 Administrator's Guide
No ratings yet
Tibco LogLogic Version 5.3 Administrator's Guide
326 pages
Software Design Patterns
100% (1)
Software Design Patterns
28 pages
NetBackup IT Analytics DC Installation Guide For Capacity Manager v11.4
No ratings yet
NetBackup IT Analytics DC Installation Guide For Capacity Manager v11.4
346 pages
Industrial Training Report
25% (4)
Industrial Training Report
27 pages
How To Add New Fields To VAS Field Catalog in S:4
100% (3)
How To Add New Fields To VAS Field Catalog in S:4
13 pages
EN Sspguide R95233
No ratings yet
EN Sspguide R95233
139 pages
Veritas Backup Exec 9.0 For Windows Servers Administartor's Guide
No ratings yet
Veritas Backup Exec 9.0 For Windows Servers Administartor's Guide
1,296 pages
Boundaries, Baby: How to Say ‘No’ and Still Be a Rockstar Educator,”
From Everand
Boundaries, Baby: How to Say ‘No’ and Still Be a Rockstar Educator,”
Thomas Grey
No ratings yet
Communication Management
No ratings yet
Communication Management
20 pages
DataFlux Data Management Studio 2.8 - Administrator's Guide
No ratings yet
DataFlux Data Management Studio 2.8 - Administrator's Guide
128 pages
Remote Desktop Service Installation
No ratings yet
Remote Desktop Service Installation
97 pages
Rta 6 3
No ratings yet
Rta 6 3
22 pages
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
No ratings yet
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
156 pages
Osama the Gun
From Everand
Osama the Gun
Norman Spinrad
5/5 (1)
Cee 9 X Windows Guide en Us
No ratings yet
Cee 9 X Windows Guide en Us
33 pages
E1UR010IF11SE
No ratings yet
E1UR010IF11SE
446 pages
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker Software-NetWorker 19.4
No ratings yet
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker Software-NetWorker 19.4
74 pages
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
No ratings yet
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
104 pages
Dell Change Auditor For EMC 6.6 User Guide
No ratings yet
Dell Change Auditor For EMC 6.6 User Guide
53 pages
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker software-NetWorker 19.5
No ratings yet
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker software-NetWorker 19.5
41 pages
The Silence of Everything: Unspoken emotions of the loudest sound
From Everand
The Silence of Everything: Unspoken emotions of the loudest sound
Malaika Nawaz
No ratings yet
The Future of Learning: Revolutionizing Education Through Generative AI: AI Books, #11
From Everand
The Future of Learning: Revolutionizing Education Through Generative AI: AI Books, #11
Mohammad
No ratings yet
RDM6 0
No ratings yet
RDM6 0
103 pages
Business English Writing: Effective Business Writing Tips and Will Help You Write Better and More Effectively at Work
From Everand
Business English Writing: Effective Business Writing Tips and Will Help You Write Better and More Effectively at Work
Mary G. Lewis
No ratings yet
Cutting-Edge Desktop UI Development with Python, PySide6, PyQt6
From Everand
Cutting-Edge Desktop UI Development with Python, PySide6, PyQt6
Jay Nans
No ratings yet
Teamcenter 11.2 NX Remote Manager: Siemens Siemens Siemens
No ratings yet
Teamcenter 11.2 NX Remote Manager: Siemens Siemens Siemens
48 pages
Intrusion Detection Honeypots
From Everand
Intrusion Detection Honeypots
Chris Sanders
3/5 (2)
Comptia: Comptia Cysa+ Certification Exam (Cs0-002)
No ratings yet
Comptia: Comptia Cysa+ Certification Exam (Cs0-002)
8 pages
Conquering the Competition: Strategies for Standing Out in the Gaming Content Landscape
From Everand
Conquering the Competition: Strategies for Standing Out in the Gaming Content Landscape
Rian McCullen
No ratings yet
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
No ratings yet
User Guide TeamViewer Remote Management
72 pages
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
1/5 (1)
Database Setup and Management Guide
No ratings yet
Database Setup and Management Guide
34 pages
Breaking Barriers: S.T.E.M Mentorship in Business
From Everand
Breaking Barriers: S.T.E.M Mentorship in Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
From Everand
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
NW Module
No ratings yet
NW Module
46 pages
The Amazing Biological Revolution and The Amazing New Health Care
From Everand
The Amazing Biological Revolution and The Amazing New Health Care
Bertil Lindmark
No ratings yet
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker software-NetWorker 19.4
No ratings yet
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker software-NetWorker 19.4
28 pages
MINIX OS Guide
100% (1)
MINIX OS Guide
127 pages
Music Production 101
From Everand
Music Production 101
Caio Barbosa
No ratings yet
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
10K Blueprint
From Everand
10K Blueprint
Cian O Farrell
5/5 (2)
Srinivasan Rathinam Kannan-CloudArch AWS Azure PCF
No ratings yet
Srinivasan Rathinam Kannan-CloudArch AWS Azure PCF
5 pages
Computer Forensics Windows Registry
No ratings yet
Computer Forensics Windows Registry
47 pages
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
From Everand
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
Jay Nans
No ratings yet
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
From Everand
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
Michael Basler
No ratings yet
A To Z of Internet: Everything You Wanted to Know
From Everand
A To Z of Internet: Everything You Wanted to Know
Bittu Kumar
No ratings yet
Ai For IT Coders
No ratings yet
Ai For IT Coders
18 pages
HP Business Availability Center Business P - Hewlett-Packard Company
No ratings yet
HP Business Availability Center Business P - Hewlett-Packard Company
98 pages
BlockChain for Beginners
From Everand
BlockChain for Beginners
Matthew Smith
No ratings yet
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Web Video Business
From Everand
Web Video Business
MUHAMMAD NUR WAHID ANUAR
No ratings yet
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
From Everand
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
Maria Cowen
No ratings yet
CP E80.61 RemoteAccessClients ForWin ReleaseNotes
No ratings yet
CP E80.61 RemoteAccessClients ForWin ReleaseNotes
14 pages
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
From Everand
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
Mohamad Charara
No ratings yet
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
Power Bi - Azure Ebook Rsm17e - 014
No ratings yet
Power Bi - Azure Ebook Rsm17e - 014
12 pages
Witsml
100% (1)
Witsml
37 pages
Ridc Developer Guide
0% (1)
Ridc Developer Guide
22 pages
17 - Performance Testing of Batch Jobs
100% (1)
17 - Performance Testing of Batch Jobs
16 pages
The Software Design Process: CSCE 315 - Programming Studio Spring 2010
No ratings yet
The Software Design Process: CSCE 315 - Programming Studio Spring 2010
38 pages
Inventory Value Report - Microsoft Dynamics Ax 2012 - Whitepaper
No ratings yet
Inventory Value Report - Microsoft Dynamics Ax 2012 - Whitepaper
10 pages
Requirements Specification (CONOPS), Also Known As A: SRS For Online Shopping System
No ratings yet
Requirements Specification (CONOPS), Also Known As A: SRS For Online Shopping System
6 pages
PHP Cookies
No ratings yet
PHP Cookies
4 pages
McAfee - Implement Step
No ratings yet
McAfee - Implement Step
28 pages
Mule - Mule 3.8.x Performance Tuning Guide Resource PDF
No ratings yet
Mule - Mule 3.8.x Performance Tuning Guide Resource PDF
41 pages
Forte For Java, Enterprise Edition, 3.0
No ratings yet
Forte For Java, Enterprise Edition, 3.0
124 pages
SQL Case Study 1 Corrected
No ratings yet
SQL Case Study 1 Corrected
3 pages
Rapid Bottleneck Identification: A Better Way To Load Test
No ratings yet
Rapid Bottleneck Identification: A Better Way To Load Test
8 pages
TH3843 Task 3
No ratings yet
TH3843 Task 3
3 pages
SRT Trail
No ratings yet
SRT Trail
3 pages
Name Address Email Address Contact Number (Senior Programmer)
No ratings yet
Name Address Email Address Contact Number (Senior Programmer)
2 pages
Full Stack Engineer (FSE)
No ratings yet
Full Stack Engineer (FSE)
2 pages
Anne of green gables
From Everand
Anne of green gables
Lucy Maud Montgomery
No ratings yet